Home

For-A FA-9500 - Operation Manual_PDF

1. The Analog audio signals are embedded to AUDIO CH 1 through 4 of output signals from SDI OUT1 4 Settings that need to be checked O Select SOURCE SEL 1 2 and set SOURCE SET to ANA1 2 as described in section 6 5 1 SOURCE SRC SEL Also select SOURCE SEL 3 4 and set SOURCE SET to ANA3 4 NOTE See section 12 Analog Audio Connection for the ANALOG AUDIO connector connection Provide audio settings if necessary as described in section 6 3 ANALOG AUDIO Settings ANALOG 26 3 5 Connecting a Computer The FA 9500 can be controlled from a computer through a Web browser Connect a computer to the FA 9500 as shown below Connection using a crossover LAN cable ANALOG AUDIO REMOTE SER NO z A N LAN1 PC Crossover LAN cable ZAS Connection using a hub A B ANALOG AUDIO REMOTE oe la OW Jf NT m z O O DONTOUT Y y AN cl Straight through LAN cable 70000000 pE paa The FA 9500 network sett
2. Program Configuration Chi Ch2 Ch3 cha chs che Ch7 che 5 1 2 1L 1R 1C 1LFE 1Ls 1Rs 2L 2R 5 1 2x1 1L 1R 1C 1LFE 1Ls 1Rs 2C 3C 4 4 1L 1R 1C 1S 2C 2S 2L 2R 4 2x2 1L 1R 1C 1S 3L 3R 2L 2R 4 2 2x1 1L 1R 1C 1S 3C 4C 2L 2R 4 4x1 1L 1R 1C 1S 4C 5C 2C 3C 4x2 1L 1R 3L 3R 4L 4R 2L 2R 3x2 2x1 1L 1R 3L 3R 4C 5C 2L 2R 2x2 4x1 1L 1R 3C 4C 5C 6C 2L 2R 2 6x1 1L 1R 4C 5C 6C 7C 2C 3C 8x1 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8C Dolby E 5 1 1L 1R 1C 1LEF ILs 1Rs None None 4 2 1L 1R 1C 1S None None 2L 2R 4 2x1 1L 1R 1C 1S None None 2S 3C 3x2 1L 1R 3L 3R None None 2L 2R 2x2 2x1 1L 1R 3C 4C None None 2L 2R 2 4x1 1L 1R 4C 5C None None 2C 3C 6x1 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C None None 4 1L 1R 1C 1S None None None None 2 2 1L 1R None None None None 2L 2R 2 2x1 1L 1R None None None None 2C 3C 4x1 1C 2C 3C 4C None None None None 7 1 1L 1R 1C 1LFE 1Ls 1Rs 1Bsl 1Bsr 7 1screen 1L 1R 1C 1LFE 1Ls 1Rs ILe 1Re Deolby Digital Decoder Output Channel Assignment Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Coding Mode Chi Ch2 ch3 cha Ch5 che Ch7 Ch8 3 2L 1L 1R 1C 1LFE ILs 1Rs None None 3 2 1L 1R 1C None ILs 1Rs None None 2 2L 1L 1R None 1LFE 1Ls 1Rs None None 2 2 1L 1R None None 1Ls 1Rs None None 3 1L 1L 1R 1C 1LFE 1S 1S None None 3 1 1L 1R 1C None 1S 1S None None Dolby Digital 2 1L 1L 1R None 1LFE 1S 1S None None 2 1 1L 1R None None 1S 1S None None 3 0L 1L 1R 1C 1LFE No
3. Entered value Menu display Auto channel pairing CH1 SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE1 CH2 SOURCE2 CH2 SOURCE2 CH2 SOURCE2 Unchanged The selected L R channels are a correct NON PCM channel pair CH1 SOURCE3 CH1 SOURCE3 CH1 SOURCE3 CH2 SOURCES CH2 SOURCES CH2 SOURCES Unchanged The selected L R channels are PCM audio signals CH1 SOURCE1 CH2 SOURCE2 CH1 SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE1 Changed to make a proper pair including the CH2 SOURCE1 CH2 SOURCE2 assigned L channel signal The selected L R channels are the same channel of a NON PCM channel pair CH1 SOURCE1 CH2 SOURCE2 CH1 SOURCE2 CH1 SOURCE Changed to make a proper pair including the CH2 SOURCE2 CH2 SOURCE2 assigned L channel signal The selected L R channels are the same channel of a NON PCM channel pair CH1 SOURCE3 CH1 SOURCE4 CH1 SOURCE3 o ie id a anged to make a proper pair including the Cre OUR Cre che UR channel assigned signal PCM and NON PCM signals are selected for L R channels CH1 SILENCE CH2 SILENCE CH1 SILENCE CH1 SILENCE Changed to make a proper pair including the CH2 SOURCE2 CH2 SILENCE assigned L channel signal SILENCE and NON PCM signals are selected for L R channels CH1 500Hz CH2 500Hz CH1 500Hz CH1 500Hz Changed to make a proper pair including the d assigned L channel signal 500Hz and Cha SOURCES en NON PCM signals are selected for L R channels 1KHz signal will be processed the same CH1 DOWNM
4. 256 Audio Trap Allows you to select whether to send traps for changes in selected audio Source 1 16 signals or a signal in the Dolby E IN connector Default is not to send traps Item Description Source CH1 16 Check to send a trap for respective channels Source CH1 16 Dolby Check to send a trap for the Dolby E IN input signal 1 See section 9 3 4 Source Select for details on Source CH1 16 2 Shown only if the FA 95D D option is installed 9 8 5 USER SETTING This page allows you to set the user name and password for accessing the FA 9500 The default settings are User Name fa9500 Password foranetwork INFORMATION NETWORK SETTING SNMP SETTING TRAP SETTING NETWORK RESTART User Account Setting User Name fa9500 15 Max char Password eeeeeeecece 15 Max char Re enter Password 15 Max char Setting Range Item Alphanumeric and Description symbolic characters User Name 15 char max Allows you to set the user name Password 15 char max Allows you to set the password Re enter Password 15 char max Allows you to confirm the password The authentication dialog box will not appear at the next login ifthe User Name and Password setting boxes are left empty Changes will be applied after rebooting or 9 8 6 Restart is performed 9 8 6 Restart Click Restart to reboot the FA 9500 The FA 9500 performs the same operation as when
5. The CHGOV DISABLED message is displayed if CHANGEOVER is disabled in the VIDEO INPUT SET 5 7 1 menu or VIDEO TRG is disabled in the CHGOV CHANGEOVER MODE SET 5 7 4 menu If this message is displayed a changeover will not be performed even though AUDIO ERR TRG is enabled AUDIO ERR TRG also triggers a changeover for SDI input signal loss If AUDIO ERR TRG is enabled and the SDI signal input is lost a changeover will be performed even though AUDIO LOSS TRG is disabled based on the AUDIO ERR TRG DURATION setting 69 5 7 11 SILENCE TRG This menu is accessible only if the FA 95CO software option is installed 62 Menu button IN SEL DOWNMIX CHGOV DISABLED Parameter Default OS Description Steps Selects an embedded audio channel for CH SEL CH1 CH1 to 16 which to set the trigger DISABLE Enables or disables auto changeover TRIGGER DISABLE ENABLE for audio silence in the embedded audio channel The CHGOV DISABLED message is displayed if CHANGEOVER is disabled in the VIDEO INPUT SET 5 7 1 menu or VIDEO TRG is disabled in the CHGOV CHANGEOVER MODE SET 5 7 4 menu If this message is displayed a changeover will not be performed even though SILENCE TRG is enabled The duration to determine SDI embedded audio is silent depends on the duration set in the 6 10 4 DIGITAL SILENCE menu 5 7 12 CHGOV STATUS This menu is accessible only if the FA 95CO software option
6. 5 13 15 Dolby AUX STATUS This menu is available only if FA 95D D option is installed Dol By AUX STATUS 573 Menu button INPUT LOSS OUTPUT NONE STATUS REFERENCE LOSS Parameter Display Description Displays status or type of signal input to the Loss optional Dolby input connector Dolby IN PCM LOSS No audio signal INPUT NON PCM PCM Standard audio signal NON PCM Compressed audio data such as UNKNOWN Dolby E encoded data UNKNOWN Unknown signal Displays status or type of signal output to the PCM optional Dolby output connectors Dolby OUT PCM Standard audio signal STEUNT NONE NON PCM Compressed audio data such as Dolby E encoded data NONE No signal LOSS 525 60 625 50 1080 59i meo ted a ar re elce signal input 1080 50i to the optional Dolby connector REFERENCE 720 59p LOSS No signal 720 50p UNKNOWN Unknown signal format 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF UNKNOWN 5 13 16 AFD IN STATUS When detecting AFD in input S2016 3 641 Menu button DETECT 2016 3 AFD 02 AR 0 STATUS 4 3 L 16 9 T een 00000000 OER AFD Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format AR Aspect Ratio is displayed in binary format 0 4 3 1 16 9 The detected AFD type is shown on the third row D Detected Data1 8 are displayed in hexadecimal format When detecting AFD in input RP186 VI Displays the status of RP186 VI Video Index Class1 AFD Active Format Des
7. 192 9 3 4 Source Select Clicking block 4 on the audio block diagram opens the Source Select dialog box F http 192 168 0 10 Source S 2 BX Source Set CH 1 2 SDI CH 1 2 CH 3 4 SDI CH 3 4 CH 5 6 SDI CH 56 CH 7 8 SDI CH 7 8 CH 9 10 SDI CH 9 10 CH 11 12 SDICH 11412 CH 13 14 SDI CH 13 14 CH 15 16 SDI CH 15 16 Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Source Set Setting range ae Parameter Default Steps Description SDI channels a corresponding to SDI CH 1 2 15 16 CH1 2 15 16 the channel ABS CHA ana peleas channel pals ttar ior numbers of Analog CH 1 2 3 4 16 channel audio SOURCEs source channels 1 If Input Select in section 9 2 1 Input Select is set to SDI 1 or SDI 2 the embedded audio signals of either selected SDI 1 or SDI 2 will be assigned to SDI 1 2 15 16 If Input Select is set to other than SDI 1 and SDI2 such as Composite the embedded audio signals of SDI 1 input video will be assigned 2 To use the AES audio signals 1 2 through 7 8 for Source the AES connector must be set to be used for input See AES 1 2 3 4 lO Setting and AES5 6 7 8 lO Setting in section 9 4 2 Audio System for details Any of the 16 audio channel signals selected under Source Select can be output as audio output or embedded to SDI video signals See section 9 3 11 SDI Audio
8. Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an audio clock per group for SDI Auto embedded audio output Reference Group 1 Reference Auto Automatically selects audio clock input CH 3 4 in the NON PCM signal channel if an input NON PCM signal is in the selected SDI embedded audio group Automatically selects audio clock signal in the smallest Auto numbered channel if all signals in the audio Reference group are NON PCM Automatically selects Group Relerence audio clock signal synchronized to the output CH 7 8 video signal if all signals in the audio group are PCM Reference Audio clock synchronize with the Auto output video signal Used to synchronize audio with the video signals processed in the Group 3 Reference PEE SRC CH 11 12 CH 1 2 to 15 16 An input audio clock in Source channels CH 1 2 to 15 16 To output asynchronous audio signals select one input channel pair for each group Auto Reference Croup Ae Snes CH 13 14 For SD SDI outputs Reference is CH 15 16 automatically selected regardless of the setting Embedded audio signals are divided into 4 groups Each group consists of 4 audio channels Group 1 CH 1 to 4 Group 2 CH 5 to 8 Group 3 CH 9 to 12 Group 4 CH 13 to 16 The audio signals in the same group are transmitted together using the same audio clock 48kHz PCM audio signals will be synchronized to a genlock signal in the SRC sampling rate converter so
9. Logo Format H POS setting range V POS setting range SD 525 0 to 718 0 to 486 SD 625 0 to 718 0 to 575 HD 1080 0 to 1918 0 to 1079 HD 720 0 to 1278 0 to 719 The logo format selection is saved for each logo ID using FA 95LG GUI See the separate FA 95LG GUI Operation Manual for details 79 5 10 VIDEO SYSTEM VIDEO SYS 5 10 1 FS MODE SET Allows you to set the FS Frame Synchronizer operation modes Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description FRAME Enables horizontal and vertical alignment of video signals to a genlock signal Effective on both synchronous and asynchronous signals LINE Locks the video signal of within 1 2H to a SAN HRO genlock signal Output delay is 1H Effective only when FRAME video signal is synchronous to the genlock signal A FRAME LINE AVDL Locks the video signal to a genlock signal with a 4 AVDL 1H delay Effective only when video signal is 5 INPUT 1 synchronous to the genlock signal 6 INPUT Locks the system to an input video signal The delay can be adjusted by System Phase and or Frame Delay However the minimum delay is 520clk common in all formats HD 74MHz SD 27MHz Does not use a genlock signal AUTO DET 525 60 625 50 SOON Sets a system format for the FA 9500 SYNC FRMT AUTO 720 59 AUTO DET Detects and sets the detected input video 8 DET p format to the system format 720 50p
10. ooooococonncocooococncccccnconnnnncnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnancnnnnnnnnncnninnanns 269 17 System Requirement ccccccccecsceeecee cece eeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeeseseneeaeaeeeeeeeeseecenaeeeeeeeeeeseenenseaeeeess 270 18 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol oooooccccccccccnncoccocccccccccnnnananccccnncnnns 271 19 FA 9500 Ancillary Data Packet Name LiSt ooooooooconoconoconoconcconnconononoconoconononononononoconoconononnss 279 20 About AFD Active Format Descripti0N oooooooccccnnnoccconconcoccccncoconnnnncnnnnnonononcnnnnnncnnnnonannnnns 281 20 1 AFD COdBS coccccoccconononccononcnconcnnnnrnn cece E A ET 282 20 2 Aspect Ratio Conversion with AFD cccccccecceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseceneaeeeeeeeeteneeas 284 20 3 AFD Supported Video Formats ccccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeaeeeeeeeececceneaeeeeeeeeteneeas 288 20 4 AFD Based Auto Aspect Conversion SettidQS oooooocccnnicccccononococcnccnonnnnannncncnnoncnnnnnnnss 288 20 5 How to Insert AFD Data to Output Video Signals ooooconncccccccnncccccncononccnnononnnninnnnos 289 20 6 AFD Code Abbreviations oooooocococcccccccoococonccconcccnnnnnnonnnnnnnonnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnacinnanns 290 20 7 Conversion Setting Version Differences c ccccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeccieeeeeeeeeeeennaes 291 21 About Colosed Captioning cccccccccceceeeceeccneeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeeecencaeeseeeeesesenenieeeeee
11. CH SEL CH1 2 CH1 2 3 4 Selects a stereo pair of analog audio output channels MONO SUM DISABLE DISABLE ENABLE ENABLE Outputs the stereo pair channels that are selected under CH SEL as a mono sum The signals of the selected pair channels are added and devided by two to output from each channel 6 3 7 ANALOG SYSTEM Menu button TERMINAL SET 600 Q SILENCE TIME 2s ec CONV1 SILENCE LVL 72dBFS ANALOG Setting range inti Parameter Default Steps Description Selects how to terminate the 600Q analog inputs 1 2 and 3 4 TENIA SEN ae Hi Z 6000 6000 termination Hi Z High impedance Sets the duration to determine SILENCE TIME 2sec 1 10sec whether the input analog audio is silent 79 Sets the audio level to determine SILENCE LVL 72dBFS da whether the input analog audio is 6dBFS Step silent 125 6 4 MASTER OUT GAIN Settings MASTER MASTER OUT GAIN Menu button CONV2 MASTER Setting range ER Parameter Default Steps Description Selects an audio channel for which to set the audio gain CH1 16 CH 1 16 Signals assigned to DEC CH1 y 8 SOURCE channels CH SEL CH1 DolbvDM L DEC CH 1 8 PCM signals DolbyDM R decoded in the Dolby decoder Dolby DM L R Downmixed signal generated from Dolby decoded PCM signals 20 0 20 0 dB Sets audio gain for the signal GAIN SET 0 0d8 0 1 dB 2 s
12. CONV1 2 S2016 3 Output Status Displays the status of S2016 3 in Converter 1 and 2 output signals Status Displays Present if ancillary data is inserted Displays Absent if no ancillary data is inserted If ANC Mode under Converter1 Ancillary Setting in the Video System menu Sec 9 4 1 is set to H V ANC the state of the V ANC setting Pass or Blank will be displayed AFD Displays Active Format Description code in binary format AR Displays the aspect ratio as 4 3 or 16 9 and the inserted AFD type Data Displays the detected 8 byte data in hexadecimal format CONV1 2 VI Output Status Displays the status of RP186 VI in Converters 1 and 2 output signals Status Displays Present if ancillary data is inserted Displays Absent if no ancillary data is inserted If ANC Mode under Converter1 Ancillary Setting in the Video System menu Sec 9 4 1 is set to H V ANC the state of the V ANC setting Pass or Blank will be displayed AFD Displays Active Format Description code in bynary format Scan Displays the Scanning System and the inserted AFD type Data1 3 Displays the detected data in hexadecimal format CONV1 2 WSS Output Status Displays the status of BT1119 2 WSS in Converters 1 and 2 output signals Status Displays Present if ancillary data is inserted Displays Absent if no ancillary data is inserted If ANC Mode under Converter1 Ancillary Setting in the Video System menu Sec 9 4 1 is set to H V ANC the state of the
13. FPGA1 1 58 or higher FPGA2 2 00 or higher FPGA3 1 01 or higher SOFT 2 30 or higher Closed captioning menus CEA608 S334 1 CEA708 compatible Revised menu display upon switching VIDEO AUDIO Supported ees Veraton Feature Option Neie FPGA1 2 08 or higher FA 95D D Supports FA 95D D and FA 95DE E options FPGA2 3 00 or higher FA 95DE E Supports PAL M FPGA3 1 01 or higher SOFT 3 00 or higher FPGA1 2 28 or higher FA 95AIO Supports FA 95AIO option FPGA2 4 10 or higher FPGA3 1 01 or higher SOFT 4 00 or higher FA 95RU ver 3 00 or higher compatible FPGA1 2 30 or higher FPGA2 4 10 or higher FPGA3 1 02 or higher SOFT 5 00 or higher Logo Generator Supports Logo Generator FA 95RU ver 4 00 or higher compatible FPGA1 3 14 or higher FPGA2 5 02 or higher FPGA3 1 02 or higher SOFT 6 00 or higher Added performance features 2016 VI WSS AFD support CONV2 Up Down Cross converter support and FA 95DE E option enhanced encoding function FA 95RU ver 5 00 or higher compatible FPGA1 3 15 or higher FPGA2 5 10 or higher FPGA3 1 02 or higher SOFT 6 01 or higher Added performance features SD SDI VITS output support FPGA1 3 20 or higher FA 95ALA Modified FA 95RU to add FA 9520 support FPGA2 5 20 or higher FA 95RU Ver 6 00 or higher compatible FPGA3 1 02 or higher Modified FA 95D D and FA 95DE E communication SOFT 8 00 or higher methods with main unit
14. indicating no SDI2 input detection if 9 2 1 Input Select is set to YPbPr SMPTE YPbPr BETACAM RGB or Y C Composite In Loss 525 60 625 50 BY PASS Unknown Displays the video format of the COMPOSITE input signal Displays Loss if there is no input signal Displays Unknown if there is an unsupported input signal Displays BY PASS if the function is enabled Reference Loss 525 60 625 50 1080 59 1080 50i 720 59p 720 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF PAL M Unknown Not Used 2 Displays the video format of the genlock input signal Displays Loss if there is no input signal Displays Unknown if there is an unsupported input signal Component In Loss 525 60 625 50 1080 59i 1080 50i 720 59p 720 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF BY PASS Unknown Displays the video format of the Component input signal Displays Loss if there is no input signal Displays Unknown if there is an unsupported input signal Displays BY PASS if the function is enabled 1 Shown when PAL M Mode Set in the 9 4 1 Video System is set to Enable or an input signal in GENLOCK IN connector is 525 60 or PAL M signal 2 Shown when Synchro Mode in the 9 4 1 Video System is set to Input Lock 3 Shown if FA 95AI0 is installed 242 9 Video Output Status Item Display Description SDI Out 1 2 525 60 625 50 1080 59i 1080 50i 720 59p 720 50p 1080 23PsF
15. Blank Deletes all horizontal ancillary data and embeds the processed audio data V ANC Pass Pass Blank Embeds audio signals into vertical ancillary data of CONV 1 output videos Pass Embeds the vertical ancillary data without processing Blank Deletes all vertical ancillary data H ANC and V ANC settings are effective if input and output formats are the same If such formats are different both H ANC and V ANC will be set to BLANK Converter2 Ancillary Setting Parameter Default Setting range Description ANC Mode H V ANC H V ANC Detail Selects ancillary data processing mode for the Converter2 output signal H ANC and V ANC menu settings will become available when H V ANC is selected Set to Detail to enable ANC Data Embed settings in 9 4 3 ANC Settings H ANC Overwrite Overwrite In Data Blank Embeds audio signals into horizontal ancillary data of CONV2 output videos Overwrite Removes the embedded audio signal from the input SDI video signal then embeds the processed audio data on the video signal Whether to embed is determined by the Converter2 Audio Group setting The input SDI data will be embedded on the video signal after audio signals are embedded In Data Passes the input SDI horizontal ancillary data without processing Processed audio data cannot be embedded Blank Deletes all horizontal ancillary data and embeds the processed au
16. H B 100 0 jf Curve Center O Black O White Sepia 100 0 100 0 H_ 100 0 mamaaa PA E CO Ce oe Black Level 100 0 100 0 Level i 100 0 Color Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps 4 Correction Mode Setting range ee Parameter Default Steps Description Selects a correction mode from Balance RGB Differential YPbPr or Sepia Balance RGB signal correction mode Allows you to adjust the white balance Gray scale can be changed by adjusting R G and Balance B levels Correction Mode Balance Differential Differential Color difference signal mode Sepia Allows you to adjust contrast without changing white balance R G and B levels can be changed without affecting gray scale This adjustment is effective for images with different color saturation levels Sepia Sepia mode Useful for creating black and white images 4 If Correction Mode is set to Sepia the White Level Black Level or Gamma Level R B setting cannot be changed Also it cannot changed if AVO Control is set to Auto or Hold in the Auto Video Optimizer AVO menu 9 2 2
17. IMPORTANT Make sure that all indicators on the front panel are turned off before starting an operation If the LOCK indicator is lit all operations on the front panel except the LOCK button are disabled Press and hold the LOCK button to enable the operations LOCK button 3 2 U ll B 5 8 8 5 i FIA oiso rrame svsncnronizer FA 9500 29 4 2 1 Accessing Menus Bug POWER on or A i Q Q Menu buttons VIDEO AUDIO button Every press of the VIDEO AUDIO button alternates the menu button assignments between video menus and audio menus The button indicators light up green when the buttons are accessible to video menus that are indicated on the top row of each menu button They light up orange when they are accessible to audio menus that are indicated on the bottom row of each menu button Pressing a menu button displays the corresponding menu on the menu display Menus are divided into categories The single arrow buttons allow you to move between menus if the selected menu button has multiple menu pages in the category The single arrow button lights up when there are more menus to be accessed in the direction
18. Parameter Default Setting range Description Allows you to turn On or Off the Loudness Level Adjustment feature Set to Off to enable only IES Off Sd loudness measurement The On Off setting can A only be changed while loudness measurement is being stopped Allows you to select the loudness level adjustment NA speed SLOW to achieve the target level for 3 9 long term loudness level adjustment allowing Re onns Normal a gradual leveling orma The larger the value the faster the responce 1 2 3 4 allowing greater adjustment NA Disables the SLOW adjustment function Allows you to select the loudness level adjustment NA speed FAST to achieve the target level for A3 9 instantaneous loudness level adjustment allowing la Normal EME sudden leveling leveling down only The larger the value the faster the response 1 2 3 4 allowing greater adjustment NA Disables the FAST adjustment function ON Allows you to set the target loudness level offset oy 0 0 LU ri tu LU The target level of the standard selected under Standard is displayed to the left of the setting box Minimum 20 0 dB 20 0 to 0 0 dB Allows you to set the minimum gain lower Gain 1 0 dB threshold to limit the attenmuation Maximum 0 0 dB 0 0 to 5 0 dB Allows you to set the maximum gain upper Gain 1 0 dB threshold to limit the magnification IMPORTANT Change Response settings according to the audio material characteristics
19. SYNCHRO IN SEL Default FRAME 0 SDI1 2 Composite 525 60 LINE Composite 625 50 Component Y C COMPONENT others SDI1 2 Composite 525 60 AVDL Composite 625 50 Component Y C COMPONENT others SDI1 2 Composite 525 60 INPUT Composite 625 50 Component Y C Component others a Bjo N O A BR oO B BR Oo a 218 Video Position Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description 525 60 92 625 50 92 1080 59i 240 1080 50i 240 H Position 0 Pixel 1080 23PsF 240 1080 24PsF 240 720 59p 160 720 50p 160 1080 59p 240 1080 50p 240 Pixel Adjusts the horizontal vertical 525 60i 30 position of output videos 625 60i 36 1080 59i 68 1080 50i 68 V Position 0 Line 1080 23PsF 68 1080 24PsF 68 720 59p 90 720 50p 90 1080 59p 135 1080 50p 135 Line Freeze Settings Parameter Default Setting range Description Freeze On Off Off Off On Sets FREEZE ON OFF Freeze Mode Frame ae Select an operation mode for FREEZE Sets the interval to refresh the images by the Strobe Freeze 0 0 255 number of fields for the field or frame freeze 0 will not refresh the image 1 Changing the FS Mode or Synchro Mode setting while Freeze On Off is set to On will turn freeze Off Freeze On Off cannot be set to On if Synchro mode is set to Line Sync AVDL or Input Lock Freeze is always set to Of
20. Source Audio SDI 1 Input Audio CH1 SDI 2 Input Audio AES Input Audio Analog Input Audio Dolby AUX Status CH 1 CH 1 Loss Loss CH 1 Loss Loss Loss Input Loss Loss CH2 Loss CH 2 Loss CH 2 Loss CH 2 Loss Output PCM Loss CH 3 Loss CH 3 Loss CH 3 Loss CH 3 Loss Reference Loss Loss CH 4 Loss CH 4 Loss CH 4 Loss CH 4 Loss Loss CH 5 Loss CH 5 Loss CH 5 Loss Loss CH 6 Loss CH 6 Loss CH 6 Loss Loss CH7 Loss CH7 Loss CH7 Loss Loss CH8 Loss CH8 Loss CH8 Loss Loss CH9 Loss CH9 Loss Loss CH 10 Loss CH 10 Loss Loss CH 11 Loss CH 11 Loss Loss CH 12 Loss CH 12 Loss Loss CH 13 Loss CH 13 Loss Loss CH 14 Loss CH 14 Loss Loss CH 15 Loss CH 15 Loss Loss CH 16 Loss CH 16 Loss SDI 1 2 Output Audio SDI 3 4 Output Audio AES Output Audio Analog Output Audio CH 1 Silence CH 1 Silence CH 1 Input Setting CH 1 Silence CH 2 Silence CH 2 Silence CH 2 Input Setting CH 2 Silence CH 3 Silence CH 3 Silence CH 3 Input Setting CH 3 Silence CH 4 Silence CH 4 Silence CH 4 Input Setting CH 4 Silence CH5 Silence CH5 Silence CH5 Input Setting CH6 Silence CH6 Silence CH6 Input Setting CH7 Silence CH7 Silence CH7 Input Setting CH8 Silence CH8 Silence CH8 Input Setting CH9 Silence CH9 Silence CH 10 Silence CH 10 Silence CH 11 Silence CH 11 Silence CH 12 Silence CH 12 Silence CH 13 Silence CH 13 Silence CH 14 Silence CH 14 Silence CH 15 Silence CH 15 Silence CH 16 Silence CH 16 Silenc
21. White Level Parameter Default See Description R G B 100 0 0 0 200 0 Adjusts the white level of R G and B RGB White Level i 0 5 components separately Adjusts the white level of R G and B components separately then turns this Group Adjust Off On Group Adjust on Changing any R G or B Group Adjustment Off value will change the values of the three components accordingly while retaining the proportion 1 If AVO Control is set to Auto in the Auto Video Optimizer AVO menu 9 2 2 the White Level setting cannot be changed 181 4 Black Level Setting range Parameter Default Steps Description R G B 100 0 0 0 200 0 Adjusts the black level of R G and B RGB Black Level on 0 5 components separately Adjusts the black level of R G and B components separately then turns this y Group Adjust off On Group Adjust on Changing any R G or Group Adjustment Off B value will change the values of the three components accordingly while retaining the proportion 1 If AVO Control is set to Auto in the Auto Video Optimizer AVO menu 9 2 2 the Black Level setting cannot be changed Gamma Level Setting range Parameter Default Steps Description R G B 100 0 0 200 Adjusts the gamma level of R G and B RGB Gamma level pe 0 5 components separately Adjusts the gamma level of R G and B components separately then turns this Group
22. 21 2 3 Internal Settings IMPORTANT Note that internal switch settings should not be changed from factory defaults If you have accidentally changed the settings return them to the factory default settings as shown in this section Be sure to have qualified technical personnel perform the settings and adjustments in the interior or contact your dealer CAUTION Do not access any internal cards while the unit is powered ON Always power OFF all connected units disconnect power cords prior to accessing the interior To protect boards from electrostatic damage do not touch the components on the boards 2 3 1 Dipswitch Settings The following settings can be made at the dipswitches on MAIN CARD inside the unit Dipswitch S1 Settings Pin No Default setting Setting 1 ON Do not change 2 OFF Do not change 3 OFF Do not change 4 OFF Do not change 5 OFF Do not change 6 OFF Do not change 7 OFF Do not change 8 OFF Do not change Dipswitch S2 Settings Pin No Default setting Setting 1 ON Do not change 2 OFF Do not change 3 OFF Do not change 4 OFF Do not change If the FA 95DACBL is installed in SLOT A OFF 5 OFF If the FA 95DACBL is installed in SLOT B ON If the FA 95DACBL is not installed OFF 6 OFF Do not change 7 OFF Standard FA 9500 OFF without FA 95PS If the FA 95PS is installed ON 8 OFF Do not change 22
23. Logo Position Setting Range for details LEVEL and H V POS settings are disabled under the following conditions e No logo is assigned to the logo ID selected under LOGO ID in the 5 9 1 1 CONV1 LOGO SEL menu e Different formats are displayed for LOGO FORMAT and CONV1 in the 5 9 1 1 CONV1 LOGO SEL menu KEYER ON LEVEL NOT ADJ H POS NOT ADJ V POS NOT ADJ 77 5 9 1 3 CONV2 LOGO SEL Allows you to select a logo function mode for CONVERTER2 Menu button 403 NAME FOR A LOGO FORMAT HD 1080 AUDIO OP CONV1 1080 59i Parameter Default Setting range Description LOGO ID 1 1 256 Selects a logo to be output to CONV 2 output Displays the registered name of the ID selected NAME logo Displays if the logo is not registered Displays the format of the ID selected logo LOGO 7 Logo formats SD 525 SD 625 HD 1080 HD FORMAT 720 Displays if the logo is not registered 2 E Displays the video format of the Converter 2 CONVE output signal 1 NAME and LOGO FORMAT can be registered for each logo ID via FA 95LG GUI See the separate FA 95LG GUI Operation Manual for details 2 The video format displayed under CONV2 and the logo format displayed under LOGO FORMAT must match Otherwise no logo will be displayed even if KEYER in section 5 9 1 4 CONV2 KEYER SET is turned ON 78 5 9 1 4 CONV2 KEYER SET Allows you to set a keyer for CONVE
24. Menu button NT OU 525 6 YPbPr SMPTE STATUS OTHER Parameter Display Description 525 60 625 50 1080 59i 1080 50i 720 59p Displays the video format of the FA 95AlO output FORMAT 720 50p signal 1080 23PsF Displays DISABLE if there is no signal output 1080 24PsF PAL M BY PASS DISABLE YPbPr SMPTE YPbPr A A Displays the format of the FA 95AIO output signal MODE See section 5 8 4 COMPONENT SET for details on en formats 1 The output video format for Y C mode is either 525 60 625 50 or PAL M 100 5 13 6 SOURCE AUDIO CH1 CH16 LOSS PCM PCM 48kHz PCM 44 1kHz PCM 32kHz PCM Other SILENCE SILENCE 48kHz SILENCE 44 1kHz SILENCE 32kHz SILENCE Other NON PCM PCM Async SILENCE Async NON PCM Async IN Analog UNKNOWN SOURCE AUDIO 63 3 1 Menu button CH 1 LOSS CH Za enosis STATUS CH 3 L055 CH 4 L0SS OTHER SOURCE AUDIO 532 CH 5 LOSS CH 6 LOSS CH TOS CH 8 LOSS SOURCE AUDIO 533 CH 9 LOSS CH10 LOSS CH11 LOSS CH12 L085 SOURCE AUDIO 5 34 CHAI sk OS S CH14 LOSS CH15 L055 CH16 LOSS Parameter Display Description Displays the status of audio sources CH1 through CH16 that are selected in the AUDIO MAPPING MAPPING menu 6 5 LOSS No audio signals PCM Normal audio signal SDI input PCM 48kHz Normal audio signal AES input approx 48kHz PCM 44 1kHz Normal audio signal AES input approx 44
25. NETWORK SETTING SNMP SETTING TRAP SETTING USER SETTING RESTART FA 9500 Displays the network settings of the LAN1 port on the rear panel 9 8 2 NETWORK SETTING INFORMATION TRAP SETTING USER SETTING RESTART FA 9500 LAN 1 Port Setting IP Address 192 168 0 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Remote Port Number 50010 Logo Port Number 50020 Refresh Time 10 second 1 65535 Submit IMPORTANT The web page may not be properly displayed if your PC does not have sufficient capacity CPU memory etc In such case set Refresh Time to a value larger than 30 The LAN1 port network settings screen will be displayed Item Default Description Allows you to set the LAN1 port IP address A IP Address 192 168 0 10 period is used to separate each octet Allows you to set the LAN1 port subnet mask A Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 period is used to separate each octet Allows you to set the gateway A period is used to Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 separate each octet Remote Port 50010 Allows you to set the TCP port number for the Number FA 95RU FA 10DCCRU connection 1 Allows you to set the TCP port number for the Lodo Bon Nome 30020 FA 95LG GUI connection 2 Allows you to set the time seconds for refreshing Refresh Time 10 the web screen 253 After you are sure that all settings are appropriate click Submit After clicking Submit restart the FA
26. Once the data is saved the Download complete dialog appears Download complete 4 Download Complete Saved Fa9500 csw from 192 168 0 10 Downloaded 12 5KBin 1 sec Download to H Documents and Settin fa9500 csw Transfer rate 12 5 KB Sec C Close this dialog box when download completes Click Close IMPORTANT Some versions of Internet Explorer may not save data having a long file name properly In such case save data in Internet Explorer using a short file name then rename the file in Windows Explorer A data file can also be saved under its default file name in any version of Internet Explorer 236 Loading the Data Saved in a File In Apply Setting Below select the checkboxes of the items you wish to load the data If no checkbox is selected no settings are loaded See section 9 8 2 NETWORK SETTING for details on the checkboxes in Network Setting See section 9 8 3 SNMP SETTING for details on the checkboxes in SNMP Setting Selecting the Parameter checkbox loads all parameters except for Event Memory Selecting the Event Name checkbox loads the event memory names See Set Event Name in section 9 6 1 Event Control for details After selecting the items to be loaded and clicking Browse the Choose file dialog appears Choose file Look in e Desktop 3 my Documents EG Y My Computer MyRecent Amy Network Places Documents ls 3 Desktop My Documents Wg My Com
27. While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or save this file What s the risk Click Save Specify the destination directory Save in fe Desktop my Documents 1 My Computer My Recent my Network Places Documents My Documents My Computer File name MyNelwoik Saveastype Compressed fpped Folder Once the download is completed the Download complete dialog box appears The file for a fa9500 mib zip will be downloaded to the destination directory After unzipping the file using an unzip utility you will have the file for a fa9500 mib mib Download complete y Download Complete Saved fora fa9500 mib zip from 192 168 0 10 SSSR KR Downloaded 6 08 KB in 1 sec Download to H Documents an fora Fa9500 mib zip Transfer rate 6 08 KB Sec 238 IMPORTANT Some version of Internet Explorer may not download MIB files having a long file name properly In such case download data in Internet Explorer using a short file name then rename the file in Windows Explorer A data file can also be downloaded under its default file name in any version of Internet Explorer See section 18 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol for details on MIB 9 6 4 Backup Event Data The Event Memory data Events1 through 100 and the event data for each video format can be saved in a
28. 3 Connections This section describes the connections and settings for specific usages The descriptions on the settings are based on the factory default If you are not sure of your current settings you can reset the unit to the default setting by selecting DEFAULT in the EVENT LOAD menu described in the section 8 1 EVENT LOAD 3 1 For HD SD SDI Frame Synchronizer Use IN1 Reference signal Input an HD SD BB or Tri level sync signal SDI signal to SDI synchronized with the input signal ANALOG AUDIO REMOTE ol SER NO fo Outputs a signal synchronized Terminate at 75 with the reference signal from ohm if not used SDI OUT1 and 2 Settings that need to be checked INSEL is set to SDI1 as described in section 5 7 1 VIDEO INPUT SET CONV1 is set to BY PASS as described in section 5 3 1 CONV1 U D MODE SDI1 2 OUT SET is set to CONV1 as described in section 5 8 VIDEO OUT SELECT OUT SEL To output the same synchronized signal from SDI3 and 4 set SDI3 4 OUT SET to CONV1 Select a sync mode in the SYNCHRO menu as described in section 5 10 1 FS MODE SET Make sure the SYS FRMT is appropriately set for the input signal as described in section 5 10 1 FS MODE SET Adjust phase and position to match the reference signal as described in se
29. 720 59p 625 50 1080 50i 720 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF 525 60 VIS VIS Y Y 1080 59i VS VIS Y Y 720 59p VIS VIS VIS Y 1080 59p VIS VIS VIS Y 625 50 VIS VIS Y Y 1080 50i VSS VSS Y Y 720 50p VIS VIS VIS Y 1080 50p VIS VIS VIS Y 1080 23PsF Y Y Y V V 1080 24PsF Y Y Y VS J J SYNCHRO can be set to FRAME LINE or AVDL A SYNCHRO can only be set to FRAME Unable to synchronize 8 This item is disabled if an FA 95CO option is installed and Format Error Trigger in section 9 2 1 Input Select is enabled 4 Composite Setting Parameter Default Setting range Description Adaptive 3D Selects a mode to separate the Y luminance Comb Filter Adaptive 2D EAN and C chrominance of composite signals Off Sets the noise reduction level for the composite NR Level oif Level1 4 signal inputs Cross Color Off Pees 3 Sets the cross color noise reduction level Selects between OIRE setup and 7 5IRE setup NTSC off Off depending on the analog signal used Setup On Off OIRE On 7 5IRE 1 NTSC Setup On Off radio buttons will appear appear under Video Sub if the FA 95AlO option is installed Video Sub Parameter Default Setting range Description Black amp White Off oe On Converts to black and white signals Off On Passes through the Composit
30. ANALOG REMAPPING 127 IMPORTANT Changing the SOURCE SET settings may affect the phase alignment of the reference and other channel pairs If the alignment is turned off set MASTER MUTE see section 6 4 MASTER OUT GAIN Settings MASTER to on and off or turn the unit power off and on to regain the alignment 6 6 AUDIO DELAY Settings 6 6 1 AUDIO DELAY Menu button AUDIO DELAY CH SEL CH1 CLIP Os Fuck SET 3 Oms MASTER 4 ms DEGAY TOTAL 4 ms Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a SOURCE channel for CHISEL cha cnt CEG which to set a delay Sets the delay for the SOURCE OFFSET Omsec 996ms 996ms channel that is selected under CH SEL MASTER Anise 4ms 1000ms Sets the offset to the delay for all audio channels CH1 to 16 2 Displays the amount of delay set under CH SEL for the SOURCE TOTAL F 7 audio channels 9 OFFSET MASTER 1 The OFFSET setting range varies depening on the MASTER setting 2 Enabling CONV DLY ADJ while CONV1 or CONV2 is in use adds a delay equivalant to 1 frame 2 frames for progressive signals of the input video signal to the set value and the menu displays the summed value See sections 5 3 CONV1 UP DOWN CROSS CONVERTER 5 4 CONV2 UP DOWN CROSS CONVERTER and 5 10 4 VIDEO SUB 3 The total value of DELAY and MASTER should not exceed the setting range between 2 and 1 000 msec If the range is exceeded the
31. Enable Enable Inserts GROUP 1 embedded audio Group 2 Enable Disable Disable Does not insert GROUP 2 embedded audio Enable Enable Inserts GROUP 2 embedded audio Group 3 Enable Disable Disable Does not insert GROUP 3 embedded audio Enable Enable Inserts GROUP 3 embedded audio Group 4 Enable Disable Disable Does not insert GROUP 4 embedded audio Enable Enable Inserts GROUP 4 embedded audio 1 GROUP4 embedded audio cannot be inserted into SD SDI output signals regardless of the GROUP4 setting 2 The setting is ineffective if the input and output formats are the same and H ANC is set to In Data under Converter2 Ancillary Setting SD Line Mask Parameter Default Setting range Description Pass Outputs the line to a composite Y C or SD SDI ere Pass output signal without processing inep 2a Pass Blank Blank Masks the selected composite Y C or SD SDI output signal line PAL M Mode Set Parameter Default Setting range Description PAL M Disable Disable Disable Allows NTSC signals to be output Mode Set Enable Enable Allows PAL M signals to be output 1 This setting is effective on composite and Y C outputs NTSC and PAL signals can be input however NTSC signal cannot be output If this mode is enabled GENLOCK IN recognizes PAL M signals as 525 60 however NTSC BB signals become ineffective PAL BB signals and tri level sync signals c
32. Sar ee ee AFD ALT 4 3 conversion PR be AR 16 9 to 16 9 conversion Input AFD WSS None F 16 9 AMRPH None None None None None None Input AFD VI S2016 16 9 L gt 16 9 16 9 F 16 9 16 9 P 4 3 16 9 F PRTD 16 9 P 14 9 16 9PALT14 9 16 9FALT14 9 16 9 F ALT4 3 Illustration in a 16 9 SD AFD 16 9 conv SD AFD ALT 16 9 conv coded frame HD AFD conversion HD AFD ALT conversion OO gt 0 00 eC KC eC 287 20 3 AFD Supported Video Formats FA 9500 supports aspect ratio conversions according to SMPTE S2016 3 SMPTE RP186 2008VI Video Index and ITU R BT1119 2 WSS Wide Screen Signalling standards AFD formats and their supported video formats are as shown in the table below Video Formats and AFD Support RP186 2008 BT1119 2 Input video format S2016 3 VI WSS 525 60 lt Y 625 50 v Y 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 1080 23 98PsF 1080 24PsF 720 59 94p 720 50p 1080 59 94p 1080 50p SYNE NEN SNAPE 20 4 AFD Based Auto Aspect Conversion Settings 4 AFD system settings To convert aspect ratios according to AFD codes set basic operational settings in the VIDEO SYSTEM menus as follows 4 Set ANC MODE to DETAIL in CONV1 ANC SET Sec 5 10 9 Set ANC MODE to DETAIL also in CONV2 ANC SET Sec 5 10 10 Specify the line to detect RP186VI or BT1119 WSS in ANC DETELCT L
33. Then the processed RGB signal is converted again to YPbPr format This correction is used to eliminate out of RGB gamut problems COMPOSITE CLIP To adjust the COMPOSITE clip set WHITE and BLACK Once the COMPOSITE CLIP mode is turned ON YPbPr input video signal is converted to composite signal in the unit The converted composite signal is processed so as not to exceed the composite gamut range set at WHITE and BLACK in the menu The processed composite signal is then reconverted to YPbPr format This correction is used to eliminate out of composite gamut problems This correction is applied to composite output signals 63 300 100 50 0 200 RGB Clip Processing 150 100 50 0 50 Composite Clip processing 111 default White setting range Black setting range White setting range Black setting range 5 7 VIDEO INPUT SELECT IN SEL Allows you to select input video signals and select the operation for when signal input is lost 5 7 1 VIDEO INPUT SET Menu button IN SEL DOWNMIX Parameter Default Setting range Description SDI1 SDI2 COMPOSITE IN SEL SDI1 YPbPr SMPTE Selects an input signal YPbPr BETACAM RGB BACK COLOR BACK AUTO FREEZE 2 Selects an operation for the time LOSS the signal input selected under IN COLOR COLOR BAR SEL is lost OUT DISABLE OFF BLACK BLUE BACK COLOR BLACK BED S
34. Video System for details 2 Selecting ODD EVEN for Forced Field while Input Select 9 2 1 is set to Composite Synchro Mode to Frame Sync and Frame Delay 9 2 3 to O frame the Frame Delay setting value will always reset to 1 frame Set Frame Delay to between 1 and 8 frames 3 Frame Delay 9 2 3 cannot be set if Synchro Mode is set to Line Sync or AVDL 4 Forced Field cannot be set if Synchro Mode is set to Line Sync AVDL or Input Lock 5 The Freeze function via GPI input is disabled if Synchro Mode is set to Line Sync AVDL or Input Lock See section 9 5 GPI for details 6 Changing the Synchro Mode setting will reset 1080 V Phase and 720 V Phase settings in HD Phase menu and the V PHASE setting in SD Phase menu to their default values according to the set Synchro Mode 7 Switching input signals with a phase difference using a router or such device may cause shock noise to occur on video or audio signals if the phase difference compared to the genlock signal exceeds the range shown in the following table If the difference is within range shock noise will not occur Video format SD HD Phase difference from genlock signal 1H with line differences depending on video format to 1 2H 5H with line differences depending on video format to 1 2H 220 Table of Reference signals and Input formats that can lock Reference signal Input signal 525 60 1080 59i
35. 1080 23f Other values make the system work in the format 1080 24f 1080 59p 1080 50p OFF o 3 OFF 1 FRAME to Sets the amount of frame delay 8 FRAME FORCED OFF ODU Selects which field to be used twice to compose a frame FIELD 2 4 EVEN Effective on composite signal inputs 1 Setting SYNCHRO to INPUT cannot synchronize the system with an invalid composite signal input In such case set SYNCHRO to FRAME Also when SYNCHRO is set to INPUT the horizontal and vertical phases of the system need to be offset by more than 1 line to keep the delay between CONVERTER and BY PASS outputs to within 1 frame See 5 3 CONV1 5 4 CONV2 5 10 6 HD PHASE SET and 5 10 7 SD PHASE SET for details However if a progressive signal format is selected for SYNC FRMT the output delay between CONVERT and BY PASS is fixed at 2 frames 2 Selecting ODD EVEN for FORCED FIELD while IN SEL in section 5 7 1 VIDEO INPUT SET is set to COMPOSITE SYNCHRO to FRAME and FRAME DELAY is set to OFF FRAME DELAY will always reset to 1 frame Set FRAME DELAY beween 1 and 8 frames 3 FRAME DELAY cannot be set if SYNCHRO is set to LINE or AVDL In such case the menu will be displayed as FRAME FRAME DELAY NOT ADJ 4 FORCED FIELD cannot be set if SYNCHRO is set to LINE AVDL or INPUT In such case the menu will be displayed as FORCED FIELD NOT ADJ 5 The FREEZE function via GPI input is disabled if SYNCHRO is set to LINE AVDL or
36. ANG AFD Radyo into the SDI signal BT1119 WSS Dunner ne oe Selects a video format compatible with SD the ancillary data selected under ANC FORMAT SD HD Only compatible Video formats will be displayed If FORMAT is set to SD REMOVE 2 HOLD 4 3 L 16 9 T 2 4 3 L14 9 T 2 4 3 L gt 16 9 2 4 3 F 4 3 4 3 L16 9PRTD 2 4 3 L 14 9 4 3 F ALT14 9 2 4 3 L ALT14 9 MODE can be set for respective ANC 4 3 L ALT 4 3 and FORMAT selections 16 9 L gt 16 9 REMOVE Does not embed the 16 9 F FRM 7 ancillary data to either CONV1 or 2 16 9 P 4 3 HOLD Retains the last ancillary data MODE REMOVE 16 9 F PRTD aspect ratio and outputs video signal in 16 9 P 14 9 the aspect ratio rE a Other values operate according to the 16 9 F ALT4 3 selected AFD as an input AFD l BT1119 WSS selected under ANC can If FORMAT is setto HD only select AFD codes indicated by REMOVE HOLD 16 9 L gt 16 9 16 9 F 16 9 16 9 P 4 3 16 9 F PRTD 16 9 P 14 9 16 9P ALT14 9 16 9F ALT14 9 16 9F ALT4 3 1 HD is selectable only when ANC is set to 82016 3 94 5 10 19 WSS AFD ERROR Allows you to select the operation mode when the aspect ratio conversion result is not standarized by WSS and embedding WSS AFD ancillary data to CONV1 and or 2 is enabled Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description REMOVE Does not embed BT1119 WSS to CONV1 REMOVE and or 2 F 4 3 F 4 3 Embeds BT1119 WSS F 4 3 code 8 to CO
37. AUDIO ERR SENSE 143 AUDIO ERR TRG 69 AUDIO LOSS TRG 69 AUDIO MAPPING MAPPING 127 Audio Master Settings Web 196 AUDIO MODE SET MODE 131 AUDIO OPTION AUDIO OP 132 Audio Output Delay Web 194 Audio Output Polarity Web 200 AUDIO Settings 114 AUDIO Settings Web 188 Audio Status Web 244 Audio System Web 224 AUDIO SYSTEM Settings AUDIO SYS 142 Audio Test Signal Web 197 Auto Channel Pairing for non PCM Audio Inputs 115 Auto Video Optimizer AVO 53 Auto Video Optimizer AVO Web 165 Automatic Delay Adjustment 83 Automatic Loudness Adjustment WEB 214 AVO SETTING 53 AVO Setup 166 AVO SETUP 54 B Backup Event Data Web 239 Backup Parameter Web 236 Basic Operations 29 BLACK LEVEL 37 BLACK VIDEO TRG 68 BY PASS Operate Web 172 C CH STATUS 144 Changeover and Input Switchover Using a Router 65 Changeover and Input Switchover Using a Router Web 164 Changeover and Loss Operation 65 Changeover and Loss Operation Web 164 Changeover Status Web 251 Changing Setting Values 34 CHGOV CHANGEOVER MODE SET 66 CHGOV AUD STATUS 71 CHGOV STATUS 70 CHGOV VID STATUS 71 CLIP VIDEO CLIP 61 COLOR CORRECT C C 38 COLOR CORRECTOR C C 36 Color Corrector Web 181 Color Corrector and AVO Modes 39 Colosed Captioning 292 COMPONENT INPUT 99 COMPONENT OUTPUT 100 COMPONENT SET 75 COMPOSITE CLIP 62 Composite Clip Web 187 Composite Output Format Table 74 COMPOSITE SET 74 82 Connecting a Computer 27 Connectin
38. COMPOSITE 525 60 LINE COMPOSITE 625 50 COMPONENT Y C COMPONENT others SDI 2 COMPOSITE 525 60 AVDL COMPOSITE 625 50 COMPONENT Y C COMPONENT others SDI 2 COMPOSITE 525 60 INPUT COMPOSITE 625 50 COMPONENT Y C COMPONENT others o a BajoOo ND O A A O afa AB AajOo 85 5 10 8 VIDEO POSITION 98 Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description H POS 525 60 92 625 50 92 1080 59i 240 1080 50i 240 1080 23PsF 240 1080 24PsF 240 720 59p 160 720 50p 160 1080 59p 240 1080 50p 240 SD 4 PIXEL HD 2 PIXEL V POS 525 60 30 625 50 36 1080 59 68 1080 50i 68 1080 23PsF 68 1080 24PsF 68 720 59p 90 720 50p 90 1080 59p 135 1080 50p 135 LINE Adjusts the horizontal vertical position of output videos 86 5 10 9 CONV1 ANC SET V R ANC TE 99 Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description ANC MODE H V ANC H V ANC DETAIL Selects ancillary data processing mode for the CONV1 output signal H ANC and V ANC menu settings will become available when H V ANC is selected DETAIL Removes all H and V ancillary data and embeds newly specified ancillary data such as CC and AFD Set to DETAIL to enable settings in 5 10 16 ANC
39. G and B at the same time The Converter1 Side Cut Color setting cannot be changed if Converter Process Mode is set to BY PASS Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV1 Conversion Table 5 3 2 176 9 2 7 Converter2 Up Down Cross Clicking block 7 on the video block diagram opens the Converter2 setting dialog box 2 Up Down Cross Converter 2 Windows Internet Explorer a 192168010 Converter 2 Process Mode y 1080 59 94i gt gt 1080 59 94i Aspect Ratio Motion Sense Antialias AFD v Field v Horizontal Normal v Vertical Normal Converter 2 Size Converter 2 Position H Position 0 Pixel V Position i 0 Line j Converter 2 Side Cut Color H Size V Size j Converter 2 Crop H Left 0 Pixel H Right ol Pr V Top 0 Line i V Bottom 0l Line i TE 08 Oe E GE E After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps Converter 2 Process Mode Parameter Default ES Description Selects a mode for the Converter2 to convert the input signal in CONV2 BY PASS Outputs the signal without converting SD Converts the input HD signal to a standard definition format BY PASS 1080i SD Co
40. IMPORTANT The Motion Sense setting is common for Converters 1 and 2 Field Adaptive Frame Odd 1st Frame Even 1st Motion Sense Adaptive Setting Motion Sense to Frame Odd 1st or Frame Even 1st for input signals other than progressive segment frame inputs cause motion artifacts In such case change Motion Sense setting to Field or Adaptive 174 Antialias Setting range fare Parameter Default Steps Description Performs horizontal anti aliasing for the output video image Weak 8 1 Weak 8 to Strong 8 low to high Horizontal Normal Normal This setting cannot be changed if the Strong1 8 conversion is set to the formats indicated as BYPASS in the CONV1 Conversion Table in section 5 3 2 Performs vertical anti aliasing for the output video image Weak 8 1 Weak 8 to Strong 8 low to high Vertical Normal Normal This setting cannot be changed if the Strong1 8 conversion is set to the formats indicated as BYPASS in the CONV1 Conversion Table in section 5 3 2 The Antialias setting cannot be changed if Converter1 Process Mode is set to BY PASS or if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV1 Conversion Table 5 3 2 Enhance Setting range gat Parameter Default Steps Description e Sharpens the output video image Enhance Level 0 Level 0 8 Level 0 to 8 low to high The Enhance setting cannot be changed i
41. INPUT See section 7 4 GPI SETTING for details 6 Changing the SYNCHRO setting will reset V 1080 and V 720 settings in section 5 10 6 HD PHASE SET and the V PHASE setting in section 5 10 7 SD PHASE SET to their default values according to the set SYNCHRO mode 80 7 Switching input signals with a phase difference using a router or such device may cause shock noise to occur on video or audio signals if the phase difference compared to the genlock signal exceeds the range shown in the following table If the difference is within range shock noise will not occur Video format Phase difference from genlock signal SD 1H with line differences depending on video format to 1 2H HD 5H with line differences depending on video format to 1 2H Table of Reference signals and Input formats that can lock Reference signal Input signal 525 60 1080 59 720 59p 625 50 1080 50 720 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF 525 60 SSA V V Y B Y 1080 591 JJ VMN Y Y 720 59p SSA V V V V Y 1080 59p SSA SSA SSS z Y 625 50 E z ISA SSA Y Y 1080 501 z z ISA ISA Y Y 720 50p z E ISSS SSS V V Y 1080 50p 3 z z ISS ISA SSS E Y 1080 23PsF Y Y Y z AZA 3 1080 24PsF a Y Y Y z ALG Y YY SYNCHRO can be set to FRAME LINE or AVDL Y SYNCHRO can only be set to FRAME Unable to synchronize 8 If an FA 95CO option is installed and TRIG
42. PAVO SETTING itn Menu button MODE OFF LEVEL STANDARD AVO AREA FULL SCREEN AREA DISPLAY OFF MAFFINS Parameter Default Setting range Description AUTO Enables automatic level adjustment HOLD Stops auto level adjustment When MODE selection is changed from AUTO to HOLD the signal levels stop and remain as they e es o reoaine OFF Disables automatic level adjustment ai ane When MODE selection is changed from AUTO to OFF the signal levels return to their state before auto level adjustment is applied When set to OFF the signal levels can be manually adjusted See section 5 5 4 1 Manual Level Adjustment for details DARKER Selects a type of signal level adjustment DARK 10 options are available Five fixed options and STANDARD five custom options LEVEL BRIGHT Adjustment STANDARD BRIGHTER Darker lt Dark lt Standard lt Bright lt Brighter level USER1 User1 User5 Customizable Heeb Selecting one user settings from User1 through USERA 5 opens the USER1 5 LEVE SET page See USERS section 5 5 3 USER1 5 LEVEL SET for details Sets the sample area to calculate the adjustment FULL 10 options are available Eight fixed areas and SCREEN two custom areas e Fixed areas BOTTOM FULL SCREEN LETTER BOX PILLAR BOX AREA FULL RIGHT CENTER TOP LEFT TOP RIGHT Sample area SCREEN BOTTOM LEFT BOTTOM RIGHT USER See Sample Area in the next page AREAY1 e Custom areas USER Selecting USER AREA1 or 2 ope
43. Reverses the polarity AUDIO MODE SOURCE SEL CH1 POLARITY SET NORMAL 1 Shown only if the FA 95D D option is installed 131 6 9 AUDIO OPTION AUDIO OP 6 9 1 Dolby Decoder Option FA 95D D 6 9 1 1 Dolby AUX OUTPUT This menu is available only if the FA 95D D option is installed Menu button VIDEO OP y OUTPUT DEC CH1 2 AUDIO OP Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an audio signal to be output from the optional Dolby output connector Dolby OUT DEC CH1 2 CH7 8 DEC CH1 2 CH7 8 Dolby decoded DolbyDM L R PCM signals ENC CH1 2 DolbyDM L R Down mixed signals OUTPUT DEC CH1 2 500Hz TONE generated from Dolby decoded PCM 1kHz TONE signals SILENCE ENC CH1 2 Encoded Dolby E signal of selected SOURCE channel signals 500Hz 1KHz TONE Test signal TONE SILENCE Mute signal NONE No signal output NONE 1 Shown only if the FA 95DE E option is installed 132 6 9 1 2 Dolby DECODER INPUT This menu is available only ifthe FA 95D D option is installed DAE ACS ANEP UAT 302 Menu button VIDEO OP AUDIO OP Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an audio signal to be input to the Dolby decoder AUX IN AUX IN Input signal in the optional Dolby INPUT AUX IN input connector Dolby IN SOURCE 1 2 15 16 SOURCE 1 2 15 16 SOURCE signals sele
44. Source CH3 Source CH4 Source CH5 Source CH6 Source CH7 Source CH8 CH 1 2 CH 3 4 CH 5 6 CH 7 8 AES Audio Mono Sum Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings AES Audio Remapping Setting range CH1 8 Source channel of the same channel number with the parameter Parameter Default Steps Description Source CH 1 16 Selects source audio signals to 500Hz assign to the AES output 1kHz channels Source CH 1 16 Signals te 19 assigned to SOURCE channels DownMix R 2 500Hz 1kHz Test signal Dolby Decoder 1 8 9 Dolby Down Mix L 8 Dolby Down Mix R 4 Dolby Encoder 1 2 Left Right Center LFE Ls Rs Loudness 1 8 Loudness 2 8 Silence Mute signal Down Mix L R Downmixed signal generated from SOURCE channels Dolby Decoder 1 8 Dolby decoded PCM signals Dolby Down Mix L R Downmixed signal generated from Dolby decoded PCM signals Dolby Encoder 1 2 Encoded Dolby E signal of selected signals of SOURCE channels Loudness 1 2 Left Loudness 1 2 Right Loudness 1 2 Center Loudness 1 2 LFE Loudness 1 2 Ls Loudness 1 2 Rs Audio signals processed in FA 95ALA Loudness1 2 channels 1 See section 9 3 4 Source Select for details on Source settings 2 S
45. Video Input FA 95AIO option Video Output Video Output FA 95AIO option Video I O Process Video Processing Quantization Frequency Response NTSC PAL DG DP S N Ratio Genlock Input 1080 59 94p 1080 50p Level A 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 1080 24PsF 1080 23 98PsF 720 59 94p 720 50p 525 60 NTSC 625 50 PAL 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 1080 24PsF 1080 23 98PsF 720 59 94p 720 50p 525 60 NTSC 625 50 PAL PAL M 3G SDI 3 Gbps HD SDI 1 5 Gbps or SD SDI 270 Mbps 75Q BNC x 2 Analog Composite 1 0 Vp p 750 BNC x 1 SDTV YPbPr 750 BNC Y Pb and Pr 1ea Y 1 0 Vp p Pb Pr 0 525 Vp p SMPTE level 0 757 Vp p BETACAM level SMPTE and BETACAM menu selectable Analog RGB 1 0 Vp p 750 BNC R G and B 1 ea Y C 1 0Vp p 750 BNC Y and C 1 ea HDTV YPbPr 750 BNC Y Pb and Pr 1ea Y 1 0 Vp p Pb Pr 0 525 Vp p Analog RGB 1 0 Vp p 750 BNC R G and B 1 ea 3G SDI 3 Gbps or HD SDI 1 5 Gbps or SD SDI 270Mbps 750 BNC x 4 2 x 2 outputs Analog Composite 1 0Vp p 750 BNC x 2 SDTV YPbPr 750 BNC Y Pb and Pr 1ea Y 1 0 Vp p Pb Pr 0 525 Vp p SMPTE level 0 757 Vp p BETACAM level SMPTE and BETACAM menu selectable Analog RGB 1 0 Vp p 750 BNC R G and B 1 ea Y C 1 0Vp p 750 BNC Y and C 1 ea HDTV YPbPr 750 BNC Y Pb and Pr 1ea Y 1 0 Vp p Pb Pr 0 525 Vp p Analog RGB 1 0 Vp p 750 BNC R G and B 1 ea 3 inputs standard or 4 inputs maximum input gt
46. YPbPr RGB Output Format 183 36 95 75 62 61 184 75 Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense 07 08 2014 Printed in Japan FORA FOR A COMPANY LIMITED Head Office 3 8 1 Ebisu Shibuya ku Tokyo 150 0013 Japan Overseas Division Phone 81 0 3 3446 3936 Fax 81 0 3 3446 1470 Japan Branch Offices Osaka Okinawa Fukuoka Hiroshima Nagoya Sendai Sapporo R amp D Production Sakura Center Sapporo Center FOR A America Corporate Office 11155 Knott Ave Suite G amp H Cypress CA 90630 USA Phone 1 714 894 3311 Fax 1 714 894 5399 FOR A America East Coast Office 2 Executive Drive Suite 670 Fort Lee Executive Park Fort Lee NJ 07024 USA Phone 1 201 944 1120 Fax 1 201 944 1132 FOR A America Distribution amp Service Center 2400 N E Waldo Road Gainesville FL 32609 USA Phone 1 352 371 1505 Fax 1 3
47. decoder Dolby DEC OUT cannot be encoded to the Dolby E signal 2 SOURCE channels corresponding to CH1 8 will be the default value CH1 SOURCE 1 CH8 SOURCE 8 If INPUT is set to Dolby DEC OUT the settings will be CH1 Dolby DEC 1 CH8 Dolby DEC 8 3 Shown only if FA 95ALA option is installed See section 6 9 3 4 LOUDNESS CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT for details on LOUD 1 2 settings 135 6 9 2 2 Dolby ENCODER SETTING Menu is available only if the FA 95DE E option is installed 307 Menu button VIDEO OP AUDIO OP Parameter Default Setting range Description 5 1 2 1 5 1 2x1 4 4 1 4 2x2 1 4 2 2x1 4 4x1 4x2 3x2 2x1 1 2x2 4x1 1 Selects Dolby E encoder program 2 6x1 configuration EA f See Dolby E Encoder Input Channel Assignment table in section 13 Dolby PROGRAM 9 142 4 2 E Decoder Encoder Channel 4 2x1 Assignment Table for channel 3x2 assignments of respective 2x2 2x1 configurations 2 4x1 6x1 4 2 2 2 2x1 4x1 A 7 1 Screen 20bit Selects the bit width of the Dolby E BIT DEPTH 20bit 16bit encoder output CONDI Selects a video output to which the Dolby E encoder output is FRAME REF ENYI CONV2 synchronized Converter 1 or converter 2 1 If BIT DEPTH is set to 16bit the will be displayed and the program functions as 5 1 To select these configurations set BIT DEPTH to 20bit 2 See section 5 8 VIDEO OUT SELECT OUT SEL for detai
48. e SDI REMAPPING ala VIDEO PROC AMP SDI MONO SUM e SDI AUDIO CLOCK SDI IN AUDIO OWHITE LEVEL ORES IN GAIN AES HYSTERESIS CG BLACK LEVEL e AES REMAPPING AES AUDIO GAMMA LEVEL COLOR CORRECT AES MONO SUM e AES I O SETUP ANALOG IN LEVEL e CONV1 U D MODE ANALOG IN GAIN CONA CONV1 SIZE POS ANALOG OUT LEVEL AOC CONV1 CROPPING ANALOG OUT GAIN CONV1 IMPROVE e ANALOG REMAPPING CONV1 SIDE RGB ANALOG MONO SUM e ANALOG SYSTEM Se CONV2 U D MODE CONV2 CONV2 SIZE POS RSTER CONV2 CROPPING MASTER OUT GAIN S CONV2 IMPROVE CONV2 SIDE RGB Se AVO SETTING AVO USER1 5 LEVEL SET MAPPING USER1 2 AREA SET Qs SOURCE SRE SEL AVO SETUP CLIP SYPbPr RGB CLIP DELAY COMPOSITE CLIP OAUDIO DELAY Se VIDEO INPUT SET e SD INPUT ASPECT CHGOV CHANGEOVER MODE SET 2 SDI ERROR TRG 2 FORMAT ERROR TRG CRC ERROR TRG 7 BLACK VIDEO TRG 2 IN SEL AUDIO LOSS TRG 7 e DOWN MIX SET DOWN MIX AUDIO ERR TRG 2 e DOWN MIX ASSIGN SILENCE TRG 2 CHGOV STATUS 2 CHGOV VID STATUS 2 CHGOV AUD STATUS 7 AUD LOSS STATUS 2 AUD ERROR STATUS 7 SILENCE STATUS 2 ye VIDEO OUT MODE OUT SEL Se SDI1 2 OUT SET lane e SDI3 4 OUT SET e AUDIO MODE SET e COMPOSITE SET e COMPONENT SET Qe Dolby AUX OUT 3 lt CONV1 LOGO SEL a Dolby DEG REPS VIDEO OP CONV1 KEYER SET e Dolby DOWNMIX 3 AUDIO OP CONV2 LOGO SEL Dolby DEC GAIN E e Dolby ENC INPUT CONV2 KEYER SET Dolby ENG SET e METADATA INPUT 31 Menu Button VIDEO menus lit green AUDIO menus lit orange
49. the above program configurations set Bit Depth to 20bit 2 See section 9 2 6 Converter1 for details on CONV1 and CONV2 settings 213 9 3 17 Automatic Loudness Adjustment FA 95ALA Clicking block 17 on the audio block diagram when the FA 95ALA option is installed opens the Automatic Loudness Adjustment dialog box 2 Loudness Settings Mozilla Firefox 1921680 10 loudness cei Loudness Measurement 1 Loudness Measurement 2 Momentary Short Term Long Term Momentary Input 0 0LKFS 0 0 LKFS 0 0 LKFS Input 0 0 LKFS Output Start Stop Session Time 0 00 00 Loudness Control Settings 1 Loudness Control Off Response Slow Normal Y Response Fast NA nll Target Level 24 0LKFS Minimum Gain 20 0dB Maximum Gain 0 0dB on 0 0LU Loudness Channel Assign 1 Mode Monaural O Stereo Left Dolby Decoder Downmix Right Source CH 2 Center Source CH 3 LFE Source CH 4 Ls Source CH 5 Rs Source CH 6 O5 1ch R OY Output Start Session Time 0 00 00 Loudness Control Settings 2 Loudness Control Off Oon Response Slow Response Fast Target Level Minimu m Gain Maximum Gain NA M NA 24 0LKFS 20LU 20 048 0 048 Y Loudness Channel Assign 2 Mode Left Right Center LFE Ls Rs O Monaural O Stereo O5 1ch Source CH 1 Y Source CH 1 Source CH 1 Sourc
50. 1 processing lt 2 x 2 outputs 4 2 2 Digital Component 3G HD SD SDI 10 bit Analog Composite 12 bit 100 kHz to 4 2 MHz 0 5 dB to 0 5 dB 4 2 MHz to 5 0 MHz 1 0 dB to 1 0 dB roll off above 5 0 MHz NTSC composite 100 kHz to 4 2 MHz 0 5 dB to 0 5 dB 4 2 MHz to 5 5 MHz 1 0 dB to 1 0 dB roll off above 5 5 MHz PAL composite 1 1 composite 60 dB without quantization noise composite BB NTSC 0 429 Vp p PAL 0 45 Vp p or Tri level Sync 0 6 Vp p 750 BNC x 1 loop through Terminate with 750 terminator if unused 296 Synchronizer mode System Phase Control Frame Sync mode Line Sync mode AVDL mode Input Sync mode minimum delay Frame Sync mode H phase 1 2 H to 1 2 H Line Sync mode AVDL mode Input Sync mode Video Delay Video Processing Functions Proc Amp Video Clip Color Correction Audio Input Embedded Audio AES EBU Analog Audio Audio Output Embedded Audio AES EBU Analog Audio Audio Delay V phase 1 2 frame to 1 2 frame Maximum delay 1 frame 1H Minimum delay 1H H phase 1 2 H to 1 2 H V phase 1 2 frame to 1 2 frame Maximum delay 1H 1 2 H Minimum delay 1 2 H H phase 1 2 H to 1 2 H V phase 1 2 frame to 1 2 frame Maximum delay 5 H 1 2 H Minimum delay 1 2 H HD Maximum delay 1 H 1 2 H Minimum delay 1 2 H SD H phase 1 2 H to 1 2 H V phase 1 2 frame to 1 2 frame Maximum delay 1 frame Minimum de
51. 10 16 These settings are necessary when inserting AFD data into video signals to be output from CONV1 and or 2 To enable devices that receive signals from FA 9500 to detect ancillary data select the ancillary data type output video format s for CONV1 and or 2 output s and line number into which the data is to be inserted in ANC EMBED LINE Sec 5 10 17 The default setting should be set to the line number usually used CONV1 and CONV2 operation mode settings Set the converter operation mode for CONV1 in CONV1 U D MODE Sec 5 3 5 Set the specific aspect ratio under ASPECT in CONV1 U D MODE Sec 5 3 5 Select an aspect ratio from among 4 3 L 16 9 T to 16 9F ALT4 3 for SD SDI output video signals from CONV1 Select from among 16 9 L gt 16 9 to 16 9F ALT4 3 for HD SDI output video signals from CONV1 Set the aspect ratio for CONV2 in the same manner as above in CONV2 U D MODE Sec 5 4 1 AFD output verification AFD data status in CONV1 and CONV2 output video signals can be verified as follows The CONV1 ANC OUT menu Sec 5 16 allows you to verify whether and in which line the VI and WSS data has been inserted into CONV1 output video signals VI and WSS output data details can be seen in CONV1 VI OUT 5 16 2 and CONV2 WSS OUT 5 16 3 2016 3 output data details can be seen in CONV1 S2016 OUT Sec 5 16 1 Into which line S2016 3 is inserted can be seen in CONV1 ANC OUT1 Sec 5 17 AFD data status in CONV2 output video
52. 1080 24PsF 1080 59p 1080 50p BY PASS Disable Displays the video format of the SDI1 output signal Displays BY PASS if the function is enabled Displays Disable if there is no signal output SDI Out 3 4 Same as above Displays the video format of the SDI2 output signal Displays BY PASS if the function is enabled Displays Disable if there is no signal output 525 60 Displays the video format of the COMPOSITE output signal 625 50 Displays PAL M if 9 4 1 PALM Mode Sets enabled and isplays M if 9 4 ode Set is enabled an Composite Out BY PASS the format setting for the converted output video signal under Disable Composite Output Setting in the 9 2 11 Output Select menu PAL M is 525 60 Loss 525 60 625 50 1080 59i Displays the video format of the Component output signal E 1080 50i Displays BY PASS if the function is enabled omponent 720 59p rae its Out 7 720 50p Displays Disable if there is no signal output 1080 23PsF Output signal format will be 525 60 625 50 or PAL M if the 1080 24PsF Component output is set to Y C mode PAL M BY PASS Disable 1 Shown if the FA 95AlO option is installed Unit Status Item Display Description Unit Name FA 9500 Displays the unit name The default setting is FA 9500 To change the unit name see Unit Name in section 9 6 1 Event Control FAN1 Normal Stopped Displays th
53. 132 11 6 9 1 2 Dolby DECODER INPUT ibe daei aad a ea idea 133 6 9 1 3 Dolby DECODER REFERENCE cccocccccccononnoncnccnccnnonnnonnnnnnconnnnannnnnnnnonencinannnnss 134 6 9 14 Dolby DOWNMIX ostia ii ii 134 6 9 1 5 Dolby DECODER GAIN vianen oinean aaraa a aaa aoea a arrainei 134 6 9 2 Dolby ENCODER INPUT FA 99DE B ooococccccccccconnononcccnnccccnnannnnnnnnncnnnonannnnnnnnninens 135 6 9 2 1 Dolby ENCODER INPUT doccocococcoccccccoconocononncononcnnoncanennncnnnconinnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnnnss 135 6 9 2 2 Dolby ENCODER SETTING ooooooooccccccccononononnnnnonocnnncnnnnnnnnnnonnoncnnnnnnnnnncncinannnnnces 136 6 9 2 3 METADATA INPUT Aaen ieat a n a aa e eea 136 6 9 3 Automatic Loudness Adjustment FA 95ALA cooooococococcccccococonanccnnnnonccccnnnnnnonnnnaninnns 137 6 9 3 1 LOUDNESS MEASUREMENT ooocccccccconnnononnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnononnnncnnnnnnnnnncnnininnnnnces 137 6 9 3 2 LOUDNESS CONTROL ENABLE coococccococononncnnnncncnncannnnnnnnnnonincnnnnnnnnnononinninnnnes 138 6 9 3 3 LOUDNESS CONTROL SETTINGS 0 cccccecceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeetenees 139 6 9 3 4 LOUDNESS CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT ceececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeeeteeees 140 6 9 3 5 LOUDNESS STANDARD rriena a e E E ee 141 6 10 AUDIO SYSTEM Settings AUDIO SS oooconococociccncccccncononnnnnononnnncnnonoconnncnnonannnnncnnnn 142 6 101 RADE INV OUT Lai A AA A AA Ai 142 6 10 2 DIGITAL AUDIO r ae a a a a a a adr N eE E 143 6 10 3 AUDIO ERR SENSE eriiic
54. 16 9 CTR 4 3L16 9PRTD frame Image with a 14 9 aspect ratio as a vertically centered letterbox in a 4 3 coded BOX 14 9 CTR 4 3 L 14 9 frame Image with a 4 3 aspect ratio and with an alternative 14 9 F14 9CTRPRTD 4 3 F ALT14 9 rene 9 coded fame ass Image with a 16 9 aspect ratio and alternative 14 9 center as None 4 3 LALT 14 9 a vertically centered letterbox in a 4 3 coded frame Image with a 16 9 aspect ratio and alternative 4 3 center as None 4 3 L ALT 4 3 a vertically centered letterbox in a 4 3 coded frame 282 AFD 16 9 code WSS name None F 16 9 AMRPH None None None None None None FA 9500 specified name VI S2016 16 9 L gt 16 9 16 9 F 16 9 16 9 P 4 3 16 9 F PRTD 16 9 P 14 9 16 9PALT 14 9 16 9FALT 14 9 16 9 F ALT4 3 Illustration in a 16 9 coded frame 283 Description Image with an aspect ratio greater than 16 9 as a vertically centered letterbox in a 16 9 coded frame Image is full frame with an aspect ratio the same as that of the 16 9 coded frame Image with a 4 3 aspect ratio as a horizontally centered pillarbox image in a 16 9 coded frame Image is full frame with a 16 9 aspect ratio and all image areas protected Image with a 14 9 aspect ratio as a horizontally centered pillarbox image in a 16 9 coded frame Image with a 4 3 aspect ratio and alternative 14 9 centered pillarbox image in a 16 9 coded frame Ima
55. 1kHz PCM 32kHz Normal audio signal AES input approx 32kHz PCM Other Normal audio signal Other AES input SILENCE Mute signal SDI input SILENCE 48kHz Mute signal AES input approx 48kHz SILENCE 44 1kHz Mute signal AES input approx 44 1kHz SILENCE 32kHz Mute signal AES input approx 32kHz SILENCE Other Mute signal Other AES input NON PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 aye ada Normal audio signal Asynchronous SDI inpu SILENCE Async Mute signal Asynchronous SDI input NON PCM Async Compressed audio data such as AC3 Asynchronous SDI input IN ANALOG Analog audio signal UNKNOWN Unidentifiable Displays the status of the selected audio sources CH1 through CH16 that are selected by MAPPING 5 13 7 SDI 1 IN AUDIO SDI 1 IN AUDIO sae Menu button CH 1 LO0SS CHL Desa BeOS eS STATUS CH 3 LOSS CH 4 L0SS uE SDI1 IN AUDIO 536 CH 5 LOSS CH 6 LOSS CH 7 LOSS CH 8 LOSS SDI 1 IN AUDIO Bude CH 9 LOSS CH10 LOSS CH11 LOSS CH12 LOSS SDI1 IN AUDIO 538 CH13 LOSS CH14 LOSS CH15 LOSS CH16 LOSS Parameter Display Description LOSS PCM SILENCE NON PCM PCM Async SILENCE Async NON PCM Async UNKNOWN CH1 CH16 Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 CH16 of the SDI1 input signal LOSS No audio signals PCM Normal audio signal SILENCE Mute signal NON PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 PCM Asyn
56. 2 Composite In Source CH 3 Reference Source CH 4 SDI Out 1 2 Source CH 5 SDI Out 3 4 Source CH 6 Composite Out Source CH 7 Changeover Source CH 8 Component In Source CH 9 Component Out Source CH 10 Source CH 11 Source CH 12 Source CH 13 Source CH 14 Source CH 15 Source CH 16 Dolby Unit Trap Allows you to select whether to send fan and power unit alarm traps Default is to send Item Description Fan1 Check to send an alarm trap for Fan1 Fan2 Check to send an alarm trap for Fan2 Power1 Check to send an alarm trap for Power1 Power2 Check to send an alarm trap for Power2 1 Not shown if the FA 95PS option is not installed Video Trap Allows you to select whether to send traps for Input output video signal changes Default is not to send Item Description SDI In 1 Check to send a trap for SDI In 1 SDI In 2 Check to send a trap for SDI In 2 Composite In Check to send a trap for Composite In Reference Check to send a trap for Reference SDI Out 1 2 Check to send a trap for SDI Out 1 2 SDI Out 3 4 Check to send a trap for SDI Out 3 4 Composite Out Check to send a trap for Composite Out Changeover Check to send a trap for Changeover Component In Check to send a trap for Component In Component Out Check to send a trap for Component Out 1 Not shown if the FA 95CO option is not installed 2 Not shown if the FA 95AIO option is not installed
57. 2 2 INNOVATIONS IN VIDEO and AUDIO TECHNOLOGY OPERATION MANUAL FA 9500 Frame Synchronizer FA 95PS FA 95DACBL FA 95RU FA 95CO FA 95D D DE E FA 95AIO FA 95ALA FA 10DCCRU 10 Edition Rev 3 SOFT Ver 8 03 higher FOR A COMPANY LIMITED Edition Revision History Edit Rev Date Description Where Preliminary 2010 08 03 Preliminary edition V0010 1 2010 09 13 First edition V0100 Throughout 1 1 2011 01 20 Added FA 95DACBL option color correction description Other text amendments 2 2011 03 23 Added 3G SDI Second Coverter and Auto Video Throughout Optimizer features and FA 95PS option Other text amendments 3 2011 06 14 Added FA 95RU option 7 1 Issued the separate FA 95RU Operation Manual 4 2011 08 19 Added FA 95CO Option 5 7 Added the login page and Logout button 9 1 4 1 2011 10 18 Revised AVO Scene Cut Detection frame delay and 5 5 2 9 2 2 1 Forced Field frame delay settings 5 10 1 9 2 3 9 4 1 5 2011 11 08 Closed captioning 5 10 13 5 11 5 12 CEA608 S334 1 CEA708 compatible 5 16 13 through 5 22 9 4 1 9 4 3 9 7 4 18 6 2011 12 16 Added FA 95D D and FA 95 DE E options 5 15 5 16 13 6 9 Enhanced Audio processing feature 9 3 9 4 10 13 19 Added PAL M support etc 7 2012 02 16 Added FA 95AIO option 5 7 1 5 8 5 5 10 3 5 15 5 17 28 3 5 17 5 7 3 16 7 1 2012 03 06 Deleted NTSC SETUP exc
58. 20175 1 301 5 3 11 Audio source signal status CH1 0 Loss a95StatusAudioSourceCh1 1 INTEGER O CH2 1 PCM a95StatusAudioSourceCh2 2 INTEGER O CH3 2 PCM 48kHz a95StatusAudioSourceCh3 3 NTEGER O CH4 3 PCM 44 1kHz a95StatusAudioSourceCh4 4 INTEGER O CH5 4 PCM 32kHz a95StatusAudioSourceChd 5 NTEGER O CH6 eae a95StatusAudioSourceCh6 6 INTEGER O CH7 7 Silence 48kHz a95StatusAudioSourceCh7 7 NTEGER O SOURCE SOURCE AUDIO CH8 8 Silence 44 1kHz a95StatusAudioSourceCh8 8 NTEGER O AUDIO CH9 9 Silence 32kHz a95StatusAudioSourceCh9 9 INTEGER O CH10 10 Silence Other a95StatusAudioSourceCh10 10 NTEGER O CH11 11 Non PCM a95StatusAudioSourceCh11 11 INTEGER O CH12 12 PCM Async a95StatusAudioSourceCh12 12 INTEGER O CH13 13 Silence Async a95StatusAudioSourceCh13 13 NTEGER O CH14 14 Non PCM Async a95StatusAudioSourceCh14 14 INTEGER O CH15 15 IN Analog a95StatusAudioSourceChT5 15 INTEGER O CH16 16 Unkn a95StatusAudioSourceCh16 16 NTEGER O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 5 3 21 SDI1 2 output audio signal status CH1 a95StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch1 1 INTEGER O CH2 a95StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch2 2 NTEGER O CH3 a95StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch3 3 INTEGER O CH4 0 Loss a95StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch4 4 NTEGER Q CH5 1 PCM a95StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch5 5 INTEGER O CH6 2 Silence a95StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch6 6 INTEGER O CH7 3 Non PCM a95StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch7 T INTEGER O AUDIO ISpI1 2 OUT AUDIO CHS 4 PCM Async a95StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch8 8 INTEGER O OUTPUT CH9 5 Silence Async a95StatusSdiE
59. 5 10 19 WSS AFD ERROR setting for the non WSS aspect ratio conversions 48 5 4 2 CONV2 Conversion Table Possible Conversions in CONV2 for Input Signal Formats and Mode Selections CONVERTER2 mode selection Input signal SD 10801 720p 1080PsF 1080p 3G 525 60 525 60 1080 59 720 59p 1080 23PsF 1080 59p 1080 59i 525 60 1080 59 720 59p 1080 59i 1080 59p ae BY PASS format 720 59p ormats 720 59p 525 60 1080 59 720 59p eee 1080 59p 1080 59p 1080 59p 525 60 1080 59 720 59p EY PASS 1080 59p 625 50 625 50 1080 50i 720 50p 1080 24PsF 1080 50p 1080 50i 625 50 1080 50i 720 50p 1080 501 1080 50p a BY PASS format 720 50p ormats 720 50p 625 50 1080 50i 720 50p Gay PASS 1080 50p 1080 50p 1080 50p 625 50 1080 50i 720 50p BY PASS 1080 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 23PsF 1080 23PsF nee 1080 23PsF 525 60 BYPASS BY PASS 1080 23PsF BY PASS formats 1080 24PsF 1080 24PsF 1080 24PsF 1080 24PsF 625 50 BY PASS BYPASS 1080 24PsF BY PASS In the conversions to the formats indicated as BY PASS the CONV2SIZE POS CONV2 CROPPING CONV2 IMPROVE and CONV2 SIDE RGB settings cannot be changed 5 4 3 CONV2 SIZE POS 22 Menu button CONV2 MASTER Parameter Default o Description H SIZE 100 0 50 0 150 0 Adjusts the width of the video Horizontal Size ae 0 1 displayed on the monitor 1 V SIZE o 50 0 150 0 Adjusts the height of the video Vertical Size 100 0 0 1
60. 59p 50p 1080 501 1080 23PsF 24PsF FRAME 1 to 8 FRAME 2 to 8 FRAME LINE AVDL Cannot be set Cannot be set INPUT 2 to 8 FRAME 3 to 8 FRAME 1 FS mode settings under SYNCRO in section 5 10 1 FS MODE SET 2 The current input video format can be verified in the VIDEO IN STATUS menu Sec 5 13 2 for each input selected in the VIDEO INPUT SET menu Sec 5 7 1 IMPORTANT Adjust the audio delay as required in the AUDIO DELAY menu Sec 6 6 1 to account for any additional video signal delay produced by changing FRAME DELAY 55 5 5 3 USER1 5 LEVEL SET Setting LEVEL of the AVO SETTING menu to one user settings from USER1 through 5 opens the USER1 5 LEVEL SET menu This menu allows you to store five sets of level settings as USER 5 37 Menu button IN WHITE A 99 0 IN BLACK a 1 0 AVO TARGET WHITE 80 0 MAPPING TARGET BLACK 3 0 Each USER1 5 is composed of four level settings such as IN WHITE IN BLACK TARGET WHITE and TARGET BLACK The default settings of USERs 1 through 5 are the same as those for DARKER DARK STANDARD BRIGHT and BRIGHTER respectively The desirable level settings are easily obtained by adjusting values from the default values 9 USER1 5 Default Settings Parameter SELECT LEVEL Adjustment level Custom levels USER1 USER2 USER3 USER4 USER 5 Default Default Default Default Default Fixed levels Darker Dark Standard Bright Brighter
61. 6 172 9 2 6 Converter1 Clicking block 6 on the video block diagram opens the Converter1 setting dialog box 2 Up Down Cross Converter 1 Windows Internet Explorer DER 192168010 E Converter 1 Process Mode y 1080 59 94i gt gt 1080 59 94i Aspect Ratio Motion Sense Antialias Enhance v Adaptive v Horizontal Normal Vertical Normal i Level 0 Converter 1 Size Converter 1 Position H Size 100 0 j H Position O Pixel v size 100 HH V Position 0 Line Converter 1 Crop Converter 1 Side Cut Color H Left 0 Pixel 0 H Right 0 Pixel g p VTop O Line Jg p E E E E E V Bottom 0 Line N I RTENELE 5 4 After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Converter1 Process Mode Paramet Setting range e Sn Default Steps Description Selects a mode for UP DOWN Converter1 to convert the input signal in the CONV1 connector BY PASS Outputs the signal without converting SD Converts signals to a standard definition format BASS 1080i Converts signals to a 1080i format aD 720p Converts CONV 1 input signals to a 720p 1080i format Mode BY PASS 720p 1080PsF Converts CONV 1 input signals to a 1080PsF 1080PsF format 1080p 3G 1080P 3G Converts signals to a 3G SDI 1080p format Auto Mode Displayed if Video Output Mode is set to Auto in the 9 2 11 Output Selec
62. 9 image 16 9 P 14 9 Pillarbox 14 9 image 1011 vertically centered in the horizontally centered in the coded frame coded frame RESERVED Reserved RESERVED Reserved 1100 4 3 F ALT14 9 Full frame 4 3 image with 16 9P ALT14 9 Pillarbox 4 3 image with 1101 alternative 14 9 center alternative 14 9 center 4 3 LALT14 9 Letterbox 16 9 image with 16 9F ALT14 9 Full frame 16 9 image with 1110 alternative 14 9 center alternative 14 9 center 4 3 LALT 4 3 Letterbox 16 9 image with 16 9 F ALT4 3 Full frame 16 9 image with 1111 alternative 4 3 center alternative 4 3 center 290 SMPTE RP186 2008 VI AFD aspect ratio table Description AFD Code RESERVED Reserved 0000 RESERVED Reserved 0001 BOX 16 9 TOP Box 16 9 top 0010 BOX 14 9 TOP Box 14 9 top 0011 BOX gt 16 9 CTR Box gt 16 9 center 0100 RESERVED Reserved 0101 RESERVED Reserved 0110 RESERVED Reserved 0111 AS THE CD FRM Active format is the same as coded frame 1000 4 3 CTR 4 3 center 1001 16 9 CTR 16 9 center 1010 14 9 CTR 14 9 center 1011 RESERVED Reserved 1100 4 3 WITH 14 9 PRTD 4 3 with shoot and protect 14 9 center 1101 16 9 WITH 14 9 PRTD 16 9 with shoot and protect 14 9 center 1110 16 9 WITH 4 3 PRTD 16 9 with shoot and protect 4 3 center 1111 9 ITU R BT 1119 2 WSS aspect ratio table Description AFD Code F 4 3 full format 4 3 1000 BOX 14 9
63. AFD 1080i 720p 1080PsF or 1080 3G AFD ALT AFD and AFD ALT automatically select an 16 9 L gt 16 9 aspect ratio according to the AFD data in the 16 9 F 16 9 input signal If no AFD data is found in the input AFD 16 9 P 4 3 signal the aspect ratio will be determined 16 9 F PRTD according to the setting made under 5 10 18 16 9 P 14 9 ANC LOSS SET 16 9 P ALT14 9 Options other than the above two output in the 16 9 F ALT14 9 specific aspect ratio See section 20 About 16 9 F ALT4 3 AFD for details on conversions according to AFD data The Aspect Ratio setting cannot be changed if Converter1 Process Mode is set to BY PASS 1 BT1119 WSS will be embedded according to the ANC Settings settings WSS AFD Error Sec 9 4 3 for non WSS aspect ratio conversions Motion Sense Default Setting range Parameter Steps Description Field Generates a progressive scan image from one field of an interlaced scan image The created image has no motion artifacts but vertical resolution will be reduced Adaptive Detects whether there is motion or no motion in the scene and generates an optimal progressive scan image Frame Odd 1st Generates a progressive scan image from two fields odd even of an interlaced scan image Suitable for the progressive segment frame input of progressive scan signals Frame Even 1st Generates a progressive scan image from two fields even odd of and interlaced scan image
64. ANC is selected ANC H V ANC H V ANC DETAIL Removes all H and V ancillary data MODE DETAIL and embeds newly specified ancillary data such as CC and AFD Set to DETAIL to enable settings in 5 10 16 ANC DATA EMBED and 5 10 17 ANC EMBED LINE Embeds audio signals into horizontal ancillary data of CONV2 output videos OVERWRITE Removes the embedded audio signal from the input SDI video signal then embeds the processed audio data on the video signal Whether to embed is determined by the OVERWRITE AUDIO GROUP setting in section 5 10 12 HANC OVERWRITE IN DATA CONV2 AUDIO GROUP BLANK The input SDI data will be embedded on the video signal after audio signals are embedded IN DATA Passes the input SDI horizontal ancillary data without processing Processed audio data cannot be embedded BLANK Deletes all horizontal ancillary data and embeds the processed audio data Embeds audio signals into vertical ancillary data PASS of CONV2 output videos V ANC PASS BLANK PASS Embeds the vertical ancillary data without processing BLANK Deletes all vertical ancillary data HANC and V ANC settings become available when ANC MODE is set to H V ANC H ANC and V ANC settings are effective if input and output formats are the same If such formats are different both H ANC and V ANC will be set to BLANK 88 5 10 11 CONV1 AUDIO GROUP Allows you to set whether or not to embed aud
65. Adjust Off On Group Adjust on Changing any R G or Group Adjustment Off B value will change the values of the three components accordingly while retaining the proportion Curve Center Gamma Curve Center Black Selects a gamma curve type White 1 If AVO Control is set to Auto in the Auto Video Optimizer AVO menu 9 2 2 the all Gamma Level Curve settings cannot be changed Also if AVO Control is set to Hold the Curve setting cannot be changed Sepia The Sepia Level and Color settings can be changed if Correction Mode is set to Sepia Setting range A Parameter Default Steps Description Level 25 0 OK Adjusts the color level in SEPIA mode Color 160 0 a o eo Adjusts the color in SEPIA mode If AVO Control is set to Auto or Hold in the Auto Video Optimizer AVO menu 9 2 2 the Sepia settings cannot be changed IMPORTANT Differential or Sepia mode settings under Correction Mode will automatically change to Balance mode whenever AVO is enabled While AVO is being used the color corrector performs correction as if Correction Mode is in Balance mode and the gamma curve type is Black curve Color correction enabled by setting AVO Control to Hold is also performed in the above state 182 9 2 9 Video Test Signal Clicking block 9 on the video block diagram opens the Video Test Signal setting dialog box A http 192 168 0 10 Video Test Signal Microsoft Int
66. C menu 5 2 4 the menu as shown below will be displayed 36 5 2 2 BLACK LEVEL Menu button RED i 100 0 cc GREEN 100 0 BLUE 100 0 AES AUDIO GROUP ADJ UST Setting Parameter Default range Description Steps RED GREEN BLUE 100 0 0 0 200 0 Adjusts the black level of R G and B RGB Black Level A 0 5 components separately Adjusts the black level of R G and B GROUP ADJUST 100 0 0 0 200 0 components all together while Group Adjustment ye 0 5 retaining the proportion of the separately adjusted levels If MODE is set to SEPIA in the COLOR CORRECT C C menu 5 2 4 the menu as shown below will be displayed R JUST G JUST B JUST C a MODE IS SEPI El 1 If AVO is enabled the m 5 2 3 GAMMA LEVEL essage AVO IS USING IT will be displayed Menu button RED 100 0 GREEN 100 0 CC BLUE 100 0 AES AUDIO GROUP ADJ UST Parameter Default aes Description RED GREEN BLUE 100 0 0 200 Adjusts the gamma level of R G RGB Gamma level ee 0 5 and B components separately Adjusts the gamma level of R G GROUP ADJUST 100 0 0 200 and B components all together while Group Adjustment cats 0 5 retaining the proportion of the separately adjusted levels If MODE is set to SEPIA in the COLOR CORRECT C C menu 5 2 4 the menu as shown below will be displayed Only the value
67. DLY ADJ in section 5 10 4 VIDEO SUB is enabled all outputs from SDI 1 2 SDI 3 4 Composite and Component will be adjusted to be the same delay If CONV DLY ADJ is disabled the outputs in the same format with inputs will be by passed through without conversions 5 8 1 SDI1 2 OUT SET Allows you to assign video signals to output from video output connectors SDI1 and 2 ASSIGN CONV1 525 60 gt gt 1080 59i 72 Menu button OUT SEL MODE Setting range Parameter Default Steps Description CONV1 Selects whether to output a signal of ASSIGN CONV1 CONV2 CONV1 or CONV2 from SDI1 and 2 connectors The input signal format and SDI1 and 2 output signal formats are displayed on the third row 5 8 2 SDI3 4 OUT SET Allows you to assign video signals to output from video output connectors SDI3 and 4 ASSIGN CONVI 525 60 gt gt 1080 59i 13 Menu button OUT SEL MODE Parameter Default Setting range Description CONV1 Selects whether to output CONV1 or ASSIGN CONV1 CONV2 CONV2 signal from the SDI3 and 4 connectors The input signal format and SDI3 and 4 output signal formats are displayed on the third row 73 5 8 3 COMPOSITE SET Allows you to assign video signals to output from the COMPOSITE video output connector 74 Menu button ASSIGN CONV1 OUT SEL 525 60 gt gt 525 60 MODE Setting range neo Parameter
68. DURATION IMMEDIATE 0 5 to 5 0 sec TRS error detection in the active 0 5 sec picture area required to trigger a changeover The CHGOV DISABLED message is displayed if CHANGEOVER is disabled in the VIDEO INPUT SET 5 7 1 menu or VIDEO TRG is disabled in the CHGOV CHANGEOVER MODE SET 5 7 4 menu If this message is displayed a changeover will not be performed even hough SDI ERROR TRG is enabled 5 7 6 FORMAT ERROR TRG This menu is accessible only if the FA 95CO software option is installed Menu button IN SEL 5E DOWNMIX Setting range Parameter Default Steps Description Enables or disables auto TRIGGER DISABLE ACE changeover for SDI input and ENABLE system format mismatches IMMEDIATE Sets the duration of the detected DURATION IMMEDIATE 0 5 to 5 0 sec format mismatch required to trigger 0 5 sec a changeover The AUTO SYS FORMAT message is displayed if SYS FRMT is set to AUTO DET in the 5 10 1 FS MODE SET menu The TRIGGER cannot be enabled when the message is displayed To enable the trigger set SYS FRMT to other than AUTO DET in the FS MODE SET 5 10 1 menu The CHGOV DISABLED message is displayed if CHANGEOVER is disabled in the VIDEO INPUT SET 5 7 1 menu or VIDEO TRG is disabled in the CHGOV CHANGEOVER MODE SET 5 7 4 menu If this message is displayed a changeover will not be performed even though FORMAT ERROR TRG is enable
69. Displays the LAN PORT1 IP address SUB 255 255 255 0 Displays the LAN PORT1 subnet mask GW 0 0 0 0 Displays the LAN PORT1 gateway The NETWORK INFO settings can be changed on a web browser window on a computer See section 9 8 2 NETWORK SETTING for details 7 6 UNIT Ver Menu button FPGA1 01 00 STATUS FPGA2 01 00 FPGA3 01 00 OBER SOFT 01 00 Parameter Description FPGA1 Displays the FPGA1 version information FPGA2 Displays the FPGA2 version information FPGA3 Displays the FPGA3 version information SOFT Displays the software version information 151 7 7 OPTION A Ver Menu button STATUS OTHER Setting range ae Parameter Default Steps Description Displays the name of the optional device that is NAME 7 installed in OPTION SLOT A Displays NONE if no device is installed Displays the FPGA1 version information in FPGA1 OPTION SLOT A Displays if the version is not supported Displays the FPGA2 version information in FPGA2 OPTION SLOT A Displays if the version is not supported Displays the version information of SOFT in SOFT OPTION SLOT A Displays if the version is not supported Display when FA 95DACBL is installed Menu button STATUS OTHER Setting range Parameter Default Steps Description Displays the name of the opti
70. E 3x2 2x1 Dolby E 2x2 4x1 Dolby E 2 6x1 Dolby E 8x1 Dolby E 5 1 Dolby E 4 2 Dolby E 4 2x1 Dolby E 3x2 Dolby E 2x2 2x1 Dolby E 2 4x1 Dolby E 6x1 Dolby E 4 Dolby E 2 2 oem Dolby E 2 2x1 ontg Dolby E 4x1 Dolby E 7 1 Dolby E 7 1Screen NON Dolby E Displays Dolby E program configuration Coding mode or status of signal selected under INPUT See Dolby E Digital Decoder Output Channel Assignment table in section 13 Dolby E Decoder Encoder Channel Assignment Table for channel assignments of respective Dolby Digital 1 1 Dolby Digital 1 0 Dolby Digital 2 0 Dolby Digital 3 0 Dolby Digital 2 1 Dolby Digital 3 1 Dolby Digital 2 2 Dolby Digital 3 2 Dolby Digital 3 0L Dolby Digital 2 1L Dolby Digital 3 1L Dolby Digital 2 2L Dolby Digital 3 2L configurations Loss Invalid 209 Dolby Decoder REF Input Select Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a reference signal to be used in the Dolby decoder PCM signal output from the Dolby decoder will be synchronized to the selected reference signal Output Video T l l REF Input AUX REF IN AUX REF In Output Video Uses the output video signal Input Video AUX REF In Uses the input signal in the p optional Dolby reference input connector REF IN If no signal is in the REF IN connector the PCM signal output will be in free run mode Input Video Uses the i
71. ENCODER INPUT 135 Dolby ENCODER SETTING 136 DOWN MIX ASSIGN 131 DOWN MIX SET 129 Downloading a MIB File Web 238 Downmix Block Diagram 130 E Embed AES Input Signals on SDI Signals 25 Embed Analog Audio Signals on SDI Signals 26 Enhance 175 Enhanced CONV U D MODE Settings 42 Event Control Web 235 EVENT LOAD 154 Event Memory 154 EVENT SAVE 155 EVENT SETUP 155 Expansion Slots A B Alert 295 External Dimensions 299 F FA 95AIO 21 FA 95AIO Option 268 FA 95AIO Switch Settings 269 FA 95DACBL 20 FA 95DACBL installation 266 FA 95D D DE E 21 FADE IN OUT 142 FORMAT ERROR TRG 67 Frame Delay Web 171 FRAME DELAY Setting Range Chart 55 Freeze Mode Setting Chart 219 FREEZE Mode Table 82 FREEZE SET 81 FRONT OPERATION 146 Front Panel 18 Front Panel Operations 29 FRONT PANEL SET 147 FS MODE SET 80 G GAMMA LEVEL 37 GPI Web 232 GPI Input Circuit 263 GPI Input Control 264 302 GPI Output Circuit GPI SETTING 265 148 H HD SD SDI Frame Synchronizer Use 23 HD PHASE SET 84 HD SD SDI Simultaneous Output 24 How to Install the FA 95DACBL 266 How to Reset to SDI 1 Main Input 65 How to Reset to SDI 1 Main Input Web 164 I IN WHITE and IN BLACK 56 INPUT FUNCTION 149 Input Select Web 159 Insert AFD Data to Output Video Signals 289 Internal Settings 22 L Level Adjustment 60 Loading Older Version Data from FA 9500 293 Loading the Data Saved in a File 237 Logo Generator 76 Logo Position Setting Range
72. F ALT4 3 according to this input signal aspect ratio This setting is effective under the following conditions CONV1 U D MODE Sec 5 3 1 ASPECT is set to other than AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 AFD 16 9 AFD ALT 16 9 AFD and AFD ALT And CONV2 U D MODE Sec 5 4 1 ASPECT is set to other than AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 AFD 16 9 AFD ALT 16 9 AFD and AFD ALT Parameter Default Setting range Description Select the aspect ratio of the SD input A 4 3 signals in CONV1 and CONV2 oe 7 16 9 Select 16 9 for horizontally squeezed anamorphic images 5 7 3 About Changeover The Changeover function is supported for the main input SDI 1 If the SDII 1 input encounters a problem Changeover switches the input to input SDI 2 However if SDI 2 also encounters the same problem a changeover will not occur Conditions to determine problem occurrence can be selected in menus 5 7 4 CHGOV CHANGEOVER MODE SET through 5 7 11 SILENCE TRG Input selection under IN SEL cannot be changed while Changeover is enabled Also IN SEL must be set to SDI 1 to enable Changeover Whether a changeover has been performed can be checked in menus 5 7 12 CHGOV STATUS through 5 7 17 SILENCE STATUS which allow you to know what caused the changeover To reset the status menus set Changeover to Disable 5 7 3 1 Changeover and Loss Operation Changeover has priority over Loss operation However if neither an SDI 1 or SDI 2 input signa
73. For materials with a wide audio level range set each setting to a large value For materials that prefer minimum loudness adjustment set each setting to a small value Loudness Channel Assign 1 2 Parameter Default Setting range Description Monaural Allows you to select the audio mode ofi Mode Stereo Stereo an audio signal for its loudness level to 5 1 CH be measured and adjusted Allows you to select audio signals to be measured and adjusted ARS Source 1 16 Source channel audio Source cH1 16 signal selected under AUDIO Down Mix Left MAPPING MAPPING sec 6 5 Left Source CH1 3 Down Mix Right Down Mix Left Right Internally Dolby Decoder CH 1 8 Dolby Decoder Downmix L Dolby Decoder Downmix R 6 generated downmixed audio signals Dolby Decoder CH 1 8 Dolby decoder output audio signals Dolby Decoder Downmix Dolby decoder downmixed output audio signals Right Source CH2 4 The same as above The same as above Center Source CH3 Y The same as above The same as above LFE Source CH4 3 The same as above The same as above Ls Source CH5 The same as above The same as above Rs Source CH6 The same as above The same as above 1 Selectable if Mode is set to Stereo or 5 1ch 2 Selectable if Mode is set to 5 1ch 3 Under Loudness Channel Assign 2 menus values are Source CH9 14 respectively 4 If MODE is set to Monaural the output signal for Loudnes
74. IN WHITE 99 0 98 0 97 0 95 0 93 0 IN BLACK 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 0 TARGET WHITE 80 0 88 0 93 0 95 0 97 0 TARGET BLACK 3 0 5 0 7 0 12 0 17 0 IMPORTANT While the USER setting menu is open and the LEVEL is changed via web browser or the connected FA 95RU to other than USERs 1 through 5 in the AVO SETTING menu 5 5 1 the menu will change to display the AVO SETTING menu 5 5 1 IN WHITE and IN BLACK These two parameters determine the highest and lowest levels of luminance in the input signal Setting Parameter range Description step The maximum value of luminance in the sample data is defined as 100 Based on this reference value this 80 0 determines the highest level of luminance for level control IN WHITE 99 0 If the value is too large some noise may be picked up and 0 5 cause the results to become unstable If the value is too small it increases contrast but it may cause the images to be overexposed The minimum value of luminance in the sample data is defined as 0 Based on this reference value this 1 0 determines the lowest level of luminance for level control IN BLACK 20 0 If the value is too small some noise may be picked up and 0 5 cause the results to become unstable If the value is too large it increases contrast but it may cause the images to be underexposed 56 The figures below are luminance histograms of input X
75. INTEGER ad ad OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 2 6 Converter 1 Converter 1 ICONV1 U D MODE Convert Mode Bypass Aspect Inaccessible SD 1080i 720p 1080PsF 1080p 3G a95Conv1Mode INTEGER Aspect Inaccessible 4 3 113 9 14 9 16 9 Squeeze fa95Conv1Aspect INTEGER AspectSD 0OJDODARAWVN O AUN O Y 0 ADN O ool N O AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 AFD 16 9 AFD ALT 16 9 Letterbox 16 9 top Letterbox 14 9 top Letterbox gt 16 9 4 3 Fullframe 4 3 Letterbox 16 9 Letterbox 14 9 0 Fullframe 4 3 Alt 14 9 1 Letterbox 16 9 Alt 14 9 2 Letterbox 16 9 Alt 4 3 3 Letterbox gt 16 9 16 9 14 Fullframe 16 9 5 Pillarbox 4 3 6 Fullframe 16 9 Protected 7 Pillarbox 14 9 8 Pillarbox 4 3 Alt 14 9 9 Fullframe 16 9 Alt 14 9 0 Fullframe 16 9 alt 4 3 fa95Conv1AspectSD INTEGER AspectHD AFD AFD ALT Letterbox gt 16 9 Fullframe 16 9 Pillarbox 4 3 Fullframe 16 9 Protected Pillarbox 14 9 Pillarbox 4 3 Alt 4 9 Fullframe 16 9 Alt 14 9 Fullframe 16 9 alt 4 3 lfa95Conv1AspectHD INTEGER ICONV1 IMPROVE Motion Sense PONTO ONOARAON TOS Field Frame Odd 1st Frame Even 1st Adaptive ffa95Conv1MotionSense 31 INTEGER Enhance O to 8 fa95Conv1Enhance 42 INTEGER Anti Alias H 8 to O to 8 fa95Conv1AntiAliasH INTEGER Anti Alias V 8 to O
76. Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps SDI Audio Input Gain Setting range Parameter Default Steps Description 20 0 20 0 dB Sets the offset to the input gain Master 0 0dB 0 1 dB for all channels CH1 to CH16 SDI Input Audio Gain Set Settings Setting range Parameter Default Steps Description 1 Sets the input gain for the CH1 CH16 o 0d8 20 0 20 0 dB individual SDI embedded audio 0 1 dB i channel 1 Master and individual channel values cannot exceed the setting range as a total The setting value will stop at the end of the range 189 9 3 2 AES Audio Input Settings Clicking block 2 on the audio block diagram opens the AES Audio Input dialog box Bi http 1 192 168 0 10 AES Audio Input Microsoft Internet Explorer DER AES Audio Input Gain AES Audio Input Hysteresis Master 0 0 dB CH 1 2 Off ma AES Audio Input Gain Set CH 3 4 Off 2 CH 1 0 dB CH 5 6 Off 2 CH 2 0 dB CH 7 8 Off 2 CH 3 0 dB 2 CH 4 0 dB CH 5 0 dB 2 CH 6 0 dB 2 CH7 D dB TE GO 008 08 08 108 oe E 2 2 0 dB v a o F 1D Internet After completing the s
77. LOAD menu set AUTO LOAD to DISABLE TO LOAD ENABLE 154 8 2 EVENT SAVE 192 Menu button NO VIDEO FORMAT LOAD START F2 UNITY FORMAT 1080 59i EVENT Parameter Default Setting range Description NO VIDEO VIDEO FORMAT Selects the number of an event you FORMAT EVENT1 EVENT100 want to save Saves the event that is selected e E E under NO when the F2 UNITY button is pressed E 7 7 Displays the signal format if NO is set to VIDEO FORMAT 1 VIDEO FORMAT saves settings to memory for the respective video formats the FA 9500 uses The current video format is displayed on the third row The EVENT SAVE menu is disabled and appears as shown below if AUTO LOAD is set to ENABLE in the EVENT SETUP menu 8 3 To enable the EVENT SAVE menu set AUTO LOAD to DISABLE TO LOAD ENABLE 8 3 EVENT SETUP 193 START LAST SETTING Menu button AUTO LOAD DISABLE EVENT Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an event you want to load at startup LAST SETTING Loads the last settings LAST SETTING that are used before startup VIDEO VIDEO FORMAT Loads the settings that START LAST FORMAT are stored in event memory for the last SETTING DEFAULT format that is detected before startup EVENT1 DEFAULT Resets all settings to the default EVENT100 settings at startup EVENT1 100 Loads the selected event memory among event memory settings 1 through 100 DISAB
78. Mounting FA 9500 RPS can be mounted to ElA standard rack units When rack mounting a unit remove the rubber feet and use the accessory rack mount brackets rack ears Installing the AC Cord Retaining Clip Secure the AC cord with the supplied ladder strap retaining clip assembly to prevent accidental removal from the FA 9500 Installing the clip 1 Wrap the retaining clip around the AC cord with the anchor of the ladder strap toward the unit Insert the anchor into the hole next to the AC IN socket Lightly fasten the clip around the AC cord Plug in the power cord Slide the clip on the ladder strap toward the plug Fasten the clip tightly Gently pull on the AC cord to ensure it is secured 5 2 FE i 4 E 1 Unpluging the AC cord 1 Push the tab on the retaining up to unfasten the clip 2 Push the tab on the ladder strap up and slide the clip back 3 Unplug the AC cord 2 3 4 5 6 7 Table of Contents Te PROLONGA ooo 17 A cl aaraa ra aa oaths tetneePentehielacesshtulend loses ceteeyhld arta a eaea 17 1 2 ROTOS ti diante 17 1 3 FA 95LG GUI Download ccccccecceeeeeecene cece cere eeeeceeaeeeeeeeeeececceeeaeeeeeeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeeeeseeeas 17 2 Panel Descriptions 0ooocococccoccoocconccnnonononononononono eee eee eee eee aaa eae eae nnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnrnncinss 18 221 A cor eecedccl cveveapitlccen cl ccbvvdid cecal of cckevitenceatelepertereivecenced three 18 222
79. Name None Name None FA 95PS None FPGA 1 3 16 FPGA 1 FPGA 1 FA 95AVO Installed FPGA 2 5 11 FPGA 2 FPGA2 a FA 95SCNV Installed FPGA 3 1 02 SOFT SOFT FA 95 3G Installed SOFT 8 00 FA 95LG Installed FA 95CO Installed If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown Click Refresh to update the settings Unit Version Item Description Serial No Displays the serial number of the FA 9500 FPGA1 Displays the FPGA1 version FPGA2 Displays the FPGA2 version FPGA3 Displays the FPGAS version SOFT Displays the SOFT version Option A Information Displays the information of the optional installed expansion card in SLOT A If no card is installed None will be shown Option B Information Displays the information of the optional installed expansion card in SLOT B If no card is installed None will be shown Option Information Displays the installation status and information on options other than the expansion cards installed into SLOT A and SLOT B 247 9 7 4 ANC Status Unit Video Status Audio Status Unit Information ANC Status Changeover Status Ancillary Input Status 1 CEA 608 CC Absent Line 2 BT 1119 2WSS Present Line 23 3 RP186 VI Present Line 11 324 AFD Input Status Detected 2016 3 AFD amp Bar AFD 1011 BNR AR 4 3 Letterbox 14 9 image vertically center
80. Non Trigger This trigger is enabled but has not triggered a changeover Trigger This trigger is enabled and has triggered a changeover Changeover Audio Status Displays the status of audio related triggers at the time a changeover is performed Item Description Audio Loss Disable This trigger is disabled Non Trigger This trigger is enabled but has not triggered a changeover Trigger This trigger is enabled and has triggered a changeover Audio Error Disable This trigger is disabled Non Trigger This trigger is enabled but has not triggered a changeover Trigger This trigger is enabled and has triggered a changeover Silence Disable This trigger is disabled Non Trigger This trigger is enabled but has not triggered a changeover Trigger This trigger is enabled and has triggered a changeover Audio Loss Status Displays status details of audio related triggers at the time a changeover is performed Item Description Disable This trigger is disabled for audio groups 1 to 4 respectively Non Trigger This trigger is enabled but has not triggered a changeover Group 1 to 4 for audio groups 1 to 4 respectively Trigger This trigger is enabled and has triggered a changeover for audio groups 1 to 4 respectively Audio Error Status Displays Audio Error trigger status details at the time a changeover is performed Item Description Disable Audio Error tr
81. Normal Inver Source CH8 SDI CH8 Normal Olnvert Source CH9 SDI CH9 Normal Invert Source CH10 SDI CH10 Normal Invert Source CH11 SDI CH11 Normal Inver Source CH12 SDI CH12 Normal Olnvert Source CH13 SDI CH13 Normal Olnvert Source CH14 SDI CH14 Normal Olnvert Source CH15 SDI CH15 Normal Olnvert Source CH16 SDI CH16 Normal O Invert Dolby Decoder CH1 Normal Invert Dolby Decoder CH2 Normmal Invert Dolby Decoder CH3 Normal Olnvert Dolby Decoder CH4 Normal Olnvert Dolby Decoder CH5 Normal Invert Dolby Decoder CH6 Normal O Invert Dolby Decoder CH7 Normal Invert Dolby Decoder CH8 Normal O Invert Dolby DownMix L O Normal Olnvert Dolby DownMix R Normal Olnvert 7 Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Setting ee Parameter Default range Description Sets the polarity for Source channels CH1 through 16 and the Dolby decoder Source CH1 16 g Dolby Decoder CH 1 8 Normal pe Invert Revere ne polarity Dolby Decoder L R nve Which input audio signal is used for the SOURCE channel is displayed as SDI CH1 1 Selectable only if the FA 95D D option is installed 200 9 3 11 SDI Audio Output Settings Clicking block 11 on the audio block diagram opens the SDI Audio Output Setting dialog box a http 192 168 0 11 SDI Audio Out
82. Present AFD 1110 BNR full format 14 9 centre shoot and protect 14 9 Bit 13 0 00 0E HEX CONV2 Ancillary Data Packet Output Status 1 52016 3 AFD Bar Line 8 E Line 3 Line ME az Line Refresh Displays the status of CEA608 WSS and VI ancillary data detection The line number in which the ancillary data is in is displayed AFD Input Status Displays the status of AFD detection in the input signal lt When detecting AFD in input 82016 3 gt AFD Input Status Detected 52016 3 AFD amp Bar AFD 1011 BNR AR 4 3 Letterbox 14 9 image vertically centered in the coded frame Data 58 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 HEX Detected Displays as S2016 3 AFD amp BAR AFD Displays Active Format Description code in binary format AR Didplays the aspect ratio as 4 3 or 16 9 The detected AFD type is shown Data Displays the detected 8 byte data in hexadecimal format 248 lt When detecting AFD in input RP186 VI gt AFD Input Status Detected RP186 VI AFD 1011 BNR Scan 625 50 4x3 14 9 center Data1 5A HEX Data2 02 HEX Data3 02 HEX Detected Displays as RP186VI AFD Displays Active Format Description code in binary format Scan Displays the Scanning System The detected AFD type is shown on the third row Data1 3 Displays the detected Data in hexadecimal format lt When detecting AFD in input BT 1119 2 WSS gt AFD Input Status Detected BT 1119 2 WSS AFD 0001 BNR box 14 9 cen
83. Pulse Control The assigned pin function is triggered by changing the pin state between OPEN and CLOSE Trigger state change of pin OPEN to CLOSE Function is ON Normal Pulse Control 500msec or more 500msec or more A gt OPEN T m B CLOSE i First i i second D E 1 0sec or more IMPORTANT Use the specified pulse width and duration Otherwise the GPI inputs may not function properly Do not simultaneously close circuits for more than 1 pulse to prevent the GPI inputs from malfunctioning 264 14 4 GPI Output Circuit Select external or internal power FA 9500 inside 5 4V 5VDC PINs 2 8 external power i I PIN 9 i SS IMPORTANT Note that the allowed current for each GPI output circuit is 10mA and the external power supply should be 5VDC 265 15 How to Install the FA 95DACBL This section describes how to install the optional FA 95DACBL If you have purchased the FA 95DACBL with the FA 9500 this procedure is unnecessary since the FA 95DACBL has been factory installed 15 1 Procedure 1 Turn off the power of the FA 9500 and disconnect the power cord 2 Remove the 3 screws from the top panel and 4 screws each from the right and left sides of the unit Remove the top panel See the below picture 3 Remove the 2 screws from the blank panel on OPTION SLOT B Keep these screws in a safe place to use later to secure the FA 95DACBL To install th
84. SDI CH3 Source CHG SDI CHE Internet See section 6 7 DOWN MIX SET for details Down Mix Mode Setting range re Parameter Default Steps Description Stereo Mode Select Stereo Surround Selects a mode to downmix audio signals Monaural ae Sets the Ls Rs surround channels level Surround Mix 3dB 9dB 0 codB Excludes surround channels from 0 the downmix Sets the C center channel level 3dB The output level after the downmix 3dB retains the original center channel level Center Mix 3dB 4 5 dB 4 5dB 6dB Used to reduce the audio level 6dB in case it becomes too loud due to the center channel audio mixing to both the right and left channels Sets the level for the downmixed audio 3dB signals as a whole Master Level 3dB Auto If set to Auto Down MIX Master Level changes according to the Downmix Mode and Surround Mix level selections 1 If Master Level is set to Auto Master Level changes as shown in the below table Surround Mix Level Down Mix Mode poe 6dB 9dB 0 dB Stereo approx 7 7dB approx 6 9dB approx 6 3dB approx 4 6dB Surround approx 9 9dB approx 8 7dB approx 7 7dB approx 4 6dB Monaural approx 12 9dB approx 12 0dB approx 11 4dB approx 9 5dB 198 9 Down Mix Assign Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects audio signals that are Left Left Source CH1 selecte
85. Sec 5 10 19 for the non WSS aspect ratio conversions 41 Enhanced CONV U D MODE Settings The CONV 1 and 2 U D MODE menu settings have been changed in software versions 6 00 and higher as shown in the table below Menu settings Input format Older than ver 6 00 gt Newer than ver 6 00 D INPUT CONV1 ASPECT ASPECT CONV1 2 ASPECT SD G Any format 4 3 SD 4 3 Any format 1080i dl Any format 1080i Any format 1080i ASPECT 720p 720p Any format 720p Any format ASPECT 1080PsF 1080PsF Any format 1080PsF Any format ASPECT 1080p 3G 1080p 3G Any format 1080p 3G Any format 4 3 4 3 16 9 P 4 3 st 13 9 4 3 ise E p i p 2B 1080PsF Una a 1080PsF r ji hai 1080p 3G 16 9 4 3 1080p 3G 16 9 F 16 9 SQUEEZE 16 9 16 9 F 16 9 4 3 4 3 F 4 3 1080i 13 9 7 a 720p 1080PsF SD ki SD 4 3 a 1080p 3G 16 9 4 3 L 16 9 PRTD SQUEEZE 16 9 F 16 9 4 3 Any format A ee 13 9 a Any format p p f p 1080PsF 1080PsF 49 1080PsF AL 1080p 3G 1080p 3G 16 9 1080p 3G Any format SQUEEZE Any format SD INPUT ASPECT menu settings in section 5 7 2 42 5 3 2 CONV1 Conversion Table Possible Conversions in CONV for Input Signal Formats and Mode Selections CONVERTER mode selection Input signal SD 1080i 720p 1080PsF 1080p 3G 525 60 525 60 1080 59 720
86. TRG 70 SNMP 271 SNMP SETTING Web 254 SOFT OPTION1 153 SOFT OPTION2 153 SOURCE AUDIO 101 Source Select Web 193 SOURCE SRC SEL 127 Specifications 296 SRC Mode Web 195 Status Display Web 241 System Requirements 270 SYSTEM Settings Web 217 Systen Block Diagram Audio 258 T TARGET WHITE and TARGET BLACK 57 TEST SIGNAL 83 TRAP List 277 TRAP SETTINGS Web 256 U UNIT ALARM 97 Unit Information Web 247 UNIT Ver 151 Unit Video Status Web 241 Unpluging the AC cord 7 User 1 5 LEVEL SET Web 168 User Area 1 2 Web 170 USER SETTING Web 257 USERI1 5 Default Settings 56 USER1 5 LEVEL SET 56 USER1 2 AREA SET 59 Utility Settings Web 234 utomatic Loudness Adjustment FA 95ALA 137 V VALIDITY 144 Various Signal Status Display STATUS 97 Verification After Dolby Option Removal Replacement 294 Verification After FA 95AIO Removal Replacement 294 Verification After FA 95ALA Removal Replacement 294 VIDEO CLIP Setting ranges 62 VIDEO IN STATUS 98 VIDEO INPUT SELECT IN SEL 64 VIDEO INPUT SET Video Loss Mode VIDEO Menus VIDEO OPTION VIDEO OP VIDEO OUT SELECT OUT SEL VIDEO OUT STATUS VIDEO POSITION VIDEO PROC AMP PROCESS VIDEO Settings Web VIDEO SUB VIDEO SYSTEM VIDEO SYS Video System Web 64 159 36 76 73 99 86 36 158 83 80 217 304 Video Test Signal Web W WHITE LEVEL WSS AFD ERROR Y Y C Output format YPbPr CLIP YPbPr RGB CLIP YPbPr RGB Clip Web
87. VI OUT Displays whether the RP186 VI ancillary data is inserted into CONV 1 output video signal When no RP186 VI is in the CONV1 output video signal Menu button RP186 VI ABSENT STATUS OTHER If ANC MODE in 5 10 9 CONV1 ANC SET is set to H V ANC the state of the V ANC setting PASS or BLANK is displayed When RP186 VI is in the CONV1 output video signal 6 7 3 18 6 D 0 X 1 2 vi 2 6 9 OU wv P gt P F 0 eek Displays the status of RP186 VI Video Index Class1 AFD Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format SS Scanning System is displayed in hexadecimal format The detected AFD type is shown on the third row D1 D3 Detected Data are displayed in hexadecimal format ee See section 20 6 AFD Code Abbreviations for details on AFD types 5 16 3 CONV1 WSS OUT When no BT1119 2 WSS is in the CONV1 output video signal Menu button BT1119 WSS ABSENT STATUS OTHER If ANC MODE in 5 10 9 CONV1 ANC SET is set to H V ANC the state of the V ANC setting PASS or BLANK is displayed When BT1119 2 WSS is in the CONV1 output video signal Displays the status of BT1119 2 WSS AFD Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format SS Scanning System is displayed in hexadecimal format The detected AFD type is shown on the third row D1 D3 Detected Data are displayed in hexadecimal format ee See section 20 6 AFD Code Abbrevia
88. VIDEO OP AUDIO OP lt LOUD MEASURE 1 2 LOUD CTRL ENA1 2 LOUD CTRL SET1 2 LOUD CH ASGN1 2 lt LOUD STANDARD 6 VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS lt e FS MODE SET FREEZE SET COMPOSITE SET e VIDEO SUB e TEST SIGNAL HD PHASE SET SD PHASE SET VIDEO POSITION e CONV1 ANC SET e CONV2 ANC SET CONV1 AUDIO GRP CONV2 AUDIO GRP SD LINE MASK ANC DETECT LINE ANC DETECT SEL ANC DATA EMBED ANC EMBED LINE ANC LOSS SET WSS AFD ERROR NTSC SETUP e PAL M MODE SET Qe FADE IN OUT e DIGITAL AUDIO e AUDIO ERR SENSE e DIGITAL SILENCE STATUS OTHER lt gt UNIT ALARM VIDEO IN STATUS COMPONENT INPUT VIDEO OUT STATUS COMPONENT OUTPUT SOURCE AUDIO CH1 16 SDI1 IN AUDIO CH1 16 SDI2 IN AUDIO CH1 16 AES IN AUDIO CH1 8 ANALOG IN AUDIO CH1 4 SDI1 2 OUT AUDIO CH1 16 SDI3 4 OUT AUDIO CH1 16 AES OUT AUDIO CH1 8 ANALOG OUT AUDIO CH1 4 Dolby AUX STATUS AFD IN STATUS ANC IN STATUS ANC IN STATUS 1 2 lt gt CONV1 ANC OUT CONV1 S2016 OUT CONV1 VI OUT CONV1 WSS OUT CONV1 ANC OUT1 CONV2 ANC OUT CONV2 S2016 OUT CONV2 VI OUT CONV2 WSS OUT CONV2 ANC OUT1 lt e CONTROL SETTING FRONT OPERATION FRONT PANEL SET GPI SETTING NETWORK INFO UNIT Ver OPTION A Ver OPTION B Ver OTHER OPTION SOFT OPTION1 SOFT OPTION2 VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO menus AUDIO menus 1 Hidden if the optional FA 95DACBL is installed 2 Shown if the optional FA 95CO is insta
89. a95AudioSourceCh8StatusChangeTrap 8 TYPE Change SOURCE CH9 TEA TOUNEN GMN a95AudioSourceCh9StatusChangeTrap 9 MO PEISA ON Change SOURCE CH10 a95AudioSourceCh10StatusChangeTrap 10 oe ON Change 0 Loss F SOURCE CH11 1 PCM a95AudioSourceCh11StatusChangeTrap 11 Nou CATON Change 2 PCM 48kHz NOTIFICATION SOURCE CH12 Booth ape 2 a95AudioSourceCh12StatusChangeTrap 12 VBE Change 5 PCM Other SOURCE CH13 6 Silence a95AudioSourceCh13StatusChangeTrap 13 eb IGATI N Change 17 Silence 48kHz 8 Silence 44 1kHz F SOURCE CH14 9 Silence 32kHz a95AudioSourceCh14StatusChangeTrap 14 Notit ICATION Change 10 Silence Other NOTIFICATI N SOURCE CH15 T POMAGAC 295AudioSourceCh15StatusChangeTrap 15 BE Change 13 Silence Async ISOURCE CH16 14 Non PCM Async a95AudioSourceCh16StatusChangeTrap 16 del ICATION Change 15 IN 16 Unknown 277 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 6 4 FA 95CO Traps Change Over 0 SDI 1 1 SDI 2 2 Composite bit 0 sdiError bit 1 formatError bit 2 crcError fa95ChangeoverOccurredTrap bit 3 blackVideo bit 4 audioLoss bit 5 audioError bit 6 silence NOTIFICATION TYPE BITS Changeover trigger OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 6 5 FA 95D D DE E TRAP AUX IN 0 Loss 1 PCM 2 Non PCM 3 Unknon fa95DolbyAuxInputChangedTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change REF IN 00 01 02 04 05 09 10 12 13 20 21 29 Loss 525 60i 625 5
90. aE competes 257 10 Systen Block Diagram AUNIO oooooooocccconccccoconconcnncnnncncnnnnnnoncnnnnnononcnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnannnnnnnnnineness 258 11 ANALOG DIGITAL Audio Input Output Level oooocococcccncccococcnccconcccnnnnanoncnnnncnncnnnnnonnnnnnnon ns 259 11 1 Analog Output Level Relative to the Digital Input Level ooononnoccccnnnnninncccccccccccccccnnnnos 259 11 2 Digital Output Level Relative to the Analog Input Level oooooonocociniccninicccocccccnccccncnnnnos 260 12 Analog Audio CONNECTION cooccccccnnonoconcnccncccnnnnnncncnncncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnninanennns 261 13 Dolby E Decoder Encoder Channel Assignment Table oooococccccccccconconcocccccccconnnanoncnnnnninnns 262 14 REMOTE a A eho te a 263 14 1 REMOTE Connector eredero ceca cada setae lecens agente sped daa di Rd iE 263 14 2 GPI Input CirGuit 3 sestesccde avec ea de checndiadeaveys acces be ena E aAa E AEEA EEEE eae ght 263 143 GPL Input CONTO lucida iia 264 144 GPI Output CiU utili eds 265 15 How to Install the FA 95DACBL oooocooccccccccccocononnccnnncnnoncnnnnnnnnnncononnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnannnnncnnnnoninnines 266 191 PFOCCCUIC lia 266 15 2 Installation ConfirMatiON oooonoococcccnnonococononoccnnncnnononnnnnnonnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnneninnas 267 16FA 95AIO Optica tada fs 268 16 1 FA 95AIO Pin Assignments oooococccccccccconooncncncnnnoconnnanonnnnnnnennonannnnnnnnnncnnannnnnnnnnnnnnaninnanns 268 16 2 FA 95AIO Switch SettidgS
91. active picture area while SDI ERROR TRG 5 7 5 detects them only in the active picture area A changeover according to a TRS error in a blanking interval can only be triggered by CRC ERROR TRG 5 7 7 5 7 8 BLACK VIDEO TRG This menu is accessible only if the FA 95CO software option is installed BLACK EO TRG 5 9 Menu button TRIGGER DISABLE THRESHOLD 0 0 IN SEL DURATION MMEDIATE DOWNMIX CHGOV DISABLED Parameter Default Setting range Description DISABLE Enables or disables auto changeover TROPES DIGAPEE ENABLE for SDI black signal Sets the threshold of average luminance of one field of interlaced or THRESHOLD 0 0 7 5 to 30 0 segment frame video or one frame of progressive video to determine a black signal Sets the detected black signal input DURATION IMMEDIATE 4 ERES duration required to trigger a a changeover The CHGOV DISABLED message is displayed if CHANGEOVER is disabled in the VIDEO INPUT SET 5 7 1 menu or VIDEO TRG is disabled in the CHGOV CHANGEOVER MODE SET 5 7 4 menu If this message is displayed a changeover will not be performed even though BLACK VIDEO TRG is enabled 68 5 7 9 AUDIO LOSS TRG This menu is accessible only if the FA 95CO software option is installed Menu button IN SEL 6 0 DOWNMIX Parameter Default SS Sanos Description Steps Selects a group from the embedded GROUPSEL
92. alert will be displayed as 1 000 msec or 2 msec if CONV DLY ADJ is disabled as described in section 5 10 4 VIDEO SUB The amounts of delay in CONV1 and CONV2 will be displayed as shown below if CONV DLY ADJ is enabled as described in section 5 10 4 VIDEO SUB The displayed amount of total delay will be the sum of delays in CONV1 and CONV2 The maximum delay is 1 000 msec 1 frame 2 frames for progressive signals of the input video signal If a NON PCM signal is assigned to a selected channel the audio delay adjusted for the channel will be applied to another channel of the stereo channel pair AUDIO DELAY CoH SE Li OFFS ET Oms MASTER l6ms 20ms TOTAL 36ms 128 6 7 DOWN MIX SET Menu button MODE STEREO SURROUND MIX 3dB IN SEL CENTER MI X o 3dB DOWN MIX MASTER LVL 3dB Parameter Default Setting range Description Steps STEREO Sel ti dete di MODE STEREO SURROUND nte A OO MONAURAL i 3dB Sets the Ls Rs surround 6dB channels level TORRONE me 9dB 0 codB Excludes surround 0 channels from the downmix Sets the C center channel level 3dB The output level after the downmix retains the original 3dB center channel level CENTER MIX 3dB 4 5 dB 4 5dB 6dB Used to reduce the 6dB audio level in case it becomes too loud due to the center channel audio mixing to both the right and left channels Sets the level for the dow
93. ancillary data ANG ds BT1119 WSS standard Format 525 60 peta Selects the input signal format Field 1 14 Line 525 60 12 19 Line 525 60 Selects a line to detect ancillary 19 Line 625 50 8 22 Line 625 50 data in Field 1 Field 2 277 Line 525 60 275 282 Line 525 60 Selects a line to detect ancillary 324 Line 625 50 321 335 Line 625 50 data in Field 2 For BT1119 WSS Parameter Default Setting range Description RP186 VI Selects an ancillary data AING PETRE S BT1119 WSS standard Format 625 50 625 50 Selects the input signal format f Selects a line to detect ancillary Field 1 23 Line 8 23 Line data in Field 1 ANC Detect Select Parameter Default Setting range Description CEA608 CC Detects closed caption data CEA608 CC in luminance signal of 525 60 systems TE cepa CEAG08 CC 5334 1 CC 334 1 CC Detects closed caption data in 525 60 SDI signal ancillary data space AFD S2016 3 AFD errr Selects an ancillary data type to detect in BT1119 WSS SDTV input signals 1 Be sure to set to CEA608 CC when processing closed caption data in 525 60 composite signals Otherwise the caption data will not be detected 228 ANC Data Embed Parameter Default Setting range Description ANC CEA608 CC CEA608 CC S334 1 CC SD CEA708 CC HD S2016 3 AFD RP186 VI BT1119 WSS Selects an ancillary data type to be inserted int
94. and R channels will be subject to loudness adjustment Other channels will be unselectable 5 1 CH All channels will be subject to loudness adjustment Allows you to select an audio channel of L CH SOURCE1 which loudness level to be measured and adjusted SOURCE Source channel signals See R CH SOURCE2 sec 6 5 1 SOURCE SRC SEL DOWNMIX Internally generated downmixed audio channels C CH SOURCES a SOURCE 1 16 See sec 6 7 DOWN MIX SET DOWNMIX L R Dolby DEC Dolby decoder output INVALID Dolby DEC 1 8 audio channels LFE CH SOURCE4 Dolby DM L R 5 See sec 6 9 AUDIO OPTION AUDIO OP Dolby DM Dolby decoder downmixed Ls CH SOURCES a output audio channels See sec 6 9 AUDIO OPTION AUDIO OP INVALID Rs CH 1 Invalid channels due to their Mode CH SOURCES settings will be indicated as INVALID 1 Default of Channel 1 is L CH SOURCE1 R CH SOURCE 2 and Channel 2 is L CH SOURCEQ R CH SOURCE10 C CH SOURCE11 LFT CH SOURCE12 Ls CH SOURCE13 and Rs CH SOURCE14 2 The LFE channel is not subject to measurement but to adjustment 3 If MODE is set to MONAURAL the output signal for LOUD 1 2 R selected in the SDI AES or Analog REMAPPING menu will be the same as that for LOUD 1 2 L 4 Only signals processed in the SRC will be subject to Loudness adjustments See section 6 5 AUDIO MAPPING MAPPING for details on SRC settings 5 Sh
95. axis Luminance level Y axis Number of pixels Minimum value of inputs 0 Maximum value of inputs 100 IN BLACK IN WHITE IN BLACK IN WHITE IN BLACK IN WHITE Wide correction range setting Narrow correction range setting TARGET WHITE and TARGET BLACK These two parameters determine the highest and lowest levels of luminance for target images outputs See figures below and in the next page Setting Parameter range Description step Determines the maximum value of luminance for outputs The maximum luminance value of the image after 60 0 correction should approximate this value TARGET WHITE 100 0 The larger the value the brighter the image which may 0 5 however cause the image to be overexposed The smaller the value tones of the bright part are kept However the overall obtained image may be dark Determines the minimum value of luminance for outputs The minimum luminance value of the image after correction 0 should approximate this value TARGET BLACK 40 0 The larger the value the dark area in pictures will appear 0 5 brighter which may however lower the contrast and the f noise will become apparent The smaller the value the higher the contrast which may however cause the image to be underexposed The figure below is a luminance histogram of output X axis Luminance level Y axis Number of pixels Reference values TARGET BLACK TARGET WHI
96. change 8 OFF Do not change 269 17 System Requirements To use with the FA 9500 your computer must meet the following requirements OS Windows XP operating Windows Vista Windows 7 operating system SP2 or later operating system system Professional 32bit Business 32bit Professional 32bit 64bit Browser Firefox 21 0 Firefox 21 0 Windows Internet Explorer 10 Firefox 21 0 CPU Pentium 4 processor Intel Core 2 Duo Intel Core 2 Duo 2 8GHz or higher processor processor 2GHz or higher 2GHz or higher Memory 512MB or more 2GB or more 2GB or more Display 1280x1024 pixels or more resolution 24 bit full color Network Ethernet 100BASE TX 1000BASE T 1 port or more Network cable Enhanced Category 5 or higher Network protocol SNMPv2c HTTP IMPORTANT When using Internet Explorer 8 Windows Updates after 6 13 2011 must be downloaded for proper performance It is highly recommended to keep your computer updated with the latest Windows Updates PCs that do not meet the above system requirements may not proplely display web pages We recommend the use of a Firefox web browser 270 18 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol The FA 9500 can be remotely monitored and some of its settings can be remotely changed using the SNMPv2C protocol Some menu items can also be set via the network MIB Management Information Base is required for the mon
97. channel status indication However real NON PCM signals cannot be output properly 195 9 3 7 Audio Master Settings Clicking block 7 on the audio block diagram opens the Audio Master Setting dialog box 2 http 192 168 0 10 Audio Master Settings Microsoft Internet Explo E EX Audio Master Setting Master Mute Off Oon Master Output Gain Master 0 4 dB Master Output Gain Set CH 1 0 4 dB CH 2 0 4 dB CH 3 0 4 dB CH 4 0 4 dB CH 5 0 4 dB CH 6 0 4 dB CH7 0 4 dB CH8 0 4 dB CH9 0 4 dB CH 10 0 4 dB CH 11 0 4 dB CH 12 0 4 dB CH 13 0 4 dB CH 14 0 4 dB CH 15 0 4 dB CH 16 0 4 dB Decoder CH 1 D 4 dB Decoder CH 2 D 4 dB Decoder CH 3 0 4 dB Decoder CH 4 0 4 dB Decoder CH 5 D 4 dB Decoder CH 6 D 4 dB Decoder CH 7 D 4 dB Decoder CH 8 D 4 dB Dolby Down Mix L 04 dB Dolby Down Mix R 0 4 dB After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps Audio Master Settings Parameter Default Setting range Description Master Mute J ye eee Master Output Gain Parameter Default Sa eet Description Master 0 0dB oa ei S through 16 Master Mute is not effective on NON PCM outputs NON PCM output signals pass through Au
98. e 189 9 3 2 AES Audio Input SettidgS ocooncnonociconncccnconononcncnnononcnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnninnnnnnos 190 9 3 3 Analog Input Gain Level ooooconnnncoccccccncccconnnononcconononnnnannnnnnnnnnonnnnannnnnnnnnnenninanennnes 192 9 3 4 Source Sele trirta e A cias 193 9 3 5 A dio Output Delay er emra abetos 194 9 3 0 SRG MOd aa a eee cea et 195 9 3 7 Audio Master SettidQS oooooccococonncoconocococccconcononnnonnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnannnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnns 196 9 3 8 Audio Test Sigal eieren raniona aa aa EAE ca eee ondas 197 923 9 5 1 Ch Down MiX apaia i eea a e Matte ad ds 198 9 3 10 Audio Output Polarity ii itasori ginea taadaa unanenn i taataa laietan 200 9 3 11 SDI Audio Output Settings oooooooccccnononnciconococcncoconconanoncnnnnononnnnannonnnnnnconnnnanne eenn 201 9 3 12 AES Audio Output SettidgQS ooocococcconinccncncoaoccncncoconnnnnnnnnnnnononnonannonnnnnnnonnnncnnennnes 204 9 3 13 Analog Audio Output Settings oocococcnnnncococccccccconnonnnancnnnnononnnncnnononnnononnnncane renne 207 9 3 14 Dolby E Digital Decoder oooccinonococccncccccinnnononncnnoconnnnannonncnnnnonnonannnnnnnnnnennnnannnnnces 208 9 3 15 Dolby AUX OUTPUT Selesta ieena ae e oline AEE nae E a da aaka neea eE 211 9 316 Dolby E Encoder a ASE ARAA ER S AA S A 212 9 3 17 Automatic Loudness Adjustment FA 9SALA ooooccccocccococoooccccccononcnnnancnnnonononnnnnnnos 214 SS ES 217 DATUM SAM MOA al
99. e Silence Error Trigger nape Disable Disables auto changeover by the audio trigger Enable Performs a changeover if any audio trigger is activated 160 Video Trigger Video Trigger Disable Click here The Video Trigger setting dialog box for detailed settings opens 2 Changeover Video Trigger Windows Internet Explorer 2 192 168 0 10 SDI Error Trigger OEnable Trigger Set ODisable Duration Olmmediate sec Format Error Trigger Enable Trigger Set Disable Duration Olmmediate O sec CRC Error Trigger OEnable O O Trigger Set ODisable Duration immediate Frame Black Video Trigger Trigger Set ODisable OEnable Threshold 0 0 Duration immediate fa Qio rx 9 Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings SDI Error Trigger Parameter Default Setting range Description Disable Enables or disables auto changeover Trigger Set Disable for SDI signal loss an unsupported Enabl nanie video format or TRS error Sets the duration of SDI signal loss Immediate unsupported video format or TRS Duration Immediate 0 5 to 5 0 error detection in the active picture 0109 0 SEC area required to trigger a changeover Format Error Trigger Parameter Default Setting range Description Disable Enables or disables auto changeover Trigger Set Disable Enabl for SDI input and s
100. file on the computer as a backup You can also move the data to another FA 9500 4 Save File Click Save File Download Do you want to open or save this file e Name Fa9500_eventdata 95e Type HTML Document From 192 168 0 10 Open Save Cancel E 1 While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially Q harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or gt save this file What s the risk Click Save The Save As dialog appears Specify the destination directory and the file name Save As Save in My Documents a E Pownioads EG Amy Music My Recent Emy Pictures Documents Desktop My Documents gs My Computer a File name fa9500_eventdata 3 My Network Save as type 95e Document v Click Save Once the data is saved click Close 239 Once the download is completed the Download complete dialog box appears Download complete yy P Download Complete fa9500_eventdata 95e from 192 168 0 10 Downloaded 2 06MB in 2 sec Download to L Documents and fa9500_eventdata 95e Transfer rate 1 03MB Sec C Close this dialog box when download completes Open Open Folder Click Close IMPORTANT Some versions of Internet Explorer may not save data having a long file name properly In such case save data in Internet Explorer using a short file name then rename the file in Windows Explorer A data file can also be saved under its
101. horizontal position of Horizontal Position 2 Pixel the video displayed on the monitor V Position Variable 1 Adjusts the vertical position of the 0 Line Vertical Position 1 Line video displayed on the monitor The Converter2 Position setting cannot be changed if Converter2 Process Mode is set to BY PASS Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV2 Conversion Table 5 4 2 1 These Position setting ranges vary depending on the Converter2 Process Mode and Sync Format settings in FS Mode 9 4 1 Video System 179 Converter2 Crop Parameter Default ee Description H Left 0 Pixel E Pre Crops the left side of the video H Right 0 Pixel E Pre Crops the right side of the video V Top 0 Line MA Lino Crops the top of the video V Bottom 0 Line vt Hine Crops the bottom of the video The Converter2 Crop setting cannot be changed if Converter2 Process Mode is set to BY PASS Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV2 Conversion Table 5 4 2 1 The Converter2 Crop setting range varies depending on the Converter2 Size Converter2 Position and Sync Format settings in FS Mode 9 4 1 Video System IMPORTANT The cropping setting range resets itself if the video input changes If the set value exceeds the setting range due to an input change the set value will automatically r
102. input and produce noise or mute the audio Note that disableing the automatic correction can prevent such improper processing however the following functions will also be disabled After a signal switchover by router or the recovery of an interrupted SDI signal delay settings will lose their accuracy to within 1 3 msec max Audio signal phases among audio groups will not match Perform either of the following operations when setting Correction to Disable or changing the setting from Disable to Normal a Change the Alignment setting from Disable to Enable under SDI Input Audio in 9 4 2 Audio System b Disconnect and reinput the SDI input signal These operations reset the audio circuit and minimize the delay differences and group audio phase differences Output audio signals will be muted while performing the operations Channel Status Mask Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects audio error sensor mode for each stereo channel pair of SDI and AES input audio signals whose channel status NON PCM flag is 1 SRC BY PASS Treats audio signals as CH1 2 CH15 16 SRC BY PASS SRC BY PASS PCM Mute NON PCM By passes audio signals through SRC and selects audio clock input in the NON PCM signal channel for SDI AUDIO CLOCK PCM Treats audio signals as PCM standard audio signal By passes audio signals through SRC and select REFERENCE for SDI AUDIO CLOCK Mute T
103. is installed Settings in this menu will reset themselves whenever CHANGEOVER in the VIDEO INPUT SET 5 7 1 menu has been set to DISABLE 63 Menu button IN SEL DOWNMIX Parameter Description Displays the status of video related triggers at the time a changeover is performed VIDEO DISABLE Video related triggers are disabled NON TRG No video related trigger is activated TRIGGER Changeover is performed due to a video related trigger s Displays the status of audio related triggers at the time a changeover is performed AUDIO DISABLE Audio related triggers are disabled NON TRG No audio related trigger is activated TRIGGER Changeover is performed due to an audio related trigger s Displays the current active input signal SDI1 The current active input is SDI1 SDI1 SDI2 The input signal is changed over to SDI2 from SDI1 SDI2 The current active input is SDI2 Composite The current input signal is composite video VIDEO IN YPbPr SMPTE The current input signal is component video SD SDI signals are SMPTE level signals YPbPr BETA The current input signal is component video SD SDI signals are BETACAM level signals RGB The current input signal is RGB video Y C The current input signal is Y C video Shown only if the FA 95AIO option is installed The CHGOV DISABLED message is displayed if CHANGEOVER is disabled in the 5 7 1 VIDEO INPUT SET menu If this message is d
104. offset to the input gain for all channels MASTER 0 006 0 1 dB CH1 to 8 of AES inputs 1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range If the range is exceeded the alert will be displayed as 20 0 dB or 20 0 dB 6 2 2 AES HYSTERESIS 3 7 Menu button H A Wi HEY SSO E TOEF ce AES AUDIO Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description at A Synchronizes the AES input signals in CH SEL CH 1 2 CH 5 6 group A or B per group CH 7 8 These settings are effective when using OFF AES audio signals to output multi channel audio signals such as HYS SET OFF TOPE surround sound The channel pair with the smallest channel numbers within a group is used as the reference pair and other channel pairs are synchronized to it If there is no audio signal in the channel pair the next channel pair will be the reference Audio signals with a phase difference relative to the reference within 0 25 of a sample period can be synchronized Setting Examples When setting all channel pairs CH 1 2 to 7 8 to GROUP A CH 1 2 will be the reference Other channel pairs will be synchronized to the word clock of CH1 2 When setting channels CH1 2 to 3 4 to GROUP A and channels CH5 6 to 7 8 to GROUP B CH 1 2 will be the reference pair for GROUP A and CH 5 6 the reference pair for GROUP B IMPORTANT Channel pairs in an audio group must be synchronous and must have the same samp
105. on the audio block diagram when FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is installed opens the Dolby Decoder dialog box AAA MAA ATA Dolby Decoder Input Select Dolby Decoder Gain Dolby Input AUX Input v Master 0 0 dB Bit Stream Dolby Digital 32bit Dolby Decoder Gain Set Program Config Dolby Digital 1 1 ue 0 0 dB Dolby Decoder REF Input Select i 0 0 dB REF Input AUX REF In E 0 0 dB Dolby Down Mix Mode 0 0 dB Surround 0 0 dB OStereo 0 0 dB Monaural 0 0 dB 0 0 dB Down Mix L CH 0 0 dB Down Mix R CH 0 0 dB Internet 208 After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings 4 Dolby Decoder Input Select Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects source audio signals to input to the Dolby decoder AUX Input AUX Input Input signal in optional Dolby Input AUX Input Source 1 2 15 16 Dolby input connector Dolby IN Source 1 2 15 16 SOURCE signals selected in the9 3 4 Source Select menu Dolby Digital 32bit Dolby Digital 16bit 1CH Dolby Digital 16bit 2CH Dolby Digital 16bit 1 2CH Dolby E 24bit Bit Stream i Dolby E 20bit Dolby E 16bit PCM Loss Error Displays signal type and bit width of signal selected under INPUT PCM Normal audio signal Loss No signal Error Unidentifiable Dolby E 5 1 2 Dolby E 5 1 2x1 Dolby E 4 4 Dolby E 4 2x2 Dolby E 4 2 2x1 Dolby E 4 4x1 Dolby E 4x2 Dolby
106. range If the range is exceeded the alert will be displayed as 20 0dB or 20 0dB 6 3 3 ANALOG OUT LEVEL ANALOG OUT Menu button CH SE H1 EEN EL SEs 4dBm CONV1 ANALOG Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an analog audio output CH SEL CH1 CH1 CH4 channel for which to set the signal level from channels CH1 to CH4 10dBm OdBm Sets the signal level for the analog LEVEL SET 4dBm 4dB audio output signal that is selected eae under CH SEL m 123 6 3 4 ANALOG OUT GAIN Menu button ANALOG OUT GAIN CH SEL gt CH 1 CONV1 GAIN SET 0 0dB MASTER 0 0dB ANALOG Setting range a Parameter Default Steps Description Selects an analog audio output channel for CH SEL CH1 CH1 CH4 which to set the input gain from channels CH1 to CH4 20 0 20 0 dB Sets the output gain for the analog audio GANEN 0 0dB 0 1 dB output signal that is selected under CH SEL 20 0 20 0 dB Sets the offset to the output gain for all analog MASTER 0s 0 1 dB audio channels CH1 to CH4 1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range If the range is exceeded the alert will be displayed as 20 0dB or 20 0dB 6 3 5 ANALOG REMAPPING Menu button CONV1 ANALOG Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an analog audio output channel CH SEL ANALOG1 ANALOG1 4 from ANALOG1 through 4 SOURCE1 16 Sele
107. signal 720 59p Displays LOSS if there is no input signal 720 50p pees UNKNOWN if there is an unsupported input signal Nerea Displays if the FA 95AIO option is installed and VIDEO INPUT SET section 5 7 1 is set to YPbPr 1080 59p SMPTE YPbPr BETACAM RGB or Y C 1080 50p BY PASS UNKNOWN Displays the video format of the SDI1 input signal Displays LOSS if there is no input signal Displays UNKNOWN if there is an unsupported input signal SDI2 Displays the video format of the COMPOSITE input signal Displays LOSS if there is no input signal COMPOSITE BY PASS LOSS 525 60 625 50 1080 59i 1080 50i Displays the video format of the genlock input signal 720 59p Displays LOSS if there is no input signal 720 50p Displays UNKNOWN if there is an unsupported input 1080 23PsF signal 1080 24PsF PAL M UNKNOWN NOT USED 1 Shown when Mode in the 5 12 PAL M MODE SET is set to ENABLE and an input signal in GENLOCK IN connector is 525 60 or PAL M signal 2 Shown when SHYNCRO in the 5 10 1 FS MODE SET is set to INPUT REFERENCE 98 5 13 3 COMPONENT INPUT This menu is accessible only if the FA 95AIO option is installed Menu button OM FORMAT 525 60 MODE YPbPr SMPTE STATUS OTHER Parameter Display Description LOSS 525 60 625 50 1080 59i Displays the video format of the FA 95AIO input 1080 50 sign
108. signals can be verified in CONV2 ANC OUT Sec 5 18 and CONV2 ANC OUT1 Sec 5 19 menus in the same manner 289 20 6 AFD Code Abbreviations SMPTE S2016 3 AFD aspect ratio table In a 4 3 coded frame In a 16 9 coded frame AFD Code UNDEFINED Undefined UNDEFINED Undefined 0000 RESERVED Reserved RESERVED Reserved 0001 4 3 L 16 9 T Letterbox 16 9 image at 16 9 F 16 9 Full frame 16 9 image the 0010 top of the coded frame same as the coded frame 4 3 L14 9 T Letterbox 14 9 image at 16 9 P 14 9 Pillarbox 14 9 image 0011 top of the coded frame horizontally centered in the coded frame 4 3 L gt 16 9 Letterbox image with an 16 9 L gt 16 9 Letterbox image with an 0100 aspect ratio greater than aspect ratio greater than 16 9 vertically centered in 16 9 vertically centered in the coded frame the coded frame RESERVED Reserved RESERVED Reserved 0101 RESERVED Reserved RESERVED Reserved 0110 RESERVED Reserved RESERVED Reserved 0111 4 3 F 4 3 Full frame 4 3 image the 16 9 F 16 9 Full frame 16 9 image the 1000 same as the coded frame same as the coded frame 4 3 F 4 3 Full frame 4 3 image the 16 9 P 4 3 Pillarbox 4 3 image 1001 same as the coded frame horizontally centered in the coded frame 4 3L16 9PRTD Letterbox 16 9 image 16 9 F PRTD Full frame 16 9 image with 1010 vertically centered in the all image areas protected coded frame with all image areas protected 4 3 L 14 9 Letterbox 14
109. systems Whatever your needs talk to your FOR A representative We will do our best to be of continuing service to you 1 2 Features The FA 9500 is a multipurpose signal processor loaded with all the functions you need for video production 3G SDI HD SD SDI and analog composite I O is supported in addition to its functionality as a frame synchronizer The unit provides dual up down cross aspect converters color corrector and automatic video optimizer AVO as standard features allowing for the conversion of many types of video and audio signals Numerous additional optional features include analog component l O frame rate converter logo generator Dolby E encoder and Dolby E decoder By combining these varied options a single unit can provide optimal functionality for all your video production scene requirements including line relay reporting production editing and delivery If you have the FA 9500 you will never need another piece of peripheral video equipment Standard Features 3G SDI HD SDI SD SDI Analog Composite I O Digital Analog Audio I O Main Converter Up Down Cross Aspect conversion Second Converter Up Down Cross Aspect conversion Color Corrector Auto Video Optimizer AVO Powerful Frame Synchronizer Performance Logo Generator Other Features Video delay 2D 3D comb filter for Y C separator composite Web browser based monitoring and control possible SNMP monitoring and partial control function VVVVVVVV
110. table The set value will be reset to its relevant default value whenever the Synchro Mode setting is changed 217 SYNCHRO IN SEL Default FRAME 0 SDI1 2 Composite 525 60 LINE Composite 625 50 Component Y C Component others SDI1 2 Composite 525 60 AVDL Composite 625 50 Component Y C Component others SDI1 2 Composite 525 60 INPUT Composite 625 50 Component Y C Component others A Oo mM Oj B BR oO ala BR Ajoj a HD Phase Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description 1375 1375 clk 1080 H Phase 0 clk 1 clk i Adjusts the horizontal and vertical 7 phases of the system referring to 0 Line genlock signal This setting is 1080 V Phase Frame Input 563 563 Lines applied to 1080 format output 1 Line 1 Lines signals Line AVDL 2063 2063 clk 720 H Phase 0 clk Y i ak Adjusts the horizontal and vertical aa phases of the system referring to 0 Line genlock signal This setting is 720 V Phase Frame Input 375 375 Lines applied to 720 format output 1 Line 1 Lines signals Line AVDL 1 These settings cannot be made if there is no reference signal input 2 The default value varies depending on the Synchro Mode setting as shown in the below table The set value will be reset to its relevant default value whenever the Synchro Mode setting is changed
111. the maximum duration the elapsed time display restarts from 0 00 00 137 6 9 3 2 LOUDNESS CONTROL ENABLE e Channel 1 display Menu button VIDEO OP AUDIO OP Parameter Default Setting range Description Allows you to turn On or Off the Loudness Level Adjustment feature Set to Off to perform only loudness OFF measurement CONTROL OFF ON The setting can be changed only when loudness is not being measured While measuring the loudness level OFF LOCK or ON LOCK is displayed and the setting cannot be changed Allows you to select the loudness level NA adjustment speed SLOW to achieve the target level for long term loudness level RESPONSE S NORMAL 4 3 2 1 adjustment allowing gradual leveling NORMAL The larger the value the faster the response 1 2 3 4 allowing greater adjustment NA Disables the SLOW adjustment function Allows you to select the loudness level adjustment speed FAST to achieve the NA target level for instantaneous loudness level 4 3 2 1 adjustment allowing sudden leveling leveling RESPONSE F NORMAL NORMAL down only 1 2 3 4 The larger the value the faster the response allowing greater adjustment NA Disables the FAST adjustment function IMPORTANT Set RESPONSE according to the input signal Larger values under both RESPONSE settings are recommended for materials with dynamic loudness level ranges Small
112. to 8 fa95Conv1AntiAliasV 44 INTEGER ogogo O ogogo O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 2 7 Converter 2 Converter 2 ICONV2 U D MODE Convert Mode Bypass SD 10801 720p 1080PsF 1080p 3G fa95Conv2Mode INTEGER O O AspectSD OHADAIRON OO NN O a Nas gt O OONDUIRWNH AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 AFD 16 9 AFD 16 9 Letterbox 16 9 top Letterbox 14 9 top Letterbox gt 16 9 4 3 Fullframe 4 3 Letterbox 16 9 Letterbox 14 9 Fullframe 4 3 Alt 14 9 Letterbox 16 9 Alt 14 9 Letterbox 16 9 Alt 4 3 Letterbox gt 16 9 16 9 Fullframe 16 9 Pillarbox 4 3 Fullframe 16 9 Protected Pillarbox 14 9 Pillarbox 4 3 Alt 14 9 Fullframe 16 9 Alt 14 9 Fullframe 16 9 alt 4 3 fa95Conv2AspectSD INTEGER AspectHD OONDAKRWN O AFD AFD ALT Letterbox gt 16 9 Fullframe 16 9 Pillarbox 4 3 Fullframe 16 9 Protected Pillarbox 14 9 Pillarbox 4 3 Alt 4 9 Fullframe 16 9 Alt 14 9 Fullframe 16 9 alt 4 3 a95Conv2AspectHD INTEGER ICONV2 IMPROVE Enhance O to 8 a95Conv2Enhance 42 INTEGER Anti Alias H 8 to 0 to 8 a95Conv2AntiAliasH INTEGER ggg ggg Anti Alias V 8 to 0 to 8 a95Conv2AntiAliasV 44 INTEGER OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 2 8 AVO AVO AVO SETTING Operation Mode O 1 2 Off Auto Hold a95AvoMod
113. to support FA 95ALA Supported FA 95D D FA 95DE E versions FPGA1 1 00 FPGA2 2 10 1 01 or lower is inoperative in this unit FPGA1 3 20 or higher FA 10DCCRU Modified FA 10DCCRU to add FA 9520 support FPGA2 5 20 or higher FPGA3 1 02 or higher SOFT 8 03 or higher FA 10DCCRU SOFT Ver 1 00 FPGA1 2 Ver 1 00 or higher compatible 1 Version information can be seen as described in section 7 6 UNIT Ver Precautions Important Safety Warnings Power A Caution Operate unit only on the specified supply voltage Disconnect power cord by connector only Do not pull on cable portion Qa Stop Do not place or drop heavy or sharp edged objects on power cord A damaged cord can cause fire or electrical shock hazards Regularly check power cord for excessive wear or damage to avoid possible fire electrical hazards Grounding Caution Ensure unit is properly grounded at all times to prevent electrical shock hazard Do not ground the unit to gas lines units or fixtures of an explosive or dangerous nature T D N D o Caution Ensure power cord is firmly plugged into AC outlet Operation gt Hazard Do not operate unit in hazardous or potentially explosive atmospheres Doing so could result in fire explosion or other dangerous results gt Hazard Do not allow liquids metal pieces or other foreign materials t
114. to their default values Be particularly careful in the following cases When the video format is changed to SDTV after the sample area has been set When the sample area settings are changed by loading an event 170 9 2 3 Frame Delay Clicking block 3 in the Video block diagram opens the Frame Delay setting dialog box A http 192 168 0 10 Frame Delay Microsoft Internet Explorer DER Frame Delay 0 Frame Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps Parameter Default Setting range Description Frame Delay 0 0 8Frame Sets the amount of frame delay Selecting Odd Even for Forced Field Synchro Mode to Frame Sync under FS Mode in 9 4 1 Video System while 9 2 1 Input Select is set to Composite and Frame Delay to 0 frame Frame Delay will always reset to 1 frame Set Frame Delay beween 1 and 8 frames Also Frame Delay cannot be set if Synchro Mode is set to Line Sync or AVDL under FS Mode in section 9 4 1 Video System 171 9 2 4 Proc Amp Clicking block 4 on the video block diagram opens the Proc Amp setting diagram A http 192 168 0 10 Proc Amp Microsoft Internet Explorer DOS Video Level 100 0 j BU
115. ts cust sucdebeahedensadapant oa len cctzentia hen terres 123 6 3 3 ANALOG OUT LEVEL urai eea cece eaaa ae ae raa ae Aa E EAA a 123 6 3 4 ANALOG OUT GAIN a a e aanre a aaa ia a n eA iaa aa E aaa Na 124 6 3 5 ANALOG REMAPPING cooococccccccccconoononcnnnncononnnnnonnnnnnnonnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnanenninnnnss 124 6 3 6 ANALOG MONO SUM oooocccccocccocononnnonnnconononnnnncnnnnnnnonnnnannnnnnnnnnennnnannnnnnncnnennaninneneces 125 6 37 ANALOG SYSTEM tl aitaan salarai in 125 6 4 MASTER OUT GAIN Settings MASTER 0oocococcccccoccconoononcnncnccnnnnnnnonnnnnnnocnnnannnnnnnnocinens 126 6 5 AUDIO MAPPING MAPPING cooocooooccccccccccocononnconcncncononnnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnninnnnnnncnnnnno 127 6 521 SOURCE SRE SE irap eide letrada dada cas AES 127 6 6 AUDIO DELAY SettidgS oocooncnonocccccnnncccinnnanonccnnnncnnnnannnnncnnnncnnonannnnncnnnncncinannnnnenonin 128 6 6 1 AUDIO DELAY A a aba 128 6 7 DOWN MISSE Tucson ii a tia 129 6 7 1 DOWN MIX ASSIGN oooooocccccccccccconnononcnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnennanannnnnrnnncenennannnnces 131 6 8 AUDIO MODE SET MODE cccocccoconoocccnnnononnconnnnnonnncnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnninnnnnnnncnnino 131 6 9 AUDIO OPTION AUDIO OP cocococoococcccnccccnocononnconnncnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnonnnnnnnnnnnncnninnnnnnncnnnnno 132 6 9 1 Dolby Decoder Option FA 95D D 0oooococcccccoconoocccnococcnnnnnonnnnnononnonannonnnnnnncnnaninnnnnnos 132 6 9 1 1 Dolby AUX QUT PUT oia ai
116. up to 8 ancillary data can be displayed 5 16 CONV1 ANC OUT Menu button CEA608 PRESENT Lx WSS ABSENT STATUS VI PRESENT L 14 277 OTHER Displays the status of CEA608 WSS and VI ancillary data inserted into luminance signal of CONV 1 output The line number in which the ancillary data is in is displayed Displays PRESENT if ancillary data is inserted Displays ABSENT if no anceillary data is inserted If ANC MODE is set to H V ANC the state of the V ANC setting PASS or BLANK will be displayed In such case no line number will be displayed See section 5 10 9 CONV1 ANC SET for details on ANC MODE and V ANC setting 5 16 1 CONV1 S2016 OUT Displays whether the S2016 3 ancillary data is inserted into CONV 1 output video signal When no S2016 3 is in the CONV1 output video signal 577 Menu button 2016 3 ABSENT STATUS OTHER If ANC MODE in 5 10 9 CONV1 ANC SET is set to H V ANC the state of the V ANC setting PASS or BLANK is displayed When S2016 3 is in the CONV1 output video signal CONV1 2016 OUT 016 3 P D 02 AR 3 L 16 9 10000000 00000000 AFD Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format AR Aspect Ratio is displayed in binary format 0 4 3 1 16 9 The detected AFD type is shown on the third row D Detected Data1 8 are displayed in hexadecimal format ee See section 20 6 AFD Code Abbreviations for details on AFD types 109 5 16 2 CONV1
117. will be displayed as x FREEZE To enable FREEZE for INPUT FUNCTION be sure to set SYNCHRO to FRAME 149 2 When the FA 95CO is installed and Changeover is enabled the value will be displayed with an asterisk as SDI1 SDI2 or COMPOSITE indicating the input selection cannot be changed See section 5 7 1 VIDEO INPUT SET for details 3 Effective only if FA 95AIO option is installed 4 Effectove only if FA 95ALA option is installed NOTE See section 14 REMOTE for details on pulse and level durations OUTPUT FUNCTION Function Description NONE No function FREEZE FREEZE OFF High Open Collector VIDEO IN o High Open Collector AUDIO IN No creer cent High Open Collector REF IN Nocona pesca High Open Collector FAN ALARM Y FAN normal High Open Collector 2 Power 1 failure Low DC POWER 1 Power 1 normal High Open Collector 2 Power 2 failure Low DC POWER 2 Power 2 normal High Open Collector SD SDI1 input signal is selected Low SDI1 input signal is not selected High Open Collector SDI2 SDI2 input signal is selected Low SDI2 input signal is not selected High Open Collector COMPOSITE input signal is selected Low COMPOSITE COMPOSITE input signal is not selected High Open Collector YPbPr SMPTE input signal is selected Low YPbPr SMPTE input signal is not selected High Open Collector YPbPr BETACAM input signal is selected Low YPbPr BET
118. 0 0 dB sae gt ag dB embedded audio channel that is i selected under CH SEL Sets the offset to the input gain for MASTER o oaB 720 0 e dB all channels CH1 to CH16 of 0 1 dB SDl embedded audio 1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range If the range is exceeded the alert will be displayed as 20 0 dB or 20 0 dB 114 6 1 2 SDI REMAPPING Menu button SDI REMAPPING CH SEL CH PROCESS ASSIGN SOURCE1 SOURCE SDI 1 SDLAUDIO Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an embedded audio channel CH SEL CH1 CH1 CH16 of an SDI output signal from CH1 through 16 SOURCE 1 16 Selects an audio signal to assign to 500Hz the channel selected under CH SEL 1KHz SILENCE SOURCE 1 16 Assigned SOURCE DOWNMIX L 2 channel signals DOWNMIX R 2 500Hz 1KHz Test signal Dolby DEC 1 8 3 SILENCE Mute signal na 9 g DOWNMIX LIR Signal generated ete a ra by downmixing SOURCE channel oloy DIVER signals ASSIGN Each SOURCE Dolby ENC 1 25 7 Dolby DEC 1 8 Dolby decoded PCM signals Dolby DM L R Signal generated by L downmixing Dolby decoded PCM R signal LOUD1 8 C Dolby ENC 1 2 Encoded Dolby E LOUD2 8 LFE data of selected SOURCE channel Ls signals R LOUD1 2 L R C LFE Ls Rs Loudness processed signal of the selected SOURCE channel SDI1 16 Displays the input signal in the SOURCE E AES1 8 SOURCE selected under AS
119. 0i 1080 59i 1080 50i 1080 24PsF 1080 23 98PsF 1080 59p 1080 50p 720 59 94p 720 50p Unknown fa95DolbyRefInputChangedTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 6 6 FA 95AIO TRAP FA 95AIO IN Same as SDI1 IN fa95AioInputFormatChangedTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change FA 95AIO OUT Same as SDI OUT1 2 fa95AioOutputFormatChangedTrap NOTIFICATION TYPE Change 278 19 FA 9500 Ancillary Data Packet Name List pany DID SDID TN FA 9500 Indication hexadecimal Description S353MMPEG V 08 08 MPEG recoding data VANC space Picture rate information S353M MPEG H 08 0C MPEG recoding data HANC space Other part of recording data set S305M SD SDTI 40 01 ARIB STD B17 Serial Data Transport Interface for Television S305M HD SDTI 40 02 ITU R BT 1557 SMPTE 348M for HD SDTI S427 Lk Enc 1 40 04 SMPTE 427 Link Encryption Message 1 S427 Lk Enc 2 40 05 SMPTE 427 Link Encryption Message 2 S427 Lk Meta 40 06 SMPTE 427 Link Encryption Metadata S352M VPID 41 01 BTA S 004C Video Payload Identification for Digital Interfaces S2016 3 AFD Bar 41 05 SMPTE 2016 3 AFD and Bar Data S2016 4 PanScan 41 06 SMPTE 2016 3 Pan Scan Data RP2010 SCTE 104 41 07 SMPTE 2010 ANSI SCTE 104 messages S2031 SCTE VBI 41 08 SMPTE 2010 DVB SCTE VBI data ITU R BT 1685 43 01 ITU
120. 1 301 3 1 2 SDI Embedded audio remapping Assign Signal CH1 a95AudioSdiOutAssignCh1 1 NTEGER Assign Signal CH2 a95AudioSdiOutAssignCh2 2 NTEGER O Assign Signal CH3 a95AudioSdiOutAssignCh3 3 NTEGER O O Assign Signal CH4 0 15 Source Ch1 16 a95AudioSdiOutAssignCh4 4 INTEGER O O Assign Signal CH5 19 S00Hz a95AudioSdiOutAssignCh5 5 INTEGER O 210 Assign Signal CH6 18 Silence a95AudioSdiOutAssignCh6 6 NTEGER O O Assign Signal CH7 19 Downmix L aQ5AudioSdiOutAssignCh7 7 NTEGER O SDI REMAPPING Assign Signal CH8 0 Downmix R a95AudioSdiOutAssignCh8 8 NTEGER O Assign Signal CH9 _ 24 28 Dolby Dec 1 8 a95AudioSdiOutAssignCh9 9 NTEGER O Assign Signal CH10_ 29 Dolby Dec Donmix L a95AudioSdiOutAssignCh10 10 INTEGER O Assign Signal_CH11_ 30 Dolby Dec Donmix R a95AudioSdiOutAssignCh11 11 NTEGER O Assign Signal CH12 31 Dolby E Enc 1 a95AudioSdiOutAssignCh12 12 INTEGER O Assign Signal CH13_ 32 Dolby E Enc 2 a95AudioSdiOutAssignCh13 13 INTEGER O Assign Signal CH14 a95AudioSdiOutAssignCh14 14 INTEGER O Assign Signal CH15 a95AudioSdiOutAssignCh15 15 INTEGER O O Assign Signal CH16 a95AudioSdiOutAssignCh16 16_ INTEGER O O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 3 2 3 AES audio remapping Assign Signal CH1 0 15 Source Ch1 16 a95AudioAesOutAssignCh 1 NTEGER O O Assign Signal CH2 J16 500Hz a95AudioAesOutAssignCh2 2 NTEGER O O Assign Signal CH3 17 1kHz aQ5AudioAesOutAssignCh3 3 NTEGER O O Assign Signal CH4 18 Silence a95AudioAesOutAssignCh4 4 INTEG
121. 159 9 2 1 1 About Changeover Web oononococicncccccnnoooccncncoconcononnoncnnononnnncnnnnnnnnnncnnaninnnnnnes 163 9 2 1 2 Changeover and Loss Operation Web oooooccccnconncicooococccccconcnnnnnncncnnonincnnnnnss 164 9 2 1 3 Changeover and Input Switchover Using a Router Web ceceeee 164 12 9 2 1 4 How to Reset to SDI 1 Main Input Web ooonoconccocononcccccncononccconcnccncanannnccnns 164 9 2 2 Auto Video Optimizer AVO ooooooncocococonccccncnonanncnnonononcnnnnnnnnnnnononnonannnnnnnnncennnnannnnnces 165 9 2 2 1 About Scene Cut Detection and Frame Delay Settings oooooococcnnnnininicccccccns 167 9 2 2 2 User 1 5 LEVEL SET Ai constatan ostra sein 168 LL MUSA it ES 170 9 2 9 Frame DAY A Ma AG ie 171 9 2 4 POC AMP isaac 172 9 2 5 BY PASS 7 Operate narace lit ei 172 9 2 6 Convert MA cashes larisa tit 173 9 2 7 Converter2 Up DOWN CTOSS coccoconoccocccccccconnnononccnnnnonnnnannnnnnnnnnonnonannnnnnnnnnennanannnnnes 177 9 2 8 Color COmeCtOn x veacecics caus edine aiea vada s Matyas a tanec der deed aed eee a eee 181 9 2 9 Video Test Signal cccccccceeeseseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeesgenenaneeseeeseeeeneaaeeeeeeeeeeeseaeas 183 9 2 10 YPDPr RGB CliPe contain 184 922 11 Output Sally AA A 185 9 2 1 2 Composite Clio di 187 9 3 AUDIO Setting Stai ii A A ie a ee aa a 188 9 3 1 SDI Input Gain o oo cece cece cece p paad eee cere iaiki Seata Nenana eaaa kanari aaaea E EEEE
122. 16bit AES and SDI AUDIO outputs 6 10 3 AUDIO ERR SENSE AUDIO ERR SENSE SDI SRC SRC 2 YP YP o W e 183 ASS ASS Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description CH SEL SDI 1 2 SDI 1 2 SDI 15 16 AES 1 2 AES 7 8 Selects a stereo channel pair for which to enable Audio Error SENSE CH STATUS SRC BYPASS SRC BYPASS PCM MUTE Selects audio error sensor mode for each stereo channel pair of SDI and AES input audio signals whose NON PCM channel status flag is 1 SRC BYPASS Treats audio signals as NON PCM By passes audio signals through SRC and selects audio clock input in the NON PCM signal channel for SDI AUDIO CLOCK PCM Treats audio signals as PCM standard audio signal By passes audio signals through SRC 4 and selects REFERENCE for SDI AUDIO CLOCK MUTE Treats audio signals as mute signals VALIDITY SRC BYPASS SRC BYPASS PCM MUTE Selects audio error sensor mode for each stereo channel pair of SDI and AES input audio signals whose channel status Validity Bit flag is 1 SRC BYPASS Treats audio signals as NON PCM By passes audio signals through SRC 7 and selects audio clock input in the NON PCM signal channel for SDI AUDIO CLOCK PCM Treats audio signals as PCM standard audio signal By passes audio signals through SRC and selects REFERENCE for SDI AUDIO
123. 19 WSS Can be set to Unable to set S2016 3 CC same line to same line Can be set to Unable to set 525 60 S2016 3 AFD E d sameline Unable to set Unable to set RP186 VI to same line to same line Unable to set Unable to set S2016 3 AFD to same line to same line Unable to set Can be set to 625 50 RP186 VI sine same line Unable to set Can be set to BT1119 WSS to same line same line If the same line is set for the ancillary data types described as Unable to set to same line combination and both ancillary data types are set to be embedded in the 5 10 16 ANC DATA EMBED menu the error message Identical ANC line location settings will appear If the message is displayed ancillary data will not be properly embedded The line settings must be properly set Usually the default value will properly embed the ancillary data Keep this in mind when changing the value to configure a system with other devices 230 ANC Loss Mode Settings Parameter Default Setting range Description ANC 32016 3 AFD E td Selects an ancillary data type to insert BT1119 WSS into the SDI signal Selects a video format compatible with Format SD SD the ancillary data selected under ANC HD 1 Only compatible Video formats will be displayed If Format is set to SD Remove Hold 4 3 L 16 9 T 4 3 L14 9 T 4 3 L gt 16 9 2 4 3 F 4 3 4 3 L16 9PRTD 7 4 3 L 14 9 2
124. 2 168 0 10 Analog Audio Output Microsoft Internet Explorer DOS Analog Audio Output Gain Analog Audio Output Level Master 0 0 dB j UNITY CH4 4 dBm Analog Audio Output Gain Set CH2 4 dBm coto il BN CH 3 4 dBm ihe a ii H An CH 4 e dBm CH 3 0 0 dB H E un bau cns ooa HA Bony Analog Audio Remapping Analog Audio Mono Sum Source CH1 SDI CH1 CH1 2 Disable Enable Source CH2 SDI CH2 CH 3 4 Disable Enable Source CH3 SDI CH3 Source CH4 SDI CH4 Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps Analog Audio Output Gain Parameter Default ES Description Master A a Analog Audio Output Gain Set Settings Parameter Default o Description CH 1 CH 4 ie g e ee Analog Audio Output Level Parameter Default ae Description 10dBm CHICHA O ee rent 8dBm 207 Analog Audio Remapping Parameter Default Setting range Description Source CH 1 16 Selects source audio signals to 500Hz assign to analog audio output 1kHz channels Silence Source CH 1 16 Signals assigned D rn as to SOURCE channels own Mix L h D Mix R 2 500Hz 1kHz Test signal own s Silen
125. 20 720 59p 21 720 50p 29 Unkown 30 BY PASS ISDI2 IN Ditto fa95InSDI2ChangeTrap 2 NOTIFICATION Change 0 LOSS 1 525 60 Composite IN Se GASD fa95lnCompositeChangeTrap 3 MOTRA TSN Change 30 BY PASS 00 Loss 01 525 60i 02 625 50i 04 1080 59i 05 1080 50i 09 1080 24PsF Ref Status 10 1080 23 98PsF fa95InRefChangeTrap 11 dla Change 12 1080 59p 13 1080 50p 20 720 59 94p 21 720 50p 29 Unknown 34 not Used 00 Loss 01 525 60i 02 625 50i 04 1080 59i 05 1080 50i SDI OUT 1 2 pS OS Sands fa950utSDI1 2ChangeTrap 21 ee ee Change 12 1080 59p 13 1080 50p 20 720 59p 21 720 50p 27 Unkown SDI OUT 3 4 Ditto a950utSDI3 4ChangeTrap 122 NOTIFICAT ON Change O LOSS E Composite OUT 1 E a950utCompositeChangeTrap 23 POTECA en Change 30 BY PASS OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 6 3 AUDIO TRAP SOURCE CH1 a95AudioSourceCh1StatusChangeTrap 1 NOTIFICAT ON Change SOURCE CH2 a95AudioSourceCh2StatusChangeTrap 2 NOMEIA ON Change 0 Loss SOURCE CH3 1EM te a95AudioSourceCh3StatusChangeTrap 3 vom CATION Change SOURCE CH4 yet a95AudioSourceCh4StatusChangeTrap 4 ee ON Change 5 PCM Other E SOURCE CH5 6 Silence a95AudioSourceCh5StatusChangeTrap 5 Epul ICATION Change 7 Silence 48kHz NOTIFICATION SOURCE CH6 E Sone a a95AudioSourceCh6StatusChangeTrap 6 Type Change 10 Silence Other Fl SOURCE CH7 11 Non PCM a95AudioSourceCh7StatusChangeTrap 7 NOTI ICATI N Change 12 PCM Async NOTIFICATION 13 Silence Async i A SOURCE CH8 44 Non PCM Async
126. 3 4 connectors are set to be output connectors INPUT AES5 6 and 7 8 connectors are set to be input INPUT connectors OUTPUT OUTPUT AES5 6 and 7 8 connectors are set to be output connectors All connectors are set as input connectors and this menu is not displayed if the FA 95DACBL option is installed AES1 4 INPUT AESS 8 INPUT 122 6 3 ANALOG AUDIO Settings ANALOG 6 3 1 ANALOG IN LEVEL Menu button CH SEL CHa LEVEL SET 4dBm CONV1 ANALOG Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an analog audio input CH SEL CH1 CH1 CH4 channel for which to set the signal level from channels CH1 to CH4 10dBm OdBm Sets the signal level for the analog LEVEL SET 4dBm 4dB audio input signal that is selected m under CH SEL 8dBm 6 3 2 ANALOG IN GAIN ANALOG IN GAIN CH SEL CHI Menu button GAIN SET 0 0dB MASTER 0 0d8 CO A ANALOG Parameter Default stents eu Description Steps CH SEL Selects an analog audio input CH1 CH1 CH4 channel for which to set the input gain from channels CH1 to CH4 Sets the input gain for the analog GAIN SET 0 0dB a gt aay dB audio input signal that is selected f under CH SEL Sets the offset to the input gain for MASTER 0 0dB 20 0 20 0dB 2 analog audio channels CH1 to 0 1 dB CH4 1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting
127. 3 AFD RP186 VI BT1119 WSS Can be set to Unable to set 2016 3 CC same line to same line Can be set to Unable to set 525 60 S2016 3 AFD same line to same line Unable to set Unable to set RP 186 VI to same line to same line Unable to set Unable to set 2016 3 AFD to same line to same line Unable to set Can be set to 625 50 RP186 VI to same line same line Unable to set Can be set to BT1119 WSS to same line same line If the same line is set for the ancillary data combination described as Unable to set to same line and both ancillary data types are set to be embedded in the ANC DATA EMBED menu see Sec 5 10 16 an asterisk UR 93 will appear next to the selected data type as an error message If the sign is displayed ancillary data will not be properly embedded The line settings must be properly set Usually the default value will properly embed the ancillary data Keep this in mind when changing the value to configure a system with other devices rror message r messa e NC EMBED LINE 109 NC RP186 VI ORMAT 525 60 I Esc D 1 1 2 L1 LELD2 ENS M L L n gt bg m mamn 5 10 18 ANC LOSS SET Allows you to select an operation mode when input AFD data is lost or unsupported AFD code is input Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description S2016 3 2016 3 AFD Selects an ancillary data type to insert
128. 3 L16 9PRTD setting made under ANC LOSS SET Sec 4 3 L 14 9 5 10 18 AFD 4 3 4 3 F ALT14 9 To output video signals in 4 3 select either ratio 4 3 L ALT14 9 with 4 3 To output in 16 9 select either ratio 4 3 LALT 4 3 1 with 16 9 Other options will output video signals 16 9 L gt 16 9 in the specified aspect ratio See section 20 16 9 F 16 9 E About AFD for details i Options 4 3 L 16 9 T to 16 9 F ALT 4 3 other ASPECT 16 9 P 4 3 A than the above four require the input signal 16 9 FPRTD aspect ratio to be specified in SD INPUT 16 9 P 14 9 ASPECT Sec 5 7 2 if the input signal is an SD 16 9P ALT 14 9 signal 16 9F ALT14 9 16 9 F ALT4 3 AFD Selectable aspect ratios when CONV1 is set to 16 9 L gt 16 9 AFD and AFD ALT automatically select an aspect i ratio according to the AFD data in the input signal 16 9 F 16 9 If no AFD data is found in the input signal the 16 9 P 4 3 aspect ratio will be determined according to the 16 9 F PRTD setting made under ANC LOSS SET Sec Oe gt orton N tput i ptions other than the above two are output in CORA TRS the specific aspect ratio See section 20 About 16 9F ALT14 9 AFD for details on conversions according to AFD 16 9F ALT4 3 data AFD The format of the input signal to CONV2 and the gt format the signal will be converted to in CONV2 are displayed on the 4 row 1 BT1119 WSS will be embedded according to the
129. 4 Displays the status of BT1119 2 WSS Wide Screen Signalling AFD Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format The detected AFD type is shown on the third row BIT13 0 Detected Bits 13 O are displayed in hexadecimal format Es See section 20 6 AFD Code Abbreviations for details on AFD types 112 5 19 CONV2 ANC OUT1 Menu button STATUS OTHER L indicates the line number into which ancillary data is inserted Displays the ancillary data packet name and line number for the inserted ancillary data in the CONV 2 output signal The status of up to 4 ancillary data can be displayed See section 19 FA 9500 Ancillary Data Packet Name List for details on ancillary data names 334 1CDP 708 L 12 113 6 AUDIO Settings Make the menu buttons light up orange using the VIDEO AUDIO button Menu button Pressing the button while the buttons are lit green turns the lights orange Afterwards the audio menus displayed on the lower row on each menu button VIDEO can be selected AUDIO 6 1 SDI AUDIO Settings SDI AUDIO Allows you to set the SDI IN1 2 SDI OUT1 2 and SDI OUT3 4 embedded audio signals 6 1 1 SDI AUDIO GAIN SD AUDI 0 GAIN Menu button PROCESS SDI AUDIO Setting range T Parameter Default Steps Description Selects a channel for which to CH SEL CH1 CH1 CH16 adjust the gain Sets the input gain for the SDI GAIN SET
130. 4 3 F ALT14 9 MODE can be set for respective ANC po Were and FORMAT selections 16 9 L gt 16 9 Remove Does not embed the 16 9 F FRM 2 ancillary data to either CONV1 or 2 16 9P 4 3 Hold Retains the last ancillary data 16 9 FPRTD aspect ratio and outputs video signal Made pemove 16 9 P 14 9 in the aspect ratio 16 9P ALT14 9 Other values operate according to the 16 9F ALT14 9 selected AFD as an input AFD 16 9 F ALT4 3 BT1119 WSS selected under ANC If Format is set to HD can only select AFD codes indicated Remove by Hold 16 9 L gt 16 9 16 9F 16 9 16 9 P 4 3 16 9 F PRTD 16 9 P 14 9 16 9 P ALT14 9 16 9 F ALT14 9 16 9 F ALT4 3 1 HD is selectable only when ANC is set to S2016 3 WSS AFD Error Parameter Default Setting range Description Remove B Does not embed BT1119 WSS to emove CONV1 and or 2 Mode Remove F 4 3 F 4 3 Embeds BT1119 WSS F 4 3 code 8 to CONV1 and or 2 231 9 5 GPI FA 9500 Logout video Audio system ce umi status Network In Out Assign Logo ID In Out Assign Logo ID In Out Assign Logo ID 5 In Out Assign Logo ID If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Input None Input None Input O Input None GPI1 GPI 2 GPI3 CONV1 Load 1 GPI 4 Logout is not shown Click Refresh to update the settings Parameter Default O Outp
131. 5 to 19 282 1 FIELD1 12 275 1080i LINE 9 to 20 LINE 9 NS 720p LINE 9 to 25 LINE 9 525 60 FIELD1 12 275 to 19 282 Y FIELD1 12 275 625 50 FIELD1 8 321 to 22 335 FIELD1 8 321 ANC S2016 3 AFD 1080i PsF LINE 9 to 20 LINE 9 720p LINE 9 to 25 LINE 9 1080p 3G LINE 9 to 41 LINE 9 525 60 FIELD1 12 to 19 FIELD1 14 ANC RP186 VI FIELD2 275 to 282 FIELD2 277 FIELD1 8 to 22 FIELD1 11 erat FIELD2 321 to 335 FIELD2 324 ANC BT1119 WSS 625 50 FIELD1 8 to 23 FIELD1 23 1 Field2 line number displayed in parentheses If CEA608 or 8334 1 CC closed caption data is detected in the 525 60 input signal and the CONV1 and or CONV2 output format s is are 1080 59i and or 720 59p the detected closed caption data will not be converted to CEA708 The CEA708 closed caption data insertion will be automatically terminated Meanwhile if CEA708 closed caption data is detected in the 1080 59i or 720 59p input signal it will be converted to S334 1 CC or CEA608 CC for 525 60 output signals to output from CONV 1 and or CONV 2 IMPORTANT Closed caption data output will stop when data input is lost S2016 3 AFD RP186 VI and BT1119 WSS ancillary data will be output according to the ANC LOSS SET settings when their data input is lost See section 5 10 18 ANC LOSS SET for details Ancillary data combinations that cannot be simultaneously embedded to the same line SO Ancillary data type S334 1 CC 2016
132. 52 378 5320 FOR A Corporation of Canada 346A Queen Street West Toronto Ontario M5V 2A2 Canada Phone 1 416 977 0343 Fax 1 416 977 0657 FOR A Latin America amp the Caribbean 5200 Blue Lagoon Drive Suite 760 Miami FL 33126 USA Phone 1 305 931 1700 Fax 1 305 264 7890 FOR A UK Limited UNIT C71 Barwell Business Park Leatherhead Road Chessington Surrey KT9 2NY UK Phone 44 0 20 8391 7979 Fax 44 0 20 8391 7978 FOR A Italia S r l Via Volturno 37 20047 Brugherio MB Italy Phone 39 039 881 086 103 Fax 39 039 878 140 FOR A Corporation of Korea 1007 57 5 Yangsan ro Yeongdeungpo gu Seoul 150 103 Korea Phone 82 0 2 2637 0761 Fax 82 0 2 2637 0760 FOR A China Limited 708B Huateng Bldg No 302 3 District Jinsong Chaoyang Beijing 100021 China Phone 86 0 10 8721 6023 Fax 86 0 10 8721 6033 FOR A Middle East Africa Office Jebel Ali Free Zone LOB 16 Office 619 P O Box 261914 Dubai UAE Phone 971 4 887 6712 Fax 971 4 887 6713 The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice
133. 59p 1080 23PsF 1080 59p 1080 59i 525 60 1080 59 720 59p ays 1080 59p NTSC 720 59 formats 720 59p 525 60 1080 59 720 59p eee 1080 59p 1080 59p 1080 59p 525 60 1080 59 720 59p EY PASS 1080 59p 625 50 625 50 1080 50i 720 50p 1080 24PsF 1080 50p 1080 50i 625 50 1080 50i 720 50p ees 1080 50p PAL 720 50 formats 720 50p 625 50 1080 50i 720 50p Gay PASS 1080 50p 1080 50p 1080 50p 625 50 1080 50i 720 50p BYPASS 1080 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 23PsF 1080 23PsF Aen 1080 23PsF 525 60 BY PASS BY PASS 1080 23PsF BY PASS formats 1080 24PsF 1080 24PsF 1080 24PsF 1080 24PsF 625 50 BYPASS BY PASS 1080 24PsF BY PASS In the conversions to the formats indicated as BY PASS the CONV2SIZE POS CONV2 CROPPING CONV2 IMPROVE and CONV2 SIDE RGB settings cannot be changed 5 3 3 CONV1 SIZE POS 7 Menu button CONV1 ANALOG Parameter Default To Description H SIZE 100 0 50 0 150 0 Adjusts the width of the video Horizontal Size ee 0 1 displayed on the monitor V SIZE o 50 0 150 0 Adjusts the height of the video Vertical Size 100 0 0 1 displayed on the monitor HPOS 0 Pixel Variable Adjusts the horizontal position of Horizontal Position 2 Pixel the video displayed on the monitor V POS 0 Line Variable Adjusts the vertical position of the Vertical Position 1 Line video displayed on the monitor 1 If the size is made smaller than the original size set the background col
134. 6 CONV1 SIDE RGB CON 10 Menu button RED 0 GREEN 0 CONV1 BLUE 0 ANALOG GROUP ADJ UST Parameter Default Setting range Description Sets background color that will be visible if the converted image is set smaller than original in CONV1 SIZE POS 5 3 3 0 0 255 R G and B components can be adjusted separately F4 control knob allows you to adjust R G and B at the same time Adjusts the R G and B components separately then turns this Group Adjust Group Adjust 0 0 255 on Changing any R G or B value will Group Adjustment change the values of the three components accordingly while retaining the proportion RED GREEN BLUE Background color If the CONV1 mode is set to BY PASS the CONV1 SIDE RGB setting cannot be changed Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV1 Conversion Table see section 5 3 2 In both cases the menu as shown below will be displayed 46 5 4 CONV2 UP DOWN CROSS CONVERTER The video signal selected under IN SEL in the VIDEO INPUT SELECT IN SEL menu as shown in section 5 7 will be input to UP DOWN CONVERTER2 CONV2 The signal will be processed in CONV2 and output from the output connector for which CONV2 is selected under ASSIGN in the VIDEO OUT SELECT OUT SEL menu Sec 5 8 The converter requires 1 frame to process video signals so that processed output signals a
135. 7 9 3 AUDIO Settings Click Click the Audio tab at the top of the page The audio block diagram will be displayed Each block in the diagram lets you to go to the corresponding windows or dialog boxes that allows you to change various settings Audio Block Diagram FA 9500 Logout Video Audio system cpi uy status Network an E Source f SS f AES In Sant SRC Master Gain 3 Analog In em Polarity am me ea f AES Out 12 Loudness Control me oo Analog Out 1 3 Output Assign Dolby E sul auxout 15 Dolby Option Dolby E Digital AUXIN Decoder Dolby Option 14 4 and 15 are effective when the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is installed 16 is effective when the FA 95DE E option is installed 17 is effective when the FA 95ALA option is installed If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown 188 9 3 1 SDI Input Gain Clicking block 1 on the audio block diagram opens the SDI Audio Input Gain dialog box 24 http 192 168 0 10 SDI Audio Input Gain Microsoft EBX SDI Audio Input Gain 0 0 dB E SDI Input Audio Gain Set 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB TE Ge 608 08 608 08 08 08 08 008 108 08 008 08 08 oe 0 0 dB
136. 79 LOSS Operation 64 LOUDNESS CHANNELASSIGNMENT 140 LOUDNESS CONTROL ENABLE 138 LOUDNESS CONTROL SETTINGS 139 LOUDNESS MEASUREMENT 137 LOUDNESS STANDARD 141 M Manual Level Adjustment 60 MASTER OUT GAIN Settings MASTER 126 Menu Buttons 31 METADATA INPUT 136 Motion Sense 174 N NETWORK INFO 151 Network Information Web 253 NETWORK SETTING Web 253 Network Settings Web 253 Note on Event Memory Operation 156 NTSC SETUP 96 O Older Version Data from FA 9500 293 OPTION A Ver 152 OPTION B Ver 152 OTHER OPTION 153 Other Settings amp Information OTHER 146 OUTPUT FUNCTION 150 Output Select Web 185 P Page Jump Feature 34 PAL M MODE SET 96 Parameters That Are Not Stored in Event Memories 156 Powering ON 29 Proc Amp Web 172 R Rear Panel 19 Reference signals and Input formats 81 221 Regarding Option Card Removal 294 REMOTE Connector 263 Resetting to Default 35 Restart Web 257 RGB CLIP 63 S Sample Area 54 Saving the FA 9500 Settings to a File 236 Scene Cut Detection 55 SD INPUT ASPECT 65 SD LINE MASK 90 SD PHASE SET 85 SDI 1 IN AUDIO 102 SDI 1 2 OUT AUDIO 105 SDI 2 IN AUDIO 103 SDI 3 4 OUT AUDIO 106 SDI AUDIO CLOCK 117 SDI AUDIO GAIN 114 SDI Audio Output Settings Web 201 SDI AUDIO Settings SDI AUDIO 114 SDI ERROR TRG 67 SDI IN AUDIO 118 SDI Input Gain Web 189 SDI MONO SUM 117 SDI REMAPPING 115 SDI1 2 OUT SET 73 SDI3 4 OUT SET 73 SET GET E 271 303 SILENCE STATUS 72 SILENCE
137. 9500 through the NETWORK RESTART page Otherwise the settings will not be applied 1 The Remote Port Number must match that of the FA 95RU 2 Logo Port Number settings in the FA 9500 and the FA 95LG GUI must match 9 8 3 SNMP SETTING This page allows you to set the SNMP settings After you are sure that all settings are appropriate click Submit After clicking Submit restart the FA 9500 through the NETWORK RESTART page Otherwise the settings will not be applied INFORMATION NETWORK SETTING USER SETTING SNMP System sysName 31 Max char sysLocation 31 Max char sysContact 31 Max char Enable Authen Trap Access Community Read Only 1 public 19 Max char Read Only 2 19 Max char Read Write 1 private 19 Max char Read Write 2 19 Max char Trap Setting Address Community Trap 1 192 168 0 200 trap 19 Max char Trap 2 19 Max char Trap 3 19 Max char SNMP System Setting Range Item Alphanumeric and Description symbolic characters sysName 31 char max Allows you to set the device name sysLocation 31 char max PE yor emar comments regarding the Allows you to enter comments regarding the person in charge of the device If authentication has failed while the Enable Authen Trap checkbox is selected a trap will be generated Access Community sysContact 31 char max Setting Range Item Alphanumeric and Description symbolic chara
138. ACAM input signal is not selected High Open Collector YPbPr SMPTE YPbPr BETACAM RGB 3 RGB input signal is selected Low RGB input signal is not selected High Open Collector yic 3 Y C input signal is selected Low Y C input signal is not selected High Open Collector 4 CHANGEOVER inactive Low CHANGEOVER CHANGEOVER occurring High Open Collector CHNGEOVER is enabled Low CHGOV ENABLE CHNGEOVER is disabled High Open Collector CONVERTER1 KEYER is enabled Low CONV1KEYER CONVERTER1 KEYER is disabled High Open Collector CONVERTER2 KEYER is enabled Low CONV2 KEYER CONVERTER KEYER is disabled High Open Collector LOUDNESS CONTROL1 CONTROL is enabled Low LOUDNESS CONTROL1 CONTROL is disabled High Open Collector LOUDNESS CONTROL2 CONTROL is enabled Low LOUDNESS CONTROL2 CONTROL is disabled High Open Collector 1 FAN ALARM goes to low active if either one of two fans fails 2 Effective if the optional FA 95PS is installed 3 Effective if the optional FA 95AlIO is installed 4 Effective if the optional FA 95CO is installed 5 Effective if the optional FA 95ALA is installed LOUD1 CTRL LOUD2 CTRL 150 7 5 NETWORK INFO Menu button STATUS OTHER Parameter Default Description Displays the unit name NAME FA 9500 To change the unit name see Unit Name in section 9 6 1 Event Control IP 192 168 0 10
139. AFD system settings Also check if any AFD data is being inserted using a waveform monitor 288 4 o o CONV1 and CONV2 operation mode settings Set the AFD auto conversion mode for CONV 1 in CONV1 U D MODE Sec 5 3 5 Set the AFD auto conversion mode for CONV 2 in CONV1 U D MODE Sec 5 3 5 AFD output verification AFD data status in CONV1 and CONV2 output video signals can be verified as follows The CONV1 ANC OUT menu Sec 5 16 allows you to verify whether and in which line the VI and WSS data has been inserted into CONV1 output video signals VI and WSS output data details can be seen in CONV1 VI OUT 5 16 2 and CONV2 WSS OUT 5 16 3 S2016 3 output data details can be seen in CONV1 82016 OUT Sec 5 16 1 Into which line S2016 3 is inserted can be seen in CONV1 ANC OUT1 Sec 5 17 AFD data status in CONV2 output video signals can be verified in CONV2 ANC OUT Sec 5 18 and CONV2 ANC OUT1 Sec 5 19 in the same manner 20 5 How to Insert AFD Data to Output Video Signals FA 9500 can insert AFD data into input video signals that have no AFD data inserted AFD system settings To insert AFD data into output video signals set basic operational settings in the VIDEO SYTEM menus as follows e Set ANC MODE to DETAIL in CONV1 ANC SET Sec 5 10 9 Set ANC MODE to DETAIL also in CONV2 ANC SET Sec 5 10 10 Select the AFD data to insert and which output to insert the data in ANC DATA EMBED Sec 5
140. ANC LOSS SET 4 3 L ALT14 9 To output video signals in 4 3 select either 4 3 L ALT 4 3 ratio with 4 3 To output in 16 9 select 16 9 L gt 16 9 either ratio with 16 9 Other options will 16 9 F 16 9 output video signals in the specified aspect 16 9 P 4 3 ratio See section 20 About AFD for details Aspect Ratio 16 9 FPRTD Options 4 3 L 16 9 T to 16 9 F ALT 4 3 16 9 P 14 9 other than the above four require the input 16 9 P ALT 14 9 signal aspect ratio to be specified in SD 16 9 F ALT14 9 INPUT ASPECT 5 7 2 if the input signal is 16 9 FALT4 3 an SD signal Selectable aspect ratios when Converter 2 is AFD set to 1080i 720p 1080PsF or 1080 3G AFD ALT AFD and AFD ALT automatically select an 16 9 L gt 16 9 aspect ratio according to the AFD data in the 16 9 F 16 9 input signal If no AFD data is found in the AFD 16 9 P 4 3 input signal the aspect ratio will be 16 9 F PRTD determined according to the setting made 16 9 P 14 9 under ANC LOSS SET Sec 5 10 18 16 9 P ALT14 9 Options other than the above two output in 16 9 F ALT14 9 the specific aspect ratio See section 20 16 9 F ALT4 3 About AFD for details on conversions according to AFD data The Aspect Ratio setting cannot be changed if Converter2 Process Mode is set to BY PASS BT1119 WSS will be embedded according to the ANC Settings settings WSS AFD Error Sec 9 4 3 for the non WSS aspect ratio conversions Motion Sense Default S
141. AUDIO OUT a 1 2 7 8 Digital audio output connectors FA 95DACBL option The above figure of rear panel depicts an AF 95DACBL option installed in slot A The option can also be installed in slot B 5 20 FA 9500 with the FA 95D D DE E options installed 2223 24 No Name Description Ref 22 Dolby E IN Digital audio input connector on the FA 95D D DE E option 6 9 1 2 AUX IN Used to input Dolby E and or digital signals to the Dolby decoder Dolby E OUT Digital audio output connector on the FA 95D D DE E option 23 Used to output signals output from the Dolby decoder and or Dolby 6 9 1 1 AUEOUT encoder Reference signal input connector on the FA 95D D DE E option 24 REF IN Used to input reference signal B B or tri level sync for the Dolby 6 9 1 3 decoder 75 ohm terminated inside FA 9500 with the FA 95AlO option installed 25 ANALOGAUDIO REMTE Z SS Gr E O Gaze e E Tanz E FS NI FQ PR NA fa 7 SZ FOIL No Name Description Ref ANALOG Analog component input output connector on FA 95AIO 25 COMPONENT I O Pon 16 Connect the supplied I O cable
142. AUX STATUS AUX Input Loss PCM Non PCM fa95StatusDolbyAuxin INTEGER AUX Output PCM Non PCM 0 1 2 3 Unknown 0 1 3 None fa95StatusDolbyAuxOut INTEGER Dolby Option Dolby AUX STATUS Reference Input 00 Loss 01 525 60i 02 625 50i 04 1080 591 05 1080 50i 09 1080 24PsF 10 1080 23 98PsF fa95StatusDolbyRefin 12 1080 59p 13 1080 50p 20 720 59 94p 21 720 50p 29 Unknown INTEGER 276 TRAP List Traps can be sent or not be sent by settings See section 9 8 4 TRAP SETTINGS for details Object Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type Event valu e O1D 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 6 1 UNIT TRAP 0 Normal NOTIFICATION FAN1 1 Stoppend fa95Fan1ChangedTrap 1 TYPE Change 0 Normal NOTIFICATION FAN2 1 Stoppend fa95Fan2ChangedTrap 2 TYPE Change Power1 e fa95Power1ChangedTrap 11 NOTIFICATION Change 1 Not Install Power2 0 Normal fa05Power2ChangedTrap 12 de Change 1 Abnormal O1D 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 6 2 VIDEO TRAP 00 Loss 01 525 60i 02 625 50i 04 1080 59i 05 1080 50i 09 1080 24PsF SDI1 IN 10 1080 23 98PsF lfa95InSDI1ChangeTrap 1 ORICA TION Change 12 1080 59p TYPE 13 1080 50p
143. BYPASSOPCM O Mute AES CH56 SRC BY PASS OPCM O Mute AES CH78 SRC BYPASS OPCM OMute AES CH78 SRC BYPASS O PCM Mute Retresh If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown Click Refresh to update the settings Fade In Out Parameter Default Setting range Description Disable Always outputs input audio signals Disable without adding any effect such as Fade or Mute Fade Mode Disable Enabl Enable Sets an audio channel to mute with fade nae out if an audio error is detected and fade in when recovered Fade Time 12ms a Sets the duration for Fade In and Out transitions 1 To use this function the audio delay must be set longer than the total Fade In Out Time and Silence Detect Time Ex If Fade Time is set to 12 ms the audio delay must be longer than 14 msec i e 12 2msec Silence Detect Time IMPORTANT Fade In Out may not function properly for the switching between AES input signals whose sampling rates are different or that are asynchronous Digital Audio Parameter Default Setting range Description AES Input AES1 2 and 3 4 connectors are set to be 1 2 3 4 Input Input input connectors 1 0 Settin p Output Output AES1 2 and 3 4 connectors are set to be g output connectors AES Input AES5 6 and 7 8 connectors are set to be 5 6 7 8 input Input input connectors 1 0 Settin
144. CLOCK MUTE Treats audio signals as mute signals 143 Parameter Default Setting range Description FA 9500 can fade and mute audio when it detects a change in the audio status due to e g signal switchover This parameter allows you to select whether to detect changes and how sensitive detection should be to such changes DISABLE Disables mute function when DISABLE change in audio status is detected CORRECTION NORMAL NORMAL Normally not selected SENSITIVE NORMAL Mutes when a change on an SDI signal ADP Audio Data Packet or DBN Data Block Number is detected Normally selected SENSITIVE Mutes when a change on channel status or EDP Extended Data Packet presence only for SD SDI as well as the above items is detected 1 Channel status and audio channel input Validity Bit can be checked using a wave form monitor 2 Processes audio signals as described if SRC MODE in the 6 5 1 SOURCE SRC SEL menu is set to AUTO 3 Processes audio signals as described if SDI AUDIO CLOCK in section 6 1 4 is set to AUTO 4 Fade function depends on the FADE MODE setting in the 6 10 1 FADE IN OUT menu CH STATUS The FA 9500 determins whether the input audio signal is PCM or not from the NON PCM flag carried in the Audio Channel Status ACS If ACS is incorrect it may lead to improper processing This setting may effective processing such audio signals with incorrect ACS properly VALI
145. CM a95StatusAesOutCh4 4 INTEGER OUTPUT AES OUT AUDIO CH5 E eres dl a95StatusAesOutChd 5 INTEGER O CH6 EEN encetasyne a95StatusAesQuiCh6 6 INTEGER O CH7 Non PCM Async ad5StatusAesQuiCh7 7 INTEGER O 7 Unknown 8 Input Setting CH8 a95StatusAesOutCh8 8 INTEGER O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 5 3 24 Analog output audio signal status CH1 a95StatusAnalogOutCh1 1 INTEGER O AUDIO ANALOG Out CH2 0 Silence a95StatusAnalogOutCh2 2 INTEGER O OUTPUT AUDIO CH3 1 Ou a95StatusAnalogOutCh3 3 INTEGER O CH4 a95StatusAnalogOutCh4 4 INTEGER O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 5 3 50 Option A loudness status Momentary IN 99 9 to 0 a952StatusLoudness1 InMomentary 1 NTEGER Short Term IN 99 9 to 0 a952StatusLoudness 1InShort 2 NTEGER Long Term IN 99 9 to 0 a952StatusLoudness1lnLong 3 NTEGER rd MEASURE Momentary OUT 99 9 to 0 oe usLoudness10utMomenta l4 NTEGER i O Loudness Short Term OUT 99 9 to 0 a952StatusLoudness10utShort 5 INTEGER Option A Long Term OUT 99 9 to O aQ52StatusLoudness1OutLong 6 INTEGER E Session Time Elapsed time a952StatusLoudness1SessionTime 7 NTEGER Momentary IN 99 9 to O a952StatusLoudness2InMomentary 11 INTEGER OUD MEASURE Short Term IN 99 9 to 0 a952StatusLoudness2InShort 12 INTEGER O Long Term IN 99 9 to 0 a952StatusLoudness2InLong 13 INTEGER O Momentary OUT 99 9 to 0 poe usLoudness2OutMomenta 44 INTEGER i O Loudness LOUD MEASURE Short Term OUT 99 9 to 0 a052StatusLoudness20utShort 15 INTEGER
146. CTR box 14 9 centre 0001 BOX 14 9 TOP box 14 9 top 0010 BOX 16 9 CTR box 16 9 centre 1011 BOX 16 9 TOP box 16 9 top 0100 BOX gt 16 9 CTR box gt 16 9 centre 1101 F 14 9 CTR PRTD full format 14 9 centre shoot and protect 14 9 1110 F 16 9 AMRPH full format 16 9 anamorphic 0111 20 7 Conversion Setting Version Differences Conversion settings in the FA 9500 ver 6 00 and higher have been changed due to added S2016 3 AFD support as shown in the table below A neni hae Later version settings eon Ei s SD INPUT ASPECT ASPECT settings 2 4 3 4 3 16 9 P 14 9 14 9 4 3 16 9 P 14 9 i e i 16 9 F 16 9 Up conversion 16 9 4 3 16 9 F PRID 16 9 F 16 9 SQUEEZE 16 9 16 9 F PRID 4 3 4 3 F 4 3 14 9 4 3 L 14 9 Down conversion 16 9 4 3 L16 9PRTD 16 9 F 16 9 SOUERZE 16 9 F PRTD 1 See section 5 7 2 SD INPUT ASPECT for details 2 See section 5 3 1 CONV1 U D MODE for details 291 21 About Colosed Captioning The FA 9500 supports 3 closed caption standards CEA608 CC S334 1 CC SD and CEA708 CC HD 4 Outline of each standard CEA608 CC Closed captioning for 525 60 video signals Closed caption data is carried in line 21 in luminance level signals Originally used for analog composite signals The FA 9500 can detect CEA608CC data in alanog composite and SD SDI signals Detection in analog Y C and YPbPr signals is not supported In the same manner insertion into an
147. DATA EMBED and 5 10 17 ANC EMBED LINE H ANC OVERWRITE OVERWRITE IN DATA BLANK Embeds audio signals into horizontal ancillary data of CONV1 output videos OVERWRITE Removes the embedded audio signal from the input SDI video signal then embeds the processed audio data on the video signal Whether to embed is determined by the AUDIO GROUP setting in section 5 10 11 CONV1 AUDIO GROUP The input SDI data will be embedded on the video signal after audio signals are embedded IN DATA Passes the input SDI horizontal ancillary data without processing Processed audio data cannot be embedded BLANK Deletes all horizontal ancillary data and embeds the processed audio data V ANC PASS PASS BLANK Embeds audio signals into vertical ancillary data of CONV1 output videos PASS Embeds the vertical ancillary data without processing BLANK Deletes all vertical ancillary data H ANC and V ANC settings become available when ANC MODE is set to H V ANC H ANC and V ANC settings are effective if input and output formats are the same If such formats are different both H ANC and V ANC will be set to BLANK 87 5 10 10 CONV2 ANC SET Menu button ANC MODE H V ANC H ANC OVERWRITE VIDEO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects ancillary data processing mode for the CONV2 output signal H ANC and V ANC menu settings will become available when H V
148. DITY The FA 9500 determines whether the input audio signal is PCM or not using Validity Bits V Bit in audio signal If Validity Bit V Bit is incorrect the audio signal may cause improper processing This setting may effective processing such audio signals with incorrect Validy Bits properly IMPORTANT Please use these settings only if there is audio noise or the audio is muted Otherwise do not change the default setting CORRECTION Normally set to NORMAL Set to DISABLE for a specific program or duration when audio output has noise or is muted The FA 9500 fades out audio or resets the delay circuit when a status change SDI signal input interruption signal switchover by a router etc is detected Faulty ancillary data in normal audio signals may also be detected as status changes Audio signals with such faulty ancillary data may lead the FA 9500 s automatic correction to improperly process the audio input and produce noise or mute the audio Note that disableing the automatic correction can prevent such improper processing however the following functions will also be disabled After a signal switchover by router or the recovery of an interrupted SDI signal delay settings will lose their accuracy to within 1 3 msec max Audio signal phases among audio groups will not match Perform either of the following operations when setting CORRECTION to DISABLE or changing the setting from DISABLE to NORMAL a Change t
149. Default Steps Description CONV1 Selects whether to output CONV1 or CONV2 Read SONY CONV2 signal from the COMPOSITE connector The input signal format and COMPOSITE output signal format are displayed on the third row Ifthe assigned CONV1 or CONV2 signal is an HD signal the COMPOSITE output will be a black video See the below Composite Output Format Table for details Composite Output Format Table CONV 1 and 2 output signals Output signal from COMPOSITE connector 525 60 CONV1 2 signals in 525 60 625 50 CONV1 2 signals in 625 50 1080 59 B B in 525 60 1080 50i B B in 625 50 1080 24PsF B B in 625 50 1080 23 98PsF B B in 525 60 720 59p B B in 525 60 720 50p B B in 625 50 1080 59p B B in 525 60 1080 50p B B in 625 50 74 5 8 4 COMPONENT SET Allows you to assign video signals to output from the FA 95AI0 video output connectors Effective only if the FA 95AIO option is installed 75 Menu button ASSIGN CONV1 T SEL 525 60 gt gt 1080 59i ENE OUTPUT YPbPr SMPTE Parameter Default Setting range Description CONV1 Selects whether to output CONV1 or CONV2 ASSIGN CONV1 CONV2 signal from the ANALOG COMPONENT OUT connector The input signal format and analog component output signal format are displayed on the third row YPbPr SMPTE Selects a format for the analog component OUTPUT YPbPr YPbPr BETACAM ou
150. Disable CH 3 Disable CH 11 Disable Group 4 Disable CH 4 Disable CH 12 Disable CH 4 Disable CH 12 Disable CH 5 Disable CH 13 Disable CH 5 Disable CH 13 Disable CH6 Disable CH 14 Disable CH 6 Disable CH 14 Disable CH7 Disable CH 15 Disable CH7 Disable CH 15 Disable CH8 Disable CH 16 Disable CH8 Disable CH 16 Disable If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown Click Refresh to update the settings Changeover Setting The current Changeover settings are displayed Item Display Description Disable Displays whether Changeover is disabled or enabled See Changeover Enable section 9 2 1 Input Select for details Disable Displays whether Video Trigger is disabled or enabled See Video Trigger Enable section 9 2 1 Input Select for details A Disable Displays whether Audio Trigger is disabled or enabled See Audio Trigger Enable section 9 2 1 Input Select for details Changeover Status The current Changeover status is displayed Item Description Disable Video related triggers are disabled Non Trigger Video related triggers are enabled but not activated Video a Trigger Video related triggers are enabled and a changeover is performed Disable Audio related triggers are disabled Audi Non Trigger Audio related triggers are enabled but not activated udio f A Trigger Audio related triggers are
151. E CB for the test signal SMPTE CB Level Shorted to GND SMPTE CB ON OPEN SMPTE CB OFF Selects RAMP for the test signal RAMP Level Shorted to GND RAMP ON OPEN RAMP OFF SDI1 2 SDI2 E 3 Pulse Selects an input video signal Switches over to the YPbPr BETACAM3 selected input signal when shorted to GND RGB Y C Enables or disables the CHANGEOVER settings If CHGOV ENABLE is selected CHANGEOVER will be enabled when the pin is shorted to GND CHGOV ENABLE Pulse If CHGOV DISABLE is selected CHANGEOVER will be CHGOV DISABLE disabled when the pin is shorted to GND However CHANGEOVER may not be enabled depending on the 5 7 1 VIDEO INPUT SET menu setting DEFAULT Loads the DEFAULT and events 1 through 100 EVENT 1 100 Pulse When shorted to GND the assigned settings among 7 default and events will be loaded Sets the converter 1 keyer ON OFF NEVER Level Shorted to GND Keyer ON OPEN Keyer OFF a The logo assigned to a LOGO ID will be loaded to the Save EA Pulse selected converter CONV1 2 LOAD 1 LOAD 7 are assigned to LOGO IDs 4 Starts or Stops LOUDNESS measurement oon etal 4 Level Shorted to GND Starts LOUDNESS measurement OPEN Stops LOUDNESS measurement 4 LOUD I CLEAR Pulse Clears LOUDNESS measurement and elapsed time LOUD2 CLEAR 1 Although FREEZE is set to ON the freeze function is disabled if SYNCHRO in section 5 10 1 FS MODE SET is set to LINE AVDL or INPUT In such case the menu
152. E cee dece eae 217 9 4 2 Audio SM A ts 224 9 4 3 ANG Setting S nct sented degen ketosis Tes vasa od eae eae Rehan eel 228 925 GP E inavecetensades E E A S E E E E tenes SE AT 232 9 6 Utility Settings ooonnnnnnicncncidnconnnnconococnncononcnnnnoncnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnninnannnnnnininnns 234 9 6 1 Event Control er eriin a a ea 235 9 6 2 Backup Parameter orrira a DEAA EEEE EAE AERAN AFERE AAAS 236 9 6 3 Downloading a MIB File i ll cnn 238 9 6 4 Backup Event Dala isa oiga 239 9 7 Status DISPO ies oie Pa ties 241 9 7 1 Unit Video Status tica A a A ha ie eee rt 241 EZ AUGIO StAtUs sieves A AE A tenth daaed ences 244 927 3 SU Nite INFORMATION ssc case OA A eters Nels see DR do 247 927 4 ANC Status cite iets ited eee eet ni te Ana ated a Sie bd 248 9 7 5 Changeover Stats hamesi iaaa aerar n aa aaea anaa aaaea aibi 251 9 8 Network Settings 2 0 2 2 ccceececcece cece eeeecene ease eeeeeeeeceneaaeeeeeeeecececcceaeeeseeeeseecsusaeeeeeeeeteneennaes 253 9 8 1 Network Information c ccccceceeeceecceeeeeeeeeeeeecccneeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeaeeeeeeeeeseceeeaeeeeeeeetee 253 9 8 2 NETWORK SETTING coooocoococoncccccccocncononncnnoncncnncnnonnnonnncnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnninennss 253 9 8 3 SNMP SETTING iraan coheed tainted e E Peter ede Hite ee ane edd 254 9 9 4 TRAP SETTINGS siciliana isa 256 9 8 5 USER SETTING ii st felted 257 A seeds ccs eaae a n r Aa aeaa aa aaa aa Aaa U NESA
153. ENT others SDI 2 COMPOSITE 525 60 COMPOSITE 625 50 COMPONENT Y C COMPONENT others SDI 2 COMPOSITE 525 60 COMPOSITE 625 50 COMPONENT Y C COMPONENT others LINE AVDL INPUT a Bpjo N O A BR oO B RPO Am 84 5 10 7 SD PHASE SET 97 Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Rae Description H PHASE 0 ea ee CLK Adjusts the horizontal and vertical 053 phases of the system referring to genlock N FRAME INPUT 313 313 signal This setting is applied to SD V PHASE 2 93 LINE output signals LINE AVDL Adjusts the subcarrier phase of comosite and Y C output signals referring to the 179 8 180 B B genlock signal 0 2 Not adjustable with the tri level genlock signal In such case the menu will appear as NOT ADJUST SC PHASE 0 0 1 The settings are not available if there is no reference signal input In such case the menu as shown below will be displayed 2 Set V PHASE to more than 1 line when setting SYNCHRO mode to INPUT 3 The default value varies depending on the SYNCHRO setting in section 5 10 1 FS MODE SET and the IN SEL setting in section 5 7 1 VIDEO INPUT SET as shown in the below table The set value will be reset to its relevant default value whenever the SYNCHRO setting is changed SYNCHRO IN SEL Default FRAME SDI 2
154. ER O O Assign Signal CH5 19 Downmix L a95AudioAesOutAssignCh5 5 INTEGER O O AES REMAPPING Assign Signal CH6 20 Downmix R a05AudioAesOutAssignCh6 6 INTEGER O O Assign Signal CH7 21 28 Dolby Dec 1 8 a95AudioAesOutAssignCh7 7 INTEGER O O 29 Dolby Dec Donmix L is i 30 Dolby Dec Donmix R A y Assign Signal CH8 31 Dolby E Enc 1 a95AudioAesOutAssignCh8 8 NTEGER O O 32 Dolby E Enc 2 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 3 3 3 Analog audio remapping Assign Signal CH1 0 15 Source Ch1 16 aQ5AudioAnalogOutAssignCh1 1 NTEGER O Assign Signal CH2 16 500Hz a95AudioAnalogOutAssignCh2 2 NTEGER O Assign Signal CH3 17 1kHz ag5AudioAnalogOutAssignCh3 3 NTEGER O 18 Silence ANALOG 19 DOWNMIX L REMAPPING ae 20 DOWNMIX R f Assign Signal CH4 21 28 Dolby Dec 1 8 a95AudioAnalogOutAssignCh4 4 NTEGER O O 29 Dolby Dec Donmix L 30 Dolby Dec Donmix R OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 3 4 Mute Master Mute Master Mute g one a95AudioMasterMute 2 NTEGER O O oid 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 3 5 1 Audio source remapping Audio Source CH1 2 a95AudioMappingSourcePair1 2 1 NTEGER O Audio Source CH3 4 a95AudioMappingSourcePair3 4 2 NTEGER O Audio Source CH5 6 a95AudioMappingSourcePair5 6 3 NTEGER O Audio Source CH7 8 a95AudioMappingSourcePair7 8_ 4 NTEGER O O AUDIO Audio Source CH9 10 or SLIG ARA aQ5AudioMappingSourcePair9 10 5 INTEGER O O MAPPING S UeeISRO Set uo Source 16 17 Analog 1 2 3 4 a95AudioMappingSourcePair11 12 6 NTEGE
155. F NF NF NF NF NF 720 50p NF NF NF NF NF F NF NF NF NF 1080 23PsF NF NF NF NF NF NF F NF NF NF 1080 24PsF NF NF NF NF NF NF NF F NF NF 1080 59p NF NF NF NF NF NF NF NF F NF 1080 50p NF NF NF NF NF NF NF NF NF F OE Can be set to FRAME ODD or EVEN F Fixed to FRAME NOE Can be set to FRAME ODD or EVEN but the image does not appear properly NF Fixed to FRAME and the image does not appear properly See section 5 10 1 FS MODE SET for the SYS FRMT 5 10 3 COMPOSITE SET Menu button COMB FILTER 3D NR LEVEL OFF VIDEO SYS CROSS COLOR OFF NTSC SETUP OFF AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description 3D Selects a mode to separate the Y COMB FILTER 2D 2D luminance and C chrominance of TRAP composite signals OFF Sets the noise reduction level for the NR LEVEL OFF LEVEL1 4 composite signal inputs OFF Sets the cross color noise reduction CROSS COLOR OFF LEVEL1 3 level OFF Select OFF when using signals without 7 5 4 IRE setup NTS SETUP OFF ON Select ON when using signals with 7 5 IRE setup 1 This parameter will not be displayed when the FA 95AIO option is installed It is supported in the NTSC SETUP menu section 5 15 82 5 10 4 VIDEO SUB Black and white video and VITS signal settings 94 Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description BLK WHT OFF One Turn ON for b
156. FA 95C0 INSTALLED STATUS OTHER Parameter Default Setting range Description Steps INSTALLED Logo Generator is installed RISAS i NONE Logo Generator is not installed INSTALLED FA 95CO option is installed PARU i NONE FA 95C0 option is not installed 153 8 Event Memory The FA 9500 can store 100 event memories as well as sets of settings each of which are stored for each format Every press of the EVENT button alternates the menus EVENT LOAD lit green EVENT SAVE lit red and EVENT SETUP lit orange To go to the desired page press the EVENT button a few times or press the EVENT button once and the up or down single arrow button to move between EVENT pages 8 1 EVENT LOAD Menu button EVENT Parameter Default Setting range Description VIDEO FORMAT NO VIDEO DEFAULT Selects the number of an event FORMAT EVENT1 you want to load EVENT100 Loads the event that is selected mech tae g under NO when the F2 UNITY button is pressed E 7 Displays the signal format if NO is set to VIDEO FORMAT 1 DEFAULT loads the default settings 2 VIDEO FORMAT loads the settings that are stored for the respective video formats the FA 9500 uses The current video format is displayed on the third row The EVENT LOAD menu is disabled and appears as shown below if AUTO LOAD is set to ENABLE in the EVENT SETUP menu 8 3 To enable the EVENT
157. GER O CH5 O Loss a95StatusSdiEmblIn1Ch5 5 INTEGER CH6 1 PCM a05StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch6 6 INTEGER O CH7 2 Silence a95StatusSdiEmbin1Ch7 7 INTEGER e CH8 Non a05StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch8 8 INTEGER AUDIO INPUT SDI 1 IN AUDIO Gag 4 PCM Async a05StatusSdiembin1Ch9 Y INTEGER O ICH10 5 Silence Async a95StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch10 10 INTEGER O CH11 6 Non PCM Async a95StatusSdiEmbln1Ch11 11 INTEGER O ICH12 7 Unknown a95StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch12 12 INTEGER O CH13 a05StatusSdiEmbln1Ch13 13 INTEGER O ICH14 a05StatusSdi embin1Ch14 14 INTEGER O ICH15 ad5StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch15 15 INTEGER ICHT6 ad5StatusSdiEmbln1Ch16 16 INTEGER O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 5 3 2 SDI2 input audio signal status CH7 a05StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch1 1 NTEGER CH2 a95StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch2 2 NTEGER O CH3 a95StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch3 3 NTEGER O CH4 a95StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch4 4 NTEGER O CH5 0 Loss a05StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch5 5 NTEGER CH6 1 PCM a95StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch6 6 NTEGER O CH7 e Silence i a5StatusSdi embIn2Ch7 7 NTEGER O CH8 Non a95StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch8 8 NTEGER O AUDIO INPUT SD 2 IN AUDIO pg 4 PCM Async 205StatusSdiEmbln2Ch9 g NTEGER O ICHT0 5 Silence Async a05StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch10 10 NTEGER CH11 6 Non PCM Async a95StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch11 11 NTEGER O CH12 7 Unknown a95StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch12 12 NTEGER O ICHT3 a05StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch13 13 NTEGER O ICH14 ad5StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch14 14 NTEGER O ICH15 a05StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch15 15 NTEGER O ICHT6 ad5StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch16 16 NTEGER O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 5 3 3 AES i
158. GER is set to ENABLE in 5 7 6 FORMAT ERROR TRG a change cannot be made 5 10 2 FREEZE SET Allows you to set an operation mode for FREEZE 92 Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description FREEZE OFF OFF ON Turns FREEZE ON OFF MODE 7 FRAME nD ENEN Select an operation mode for FREEZE OFF Sets the interval to refresh the images by the STROBE OFF 4 255 number of fields for the field or frame freeze 7 OFF Images are not refreshed 1 Changing the SYNCHRO setting in section 5 10 1 FS MODE SET while FREEZE is set to ON will turn FREEZE OFF FREEZE cannot be set to ON if SYNCHRO is set to LINE or AVDL FREEZE is always set to OFF at startup These settings are not stored in the event memory When FREEZE is ON VIDEO SYS button flashes AUDIO SYS 81 2 If the input signal is a PsF signal MODE is automatically set to FRAME and the setting cannot be changed See the following FREEZE MODE table for details FREEZE Mode Table Input signal SYS FRMT setting 525 60 625 50 1080 59i 1080 50i 720 59p 720 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF 1080 59p 1080 50p AUTO OE OE OE OE F F F F F F 525 60 OE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE 625 50 NOE OE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE 1080 59i NOE NOE OE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE 1080 50 NOE NOE NOE OE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE 720 59p NF NF NF NF
159. INE Sec 5 10 14 The line must be correctly set for RP186VI and BT1119 WSS detection S2016 3 data is automatically obtained from input signals AFD data in S2016 3 is automatically obtained from the input HD SDI signals Select an AFD type to detect for SD SDI input signals under AFD in ANC DETECT SEL Sec 5 10 15 Select the AFD data to insert and which output to insert the data in ANC DATA EMBED Sec 5 10 16 These settings are necessary when inserting AFD data into video signals to be output from CONV1 and or 2 To enable devices that receive signals from FA 9500 to detect ancillary data select the ancillary data type output video format s for CONV1 and or 2 output s and line number into which the data is to be inserted in the ANC EMBED LINE menu Sec 5 10 17 The default setting should be set to the line number usually used Select the operation mode when AFD input is lost in ANC LOSS SET Sec 5 10 18 AFD verification Auto aspect ratio conversion according to AFD data cannot be performed if there is no AFD data present in the input signal Whether the AFD data is detected can be verified in AFD IN STATUS Sec 5 13 16 ANC IN STATUS Sec 5 14 and ANC IN STATUS 1 2 Sec 5 15 P186VI and BT1119 WSS states that appear as ABSENT indicate the absence of AFD data that allows for auto conversion For auto conversions using S2016 3 the data packet must be detected in the ANC IN STATUS1 2 menu If no AFD data is detected reset
160. IX L CH1 DOWNMIX L CH1 DOWNMIX L CH2 SOURCE3 CH2 SOURCE3 CH2 SOURCE3 Unchanged DOWNMIX L and PCM signals are selected for L R channels CH1 DOWNMIX L CH2 DOWNMIX R CH1 DOWNMIX L CH1 DOWNMIX L Changed to make a proper pair including the CH2 SOURCE2 CH2 DOWNMIX R assigned L channel signal DOWNMIX L and NON PCM signals are selected for L R channels CH1 Dolby ENC 1 CRIDO DY ENG CAE epee hR maca proper pair including the CH2 1KHz CH2 x Dolby ENC 2 assigned L channel signal NON PCM and 1KHz signals are selected for L R channels 121 6 2 4 AES MONO SUM Menu button CH SEL CH 1 2 MONO SUM DISABLE CC AES AUDIO Parameter Default Setting range Description CH SEL CH1 2 CH1 2 7 8 Selects a stereo pair of AES output audio channels ENABLE Outputs the stereo pair channels that are selected under CH DISABLE SEL as a mono sum MONG SUM BISABLE ENABLE The signals of the selected pair channels are added and devided by two to output from each channel If the AES connector is set to be used for input the menu display for the selected AES output audio channel appears as CH1 See section 6 2 5 AES I O SETUP and change the setting if necessary 6 2 5 AES I O SETUP Menu button cc AES AUDIO Parameter Default Setting range Description INPUT AES1 2 and 3 4 connectors are set to be input INPUT connectors OUTPUT OUTPUT AES1 2 and
161. If the single arrow button is unlit the direction is not accessible The double arrow buttons allow you to go to the first menu of the menu button Menu Buttons Process cc Y cont Y f convz SDI AUDIO AES AUDIO ANALOG MASTER a Aavo CLIP Y IN SEL OUT SEL MODE MAPPING J DELAY J omy A J VIDEO OP VIDEO SYS STATUS VIDEO Y AUDIO OP gt AUDIO SYS J OTHER _ AUDIO Menu Title Page number DEO PRO AMP 1 F1 VIDEO LEVEL 100 0 P a CHROMA LEVEL 100 0 ES SETUP BLACK 0 0 L p4 HUE 0 0 O HD SD FRAME SYNCHRONIZER FA 9500 Parameter Value In the example above the PROCESS SDI AUDIO button has been pressed so that the VIDEO PROC AMP menu is displayed 30 4 2 2 Menu Buttons The VIDEO AUDIO button at the bottom right switches between the video and audio related menus Pressing the button alternates the button to work as video menu buttons lit green and audio menu buttons lit orange The menus at the top of each button label are video menus lit green and the menus at the bottom are audio menus lit orange Menus that request a setting confirmation are shown with a black circle e in the following list Menu Button VIDEO menus lit green AUDIO menus lit orange SDI AUDIO GAIN
162. LE 2 embedded audio ENABLE Inserts the GROUP3 embedded audio DISABLE DISABLE Does not insert the GROUP4 GROUP4 ENABLE ENABLE 2 embedded audio ENABLE Inserts the GROUP4 embedded audio 1 GROUP4 embedded audio cannot be inserted into SD SDI outputs regardless of the GROUP4 setting 2 The setting is ineffective if the input and output formats are the same and H ANC is set to IN DATA in the CONV2 ANC SET menu Sec 5 10 10 89 5 10 13 SD LINE MASK Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description LINE SEL LINE6 LINE6 23 Selects a line from lines 6 through 23 of an SD SDI or COMPOSITE output signal Sets the line selected in LINE SEL to PASS or BLANK PASS Outputs a line of the composite Y C PASS 1 SD SDI input signal that is the same MASK SET PASS BLANK number as the selected output signal line to a composite Y C SD SDI output signal without processing BLANK Masks the selected composite Y C 1 SD SDI output signal line 1 Selectable only if FA 95AIO option is installed IMPORTANT Ancillary data is embedded in signals at a later step of the process Embedding will occur if the line mask is set to the same line as that of the ancillary data to be embedded 5 10 14 ANC DETECT LINE Allows you to select a line to detect ancillary RP186 VI or BT1119 2 WSS data in input signals For RP186 VI Me
163. LE ENABLE Loads the respective video format settings If the video input is changed AUTO LOAD DISABLE ENABLE to a different format the settings of the changed format will be loaded NOTE Events 1 through 100 can be renamed See Set Event Name in section 9 6 1 Event Control for details 155 8 4 Parameters That Are Not Stored in Event Memories The following parameters are not stored in event memories DISABLE ENABLE settings of CHANGEOVER in the VIDEO INPUT SET menu 5 7 1 ON OFF settings of FREEZE in the FREEZE SET menu 5 10 2 ON OFF settings of MASTER MUTE in the MASTER OUT GAIN Settings MASTER menu 6 4 All settings in the EVENT SETUP menu 8 3 All settings in the Other Settings 4 Information OTHER menu 7 All settings in the Various Signal Status Display STATUS menu 5 13 Unit Name setting in the Event Control menu 9 6 1 All settings in the Network Settings menu 9 8 All settings in the LOUDNESS MEASUREMENT menu 6 9 3 1 ON OFF settings of CONTROL in the LOUDNESS CONTROL ENABLE menu 6 9 3 2 8 5 Note on Event Memory Operation Do not power off the unit while saving an event The event may not be properly stored Also the FA 9500 regularly updates the setting data Do not turn off the unit for at least 5 seconds after changing settings lt is recommended to save important data into a backup file See sections 9 6 2 Backup Parameter and 9 6 4 Backup Event Da
164. Line ALA 720p 9 to 25 Line 9 Line 525 60 12 275 to 19 282 Line 12 275 Line 625 50 8 321 to 22 335 Line 8 321 Line ANC S2016 3 AFD 1080i PsF 9 to 20 Line 9 Line 720p 9 to 25 Line 9 Line 1080p 3G 9 to 41 Line 9 Line o Fada 27a to 282 ine 7 Ue ANC RP 186 VI 625 50 Field 1 8 to 22 Line 11 Line Field 2 321 to 335 Line 324 Line ANC BT1119 WSS 625 50 Fiels 1 8 to 23 Line 23 Line 229 Field2 line number will be displayed in the parenthesis If CEA608 or 8334 1 CC closed caption data is detected in the 525 60 input signal and the CONV and or CONV2 output format s is are 1080 59i and or 720 59p the detected closed caption data will not be converted to CEA708 The CEA708 closed caption data insertion will be automatically terminated Meanwhile if CEA708 closed caption data is detected in the 1080i or 720 59p HD SDI input signal it will be converted to S334 1 CC and CEA608CC for 525 60 output signals to output from Converter 1 and or Converter 2 IMPORTANT Closed caption data output in SD SDI signal ancillary data space will stop when data input is lost 2016 3 AFD RP186 VI and BT1119 WSS ancillary data will output according to the ANC LOSS SET settings when their data input is lost See section 5 10 18 ANC LOSS SET for details Ancillary data combinations that cannot be simultaneously embedded to the same line Peles Ancillary data type 334 1CC S2016 3 AFD RP186 VI BT11
165. MASTER LVL setting 130 6 7 1 DOWN MIX ASSIGN DOWN MIX ASSIGN Menu button IN SEL DOWNMIX Setting range ee Parameter Default Steps Description LEFT L RIGHT R Selects a channel to be CH SEL LEFT CENTER C downmixed for which to assign a LEFT SRRND LS source audio RIGHT SRRND RS L SOURCE1 Selects a SOURCE channel to R SOURCE2 assign to the channel that is SOURCE C SOURCE3 SOURCE1 16 1 selected under 6 5 AUDIO LS SOURCE5 MAPPING MAPPING from RS SOURCE6 channels CH1 to 16 1 If the same SOURCE channel is selected for multiple CH SEL channels or a NON PCM signal is assigned to a SOURCE channel the menu will be indicated with an and DOWNMIX L and DOWNMIX R will be mute To embed downmixed audio signals see section 6 1 2 SDI REMAPPING To output downmixed audio signals from AES connectors see section 6 2 3 AES REMAPPING To output from the analog audio output connector see section 6 3 5 ANALOG REMAPPING 6 8 AUDIO MODE SET MODE Menu button OUT SEL MODE Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a channel for which to set the polarity CH1 16 CH1 CH 16 Selected SOURCE DEC CH 1 8 Channels Sane DEC CH 1 8 Dolby decoded y PCM signals 1 DolbyDM R DolbyDM L R Down mixed signals generated from Dolby decoded PCM signals Sets the polarity for the channel NORMAL that is selected under POLARITY INVERT SEL INVERT
166. MODE SET This menu is accessible only if the FA 95CO software option is installed 55 Menu button IN SEL DOWNMIX CHGOV DISABLED Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects changeover trigger mode for below 4 video triggers 5 7 5 SDI ERROR TRG DISABLE 5 7 6 FORMAT ERROR TRG 5 7 7 CRC ERROR TRG MIBEO TRS DISABLE ENABLE 5 7 8 BLACK VIDEO TRG DISABLE Disables auto changeover by the video trigger ENABLE Performs a changeover if any video trigger is activated Selects changeover trigger mode for below 3 audio triggers 5 7 9 AUDIO LOSS TRG DISABLE 5 7 10 AUDIO ERR TRG AUDIO TRG DISABLE ENABLE 5 7 11 SILENCE TRG DISABLE Disables auto changeover by the audio trigger ENABLE Performs a changeover if any audio trigger is activated The CHGOV DISABLED message is displayed if CHANGEOVER is set to DISABLE in the VIDEO INPUT SET menu Sec 5 7 1 If this message is displayed a changeover will not be performed even though VIDEO TRG AUDIO TRG is enabled 66 5 7 5 SDI ERROR TRG This menu is accessible only if the FA 95CO software option is installed Menu button 56 IN SEL DOWNMIX Parameter Default Setting range Description Steps DISABLE Enables or disables auto changeover for SDI signal loss an TRIGGER DISABLE ENABLE unsupported video format or TRS error Sets the duration of SDI signal IMMEDIATE loss unsupported video format or
167. Mob 5F DC Caption format used in digital television broadcasting for mobile receivers standarized in ARIB STD B37 Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets ARIB B 37 Ana 5F DD Analog signal closed caption data packets standarized in ARIB STD B37 Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets ARIB B 37 SD 5F DE SD signal closed caption data packets standarized in ARIB STD B37 Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets ARIB B 37 HD 5F DF HD signal closed caption data packets standarized in ARIB STD B37 Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets ARIB TR B 22 5F E0 HD ancillary data packet for transmission standarized in ARIB TR B22 Operational Guidelines for Transport of the Ancillary Data for HDTV Contribution ARIB TRB23 1 5F FA Dummy packet standarized in ARIB TR B23 Operational Guidelines for Ancillary Data in Inter Stationary Information Exchange ARIB TRB23 2 5F FB User data 2 in user data packets standarized in ARIB TR B23 Operational Guidelines for Ancillary Data in Inter Stationary Information Exchange 279 FA 9500 Indication DID SDID hexadecimal Description ARIB TRB23 1 5F FC User data 1 in user data packets standarized in ARIB TR B23 Operational Guidelines for Ancillary Data in Inter Stationary Information Excha
168. NT Chroma Level 100 0 _ j _ _ BY LUNITY Setup Black 0 0 jim HLN oy i H Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps Parameter Default o Description Video Level 100 0 do Adjusts the video level Chroma Level 100 0 Eo ek Adjusts the chrominance level Setup Black 0 0 a 1m Adjusts the black level Hue 0 0 1 a ul Adjusts the color phase IMPORTANT If Correction Mode is set to Sepia in the Color Corrector menu 9 2 8 the Chroma Level and Hue settings cannot be changed 9 2 5 BY PASS Operate Clicking block 5 on the video block diagram opens the BY PASS Operate setting dialog box A nitp 1 192 168 0 10 Operate BY PA E EK BY PASS Operate BY PASS Operate Operate BY PASS Close Refresh E Done MD Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Setting range Description Parameter Default BY PASS Connects input signals directly to the BY PASS Operate BY PASS output connector Input video signals are output Operate p Operate without processing See section 2 2 Rear Panel items number 2 4 and
169. NV1 and or 2 MODE REMOVE 95 5 11 NTSC SETUP This menu which allows you to set the analog composite Y Pb Pr or Y C NTSC input and output signal settings is accessible only if the FA 95AIO option is installed Menu button NTSC SETUP ON VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description OFF Set to OFF for signals without 7 5 IRE setup Mist SERI OFF ON Set to ON for signals with 7 5 IRE setup 5 12 PAL M MODE SET Allows PAL M signals to be output from the COMPOSITE OUT and Y C connectors PAL M MODE SET 115 Menu button MODE DISABLE VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description DISABLE DISABLE Allows NTSC signals to be output MODE DISABLE ENABLE ENABLE Allows PAL M signals to be output 1 Y C output is supported only if the FA 95AIO option is installed and Y C output is selected 2 This setting enables PAL M output for COMPOSITE OUT and Y C outputs however NTSC signal output will be disabled To synchronize the PAL M output input a PAL M BB or 59 94 29 97 Hz tri level sync signal to the GENLOCK IN connector NTSC BB signals cannot synchronize PAL M output signals PAL signals can always be input and output regardless of this setting 96 5 13 Various Signal Status Display STATUS 5 13 1 UNIT ALARM Menu button AL ad STATUS NORMAL eee Parameter Display Descriptio
170. O Option A Long Term OUT 99 9 to 0 a052StatusLoudness2OutLong 16 INTEGER Session Time Elapsed time a952StatusLoudness2SessionTime 17 INTEGER OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 307 5 3 51 Option B loudness status Momentary IN 99 9 to 0 a952StatusLoudness1InMomentary 1 NTEGER Short Term IN 99 9 to 0 a952StatusLoudness 1InShort 2 NTEGER Long Term IN 99 9 to 0 a952StatusLoudness1lnLong 3 NTEGER LOUD MEASURE 99 9 to 0 a952StatusLoudness10utMomenta 1A ry 4 NTEGER O Short Term OUT 99 9 to 0 a952StatusLoudness1OutShort 5 NTEGER O Long Term OUT 99 9 to 0 a952StatusLoudness1OutLong 6 NTEGER O Loudness Session Time Elapsed time a952StatusLoudness1SessionTime 7 NTEGER O Option B Momentary IN 99 9 to 0 a952StatusLoudness2InMomentary 11 NTEGER l O Short Term IN 99 9 to 0 a952StatusLoudness2InShort 12 INTEGER O Long Term IN 99 9 to O a952StatusLoudness2InLong 13 INTEGER come MEASURE Momentary OUT 99 9 to 0 ee usLoudness2OutMomenta 44 INTEGER i O Short Term OUT 99 9 to 0 a952StatusLoudness2OutShort 15 INTEGER Long Term OUT 99 9 to O a952StatusLoudness20utLong 16 INTEGER Session Time Elapsed time a952StatusLoudness2SessionTime 17 INTEGER 275 Object group Front TITLE Item name Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type Read Get Write Set OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 5 3 100 Dolby option AUX inpu output signal status Dolby Option Dolby
171. ONV2 Keyer Loudness1 2 Control 1 Sets ID 1 through 256 to logos to be Logo ID 11 1 7 1 256 inserted for outputs 1 through 7 of converters 1 and 2 1 Whenever the In Out setting is changed Assign is reset to None Reset Assign 2 The input functions consist of pulse mode and level mode functions See the INPUT FUNCTION in section 7 4 GPI SETTING for details 3 Details of the output functions are shown in the 4 OUTPUT FUNCTION in section 7 4 GPI SETTING 4 Input assignment cannot be changed if FA 95CO is installed with Changeover enabled To enable input assignments set Input Select section 9 2 1 to disable 5 Changeover is selectable only if FA 95CO is installed 6 If FS Mode gt Synchro Mode in section 9 4 1 Video System is set to Line Sync AVDL or Input Lock the Freeze setting will not function but will be displayed as Freeze To enable Freeze for Input be sure to set Synchro Mode in section 9 4 1 Video System to Frame Sync 7 When the FA 95CO is installed and Changeover is enabled the value will be displayed with an asterisk as Input SDI1 Input SDI2 or Input Composite indicating the input selection cannot be changed See section 9 2 1 Input Select for details 8 DC Power 1 and 2 are selectable only if FA 95PS is installed 9 Selectable only if FA 95AIO is installed 10 Shown only if the FA 95ALA option is installed 11 The Logo ID setting box will be
172. OPTION A Ver 11 FA 95DACBL 199 Unknown FPGA1 Ver ISlotA FPGA1 version a95FPGA1VerSlotA 2 OCTET STRING 5 13 O FPGA2 Ver SlotA FPGA2 version a95FPGA2VerSlotA 3 OCTET STRING 5 13 JO SOFT Ver ISlotA Software version a95CPUVerSlotA 4 OCTET STRING 5 13 O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 1 200 2 Option SlotB 0 notinstalled 1 FA 95AIO 4 FA 95DE E Name 5 FA 95D D a95SlotTypeB 1 INTEGER O OPTION Slot B OPTION B Ver 11 FA 95DACBL 99 Unknown FPGA1 Ver SlotA FPGA1 version a95FPGA1VerSlotB 2 OCTET STRING 5 13 O FPGA2 Ver ISlotA FPGA2 version a95FPGA2VerSlotB 3 OCTET STRING 5 T3 O SOFT Ver ISlotA Software version a95CPUVerSlotB 4 OCTET STRING 5 13 O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 2 2 Input video signal selection 0 SDI1 1 SDI2 2 Composite Input Select 3 YPbPr SMPTE a95VideolnputSelect 1 INTEGER O O 4 YPbPr BETACAM 5 component RGB INPUT SEL VIDEO IN SETTING 6 component Y C If no signal is present 0 Back Color Video Loss Mode 1 Auto Freeze a95VideoLossMode 2 NTEGER O O 2 Color Bar 3 Output Disable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 2 3 Output video signal selection Mode O Fix 1 Auto a95VideoOutMode 1 NTEGER VIDEO OUT MODE 0 710801 Inaccessible SD gt UP HD Format 3 TOSDPeE a95UpConvertSDto 2 NTEGER 4 1080p 3G a 0 Converter 1 Assign Fix 1 Converter 2 a950utSDI1 2FixedSel 11 INTEGER O O SDI 1 2 OUT SET auto o HD Inaccessible 1 SD a950utSDI1 2AutoSel 12 INTEGER Assign Fix R a a95OutSDI3 4Fi
173. OURCE channels corresponding to CH1 8 will be the default value If Input Selection is set to Direct Input Selection the settings will be CH1 Source CH1 CH8 Source CH8 If Input Selection is set to Dolby Decoder Output the settings will be CH1 Dolby DEC 1 CH8 Dolby DEC 8 3 Shown if FA 95ALA option is installed See section 9 3 17 Automatic Loudness Adjustment FA 95ALA for details on Loudness 1 2 settings Dolby Encoder Mode Setting Parameter Default Setting range Description 5 1 2 1 5 1 2x1 4 4 1 4 2x2 4 2 2x1 4 4x1 4x2 3x2 2x1 2x2 4x1 2 6x1 8x1 Program 5 1 2 5 1 Selects Dolby E encoder program Configuration i 4 2 configuration 4 2x1 3x2 2x2 2x1 2 4x1 6x1 4 2 2 2 2x1 4x1 7 1 7 1 Screen e 20bit Selects the bit width of the Dolby E Aena eum 16bit encoder output ban Selects a video output to which the Dolby E encoder output is prame RER GANYI CONV2 A Converter 1 or converter 2 Selects a metadata to be used for Dolby E encoding Internal Uses Program Configuration and Bit Depth settings Meta Data Internal Other metadata will be reset to Input mena Dolby Decoder Output derauli Dolby Decoder Output Uses the metadata of the Dolby E signal input to the Dolby decoder The program configuration and bit depth settings will be ineffective 1 If Bit Depth is set to 16bit the is displayed and the program functions as 5 1 To set to
174. Output Settings for details on embedding 193 9 3 5 Audio Output Delay Clicking block 5 on the audio block diagram opens the Audio Delay dialog box F http 192 168 0 10 Audio Delay Microsoft Internet EBX Audio Output Delay Master q El UNITY Audio Total Delay Set CH2 ms i BNT CH3 ms H YLUNITY CH4 16 ms i BNT CH5 16 ms j Bony CH 6 ms i BNT CH7 ms j Bony cus 1em Y uy CH9 ms j BNT CH 10 16 ms UH UNITY CH 11 ms y BNT CH 12 16 ms p BNT CH 13 ms i BNr CHM 16 ms YH BUNTY CH 15 16 ms ee Bon ime HH Bu Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps Parameter Default Setting range Description Master 4 1000msec Audio Output 4 msec Sets the delay for Delay SOURCE channels CH1 16 4 1000msec 1 The total value of Master and individual channel cannot exceed the setting range The setting value will stop at the end of the range Enabling Delay Adjust under Video Sub in the 9 4 1 Video System while CONV1 or CONV2 is in use adds a delay equivalant to 1 frame 2 frames for progressive signals of the input video signa
175. Output Output AES5 6 and 7 8 connectors are set to be 9 output connectors Reference 18dBFS Selects the reference level for digital audio Level 20dBFS 20dBFS signals See section 11 ANALOG DIGITAL 24dBFS Audio Input Output Level for details al Selects an audio application for digital audio f rofessional channels Grade Professional Consumer Professional Optimized for professional use Consumer Optimized for consumer use Resolution 24Bit a Selects an audio word length for Digital Audio 16Bit output signals 1 All connectors are set to be input connectors and this menu will be disabled if the optional FA 95DACBL is installed 224 4 Digital Audio Silence Setting Parameter Default Setting range Description Sets the duration to determine the SDI Silence Detect 2sec 1 10sec embedded audio and AES input signals are Time silent 72dBFS 66dBFS Sets the audio level to determine the SDI Silence Level 72dBFS 60dBFS embedded audio and AES input signals are 54dBFS silent 48dBFS SDI Input Audio Parameter Default Setting range Description Enables or disables automatic phase adjustment for input embedded audio Disable channel groups Enable Enable Automatic adjustment normal setting Disable No adjustment Selects audio clock signal to use for de embedding and processing audio data in HD SDI input signal Auto De embeds HD SDI embedded audio data using the au
176. P 2 REFERENCE REFERENCE group are NON PCM Automatically selects CH 5 6 audio clock signal synchronized to the output CH 7 8 video signal if all signals in the audio group are PCM REFEFENCE Audio clock signal AUTO synchronized to the output video signal REFERENCE Used to synchronize audio with the video GROUP 3 REFERENCE CH 9 10 signals processed in the SRC CH 11 12 CH 1 2 to 15 16 Audio clock input in SOURCE channels CH 1 2 to 15 16 To output asynchronous audio signals select one input channel pair for each group AUTO 2 REFERENCE PRONESE REFERENSE CH 13 14 For SD SDI outputs REFERENCE is CH 15 16 automatically selected regardless of the settings 1 See section 6 5 AUDIO MAPPING MAPPING for details on SOURCE settings 2 Embedded audio signals are divided into 4 groups Each group consists of 4 audio channels Group 1 CH 1 to 4 Group 2 CH 5 to 8 Group 3 CH 9 to 12 Group 4 CH 13 to 16 The audio signals in the same group are transmitted together using the same audio clock 48kHz PCM audio signals will be synchronized to a genlock signal in the SRC sampling rate converter so as to synchronize with the output video signal Non PCM audio signals compressed audio data such as AC 3 do not go into SRC If the NON PCM audio input signal is asynchronous with the output video signal the NON PCM audio output signal will be asynchronous The asynchronous NON PCM audio signals can be
177. PTE RGB SMPTE and BETACAM are SD SDI Y C output formats Outputs black signals if the output signal s from CONV1 and CONV2 is are 1080p and FA 95AlO output is set to YPbPr or RGB See the YPbPr RGB Output Format table in section 5 8 4 COMPONENT SET Outputs black signals if the output signal s from CONV1 and CONV2 is are HD SDI and FA 95AlO output is set to Y C See the YPbPr RGB Output Format table in section 5 8 4 COMPONENT SET 186 9 2 12 Composite Clip Clicking block 13 on the video block diagram opens the Composite Clip dialog box See section 5 6 3 VIDEO CLIP Setting Ranges for details 2 http 192 168 0 10 Composite Clip Microsoft Internet Explo E BK Composite Clip Mode Clip Mode O Composite Clip Composite Clip White Clip Black Clip Internet Parameter Default Setingrange Description Steps Off Composite Clip enables clipping Clip Mode Off Composite Clip on the composite output signals 50 150 Sets the upper threshold of analog White Clip 150 0 0 5 composite color space 50 50 Sets the lower threshold of analog Black Clip 50 0 0 5 composite color space The COMPOSITE CLIP settings are effective only on the analog composite outputs The settings are not effective on the SDI1 2 and SDI3 4 outputs To enable the Composite Clip menu set Clip Mode to Off in the YPbPr RGB Clip menu 9 2 10 18
178. R BT 1685 Inter station control data packets RDD8 OP47 SDP 43 02 SMPTE RDD 8 Subtitling Distribution packet SDP RDD8 OP47 Mult 43 03 SMPTE RDD 8 Transport of ANC packet in an ANC Multipacket S346M 43 13 Time Division Multiplexing Video Signals and Generic Data over HD SDI RP214 KLV V 44 04 SMPTE RP 214 KLV Metadata transport in VANC space RP214 KLV H 44 14 SMPTE RP 214 KLV Metadata transport in HANC space RP223 UMID 44 44 SMPTE RP 223 Packing UMID and Program Identification Label Data into SMPTE 291M Ancillary Data Packets S2020 Aud 45 01 SMPTE 2020 1 Compressed Audio Metadata S2020AudPr1 2 45 02 SMPTE 2020 1 Compressed Audio Metadata S2020AudPr3 4 45 03 SMPTE 2020 1 Compressed Audio Metadata S2020AudPr5 6 45 04 SMPTE 2020 1 Compressed Audio Metadata S2020AudPr7 8 45 05 SMPTE 2020 1 Compressed Audio Metadata S2020AudPr9 10 45 06 SMPTE 2020 1 Compressed Audio Metadata 2020AudPr11 12 45 07 SMPTE 2020 1 Compressed Audio Metadata S2020AudPr13 14 45 08 SMPTE 2020 1 Compressed Audio Metadata S2020 AudP15 16 45 09 SMPTE 2020 1 Compressed Audio Metadata RP215 Film Xfer 51 01 RP215 Film Codes in VANC space ARIB TRB 18 5F CF Color information packets standarized in ARIB TR B18 Color Frame Information for Component Interface of 525 60 Television System ARIB B 37 1D0 Closed caption data packets for expansion standarized in ARIB STD B37 E Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets 2DB ARIB B 37
179. R o jo Audio Source a95AudioMappingSourcePair13 14 7 INTEGER o jo Audio Soure a95AudioMappingSourcePair15 16 8 INTEGER o jo oid 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 3 10 Loudness Loudness1 Control R on a95Loudness1 Control 1 NTEGER O O Loudness Meas1 Loudness1 Mesure esep a95Loudness1 Mesure 2 NTEGER O O Canes Mesure 1 Clear a95Loudness1 MesureClear 3 NTEGER O O Loudness 0 0FF Loudness2 Control q ON a95Loudness2 Control 11 NTEGER O O Loudness Meas2 Loudness2 Mesure Hens a95Loudness2 Mesure 12 INTEGER O O Pougness2 Mesure 1 Clear a95Loudness2 MesureClear 13 INTEGER O O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 4 VIDEO SYSTEM BY PASS BY PASS BY PASS OPERATE pe rs a95BypassOut 1 NTEGER O O 0 OFF 1 Full CB VIDEO TEST SIGNAL 2 75 CB a95VideoTestSignal 2 INTEGER O O Test signal TEST SIGNAL 3 SMPTE CB 4 RAMP AUDIO TEST SIGNAL p a z Tone a95AudioTestSignal 3 NTEGER O O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 5 1 Unit alarm 0 Normal FAN1 1 Stopped a95Fan1Status 1 NTEGER 0 Normal FAN2 1 Stopped a95Fan2Status 2 NTEGER UNIT UNIT ALARM B Power a a95Power1Status 11 INTEGER 1 Not Install Power2 O Normal a95Power2Status 12 INTEGER O 1 Ab normal 273 Object group Front TITLE I
180. REA PANA 19 23 Internal Settings cid A Did 22 2 31 DIPSWItCO SO INOS iran listas 22 A A O O 23 3 1 For HD SD SDI Frame Synchronizer Use ococoooccoccccccococonononcnococonnnncnnononocnnnnnoncnnnnncnnnnno 23 3 2 For HD SD SDI Simultaneous Output cccccccccnococoocconococinnnononnnnnononcnncnnnnncnnnncnninannnnncinnnno 24 3 3 To Embed AES Input Signals on SDI Signals ooococcccnconccocooccccccoconocanonononnnnnconcnnrnnccnnnno 25 3 4 To Embed Analog Audio Signals on SDI Signals oooconnnnonococcnnncccccnnconcnccnnncnncnnannnoncnno 26 3 5 Connecting a COMPUTED kisser ne cece cece r cece a E N a a pt a a iih 27 3 6 Connecting to the REMOTE GPI Connector ccccececeeceececeeeeeeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeaneess 28 4Front Panel Operations dun a E EAEE 29 4 1 Powering O N secarse nba afiladas 29 4 2 Basic Operations 2 0 0 0 cccceccceecece cece eceeeeee cece eeeeececeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeecneeaeeseeeeesseceieaeeetereeeseases 29 4 2 1 Accessing MENUS a 30 4 2 2 Menu BUON S 2c adrede td 31 4 2 3 Arrow ButtONSucuidiciocoga ect o idad 33 4 2 4 Consecutive Viewing Of Settings oooooounicccocccnnnncicncononccnnnnoncnncnnannnononcnnnnnnnannnncnnno 33 A 2 9 Page JUMP Feature ct dit A chine ahaa eta ana 34 4 2 6 Changing Setting Values ooooooooccccnnicicoconooncncnnoccnncnnonononnncnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnaninens 34 4 2 7 Resetting to Default ooooononnnnccccccnncccccnnnnnonccnnncononnnnnonnnnnnconnnnnnn
181. REMAPPING menu Sec 6 1 2 e ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 8 in the AES REMAPPING menu Sec 6 2 3 e OUTPUT settings in the Dolby AUX OUTPUT menu Sec 6 9 1 1 23 3 Verification After FA 95AlO Removal Replacement Reset the following menu items if the FA 95AlO option card is removed or moved e IN SEL settings in the VIDEO INPUT SET menu Sec 5 7 1 INPUT settings in the GPI SETTING menu Sec 7 4 23 4 Verification After FA 95ALA Removal Replacement Reset the following menu items if the FA 95ALA option card is removed or moved ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 16 in the SDI REMAPPING menu Sec 6 1 2 e ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 8 in the AES REMAPPING menu Sec 6 2 3 e ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 4 in the ANALOG REMAPPING menu Sec 6 3 5 e ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 8 in the Dolby ENCODER INPUT menu Sec 6 9 2 1 294 24 Expansion Slots A B Alert The above alert that appears after turning on the FA 9500 indicates an alarm or alarms for an option card or cards installed in the expansion slot A and or B This indication appears only after powering on the FA 9500 Indicates failure of the option card installed in the slot indicated as FAILED If this indiation appears turn the power of the unit off immediately and contact your service agency or distributor 295 25 Specifications and Dimensions 25 1 Unit Specifications Input Video Formats Output Video Formats Video Input
182. RTER 2 Menu button VIDEO OP AUDIO OP Setting range oa Parameter Default Steps Description Allows you to enable or disable the keyer for OFF the Converter 2 output signal KETER ORF ON ON Enables to display logos selected in the 5 9 1 3 CONV2 LOGO SEL menu 4 0 100 Allows you to set a key level for a logo to be LEVEL 100 0 1 output to the Converter 2 output signal 9 Allows you to set the horizontal positon for a H POS 0 a logo to be output to the Converter 2 output 2 Pixel l signal f 9 Allows you to set the vertical positon for a V POS 0 logo to be output to the Converter 2 output ne signal 1 Key level and position settings are saved for each logo ID Changing logo settings for Converter 2 will also change the logo settings of Converter 1 using the same logo 2 Actual logo position differs depending on the logo format selected when registering the logo See section 5 9 1 5 Logo Position Setting Range for details LEVEL and H V POS settings are disabled under the following conditions e No logo is assigned to the logo ID selected under LOGO ID in the 5 9 1 3 CONV2 LOGO SEL menu e Different formats are displayed for LOGO FORMAT and CONV2 in the 5 9 1 3 CONV2 LOGO SEL menu m m ooo lt lt oomm 0 MN zw K L H V 5 9 1 5 Logo Position Setting Range Positional settings will vary according to the logo formats as shown below
183. SEL CH SEL CH1 VIDEO OP ASSIGN SOURCE 1 AUDIO OP Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a signal to be input to the Dolby encoder DIRECT IN SEL DIRECT IN SEL SOURCE Dolby DEC OUT channel signals Dolby DEC OUT Output signal from the Dolby decoder Selects a channel to which to CH SEL CH 1 CH 1 8 assign a signal When DIRECT IN SEL is When INPUT is set to DIRECT IN selected SEL SOURCE 1 16 SOURCE 1 16 SOURCE signal PCM DOWNMIX L selected in the 6 5 AUDIO INPUT DIRECT IN SEL 4KHz TONE mixed signal generated from SOURCE channel signals SILENCE 500Hz 1KHz TONE Test signal L TONE R SILENCE Mute signal LOUD1 C LOUD1 2 L R C LFE Ls Rs ASSIGN SOURCE 1 2 LOUD2 3 LFE Loudness processed signal of the Ls selected SOURCE channel Rs When INPUT is set to Dolby DEC When Dolby DEC OUT OUT is selected Dolby DEC1 8 PCM signal output Dolby DEC 1 8 from the Dolby decoder DolbyDM L DolbyDM L R Down mixed z signal generated from NE Dolby decoded PCM signal E 500Hz 1KHz TONE Test signal 1KHz TONE TONE SILENCE SILENCE Mute signal 1 DIRECT IN SEL and Dolby DEC OUT settings are retained until changed When an INPUT setting DIRECT IN SEL or Dolby DEC OUT is changed CH1 8 signal assignments will be changed to that of the INPUT selection DIRECT IN SEL and Dolby DEC OUT signals cannot be input to the Dolby encoder together Dolby Digital signal output from the Dolby
184. SIGN ANA1 4 Unvisible if ASSIGN is not set to any 7 SOURCE 1 16 1 See section 6 5 AUDIO MAPPING MAPPING for details on SOURCE settings 2 See section 6 7 DOWN MIX SET for details on DOWN MIX settings 3 See section 6 9 1 2 Dolby DECODER INPUT for details on Dolby DEC settings 4 See section 6 9 1 4 Dolby DOWNMIX for details on Dolby DM settings 5 See sections 6 9 2 Dolby ENCODER SETTING for details on Dolby ENC settings 6 Not shown if the FA 95D D option is not installed INPUT and 6 9 2 2 Dolby ENCODER 7 Not shown if the FA 95DE E option is not installed 8 Not shown if the FA 95ALA option is not installed See section 6 9 3 4 LOUDNESS CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT for details on LOUD 1 2 settings Auto Channel Pairing for NON PCM Audio Inputs The FA 9500 recognizes NON PCM audio input signals in L R channel pair units and adjusts assignments according to the signal selected for the L channel L R channel pairs are SOURCE 1 2 SOURCE 3 4 SOURCE 15 16 The channel assignments that are changed by the adjustment will be shown with as CH1 SOURCE2 115 Auto channel pairing example on NON PCM inputs Conditions NON PCM inputs in SOURCE 1 and 2 PCM inputs in SOURCE 3 through 16 Entered value Menu display Auto channel pairing CH1 SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE1 CH2 SOURCE2 CH2 SOURCE2 CH2 SOURCE2 Un
185. SOU GROUPS IOS audio for which to set the trigger DISABLE Enables or disables auto changeover TRIGGER DIRABEE ENABLE for signal loss of SDI embedded audio Sets the detected SDI embedded audio signal loss duration required to trigger a DURATION 0 0sec a ieee changeover 0 1sec This setting will be shared by all 4 audio groups The CHGOV DISABLED message is displayed if CHANGEOVER is disabled in the VIDEO INPUT SET 5 7 1 menu or VIDEO TRG is disabled in the CHGOV CHANGEOVER MODE SET 5 7 4 menu If this message is displayed a changeover will not be performed even though AUDIO LOSS TRG is enabled 5 7 10 AUDIO ERR TRG This menu is accessible only if the FA 95CO software option is installed Menu button IN SEL 61 DOWNMIX Setting range Steps Description Parameter Default Selects a channel from the embedded CH SEL GEI eEnttode audio for which to set the trigger Enables or disables auto changeover for DISABLE errors listed below TRIGGER DISABLE ENABLE DBN Data Block Number discontinuity Channel status discontinuity HD audio clock data error or change Sets the detected audio error duration required to trigger a changeover This setting will be shared by all 16 0 0to 1 0sec channels 0 1sec To avoid an unexpected changeover triggered by a switchover of input signals via router set DURATION to longer than 0 2 sec DURATION 0 0sec
186. S_ 16 dBFS 20 dBFS 24 dBFS 10 dBm 4dBFS 14 dBFS 18 dBFS 22 dBFS See REF LEVEL in section 6 10 2 DIGITAL AUDIO for details on the Digital Reference Level settings See section 6 3 1 ANALOG IN LEVEL for details on the ANALOG IN LEVEL settings 260 12 Analog Audio Connection For balanced input and output connect the hot and cold wires of an analog audio signal to plus and minus pins respectively For unbalanced input connect the analog audio signal line to the plus pin and route the ground line to the minus pin and COM pin For unbalanced output connect the analog audio signal line to the plus pin and the ground line to the COM pin Analog Audio IN OUT Connector 25 pin D sub female inch screws 1 10 9 2992999999999 Or iO OOOO Pin Assignments Pin No Setting 1 CH4 OUT 2 CH4 OUT COM 3 CH3 OUT 4 CH2 OUT 5 CH2 OUT COM 6 CH1 OUT 7 CH4 IN 8 CH4 IN COM 9 CH3 IN 10 CH2 IN 11 CH2 IN COM 12 CH1 IN 13 NC 14 CH4 OUT 15 CH3 OUT 16 CH3 OUT COM 17 CH2 OUT 18 CH1 OUT 19 CH1 OUT COM 20 CH4 IN 21 CH3 IN 22 CH3 IN COM 23 CH2 IN 24 CH1 IN 25 CH1 IN COM 261 13 Dolby E Decoder Encoder Channel Assignment Table Dolby E Decoder Output Encloder Input Channel Assignment Out In Out In Out ln Out In Out ln Out In Out In Out In
187. System Audio System ANC Settings SO Phase HD Phase SD Line Mask H Phase 0 clk H_ g UNITY 1080 H Phase clk _j _ El UNITY Lines Pass OBlank V Phase Oline fH E UNITY 1080 Y Phose Line ff H UNIV Liner Pass OBlonk SC Phase 0 0 El UNITY 720 H Phase 0 clk HA El UNITY Line 0 Pass OBlank 720 V Phase 0 Line H UNITY Line 9 OPass OBlank Video Position 8 s A 7 Lino 10 Pass OBlank H Position 0 Pixel HF El UNITY Composite Setting nea 3 sis erro A ni s ni V Position D Line g UNITY Comb Filter OAdaptive 3O Adaptive2D OTrap Only se gt NR Love i On e Line 12 Pass Blank 13 Pass C Freeze Setting Cross Color Of Lino 1 Pa Blank Freeze OniOtt Don On 4 a Line 14 Pass OBlonk z NTSC Setup Off Con Freeze Mode Frame Odd Even Line 15 Pass OBlank rana S 8 Untry Video Sub Lino 16 Pass OBllank Black amp White 0H On Line 17 Pass OBlonk FS ode VITS Son On Line 10 Pass OBlank Synchro Mode Frame Sync Oline Sync OAVDL Cinput Lock i Delay Adjus Off On Lino 19 Pass OBlank Sync Format 1080 59 94 4 3 z NTSC Setup orf COn Line 20 Pass OBlonk Forced Fleld ot Oodd Even Line 21 Pass OBlank Converter 1 Ancillary Setting Converter 2 Ancillary Setting Cine 22 ies Dile ANC Mode OHV ANC Detail ANC Mode CHN ANC Detall Line 23 Pass OBlonk HANC Overwrite in Data Blank HANC SOv
188. TE 57 The figures below compare the reference values dotted line for output and the actual values after correction full line TARGET BLACK TARGET BLACK Large TARGET BLACK setting Small TARGET BLACK setting TARGET WHITE TARGET WHITE Large TARGET WHITE setting Small TARGET WHITE setting Relationship between IN BLACK IN WHITE and TARGET BLACK TARGET WHITE levels Input image 0 100 IN BLACK IN WHITE Output image 100 TARGET BLACK TARGET WHIE 58 5 5 4 USER1 2 AREA SET Selecting USER1 or 2 AREA for AREA in the AVO SETTING menu opens the USER1 2 AREA SET menus 73 Menu button AVO EL MAPPING E To set the sample area set the start point and the size 3 3 Parameter Default ae Description START H 0 Pixel Pixel Specifies the horizontal start point START V 0 Line Bling Specifies the vertical start point H SIZE 360 periods et horizontal size distance from the V SIZE 360 no signal ie vertical size distance from the START V START H HSIZE Default setting of sample area in 1080 59 94i IMPORTANT The sample area should be set within the effective lines and pixels Otherwise the sample area will automatically revert to their default values Be particularly careful in the following cases When the video format is changed to SDTV after the sample area has been set When the sample area settings are c
189. TUS Td A A A A A add 109 5 16 CONVTANC OU Tort ii ia eds 109 5 16 1 CONV1 52016 OUT cesa lolo tail 109 5 16 2 CONV1 VI OUT cc niae asaka daaa a aaea iaai aa aaia 110 5 16 23 CONVIWSS QUT a AA A A e CaN aaee naai Ta 110 5 17 CONVTANG OUTA nin era 111 5 18 CONV2Z ANC OU Tiara 111 5 18 1 CONV2 52016 OUT cuestionario Aaaa aE 111 9 18 2 CONV2 VI OUT sieges eeu ease ide 112 5 18 3 CONV2 WSS OUT tdi ake avis a tld ster deat fee a eae a 112 5 19 CONVZ ANG OUT nissan 113 AUDIO Setting Serea atc A A A AAA A ee a es 114 6 1 SDI AUDIO Settings SDI AUDIO 0ooooccccccnccconcononccnnnccconnnanoncnonononnonannnnnnonnnnnnonannnnncicnnn 114 6 121 SBLAUDIO GAIN pant i en a A Ueno in eee 114 6 1 2 SDl REMAPPING ie lrn naea aa lastra Ea anaa eera AATED AE 115 6 1 3 SDI MONO SUM coi a n alae tea 117 6 1 4 SDI AUDIO CLOCK iia A A AA ates 117 6 1 5 SDUIN AUDIO sota ac 118 6 2 AES AUDIO Settings AES AUDIO oooocococccocononoccccncnccncnnnnnoncnnononnnnnnnnnncnnnnccnannnnnnncnnnnno 119 62221 AESAINIGAIN 200 A eee A 119 6 2 2 AES HYSTERES Socia a ias 119 6 2 3 AES REMAPPING ahnen etatas aaa aaa aeaaeae eaei adaa EAA aaar sa 120 6 2 4 AES NC 0Y cece eee ceeeeaeeeeeeeeeceeceeaeeeeeeeeseeeeusaeeeeeeeeseeeensas 122 6 2 5 AES VO SETUP cocoa la aia 122 6 3 ANALOG AUDIO Settings ANALOG ocococococonocccnnccccnconnnnncnnnnonnnnonnnnnonnnnnncnninnnnnnncnnnnno 123 6 3 1 ANALOG IN LEVE oo iaa 123 623 2 ANAL O G IN GAIN ccoo carrito
190. UNKNOWN NON PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 BLANK UNKNOWN Unidentifiable 2 BLANK No audio signal embedding PEEASS BY PASS By passed through 5 13 12 SDI 3 4 OUT AUDIO Menu button STATUS OTHER Purne T UD Ya OOO CH13 PCM CH14 PCM CH15 PCM CH16 PC Parameter Display Description Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 PCM through CH16 of the SDI 3 4 output ONS PCM Normal audio signal x z SILENCE Mute signal Seo UNKNOWN NON PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 BLANK UNKNOWN Unidentifiable BY PASS BLANK No audio signal embedding BY PASS By passed through 5 13 13 AES OUT AUDIO Menu button CH 1 PC TEGH a CH 4 PC Sen AES OUT AUDIO 570 Ho TEL CH 6 PC CH 7 PCM CH 8 PCM Parameter Display Description Displays the status of the audio signal output from the PCM DIGITAL AUDIO IO connectors SILENCE PCM Normal audio signal CH1 CH8 NON PCM SILENCE Mute signal UNKNOWN NON PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 INPUT SETTING UNKNOWN Unidentifiable INPUT SETTING Connector is set to input 5 13 14 ANALOG OUT AUDIO OG 0 Menu button Cima ll Sook EN CHE CH 2 SILENCE STATUS CH 3 SILENCE CH 4 SILENCE GTHER Parameter Display Description Displays the status of the output audio signal CH1 CH4 SILENCE from the ANALOG AUDIO connector OUT SILENCE Mute signal OUT Output signal is present
191. V Additional Features Redundant power supply unit Changeover function Remote control unit via Ethernet Dolby E Digital decoder and Dolby E encoder Analog component I O Automatic Loudness Adjustment Function VVVVVV 1 3 FA 95LG GUI Download The FA 9500 Logo generator function is designed to be used with logo management software FA 95LG GUI enabling logo data import to FA 9500 via Ethernet The FA 95LG GUI can be downloaded from FOR A s website http www for a com products fa9500 fa95lg_qui zip The operation manual for the FA 95LG GUI will download automatically along with the software 17 2 Panel Descriptions 2 1 Front Panel ae e DISPLAY AREA 7 sl El Es S E E No Name Description Ref Used to turn the unit ON OFF Pressing the side turns on 1 POWER switch the power 4 1 Lit when pressed and the buttons and controls on the front panel except this LOCK button are disabled my LOCK button To enable the disabled buttons and controls press and hold this button down for several seconds Bypasses input signals video and audio The input signals 3 are directly output
192. V ANC setting Pass or Blank will be displayed AFD Displays Active Format Description code in hexadecimal format and the AFD type Bit 13 0 Displays the inserted Bit13 to BitO in hexadecimal format CONV1 2 Ancillary Data Packet Output Status Displays the content names and inserted lines of the 4 total ancillary data packets inserted into Converter 1 and 2 output signals See section 19 FA 9500 Ancillary Data Packet Name List for details on ancillary data names and DID and SDID of formats Displays if no ancillary data is inserted 250 9 7 5 Changeover Status The Changeover Status page is displayed only if FA 95CO option is installed FA 9500 Logout EEE A Video Audio System GPI Utility Status Network gt Unit Yideo Status Audio Status Unit Information ANC Status Changeover Status Changeover Settings Changeover Status Changeover Video Status Changeover Audio Status Changeover Disable Video Disable SDI Error Disable Audio Loss Disable Video Trigger Disable Audio Disable Format Error Disable Audio Error Disable Audio Trigger Disable Video In spi CRC Error Disable Silence Disable Black Video Disable Audio Loss Status Audio Error Status Silence Status Group 1 Disable CH 1 Disable CH 9 Disable CH 1 Disable CH 9 Disable Group 2 Disable CH 2 Disable CH 10 Disable CH 2 Disable CH 10 Disable Group 3 Disable CH 3 Disable CH 11
193. able below ao acta ore Color Corrector Menu Reference x O O WHITE LEVEL 5 2 1 WHITE LEVEL x O O BLACK LEVEL 5 2 2 BLACK LEVEL x O O GAMMA LEVEL 5 2 3 GAMMA LEVEL x x O CORRECTION MODE CURVE 5 2 4 COLOR CORRECT O The setting is enabled x The setting is disabled The message NOT ADJUST appears when the disabled menu is opened 60 5 6 CLIP VIDEO CLIP 5 6 1 YPbPr RGB CLIP Menu button YPbPr RG Cll 45 CLIP MODE OFF CLIP DELAY Parameter Default Setting range Description OFF Selects a mode whether to clip a ions OFF YPbPr CLIP signals in the YPbPr color space or Clip Mode RGB CLIP RGB color space 45 Parameter Default eee Description o n Y White Clip 109 0 05 le Sets the Y signal upper threshold e sa O Pa Y Black Clip 7 5 5 le Sets the Y signal lower threshold CHROMA 111 0 50 0 111 0 Sets both the upper and lower YPbPr Chroma Clip reer 0 5 thresholds of PbPr signals RGB CLIP 45 Setting range ote Parameter Default Steps Description WHITE 300 0 50 300 Sets the upper threshold of RGB RGB White Clip bake 0 5 color space BLACK 200 0 200 50 Sets the lower threshold of RGB RGB Black Clip pee 0 5 color space 61 5 6 2 COMPOSITE CLIP Menu button 46 CLIP DELAY Parameter Default a Des
194. al FORMAT 720 59p Displays LOSS if there is no input signal 720 50p Displays UNKNOWN if there is an unsupported 1080 23PsF input signal 1080 24PsF BY PASS UNKNOWN YPbPr SMPTE Displays the FA 95AlO input signal format YPbPr BETACAM Displays if IN SEL in the 5 7 1 VIDEO INPUT MODE RGB SET menu is set to SDI 1 SDI 2 or COMPOSITE Y C See section 5 7 1 VIDEO INPUT SET for details cd on the input signal selection 5 13 4 VIDEO OUT STATUS Displays the status of output video signals VIDEO OUT STATUS Menu button STATUS OTHER Parameter Display Description 525 60 625 50 1080 59 1080 50 720 59p Displays the video format of the SDI1 output 720 50p SDI1 2 signal 1080 23PsF E gt 1080 24PsF Displays DISABLE if there is no signal output 1080 59p 1080 50p BY PASS DISABLE Displays the video format of the SDI2 output SDI3 4 Same as above signal Displays DISABLE if there is no signal output Displays the video format of the COMPOSITE 525 60 output signal 625 50 Displays DISABLE if there is no signal output COMPOSITE BY PASS Displays PAL M if 5 12 PAL M MODE SET is DISABLE enabled and the format of the output video signal PAL M from COMPOSITE OUT that is shown in 5 8 3 COMPOSITE SET is 525 60 99 5 13 5 COMPONENT OUTPUT This menu is accessible only if the FA 95AIO option is installed
195. alog composite and SD SDI signals is supported Insertion into analog Y C and YPbPr signals is not supported S334 1 CC SD Data packet closed caption standard for SD SDI as defined by DID and SDID in ancillary data The FA 9500 can detect and inset the data into 525 60 video signals CEA708 CC HD Data packet closed caption standard for HD SDI as defined by DID and SDID in ancillary data The FA 9500 can detect and inset the data into 1080 59i and 720 59p video signals Refer to SMPTE standard documents for details 21 1 Closed Captioning Setting Procedure e Select an input signal type under IN SEL in the VIDEO INPUT SET menu see Sec 5 7 1 e 1f525 60 SD SDI signal is selected under IN SEL specify the closed caption data type to detect in ANC DETECT SEL Sec 5 10 15 If the selected input signal is 1080 59i or 720 59p closed caption data will be automatically detected in CEA708 CC HD data e The status of CEA608 CC closed caption data detection in input signals can be verified in the ANC IN STATUS menu see Sec 5 14 The status of S334 1 CC SD or CEA708 CC HD can be verified in the ANC IN STATUS1 2 menu see Sec 5 15 e To insert closed caption data into output video signals enter the following settings which can be separately set for converters 1 and 2 Set ANC MODE to DETAIL in CONV1 ANC SET Sec 5 10 9 and CONV2 ANC SET Sec 5 10 10 Select ue converter output signal to which the data is to be inserted under EMBED
196. ame input of progressive scan signals FRM EVEN 1st Generates a progressive scan image from two fields even odd of interlaced scan image Performs horizontal anti aliasing for the output video image WEAK 8 to STRONG 8 low to high This setting cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BYPASS in the CONV1 Conversion Table in section 5 3 2 ANTIALIAS V NORMAL WEAK 8 1 NORMAL STRONG1 8 Performs vertrical anti aliasing for the output video image WEAK 8 to STRONG 8 low to high This setting cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BYPASS in the CONV1 Conversion Table in section 5 3 2 ENHANCE LEVEL 0 LEVEL 0 8 Sharpens the output video image LEVEL 0 to 8 low to high 1 Common MOTION settings for CONV1 and CONV2 This setting can be changed from either the CONV1 IMPROVE or CONV2 IMPROVE menu and applied to both menus 2 ANTIALIAS and ENHANCE settings cannot be changed if CONV1 U D MODE is set to BY PASS or the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV Conversion Table see section 5 3 2 In both cases the menu as shown below will be displayed IMPORTANT Setting MOTION to FRM ODD 1st or FRM EVEN 1st for input signals other than progressive segment frame inputs causes motion artifacts to appear In such case change the MOTION setting to FIELD or ADAPTIVE 45 5 3
197. an be used 223 9 4 2 Audio System FA 9500 Logout Video Audio System GPI Utility Status Network Video System Audio System gt ANC Settings Fade In Out Audio Error Sense Fade Mode 2 Disable Enable Conection Disable Normal Sensitive Fade Time D 12ms 24ms Channel Status Mask Validity Bit Mask Digital Audio SDI CHL SRC BYPASS OPCM O Mute SDI CHI SRC BY PASS OPCM Mute AES 12 34 VO Setting input Output SDI CHIA SRC BYPASS OPCM O Mute SDI CHIA SRC BY PASS OPCM Mute AES 56 7 8 VO Sening input Output SDI CH5 DSRC BYPASS OPCM OMute SDI CH56 SRC BY PASS OPCM Mute Reference Level 18dBFS gt 200BFS 24UBES SDICHT G SRCBYPASSOPCMOMute SDICHT SRC BY PASS OPCM O Mute Grade Professional Consumer SDI CH9 10 SRCBYPASS OPCM OMute SDICH910 SRC BY PASS OPCM Mute Resolution D24 Bh 20 Bh 16 Bit SDI CH11 12 SRC BYPASS OPCM OMute SDICH11 12 SRC BY PASS OPCM O Mute Digital Audio Silence Setting SDI CH13 14 SRCBYPASS OPCM O Mute SDICH13 14 SRC BYPASS OPCM O Mite Silence Detect Time 2 sec Y SDI CH15 16 SRC BYPASS OPCM OMute SDICH15 16 SRC BY PASS OPCM Mute Silence Level 72dBFS x P gt P AES CH12 SRC BYPASS OPCM OMute AES CHIR SRC BY PASS OPCM Mute SDI Input Audio Alignment Disable Enable AES CH34 SRCBYPASS OPCM OMute AES CH34 SRC BY PASS O PCM O Mute HD SDI Audio Clock Auto Sync SDI Audio Clock AES CHS 6 G SRC
198. are input to the FA 9500 If there is an abnormal audio signal in an audio group whether the audio group is in use or not audio streams may be obstructed by the auto phase adjustment In such cases audio stream obstruction can be avoided using this Alignment enable disable function 2 Embedded audio signals in SD SDI video inputs are always processed as synchronous signals 3 Sync SDI should be selected only if audio data cannot pass through as AUTO or asynchronous audio data is never input 4 AUD CLK may be effective in the case audio data cannot properly pass through as AUTO or Sync SDI IMPORTANT Use this Alignment enable disable function only if the audio output has noise or is muted Do not change the setting for normal audio output Note that the audio output will be temporally muted when ALIGNMENT is changed from DISABLE to ENABLE while audio signal phases are aligning 118 6 2 AES AUDIO Settings AES AUDIO Allows you to set the DIGITAL AUDIO IN OUT settings 6 2 1 AES IN GAIN Menu button C H SEL CH1 GAIN SET 0 0dB cc MASTER 0 0dB AES AUDIO Parameter Default 9 a RanEo Description Steps CH SEL CH1 CH1 CH8 Selects an AES audio channel for which to adjust the gain from channels CH1 through 8 20 0 20 0 dB Sets the input gain for the AES audio channel GAIN SET 0 0 dB 0 1 dB that is selected under CH SEL 20 0 20 0 dB Sets the
199. as been pressed while the menu buttons are turned to video menus lit green by pressing the VIDEO AUDIO so that the VIDEO PROC AMP menu is displayed Ifthe LEDs around control F1 through 4 knobs are lit the setting value corresponding to the lit control knob can be changed If you want to change the VIDEO LEVEL setting value turn F1 To change the CHROMA LEVEL setting value turn F2 For SETUP BLACK turn F3 and for HUE turn F4 To go to other menus assigned to the menu button press the single arrow down button To return to the previous menu press the single arrow up button Menu title VIDEO NPUT 47 Sor i FRAME SYNCHRONIZER Parameter Setting value Menu page number lt LIVE SAFE mode gt Menus that do not request a setting change confirmation such as VIDEO PROC AMP are used the same as in NORMAL mode Menus that request a setting change confirmation such as VIDEO INPUT SET will be in the setting change confirming state when the parameter is changed In the above example pressing the IN SEL DOWNMIX button while the button is in VIDEO menu selection mode lit green will display the VIDEO INPUT SET menu To change the IN SEL setting turn F1 Turn F2 for the LOSS setting and F3 for the BACK COLOR setting If any setting is changed single arrow buttons and the control knob for the setting that has changed will blink indicating the setting change confirming state Pressi
200. as to synchronize with the output video signal Non PCM audio signals compressed audio data such as AC 3 do not go into SRC If the non PCM audio input signal is asynchronous with the output video signal the non PCM audio output signal will be asynchronous The asynchronous non PCM audio signals can be embedded to SDI video signals by selecting an audio clock for each audio group To do so all 4 channels in the respective audio groups must be synchronous Assign 4 synchronous audio signals to channels in a group See section 9 3 11 SDI Audio Output Settings for details Then the asynchronous audio signal will be properly embedded to the video signal 2 See section 9 3 4 Source Select for details on SOURCE settings To change the Source signal assignments see section 9 3 4 Source Select For details on how to set down mix see section 9 3 9 5 1Ch Down Mix 203 9 3 12 AES Audio Output Settings Clicking block 12 on the audio block diagram opens the AES Audio Output Setting dialog box http 192 168 0 10 AES Audio Output Setting Microsoft Internet Explorer AES Audio Remapping CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 CH5 CH6 CH7 Source CH1 SDI CH1 Source CH2 SDI CH2 Source CH3 SDI CH3 Source CH4 SDI CH4 Source CH5 SDI CHS Source CHG SDI CHE Source CH SDI CH Source CH8 SDI CHE Assigned Source CH 1 Source CH1 CH2 CH 3 CH4 CH 5 CH6 CH7 CH8 Close Source CH2
201. assed BY PASS Sets the SRC circuit to by pass signals Set to By pass to output asynchronous audio signals To embed the asynchronous audio signals to SDI video signals an audio clock must be selected under 6 1 4 SDI AUDIO CLOCK for the respective audio groups SRC IN Sets the SRC circuit to pass both PCM or NON PCM signals Useful for the irregular PCM signal with the NON PCM audio channel status indication However real NON PCM signals cannot be output properly 1 If IN SEL in section 5 7 1 VIDEO INPUT SET is set to SDI 1 or SDI 2 the embedded audio signals of either selected SDI 1 or SDI 2 will be assigned to SDI 1 2 15 16 If IN SET is set to other than SDI 1 and SDI2 such as COMPOSITE the embedded audio signals of SDI 1 input video will be assigned 2 If the AES connector is set to be used for output the menu display for the selected AES audio channel pairs appear as AES1 2 See section 6 2 5 AES I O SETUP and change the setting if necessary The 16 audio channels can be set to output from desired output connectors or embed into SDI signals See section 6 1 2 SDI REMAPPING for how to embed the audio channels into SDI signals The SDI embedded audio signals can be masked on a group basis See sections 5 10 11 CONV1 AUDIO GROUP and 5 10 12 CONV2 AUDIO GROUP for details For details on AES output see section 6 2 3 AES REMAPPING For analog output see section 6 3 5
202. ault Setting range Description DISABLE Always outputs input audio signals without adding any DISABLE effect such as Fade or Mute FADE MODE DISABLE ENABLE ENABLE Sets an audio to mute with fade out if an audio error is detected and make it fade in when recovered 12 msec Sets the duration for FADE IN and FADE TIME 12 msec 24 msec OUT transitions 1 To use this function the audio delay must be set longer than the sum of the FADE TIME and error detection time 2 msec Ex If FADE TIME is set to 12 msec the audio delay must be longer than 14 msec i e 12 2 msec error detection time Error detection Return to normal mo Input signal Internal Process l l 12 msec 24 msec IMPORTANT FADE IN OUT may not function properly for the switching between AES input signals whose sampling rates are different or that are asynchronous 142 6 10 2 DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO 182 Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects the reference level for 18dBFS digital audio signals REF LEVEL 20dBFS 20dBFS See section 11 24dBFS ANALOG DIGITAL Audio Input Output Level for details Selects an audio application for AES and SDI AUDIO outputs PROFESSIONAL PROFESSIONAL Optimized for GRADE PROFESSIONAL CONSUMER professional use CONSUMER Optimized for consumer use RESOLUTION 24bit oat Selects an audio word length for
203. button to return to the normal menu display The alarm message indicates settings set while the FA 95D D FA 95DE E FA 95AIO or FA 95ALA option is being installed into option slots A and B have not be retained due to the removal or change of the option or options In such case the settings that are only available with those options will be reset to default See section 23 2 Verification After Dolby Option Removal Replacement and correct any necessary settings if you have removed the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E See section 23 3 Verification After FA 95AlIO Removal Replacement and correct the necessary settings if you have removed the FA 95AlO See section 23 4 Verification After FA 95ALA Removal Replacement and correct the necessary settings if you have removed the FA 95ALA The alarm message appears only once when starting the FA 9500 after removing or changing the location of the FA 95D D FA 95DE E FA 95AIO or FA 95ALA option 23 1 Alert 23 2 Verification After Dolby Option Removal Replacement Reset the following menu items if the FA 95D D option card is removed or moved e ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 16 in the SDI REMAPPING menu Sec 6 1 2 e ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 8 in the AES REMAPPING menu Sec 6 2 3 e ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 4 in the ANALOG REMAPPING menu Sec 6 3 5 Reset the following menu items if the FA 95DE E option is removed e ASSIGN settings for CH 1 CH 16 in the SDI
204. c Normal audio signal asynchronous SILENCE Async Mute signal asynchronous NON PCM Async Compressed audio data such as AC3 asynchronous UNKNOWN Unidentifiable 5 13 8 SDI 2 IN AUDIO SDI 2 IN AUDIO 539 Menu button CH 1 L055 CH 2 0 0 5 5 STATUS CH 3 L055 CH 4 L055 Oren SDI 2 IN AUDIO 540 CH 5 L0OSS CH 6 LOSS CH 7 L0OSS CH 8 LOSS SDI2 IN AUDIO 541 CH 9 LOSS CH10 LOSS CH11 L055 CH12 1055 SDs te ZEN ACW DAIL 0 5 42 CH13 L055 CH14 LOSS CELS 0755 CH16 L055 Parameter Display Description Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 CH16 of the SDI2 input signal LOSS LOSS No audio signals PCM PCM Normal audio signal SILENCE SILENCE Mute signal NON PCM NON PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 CH1 CH16 PCM Async PCM Async Normal audio signal asynchronous SILENCE Async NON PCM Async UNKNOWN SILENCE Async Mute signal asynchronous NON PCM Async Compressed audio data such as AC3 asynchronous UNKNOWN Unidentifiable Displays if the FA 95AIO option is installed and the 5 7 1 VIDEO INPUT SET menu is set to YPbPr SMPTE YPbPr BETACAM RGB or Y C 5 13 9 AES IN AUDIO AES IN AUDIO 5 4 3 Menu button CH 1 LOSS CH 2 L055 STATUS CH 3 L055 CH 4 L085 SIMER AES IN AUDIO 544 CH 5 LOSS CH 6 LOSS CH Pe Le OSes CH 8 LOSS Parameter Display Description Displays the status of the audio signal input
205. ce Mute signal Dolby Decoder 1 8 5 Down Mix L R Downmixed signal Dolby Down Mix L generated from SOURCE channels Dolby Down Mix R 45 matte oo 1 8 Dolby decoded E signals a Anais Dolby Down Mix L R Downmixed signal generated from Dolby Left decoded PCM signals Right Loudness 1 2 Left Loudness 1 Center Loudness 1 2 Right Loudness 2 4 LFE Loudness 1 2 Center Ls Loudness 1 2 LFE Rs Loudness 1 2 Ls Loudness 1 2 Rs Audio signals processed in FA 95ALA Loudness1 2 channels 1 See section 9 3 4 Source Select for details on Source settings 2 See section 9 3 9 5 1Ch Down Mix for details on Down Mix settings 3 See section 9 3 14 Dolby E Digital Decoder for details on Dolby Decoder settings 4 See section 9 3 14 Dolby E Digital Decoder for details onDolby Down Mix settings 5 Shown only if FA 95D D option is installed 6 Shown only if the FA 95ALA option is installed See section 9 3 17 Automatic Loudness Adjustment FA 95ALA for details on Loudness 1 2 settings Analog Audio Mono Sum Parameter Default Setting range Description CH 1 2 Disable Disable Enable Outputs the stereo pair CH 3 4 Enable channels as a mono sum To change the Source signal assignments see section 9 3 4 Source Select For details on how to set downmix see section 9 3 9 5 1Ch Down Mix 9 3 14 Dolby E Digital Decoder Clicking block 14
206. changed The selected L R channels are a correct NON PCM channel pair CH1 SOURCE3 CH1 SOURCE3 CH1 SOURCE3 CH2 SOURCES CH2 SOURCES CH2 SOURCES Unchanged The selected L R channels are PCM audio signals CH1 SOURCE1 CH2 SOURCE2 CH1 SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE1 Changed to make a proper pair including the CH2 SOURCE1 CH2 SOURCE2 assigned L channel signal The selected L R channels are the same channel of a NON PCM channel pair CH1 SOURCE1 CH2 SOURCE2 CH1 SOURCE2 CH1 SOURCE1 Changed to make a proper pair including the CH2 SOURCE2 CH2 SOURCE2 assigned L channel signal The selected L R channels are the same channel of a NON PCM channel pair CH1 SOURCE3 CH1 SOURCE4 CH1 SOURCE3 ae ce Ener eT ay anged to make a proper pair including the NASA di channel assigned signal PCM and NON PCM signals are selected for L R channels CH1 SILENCE CH2 SILENCE CH1 SILENCE CH1 SILENCE Changed to make a proper pair including the CH2 SOURCE2 CH2 SILENCE assigned L channel signal SILENCE and NON PCM signals are selected for L R channels CH1 500Hz CH2 500Hz CH1 500Hz CH1 500Hz Changed to make a proper pair including the f assigned L channel signal 500Hz and Chie QOURCES Cee enone NON PCM signals are selected for L R channels 1KHz signal will be processed the same CH1 DOWNMIX L CH1 DOWNMIX L CH1 DOWNMIX L CH2 SOURCE3 CH2 SOURCE3 CH2 SOURCE3 Unchanged DOWNMIX L and PCM signals are selected for L R channe
207. channels CH1 Loss CH16 of the SDI1 input signal PCM Loss No audio signals Silence PCM Normal audio signal Non PCM Silence Mute signal CH1 CH16 PCM Async Non PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 PCM Async Normal audio signal asynchronous Silence Async Mute signal asynchronous Non PCM Async Compressed audio data such Silence Async Non PCM Async Unknown Unknown as AC3 asynchronous Unknown Unidentifiable SDI2 Input Audio Item Display Description Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 CH16 of the SDI2 input signal Loss ieee PCM Loss No audio signals Silence PCM Normal audio signal Non PCM Silence Mute signal CH1 CH16 PCM Async Non PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 PCM Async Normal audio signal asynchronous Silence Async Mute signal asynchronous Non PCM Async Compressed audio data such as AC3 asynchronous Unknown Unidentifiable SDI1 2 Output Audio Silence 44 1kHz Silence 32kHz Silence Other Non PCM Output Setting Item Display Description PCM Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 l through CH16 of the SDI 1 2 output Silence PCM Normal audio signal CH1 CH16 Non PCM Silence Mute signal Unknown Non PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 Blank Unknown Unidentifiable 2 Blank No audio signal embedding ARO BY PASS By passed through SDI3 4 Output Audio Item Display Descripti
208. cininenes 65 5 7 3 3 How to Reset to SDI 1 Main Input oooococococccncoccnoconcncncoconnnannncononnnnoncnnnnononnnnos 65 5 7 4 CHGOV CHANGEOVER MODE SET cococccccnccononconcncnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnannnnnnnnnnenninannnnes 66 O SOD ERROR TRG ssc fades a 67 5 7 6 FORMAT ERROR TRG cetei aaria aaa a aap aa a e aa aA E Naaa Eee eain TA 67 9 727 CRE ERROR TRG unta oea EEE an eat EELE EE A EAEE A TENERE 68 9 7 8 BLACK VIDEO TRO cua aa 68 5 7 9 AUDIO LOSS TRG wie ra E Dd esas 69 927 10 E AUDIO ERR TRE AEE E E A A hcbdaeetesaees 69 SIT SILENCETRG ii A A tak ae es Ath a e a a 70 5 7 12 CHGOV STATUS ccccccccccee cece cece cee cece eeeeeececeaeaeeeeeeeeseeceneaeeeeeeeeesecenccieeseeeeeeeseneees 70 5 7 13 CHGOV VID STATUS coo lect Ea aaa fede AEAEE A Aeaee aaa ENERE 71 5 214 CHGOV AUD STATUS iia A AA ada 71 927215 AUD LOSS STATUS iaa AA EE ENEE N A a N Ea 72 5 7 16 AUD ERROR STATUS dictara sisi 72 5 7 17 SILENCE STATUS cccccccceececeecec cece cece cece ceeeeaeeeeeeeeeesecaeeaeeeeeeeeseeceeaeeeseeeeseeeeas 72 5 8 VIDEO OUT SELECT OUT SEl oooooococcconononconcncncnnononconnnnnnconononconnnnnnnnnnnnnnannn ne kaiaa Eata 73 9 81 SDI1 2Z OUT SE Tunas s 73 9 622 SDIS 4 OUT SET kaioa A ii 73 5 8 3 COMPOSITE SET cundo iptetendeezecapeteshhigagaresineveltsacaceeabsniaeandaals 74 5 6 4 COMPONENT SET cis is di 75 5 9 VIDEO OPTION VIDEO OP rhoid tan aaae adia aiaa aE Naan a aaa Ca ENEE EAA aaee Eaa 76 5 9 1 Logo Ge
209. ck Mount Brackets 1 set EIA standard type Including 4 screws CD ROM 1 FA 9500 FA 9520 User Manuals PDF Quick Setup Guide 1 Option ITEM QTY REMARKS FA 95PS 1 set e unit with AC cord and Digital audio expansion cable to expand digital FA 95DACBL 1 audio I O up to 8 inputs and 8 outputs Normally installed in slot B FA 95RU 1 Remote Control Unit FA 95D D 1 Dolby E Digital decoder Dolby E encoder FA 95DE E 1 FA 95D D option required for FA 95DE E installation Analog component I O expansion card pene with aodlested eres cable PC 3307 1 FA 95ALA 1 Automatic Loudness Adjustment card FA 10DCCRU 1 Remote Control Unit for color correction FA 95DACBL FA 95D D FA 95DE E FA 95AIO and FA 95ALA options any combination other than 2 of the same option can be installed into option slots A and or B Software Option ITEM QTY REMARKS FA 95CO 1 Changeover Check Check to ensure no damage has occurred during shipment If damage has occurred or items are missing inform your supplier immediately Trademark Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Pentium and Intel Core are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U S and or other countries Firefox is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation All other trademarks are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Rack
210. click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps Analog Audio Input Gain Setting range ae Parameter Default Steps Description Sets the offset to the input gain for Master 0 0dB 20 0 20 0 dB all analog audio channels CH1 to Analog Audio Input Gain Set Settings Setting range nar Parameter Default Steps Description 20 0 20 0dB Sets the input gain for the CH1 CH4 0 0 dB 0 1 dB individual Analog Audio channel 1 The total value of Master and indivual channel cannot exceed the setting range The setting value will stop at the end of the range Analog Audio Input Level Setting range Parameter Default Steps Description 10 dBm 0 dBm Sets the signal level for the ER t4dBm 4 dBm individual Analog Audio channel 8 dBm Analog Audio System Setting range Parameter Default Steps Description Selects how to terminate the ere y 6000 analog inputs 1 2 and 3 4 o DUUN Hi Z 60012 6000 termination Hi Z High impedance 1 10 sec Sets the duration to determine Silence Time 2sec whether the input analog audio is 1 sec silent 79 Sets the audio level to determine Silence Level 72dBFS e A ORES whether the input analog audio is 6dBFS silent
211. cription COMPOSITE CLIP enables CLIP MODE OFF A E OFF 2 clipping on the composite output Clip Mode COMPOSITE CLIP signals WHITE 150 0 50 150 Sets the upper threshold of Composite White Clip wes 0 5 analog composite color space BLACK 50 0 50 50 Sets the lower threshold of Composite Black Clip S 0 5 analog composite color space The COMPOSITE CLIP settings are effective only on the analog composite outputs The settings are not effective on the SDI1 2 and SDI3 4 outputs To enable the COMPOSITE CLIP menu set YPbPr RGB CLIP to OFF 5 6 3 VIDEO CLIP Setting Ranges YPbPr CLIP Y Signal Settings Y White Clip Level Setting range 50 109 Default 109 109 100 Y white clip level setting range SMPTE 100 color bar when 100 white Y Black Clip Level Setting range 7 5 50 Default 7 5 Y Black clip level setting range SMPTE 100 color bar when 100 black 75 62 3 C White Clip Level Setting range 50 111 Default 111 SMPTE 100 color bar when color 700mVp p RGB CLIP To adjust the RGB clipping select the RGB CLIP under CLIP MODE and then set RGB White Clip and RGB Black Clip Once the RGB CLIP is selected the YPbPr input video signal is converted into an RGB signal in the unit The converted RGB signal is processed so as not to exceed the RGB gamut range set under the RGB White Clip and RGB Black Clip parameters in the menu
212. cription is displayed in hexadecimal format AR Aspect Ratio is displayed in binary format 0 4 3 1 16 9 The detected AFD type is shown on the third row D Detected Data1 8 are displayed in hexadecimal format ee See section 20 6 AFD Code Abbreviations for details on AFD types 111 5 18 2 CONV2 VI OUT Displays whether the RP186 VI ancillary data is inserted into CONV 2 output video signal When no RP186 VI is in the CONV2 output video signal Menu button RP186 VI ABSENT STATUS OTHER When RP186 VI is in the CONV2 output video signal 6 8 3 RE 0 OP 2 SENT 2 5 P S 9 T 12 D2 0 D3 02 Displays the status of RP186 VI Video Index Class1 AFD Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format SS Scanning System is displayed in hexadecimal format The detected AFD type is shown on the third row D1 D3 Detected Data are displayed in hexadecimal format ee See section 20 6 AFD Code Abbreviations for details on AFD types 5 18 3 CONV2 WSS OUT Displays whether the BT1119 WSS ancillary data is inserted into CONV 1 output video signal When no BT1119 WSS is in the CONV2 output video signal Menu button BT1119 WSS ABSENT STATUS OTHER If ANC MODE in 5 10 10 CONV2 ANC SET is set to H V ANC the state of the V ANC setting PASS or BLANK is displayed When BT1119 WSS is in the CONV2 output video signal WSS PRESENT 9 TOP BI T13 0 000
213. cription is displayed in hexadecimal format SS Scanning System is displayed in hexadecimal format The detected AFD type is shown on the third row D1 D3 Detected Data are displayed in hexadecimal format When detecting AFD in input BT1119 2 WSS Ws S Displays the status of BT1119 2 WSS Wide Screen Signalling AFD Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format The detected AFD type is shown on the third row BIT13 0 Detected Bits 13 O are displayed in hexadecimal format ee See section 20 6 AFD Code Abbreviations for details on AFD types 5 14 ANC IN STATUS i Menu button 08 PRE i ABSENT STATUS PRESENT L 14 277 OTHER Displays the status of CEA608 WSS and VI ancillary data in the input signal luminance component The line number in which the ancillary data is in is displayed 108 5 15 ANC IN STATUS 1 2 Menu button Dl DO PS D D A 334 1CDP 708 STATUS oe OTHER Displays the status of ancillary data packets in an input SDI signal Displays the detected DID and SDID of the ancillary data in hexadecimal format such as DID SDID 15 30 if they are different from that of supported formats Displays the ancillary data name such as S334 1CDP 708 if the DID and SDID of the ancillary data match that of supported formats See section 19 FA 9500 Ancillary Data Packet Name List for details on ancillary data names and DID and SDID of formats The status of
214. cted in the 6 5 AUDIO MAPPING MAPPING menu D eae Displays signal type and bit width of signal D 16bit 2CH selected under INPUT D 16bit 1 2CH ee Rep EDA E 24bit Dolby Digital signa STREAM E 20bit E Dolby E signal E 16bit PCM Normal audio signal Hoes LOSS No signal ERROR ERROR Unidentifiable Dolby E 5 1 2 5 1 2x1 4 4 4 2x2 4 2 2x1 4 4x1 4x2 3x2 2x1 2x2 4x1 2 6x1 8x1 5 1 4 2 4 2x1 3x2 2x2 2x1 oe Displays Dolby E program configuration 4 Coding mode or status of signal selected 242 under INPUT 2 2x1 See Dolby E Digital Decoder Output PROGRAM 4x1 Channel Assignment table in section 13 7 1 Dolby E Decoder Encoder Channel 7 1 Screen Assignment Table for channel NON Dolby E assignments of respective configurations Dolby Digital 1 1 1 0 2 0 3 0 2 1 3 1 2 2 3 2 3 0L 2 1L 3 1L 2 2L 3 2L LOSS INVALID 133 6 9 1 3 Dolby DECODER REFERENCE This menu is available only if the FA 95D D option is installed Dolby DEC AUX RESP REF IN 3 0 3 NP UT Menu button VIDEO OP AUDIO OP Parameter Default Setting range Description OUTPUT VIDEO AUX REF IN INPUT VIDEO INPUT AUX REF IN Selects a reference signal to be used in the Dolby decoder PCM signal output from the Dolby decoder will be synchronized to the selected reference signal OUTPUT VIDEO Uses the output video signal AUX REF IN Uses the input signal in the opti
215. cters Read Only1 19 char max Read only SNMP community name Read Only2 19 char max Read only SNMP community name Read Write1 19 char max Read Write SNMP community name Read Write2 19 char max Read Write SNMP community name 254 9 Trap Setting Item Setting Range Alphanumeric and symbolic characters Description Trap1 Address The SNMP manager s IP address to which a trap is sent Trap2 Address The SNMP manager s IP address to which a trap is sent The SNMP manager s IP address to which a trap Trap3 Address is sent Trap1 Community 19 char max uny name that sends a trap to Trap1 The community name that sends a trap to Trap2 Trap2 Community 19 char max Address Trap3 Community 19 Ghar max The community name that sends a trap to Trap3 Address 255 9 8 4 TRAP SETTINGS Allows you to control SNMP trap transmission Check the check box of a trap to be sent then click Submit Uncheck to stop sending See the TRAP List in section 18 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol for details FA 9500 Logout video audio system cpi uy status nowork SNMP SETTING USER SETTING Unit Trap Video Trap Audio Trap v Fan 1 SDI In 1 Source CH 1 Fan 2 SDI In 2 Source CH
216. ction 5 10 6 HD PHASE if necessary The SD SDI input signal in SDI IN1 can also be output from COMPOSITE OUT To do so set COMPOSITE to CONV1 as described in section 5 8 VIDEO OUT SELECT OUT SEL To adjust the signal phase of the output from the COMPOSITE OUT see section 5 10 7 SD PHASE SET The input signal can be selected from the inputs in the SDI IN1 SDI IN2 and COMPOSITE IN connectors The input selection can be made by the IN SEL setting as described in section 5 7 1 VIDEO INPUT SET 23 3 2 For HD SD SDI Simultaneous Output Input an HD SD SDI signal Reference signal BB or Tri level sync signal synchronized with the input to SDI IN1 signal ANALOG AUDIO REMOTE lo AED WV OSHMA AAA O SJE g 3 vr we LY eae YS OH LIP Y Hf a MON LJ EN Y UA A SE Outputs an Outputs an Terminate at 75 HD SDI signal SD SDI signal ohm if not used synchronized with synchronized with the reference the reference signal from SDI signal from SDI OUT1 and 2 OUT3 and 4 oe that need to be checked INSEL is set to SDI1 as described in section 5 7 1 VIDEO INPUT SET CONV1 is set to SD as described in section 5 3 1 CONV1 U D MODE To convert to 720p set it to 720p CONV2 is set to SD as described in section 5 4 1 CONV2 U D MODE T
217. cts a signal f to output from the analog ANALOG REMAPPING 500Hz audio output channel that is selected under 1KHz CH SEL SOURCE 1 16 Signals assigned to NDA 2 SOURCE channels DOWNMIX R2 500Hz 1KHz Test signal 2215 SILENCE Mute signal Dolby DEC1 8 DOWNMIX L R Downmixed signal ASSIGN nE Dolby DM L generated from SOURCE channels Dolby DM R Dolby DEC 1 8 Dolby decoded PCM L signals R Dolby DM L R Downmixed signal ps generated from Dolby decoded PCM LOUD1 i C signals LOUD2 LFE LOUD1 2 L R C LFE Ls Rs Ls Loudness processed signal of the selected Rs SOURCE channel SDI1 16 Displays the input signal in the SOURCE SOURCE AES1 8 channel selected under ASSIGN Shown ANA1 4 only if ASSIGN is set to SOURCE 1 16 1 See section 6 5 AUDIO MAPPING MAPPING for detail on SOURCE settings 2 See section 6 7 DOWN MIX SET for details on DOWN MIX settings 3 See section 6 9 1 2 Dolby DECODER INPUT for details on Dolby DEC settings 4 See section 6 9 1 4 Dolby DOWNMIX for details on Dolby DM settings 5 Shown only if FA 95D D option is installed 6 Shown only if FA 95ALA option is installed See section 6 9 3 4 LOUDNESS CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT for details on LOUD 1 2 settings 124 6 3 6 ANALOG MONO SUM ANALOG MONO Menu button CONV1 ANALOG Parameter Default Setting range Description
218. d 5 10 16 ANC DATA EMBED Allows you to set ancillary data insertion into SDI signal ancillary spaces Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description CEA608 CC 334 1 CC SD CEA708 CC HD l S2016 3 AFD Selects an ancillary data type to insert RP186 VI BT1119 WSS ANC CEA608 CC Selects a video format that supports the FORMAT ancillary data selected under ANC Only selectable format will be shown DISABLE Does not insert ancillary data selected under ANC CONV1 Inserts ancillary data selected under ANC into the CONV1 output signal DISABLE CONV2 Inserts ancillary data selected CONV1 under ANC into the CONV2 output signal EMBER iia CONV2 CONV1 2 Inserts ancillary data selected CONV 1 2 under ANC into CONV1 and CONV2 output signals This value can be set respectively for each selection S334 1 CC SD to BT1119 WSS under ANC 91 Ancillary Data Types Data type Description CEA608 CC Closed caption data inserted as Y signals into line 21 of 525 60 analog and SDI signals S334 1 CC Closed caption data inserted as data packets into the ancillary data space of 525 60 SDI signals CEA708 CC Closed caption data inserted as data packets into the ancillary data space of HD SDI signals S2016 3 AFD Aspect ratio data inserted as data packets into the ancillary data space of SD and HD SDI signa
219. d FORMAT ERROR TRG also triggers a changeover for SDI input signal loss If FORMAT ERROR TRG is enabled and the SDI signal input is lost a changeover will be performed even though SDI ERROR TRG is disabled based on the FORMAT ERROR TRG DURATION setting 67 5 7 7 CRC ERROR TRG This menu is accessible only if the FA 95CO software option is installed 5 8 Menu button IN SEL DOWNMIX CHGOV DISABLED Parameter Default Setting range Description DISABLE Enables or disables auto changeover TRIGGER DISABLE ENABLE for SDI video CRC error Sets the detected video CRC error duration required to trigger a changeover DURATION IMMEDIATE 4 Sea ERAMES To avoid an unexpected changeover triggered by a switchover of input signals via router set DURATION to longer than 2 frames The CHGOV DISABLED message is displayed if CHANGEOVER is disabled in the VIDEO INPUT SET 5 7 1 menu or VIDEO TRG is disabled in the CHGOV CHANGEOVER MODE SET 5 7 4 menu If this message is displayed a changeover will not be performed even though CRC ERROR TRG is enabled CRC ERROR TRG also triggers a changeover for SDI input signal loss If CRC ERROR TRG is enabled and the SDI signal input is lost a changeover will be performed even though SDI ERROR TRG is disabled based on the CRC ERROR TRG DURATION setting CRC ERROR TRG 5 7 7 also detects TRS errors in blanking intervals as well as in the
220. d for SOURCE channels ht 1 through 16 in the Source o dos jes weer Source CH Select menu 9 3 4 for the enter Seg Seure 1 16 channels to be downmixed Left Surround Left Surround Source CH5 Which input audio signal is Right Surround Right Surround Source CH6 used for the SOURCE channel is displayed as SDI CH1 If the same SOURCE channel is selected for multiple channels among the above or NON PCM signal is assigned to a Source channel Down MIX L and Down MIX R will be muted The downmixed audio signals are output as Down Mix L and R To embed downmixed audio signals Down Mix L and R see section 9 3 11 SDI Audio Output Setting To output downmixed audio signal from AES connectors see section 9 3 12 AES Audio Output Setting To output from the analog audio output connectors see section 9 3 13 Analog Audio Output Setting To change the Source signal assignments see section 9 3 4 Source Select 199 9 3 10 Audio Output Polarity Clicking block 8 on the audio block diagram opens the Audio Output Polarity setting dialog box A http 192 168 0 10 Audio Mode Microsoft I 2 EX Audio Output Polarity Source CH1 SDI CH1 Normal Invert Source CH2 SDI CH2 Normal Invert Source CH3 SDI CH3 Normal Inver Source CH4 SDI CH4 Normal Olnvert Source CH5 SDI CH5 Normal Invert Source CH6 SDI CH6 GS Normal Invert Source CH7 SDI CH7
221. default file name in any version of Internet Explorer 4 Restore To load the backup file on the computer click Browse The Choose file dialog appears Choose file Look in 6 Desktop 3 my Documents 4 My Computer My Recent Amy Network Places Documents E Fagsoo 3 E fa9s00_eventdata L 2 fora fa9500 mib Desktop My Documents My Computer My Network File name fa9500_eventdata Places Files of type All Files Specify the directory and the file name and click Open The destination path will be displayed on the screen Click Load The confirmation dialog appears Microsoft Internet Explorer e 7 Are you sure you want to load EVENT Data from file Click OK to start loading the data To cancel loading the data click Cancel 240 9 7 Status Display Click Network gt Unit Video Status Audio Status Unit Information Changeover Status Click the Status tab at the top of the page The Unit Video Status page will be displayed To go to the Audio Status page click Audio Status at the top left of the page In the same way click Unit Video Status to go to the Unit Video Status page and click Unit Information to go to the Unit Information page Click Changeover Status to go to the Changeover Status page The Changeover Status page will open only if the FA 95CO option is installed 9 7 1 Unit Video Status The video and unit statuses are shown on the Uni
222. dio Output Gain Set Settings Setting range mee Parameter Default Steps Description CH1 CH16 _ Sets audio gain for the Dolby Decoder CH1 CH8 72 0 0dB 20 0 20 0 dB decoder and CH1 through CH16 49 0 1 dB that are selected under Source Dolby Down Mix L R Select 1 The total value of Master and individual channel cannot exceed the setting range The setting value will stop at the end of the range 2 Selectable only if FA 95D D option is installed 196 9 3 8 Audio Test Signal Clicking block 10 on the audio block diagram opens the Audio Test Signal dialog box Bi http 192 168 0 10 DER Audio Test Signal OFF 1kHz Tone MD Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Parameter Default Setting range Description f Off Audio Test Signal Off 1kHZz Tone Outputs an internal audio test signal 197 9 3 9 5 1Ch Down Mix Clicking block 9 on the audio block diagram opens the Audio Down Mix dialog box A http 192 168 0 10 Audio Down Mix Microsof DER Down Mix Mode Mode Select Stereo Surround Monaural Surround Mix 3dB v Center Mix 3dB O 4 5dB O 6dB Master Level 3dB O Auto Down Mix Assign Left source CH1 SDI CH1 Right Source CH2 SDI CH2 Center Left Surround Source CH5 SDI CHS Right Surround Source CH3
223. dio clock phase data in the embedded audio Synchronous and asynchronous embedded audio signals from 4 audio groups can be Auto de embedded separately HD SDI Audio Clock Auto Sync SDI Audio data will be processed as Audio Clock synchronous data if the audio clock phase data is incorrect or jitter is too great Sync SDI All audio data in 4 audio groups are always processed as synchronous data without refering to the respective audio clock phase data Audio Clock Always uses audio clock phase data in HD SDI embedded audio data to de embed the audio data 1 Embedded audio signal groups are automatically phase adjusted when they are input to the FA 9500 If there is an abnormal audio signal in an audio group whether the audio group is in use or not audio streams may be obstructed by the auto phase adjustment In such cases audio stream obstruction can be avoided using this Alignment enable disable function 2 Embedded audio signals in SD SDI video inputs are always processed as synchronous signals 3 Embedded audio signals in SD SDI video inputs are always processed as synchronous signals 4 AUD CLK may be effective in the case audio data cannot properly pass through as AUTO or Sync SDI IMPORTANT Use this Alignment enable disable function only if the audio output has noise or is Alignment 1 Enable muted Do not change the setting for normal audio output Note that the audio
224. dio data V ANC Pass Pass Blank Embeds audio signals into vertical ancillary data of CONV2 output videos Pass Embeds the vertical ancillary data without processing Blank Deletes all vertical ancillary data H ANC and V ANC settings are effective if input and output formats are the same If such formats are different both H ANC and V ANC will be set to BLANK 222 Converter1 Audio Group Parameter Default Setting range Description Disable Disable Does not insert GROUP 1 embedded Group1 Enable Enabl 2 audio aid Enable Inserts GROUP 1 embedded audio Disable Disable Does not insert GROUP 2 embedded Group 2 Enable Enabl 2 audio nanie Enable Inserts GROUP 2 embedded audio Disable Disable Does not insert GROUP 3 embedded Group 3 Enable Enabl 2 audio nane Enable Inserts GROUP 3 embedded audio Disable Disable Does not insert GROUP 4 embedded Group 4 Enable Enabl 2 audio naie Enable Inserts GROUP 4 embedded audio 1 GROUP4 embedded audio cannot be inserted into SD SDI output signals regardless of the GROUP4 setting 2 The setting is ineffective if the input and output formats are the same and H ANC is set to In Data under Converter1 Ancillary Setting Converter2 Audio Group Parameter Default Setting range Description Group Enable Disable Disable Does not insert GROUP 1 embedded audio
225. displayed on the monitor 1 HPOS Variable 2 Adjusts the horizontal position of O Pixel Horizontal Position 2 Pixel the video displayed on the monitor V POS 0 Line Variable 2 Adjusts the vertical position of the Vertical Position 1 Line video displayed on the monitor 1 If the size is made smaller than the original size set the background color under CONV2 SIDE RGB see section 5 4 6 2 The following parameters interact with each other When you change one of their setting values setting ranges of other parameters will also change Video format SYNC FRMT Parameter in FS MODE SET see section 5 10 1 All parameters in CONV2 U D MODE see section 5 4 1 If the CONV2 mode is set to BY PASS the CONV2 SIZE POS setting cannot be changed Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV2 Conversion Table see section 5 4 2 In both cases the menu as shown below will be displayed 22 49 5 4 4 CONV2 CROPPING CONV PPING 23 Menu button MEET OPIXEL RIGHT OPIXEL CONV2 TOP OLINE MASTER BOTTOM OLINE Setting range TA Parameter Default Steps Description LEFT 0 Pixel Pre Crops the left side of the video RIGHT 0 Pixel Pre Crops the right side of the video TOP 0 Line A Line Crops the top of the video BOTTOM O Line ibe Crops the bottom of the video These setting ranges vary depending on the in
226. displayed when In Out is set to Input and Assign is set to any of CONV1 Load 1 7 or CONV2 Load 1 7 In the following cases the logo will not be inserted to the converter output signals although data will be loaded to the FA 9500 No logo is registered under the selected Logo ID The registered logo format and converter output video format do not match The keyer of the relevant converter is turned off 233 9 6 Utility Settings Click Click the Utility tab at the top of the page The Utility setting window will be displayed FA 9500 Logout video audio system cpi utility status network Event Control Start Up Event Load Last Setting xi Auto Event Load ODisable OEnable Event Load Default i a M Event Save Video Format xv Set Event Name e Backup Parameter Save File Restore Browse Apply Settings Below a Network Setting O SNMP Setting O Parameters O Event Name Download MIB File Download Backup Event Data Save File Restore II Browse If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown Click Refresh to update the settings 234 9 6 1 Event Control Setting range eae Parameter Default Steps Description Sarii Last Setting 3 art Up A Video Format Selects an event you want to load Event Load Last Set
227. e INTEGER OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 2 9 FA 95C0 FA 95CO VIDEO INPUT SET CHANGEOVER 0 1 disable enable a95CoMode INTEGER 272 Object group Front TITLE Item name Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type Can Set VIDEO TRG i coe a95CoVideoTriggerMode 1 INTEGER o jo ICHGOV MODE SET D disable AUDIO TRG q enable a95CoAudioTriggerMode 2 INTEGER O O SDI ERROR bit 0 sdiError From MSB FA 95CO FORMAT ERROR bit 1 formatError CRC ERROR bit 2 crcError A BLACK VIDEO bit 3 blackVideo a95CoTriggerStatus 01 BITS AUDIO LOSS bit 4 audioLoss AUDIO ERR bit 5 audioError SILENCE bit 6 silence OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 1 2 9 FA 95LG IASSIGNN Conv1 ID 1 to 256 a95LgConv1Assign NTEGER O O Keyer Conv1 on a95LgConviKeyer 2 NTEGER O O FA 95LG VIDEO OPTION ASSIGN Conv2 1D 110 256 adSLgConv2Assign 3 INTEGER oO O Keyer Conv1 COFF a95LgConv2Keyer 4 NTEGER O O IDEO INSTATUS COMPONENT IN Same as SDI IN 1 a95IncComponent 101 INTEGER O O AO O COMPONENT OUT _ Same as SDI IN 1 2 a95outComponent 102 INTEGER o lo OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175
228. e If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown Click Refresh to refresh the page 4 Source Audio Item Display Description Displays the status of audio sources CH1 through CH16 that are selected in the Audio Source Select menu LOSS No audio signals Loss PCM Normal audio signal SDI input PCM PCM 48kHz Normal audio signal AES input approx 48kHz PCM 48kHz PCM 44 1kHz Normal audio signal AES input approx PCM 44 1kHz 44 1kHz ace PCM 32kHz Normal audio signal AES input approx 32kHz rags PCM Other Normal audio signal Other AES input Silence 48kHz Silence Mute signal SDI input CH1 CH16 Silence 44 1kHz Silence 48kHz Mute signal AES input approx 48kHz Silence 32kHz Silence Other Non PCM PCM Async Silence Async Non PCM Async In Analog Unknown Silence 44 1kHz Mute signal AES input approx 44 1kHz Silence 32kHz Mute signal AES input approx 32kHz Silence Other Mute signal Other AES input Non PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 PCM Async Normal audio signal Asynchronous SDI input Silence Async Mute signal Asynchronous SDI input Non PCM Async Compressed audio data such as AC3 Asynchronous SDI input In Analog Analog audio signal Unknown Unidentifiable 244 SDI1 Input Audio Silence Async Non PCM Async Item Display Description Displays the status of audio signal
229. e CH Source CH Source CH y 1 1 Loudness Measurement1 2 Input indicates the measured loudness level of the FA 95ALA input audio signal in LKFS Output indicates the loudness level of the loudness processed signal in LKFS DER Loudness Standard Setting Short Term Long Term Standard ARIB TR B32 0 0 LKFS 0 0 LKFS Target Level 24 0LKFS Momentary 400ms Short Term 3000ms Parameter Default Setting range Description Input Displays the measured loudness level of the FA 95ALA input audio signal in LKFS Output Start Displays the measured loudness level of the FA 95ALA output audio signal in LKFS Set Loudness Control to On then click Start to start loudness adjustment and display the measured loudness level Allows you to start to adjust the audio signal loudenss according to Loudness standard selected under Stndard Stop Allows you to stop loudness measurement and adjustment Clear Allows you to clear loudness measurement If clicked while Start is enabled loudness measurement and adjustment restart after being cleared Session Time display also resets to 0 00 00 Session Time Displays the elapsed time of loudness measurement and adjustment After counting up to 6 59 59 the display resets to 0 00 00 Loudness measurement and adjustment will also be cleared and restart 214 Loudness Control Settings 1 2
230. e Description Auto Enables automatic level adjustment Hold Stops auto level adjustment When MODE selection is changed from AUTO to HOLD the Off signal levels stop and remain as they are Mode Off Alto Off Disables automatic level adjustment When 5 MODE selection is changed from AUTO to Off Hold the signal levels return to their state before auto level adjustment is applied When set to Off the signal levels can be manually adjusted See section 9 2 8 Color Corrector for details Darker Selects a type of signal level adjustment Dark 10 options are available Five fixed options and Standard five custom options Level ELO Adjustment Standard eari Darker lt Dark lt Standard lt Bright lt Brighter level User2 User1 User5 Customizable User3 Clicking Set User opens the USER1 5 LEVE User4 SET dialog box See section9 2 2 2 User 1 5 User5 LEVEL SET for details Sets the sample area to calculate the adjustment Full 10 options are available Eight fixed areas and Screen tow custom areas e Fixed areas Full Bottom Full Screen Letter Box Pillar Box Center Sample Area Screen Right Top Left Top Right Bottom Left Bottom Right e Custom areas User Area1 Clicking Set Area opens the User Area1 2 setting User Area2 dialog box See section 9 2 2 3 User Area 1 2 for details f Sets sample area display On Off If set to On the Area Display Off sample area appears as a semi transparent white Marker Of
231. e FA 95DACBL in slot A remove the screws from the blank panel on OPTION SLOT A 4 Connect the white connector of the FA 95DACBL to CN34 See the below picture 266 5 Install the BNC connector panel of the FA 95DACBL into the slot from inside the unit Secure the connector panel with the screws that were removed from the blank panel See the below picture 6 If you have install the FA 95DACBL in slot A set switch 5 in the S2 DIP switch to OFF If you have installed it into slot B set switch 5 in the S2 DIP switch to ON 7 Return and secure the top panel onto the unit with the 3 screws on top and 4 screws each on the right and left sides of the unit 15 2 Installation Confirmation Confirm the status of the FA 95DACBL on the front panel menu See sections 7 7 OPTION A Ver and 7 8 OPTION B Ver The menu appears as shown below if the FA 95DACBL is installed in SLOTA OPTION A Ver 199 NAME FA 95DACBL FPGAI1 sone FPGA2 SOFT in SLOT B OPTION B Ver 200 NAME FA 95DACBL FPGAl FPGA2 SOFT IMPORTANT Menu button STATUS OTHER Menu button STATUS OTHER Four connectors of the FA 95DACBL digital audio expansion option can be used for outputs If the FA 95DACBL option is installed the DIGITAL AUDIO IO connectors can only be used for inputs and the AES I O SETUP menu section 6 2 5 is not accessible 16 FA 95AIO Option 16 1 FA 95AIO Pin Assignme
232. e eae ado sat asec eee 91 510 16 ANC DATA EMBED i e cere sil apaan td et 91 5 10217 ANC EMBED LINE cacon rara and ata ca 92 9 110518 ANCILOSS SET 94 5 10 19 WSS AFD ERROR eetet eene ise eet aae cine ahd el eee aes 95 9 11 NTSC SEM ERE E a ia 96 5 12 PAL M MODE SE Toco a A AAA ete et eee eae 96 5 13 Various Signal Status Display STATUS ooocooncccoccccccocononanonnnnnononnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnno 97 STi UNITALARM ii A ad 97 59 132 VIDEO IN STATUS A ti A 98 5 13 3 COMPONENT INPUT 0 cccceceeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseceaeeseeeeeseeseeseseeeeeeeeess 99 5213 4 VIDEO QUT STATUS acne Henini are tea ated 99 5 13 5 COMPONENT OUTPUT eodococccccccconononncncnnnncnnnonnnnoncnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnaninninns 100 5 13 06 SOURCE AUDIO 00 A a it 101 9213 72 SBI INVA DIO ies se A A ato 102 519 8 SD2 IN AUDIO ci Re aa io a 103 9 139 9 AESIN AUDIO cocer rante talirt 104 5 13 10 ANALOG IN AUDIO cococococcoccccccococncononncnnnncnnoncnnnnnnnnnncnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnannnnncnnnnaninnnnns 104 9 13 112 SDIA1 2 OUT AUDIO coi ara 105 5 13 12 SDI 3 4 OUT AUD Oo nirera co 106 9 13 13 AES OUT AUDIO 0 Hand anche eagle DO Salt tica 106 9 13 14 ANALOG QUT AUDIO sessccctsccccopsavsshecaten casa eretehencediatape peste taadieseshtedbelbadeecesereiesette 107 59 19 15 Dolby AUX STATUS ia a e a O AEE 107 9 13 16 AED UN STATUS tet noche IA oni A aa a bi 108 9 14 ANC IN STATUS co A e ita 108 9 15 ANGUN STA
233. e inris enoi iea dader o iaee dad iaeaea EAEE iaaa deiat 143 610 4 DIGITAL SILENC Erns Siron A ee 145 Other Settings amp Information OTHER ooooococcccccocococononoconononccnnnnnanonnnnnononnnnannonnnnnnnennaninnnnnces 146 Is CONTROL SETTING A aii 146 132 FRONTF OPERA TON o dl ete ek ede eaten bbe 146 3 FRONT PANEL SET 400 i a aree e aea a araa aa aa anane laei eadera 147 FAR SETTING a a a E a ad eh a cae nce 148 1 5 NETWORK INFO ociosas al ide 151 T O UNIT VE raia A A a A R A a eee 151 Tel OPTION A VOT a a fener e aa A Tee A IEE 152 8s OPTION A E E E E E S SEAS TETA 152 7 9 OTHER OPTION o oo aa aA a aE Ea a ae raaa 153 TAIO SOFT OPON A AA A as SE et ea a 153 T 11 SQF OPTION conan ir aria 153 EVONnt MOMONY caca a A Ai T 154 8 1 EVENT LOAD irei A A e He BP ee E 154 9 2 EVENTISA VE A Ade 155 9 3 EVENT SETU Pisos bite 155 8 4 Parameters That Are Not Stored in Event Memories ccccccccseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeneaees 156 8 5 Note on Event Memory Operation ooooooococociccccccnonoconccconcncnnnnnnonnnnnononnnnnnnonnnnnnnennanannnnnnos 156 Control via WEB BrowSet ccceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceeceeaaeeeeeeeecececaeaeeeeeeeesesecccneeaeeeeeteseseenaees 157 9 1 Connecting via a WEB BrOWS8T oococonoccoccccccccccncononncnnoncnnoncnnnnncnnnncononnnnnnnnnnnncnneneanannenenes 157 922 VIDEO Setting Siin A AA o A Ae A 158 A Cte ccceeaete he ectadee e tenes taeshedcnvtc eevee dy Maeda E ET E rE ERDE
234. e selected for L R channels CH1 Silence i CH2 Silence CH1 Silence CH1 Silence Changed to make a proper pair including the CH2 Source2 CH2 Silence assigned L channel signal SILENCE and non PCM signals are selected for L R channels CH1 500Hz CH2 500Hz CH1 500Hz CH1 500Hz Changed to make a proper pair including the CH2 S 2 CH2 x 500H assigned L channel signal 500Hz and iS 2 non PCM signals are selected for L R channels 1kHz signal will be processed the same CH1 Down Mix L CH1 Down Mix L CH1 Down Mix L CH2 Source3 CH2 Source3 CH2 Source3 Unchanged Down Mix L and PCM signals are selected for L R channels CH1 Down Mix L CH2 Down Mix R CH1 Down Mix L CH1 Down Mix L Changed to make a proper pair including the CH2 Source2 CH2 Down Mix R assigned L channel signal Down Mix L and non PCM signals are selected for L R channels 202 Entered value in SDI Audio Remapping Assigned Source display Auto channel pairing CH1 Dolby Encoder 1 CH1 Dolby Encoder 1 CH1 Dolby Encoder 1 CH2 Dolby Encoder 2 Changed to make a proper pair including the CH2 1KHz CH2 Dolby Encoder 2 assigned L channel signal NON PCM and 1KHz signals are selected for L R channels SDI Audio Mono Sum Parameter Default Setting range Description Disable Enable Outputs the stereo pair CH1 2 CH15 16 Disable Enable chanriels asta mono Sum SDI Output Clock Select
235. e signal MITS OF On lines 11 through 21 Allows you to align unprocessed output video signal phases to those of processed video Off signals delayed by processing Delay Adjust Off On On Aligns CONV1 and 2 output video signal phases and adjusts audio delay See the table in section 5 10 4 VIDEO SUB for the delay amounts Off On Sets NTSC setup for Composite and NTSC Setup Off On Component inputs and outputs Off Turns NTSC setup off 1 NTSC Setup NTSC Setup On Off radio buttons will appear under Video Sub if the FA 95AIO option is installed 221 Converter1 Ancillary Setting Parameter Default Setting range Description ANC Mode H V ANC H V ANC Detail Selects ancillary data processing mode for the Converter1 output signal H ANC and V ANC menu settings will become available when H V ANC is selected Set to Detail to enable ANC Data Embed settings in 9 4 3 ANC Settings H ANC Overwrite Overwrite In Data Blank Embeds audio signals into horizontal ancillary data of CONV1 output videos Overwrite Removes the embedded audio from the input SDI video then embeds the processed audio data in the video signal Whether to embed is determined by the Converter1 Audio Group setting The input SDI data will be embedded in the video signal after audio signals are embedded In Data Passes the input SDI horizontal ancillary data without processing Processed audio data cannot be embedded
236. e status of FAN1 Normal Operating normally Stopped FAN1 has stopped Turn the unit power off and contact your dealer if a replacement is needed FAN2 Normal Stopped Displays the status of FAN2 Normal Operating normally Stopped FAN2 has stopped Turn the unit power off and contact your dealer if a replacement is needed Power1 Normal Abnormal Displays the status of DC POWER1 Normal The power supply is normal Abnormal DC POWER has failed A power failure has occurred Although the unit is working properly It is recommended that the power supply unit be replaced Contact your dealer if a replacement is necessary Power2 Normal Abnormal Displays the status of DC POWER2 Normal The power supply is normal Abnormal DC POWERZ2 has failed A power failure has occurred Although the unit is working properly It is recommended that the power supply unit be replaced Contact your dealer if a replacement is necessary 1 Displays if the optional FA 95PS is not installed 243 9 7 2 Audio Status The audio statuses are shown on the Audio Status page FA 9500 Logout _ Video Audio System GPI Utility Status Network Unit Video Status Audio Status Unit Information ANC Status Changeover Status CH1 CH2 CH3 CH 4 CH 5 CH 6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH 10 CH 11 CH 12 CH 13 CH 14 CH 15 CH 16
237. e to this trigger 5 7 16 AUD ERROR STATUS This menu is accessible only if the FA 95CO software option is installed Settings in this menu will reset themselves whenever CHANGEOVER in the VIDEO INPUT SET 5 7 1 menu has been set to DISABLE Numbers 1 to 16 indicate SDI 1 input audio channels 1 to 16 67 Menu button IN SEL DOWNMIX Parameter Description Displays audio error trigger status of SDI enbedded audio channels 1 through 16 This trigger is disabled This trigger is enabled but not activated T Changeover is performed due to this trigger 1 to 16 CH1 to 16 5 7 17 SILENCE STATUS This menu is accessible only if the FA 95CO software option is installed Settings in this menu will reset themselves whenever CHANGEOVER in the VIDEO INPUT SET 5 7 1 menu has been set to DISABLE Numbers 1 to 16 indicate SDI input audio channels 1 to 16 58 Menu button ce ee ae IN SEL Qe AR es SQ DOWNMIX IS 14 15 16 Parameter Description Displays audio silence trigger status of SDI enbedded audio 1 to 16 channels 1 through 16 Te 16 This trigger is disabled 9 This trigger is enabled but not activated T Changeover is performed due to this trigger 72 5 8 VIDEO OUT SELECT OUT SEL Allows you to select output modes and whether to output a signal from CONV1 or CONV2 for respective video output connectors IMPORTANT If CONV
238. ed in the coded frame Data 58 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 HEX Ancillary Data Packet Input Status 1 RP165EDH Line 5 2 2016 3 AFD Bar Line 8 3 RP165EDH Line 318 4 S2016 3 AFD Bar Line 321 o ance Line 6 gt Line o o Line i Line CONV1 Ancillary Output Status 1 CEA 608 CC Absent Line 2 BT 1119 2WSS Present Line 23 3 RP186 VI Present Line 11 324 CONV1 S2016 3 Output Status Status Present AFD 1111 BNR AR 4 3 Letterbox 16 9 image with alternative 4 3 center Data 78 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 HEX CONV1 VI Output Status Status Present AFD 1111 BNR Scan 625 50 4x3 16 9 with shoot and protecte 4 3 center Data1 7A HEX Data2 02 HEX Data3 02 HEX CONV1 WSS Output Status Status Present AFD 1011 BNR box 16 9 centre Bit 13 0 00 0B HEX CONV1 Ancillary Data Packet Output Status 2016 3 AFD Bar Line 8 Line nes Line A ee ee Line Click Refresh to update the settings Ancillary Input Stats CONV2 Ancillary Output Status 1 CEA 608 CC Absent Line 2 BT 1119 2WSS Present Line 23 3 RP186 VI Present Line 11 324 CONV2 2016 3 Output Status Status Present AFD 1101 BNR AR 4 3 Full frame 4 3 image with alternative 14 9 center Data 68 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 HEX CONV2 VI Output Status Status Present AFD 1101 BNR Scan 625 50 4x3 4 3 with shoot and protecte 14 9 center Data1 6A HEX Data2 02 HEX Data3 02 HEX CONV2 WSS Output Status Status
239. ee section 9 3 9 5 1Ch Down Mix for details on Down Mix settings 3 See section 9 3 14 Dolby E Digital Decoder for details on Dolby Decoder settings 4 See section 9 3 14 Dolby E Digital Decoder for details onDolby Down Mix settings 5 See section 9 3 16 Dolby E Encoder for details on Dolby Encoder settings 6 Shown only if FA 95D D option is installed 7 Shown only if FA 95DE E option is installed 8 Shown only if FA 95ALA option is installed See section 9 3 17 Automatic Loudness Adjustment FA 95ALA for details on Loudness 1 2 settings 204 Auto Channel Pairing for non PCM Audio Inputs The FA 9500 recognizes non PCM audio input signals in L R channel pair units and adjusts assignments according to the signal selected for the L channel Source channels that are assigned after such adjustments are shown as Assigned Sources L R channel pairs are Source 1 2 Source 3 4 Source 15 16 The channel assignments that are changed by the adjustment will be shown with gt as CH1 Source2 Auto channel pairing example on non PCM inputs Conditions non PCM inputs in Source 1 and 2 PCM inputs in Source 3 through 16 Au Entered value in AES dio Remapping Assigned Source display Auto channel pairing CH1 CH2 Source Source2 CH1 CH2 Source Source2 CH1 Source CH2 Source2 Unchanged The selected L R channels are a correct non PCM chan
240. eeeeeesecenceaeeeeeeereeseeeas 50 9 4 5 CONV2 IMPROVE coito Gal Sines ee ec a eee A ee i es 51 5 4 6 CONV2 OA NT 52 5 5 Auto Video Optimizer AVO c cccceeeeeeceeceneeeeee cece eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeenseaeeeeeeeseeeenieaneeeeeeess 53 5 5 1 AVO SET TIN Guti cristo 53 9 9 2 AV O SETUP a ie eda eb Gautier ese ea A eae 54 5 5 2 1 About Scene Cut Detection and Frame Delay Settings ooonooocccnnnnnnnnicccccccccns 55 5 5 3 USERI 5 LEVEL SE Tecos cassueedecaeanseas sueetacddvenea aAA PEDE E EA EE DEEE ae E ian 56 5 5 4 USERT 2 AREA SET oia aa EARE ENE Di aiaei 59 5 5 4 1 Manual Level AdjuStMeNt oooocccccccncicnccnnninnnonenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenanenaninns 60 5 6 CLIP VIDEO CLP A A at ea os ad 61 D 6 1 YPDPr RGB CLlP vai A AAA AA 61 5 6 2 COMPOSITE CLIP e a a A a A a a aie a Ara i E ia 62 5 6 3 VIDEO CLIP Setting Ranges ccccccccocononccccccocononenoncnnnnnocnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnannnnnnnconennanannnnss 62 5 7 VIDEO INPUT SELEGCT IN SED io A ee ROA a A 64 92 21 VIDEO INPUT SET aisccciet E da and 64 9 17 20 SD INPUT ASPECT a aaa aa a a aa ae a a a aeae eaa A e aaae atta 65 5 7 3 About Changeover occccccnonooooccncnccnonnonnnnnnnnnnn rencor enn nn nn nen nen RR EEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEEE EEEE Ennen rE neee 65 5 7 3 1 Changeover and Loss Operation ooooocoooccccnnccccnccooooccncnnoconnnnnnnncnnononnnnnnnnnnnnncnno 65 5 7 3 2 Changeover and Input Switchover Using a Router ccccccccccccccnoncnoneni
241. eetees 292 14 21 1 Closed Captioning Setting Procedure ooconinconociccnccccnconononcncnnononnnnnnnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnncnncnno 292 22 Loading Older Version Data from FA 9500 ooooccccccccccoconoocococccconcnnonnnononconinnnnnnnnnnnononenninnnnes 293 23 Regarding Option Card Removal ooocccccccnncoccoccccccoconnnononncnnnnnnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnaninnnnnnnnnnnnnanenninnnnss 294 23d Aledo iaa 294 23 2 Verification After Dolby Option Removal Replacement oooocococccnccccococonocccocccconcnnannconons 294 23 3 Verification After FA 95AlIO Removal Replacement ooooccocococcccccccccconononcnnccnccnnnanncnnnnno 294 23 4 Verification After FA 95ALA Removal Replacemennt ooocoocococcccccocococononococoncncnncnnnnononnos 294 24 Expansion Slots A B Alertuucnaan ino 295 25 Specifications and Dimensions oooocccccccnonononcnnnococonnnanonnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 296 25 1 Unit Specification 296 25 2 External DIMENSIONS ocoooocococcoconononono ieee 299 NS 300 15 1 Prior to Starting 1 1 Welcome Congratulations By purchasing FA 9500 Frame Synchronizer you have entered the world of FOR A and its many innovative products Thank you for your patronage and we hope you will turn to FOR A products again and again to satisfy your video and audio needs FOR A provides a wide range of products from basic support units to complex system controllers which have been increasingly joined by products for computer video based
242. elect a background color MAGENTA 9 i GREEN CYAN YELLOW DISABLE Enables or disables 3 CHANGEOVER Changeover CHANGEOVER DISABLE ENABLE can be enabled only if IN SEL is set to SDI 1 1 Selectable only if the FA 95AIO option is installed 2 The selected AUTO FREEZE functions the same as BACK COLOR if SYNCHRO in section 5 10 1 FS MODE SET is set to LINE AVDL or INPUT In such case the menu is indicated as k AUTO FREEZE 3 This parameter is displayed only if FA 95CO software option is installed CHANGEOVER is always set to DISABLE at power on LOSS Operation If the signal input that is selected under IN SEL is lost the FA 9500 operates in the selected LOSS mode as follows e In BACK COLOR mode Outputs a matte signal of the color selected under BACK COLOR e In AUTO FREEZE mode Freezes the last image before signal input is lost Freezes the field Freezes the frame if the lost input signal is of a progressive scan video format such as 720p e In COLOR BAR mode Outputs the SMPTE color bar e In OUT DISABLE mode Does not output any signal from SDI OUT1 2 3 4 COMPOSITE OUT1 or 2 e In AUTO FREEZE mode Outputs a black screen if SYNCHRO is set to LINE AVDL or INPUT under FS MODE SET section 5 10 1 64 5 7 2 SD INPUT ASPECT ASPECT 48 Menu bottun IN SEL DOWNMIX Allows you to specify the SD input signal aspect ratio CONV and 2 process specified aspect conversions 4 3 L 16 9 T to 16 9
243. elected under CH SEL E 20 0 20 0dB Sets the offset to audio gain for all MASTER 0 1 dB audio channels CH1 through 16 MASTER MUTE OFF a ON Mutes all audio channels 1 Shown only if the FA 95D D option is installed 2 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range If the range is exceeded the alert will be displayed as 20 0dB or 20 0dB 3 MASTER MUTE is always set to OFF at startup The setting is not stored in the event memory MASTER MUTE is not effective on NON PCM outputs NON PCM output signals pass through 126 6 5 AUDIO MAPPING MAPPING Allows you to route 16 audio channels The SOURCE SRC SET menu allows you to select 16 channel audio signals to process from among SDI embedded AES and analog input audio signals 6 5 1 SOURCE SRC SEL Menu button AVO MAPPING Parameter SOURCE SEL Default CH1 2 Setting range CH1 2 CH15 16 Description Selects stereo pairs of 16 channel audio signals to be internally processed SOURCE SET SDI channels corresponding to source channels SDI1 2 15 16 AES1 2 7 8 ANA1 2 3 4 Selects audio signals to input to the SOURCE that are selected under SOURCE SEL SRC MODE SRC IN AUTO BY PASS SRC IN Sets the SRC circuit to pass or by pass audio signals per channel pair AUTO Sets the SRC circuit to pass signals However NON PCM audio signals will be by p
244. embedded to SDI video signals by selecting an audio clock for each audio group To do so all 4 channels in the respective audio groups must be synchronous Assign 4 synchronous audio signals to channels in a group See section 6 1 2 SDI REMAPPING for details Then the asynchronous audio signal will be properly embedded to the video signal 117 6 1 5 SDI IN AUDIO Menu button PROCESS SDI AUDIO Parameter Default Setting range Description Enables or disables automatic phase adjustment ALIGNMENT ENABLE for input embedded audio channel groups DISABLE DISABLE ENABLE Automatic adjustment normal setting DISABLE No adjustment Selects audio clock signal to use for de embedding and processing audio data in HD SDI input signal AUTO De embeds HD SDI embedded audio data using the audio clock phase data in the embedded audio Synchronous and asynchronous embedded audio signals from 4 AUTO audio groups can be de embedded separately AUTO SYNC SDI Audio data will be processed as synchronous data if the audio clock phase data is incorrect or AUD CLK jitter is too great Sync SDI All audio data in 4 audio groups are always processed as synchronous data without refering to the respective audio clock phase data HD SDI ACLK AUD CLK Always uses audio clock phase data in HD SDI embedded audio data to de embed the audio data 1 Embedded audio signal groups are automatically phase adjusted when they
245. enabled and a changeover is performed SDI1 The current active input is SDI1 SDI1 SDI2 The input signal is switched to SDI2 from SDI1 by a changeover SDI2 The current active input is SDI2 Composite The current input signal is a composite video signal YPbPr SMPTE The current input signal is a component video signal SD SDI signals are in SMPTE level YPbPr BETA The current input signal is a component video signal SD SDI signals are in BETACAM level RGB The current input signal is an RGB video signal Y C The current input signal is a Y C video signal 1 Shown only if the FA 95AIO option is installed Video In 251 Changeover Video Status Displays the status of video related triggers at the time a changeover is performed Item Description Disable This trigger is disabled SDI Error Non Trigger This trigger is enabled but has not triggered a changeover Trigger This trigger is enabled and has triggered a changeover Format Error Disable This trigger is disabled Non Trigger This trigger is enabled but has not triggered a changeover Trigger This trigger is enabled and has triggered a changeover Disable This trigger is disabled CRC Error Non Trigger This trigger is enabled but has not triggered a changeover Trigger This trigger is enabled and has triggered a changeover Disable This trigger is disabled Black Video
246. eptional condition 5 15 8 2012 03 26 Added Logo feature 5 9 1 9 2012 07 06 Enhanced FA 95DE E option 5 3 5 4 20 21 etc Added AFD support S2016 VI WSS CONV2 modified to Up Down Cross converter 9 1 2012 08 06 Added VITS feature description 5 10 4 through 5 10 7 9 4 1 9 2 2013 04 12 Revised specifications optional video formats 25 1 10 2013 06 03 Added FA 95ALA option 6 9 9 9 3 17 etc Enhanced FA 95RU for FA 9520 support 10 1 2013 06 13 Operation Manual added to User Manual CD 10 2 2014 06 02 Changed REFERENCE status 5 13 2 9 7 1 18 10 3 2014 07 08 Added FA 10DCCRU option 7 1 9 8 25 1 etc Software Versions and Supported Options Supported nee Versten Feature Option Note FPGA1 1 36 or higher FA 95PS First edition FPGA2 1 27 or higher 3G SDI FPGA3 1 01 or higher SOFT 1 13 or higher Second Converter Auto Video Optimizer FA 95DACBL FPGA1 1 40 or higher FPGA2 1 28 or higher FPGA3 1 01 or higher SOFT 2 00 or higher FA 95RU Supports FA 95RU option FPGA1 1 51 or higher FPGA2 1 29 or higher FPGA3 1 01 or higher SOFT 2 10 or higher FA 95CO Supports FA 95CO option FA 95RU ver 1 10 or higher compatible FPGA1 1 55 or higher FPGA2 1 30 or higher FPGA3 1 01 or higher SOFT 2 22 or higher AVO Scene cut detection Modified frame delay settings for Forced Field function Corrected a bug on AUTO LOAD FA 95RU ver 1 20 or higher compatible
247. er values under both settings are recommended for materials for which only minimum leveling is prefered such as music materials 138 6 9 3 3 LOUDNESS CONTROL SETTINGS e Channel 1 display Menu button VIDEO OP AUDIO OP Parameter Default Setting range Description Allows you to set the target loudness level 2 0 to 2 0 LU The target level specified by the standard that is TARGET FOOLY 0 1 LU selected under the LOUDNESS STANDARD menu sec 6 9 3 5 is displayed to the left 20 0 to 0 0 dB Allows you to set the minimum gain lower MIN SA 0 gB 1 0 dB threshold to limit attenuation 0 0 to 5 0 dB Allows you to set the maximum gain upper MAI GAIN 30 0 08 1 0 dB threshold to limit magnification 139 6 9 3 4 LOUDNESS CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT e Channel 1 display 324 Menu button MODE STEREO L SOURCE VIDEO OP R SOURCE 2 AUDIO OP C INVALID 325 LFE INVALID Ls INVALID Rs INVALID e Channel 2 display 334 MODE STEREO L gt SOURCE 9 R gt SOURCEI10 C INVALID 335 EEEF E NOVA ED Ls INVALID Rs INVALID Parameter Default Setting range Description Allows you to specify the audio mode of the audio signal to be measured and adjust its loudness level F MONAURAL Only L channel will be MONAURAL subject to loudness adjustment Other MODE STEREO STEREO channels will be unselectable 5 1 CH STEREO L
248. er the IN OUT SEL setting is changed ASSIGN is reset to NONE Reset ASSIGN 2 The input functions consist of pulse mode and level mode functions See the following INPUT FUNCTION for details 3 Details of the output functions are shown in the OUTPUT FUNCTION on the next page Power 1 and 2 are selectable if the FA 95PS option is installed 148 4 Effective if the FA 95CO option is installed 5 Effective if the FA 95AlO option is installed 6 CONV1 LOGOs 1 7 and CONV2 LOGOs 1 7 will be displayed if selected as LOGO ID 1 Logo ID can be assigned to any number 1 through 256 In the following cases the logo will not be inserted to the converter output signals although data will be loaded to the FA 9520 No logo is registered under the selected Logo ID The registered logo format and converter output video format do not match The keyer of the relevant converter is turned off 7 Shown only if the FA 95ALA option is installed INPUT FUNCTION Function Mode Description NONE No function Selects OPERATE or BY PASS BY PASS Level Shorted to GND BY PASS OPEN OPERATE Sets FREEZE ON OFF FREEZE Level Shorted to GND FREEZE ON OPEN FREEZE OFF Selects FULL CB color bar for the test signal FULL CB Level Shorted to GND FULL CB ON OPEN FULL CB OFF Selects 75 CB for the test signal 75 CB Level Shorted to GND 75 CB ON OPEN 75 CB OFF Selects SMPT
249. ernet Explorer DER Video Test Signal OFF OFull Color Bar 75 Color Bar SMPTE Color Bar Ramp E Done Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Parameter Default Setting range Description Off Full Color Bar Video Test Signal Off 75 Color Bar al an internal video test SMPTE Color Bar Ramp 183 9 2 10 YPbPr RGB Clip Clicking block 11 on the video block diagram opens the YPbPr RGB setting dialog box See section 5 6 3 VIDEO CLIPSetting range for details A http 192 168 0 10 YPbPr RGB Clip Microsoft Internet Ex EBR YPbPr RGB Clip Mode YPbPr O RGB YPbPr Clip 107 5 ij EY Cunrry 75 g A LONITY Clip Mode O Off Y White Clip Y Black Clip Chroma Clip 111 0 4 SON RGB Clip White Clip Black Clip Internet l Done YPbPr RGB Clip Mode Parameter Default Setting range Description Off Selects a mode whether to clip Clip Mode Off YPbPr signals in the YPbPr or RGB color RGB space YPbPr Clip Parameter Default od Description A 7 7 y Mio Clb 109 0 05 lo Sets the Y signal upper threshold f FE 5 Y aa Ci 7 5 MESA le Sets the Y signal lower threshold Chroma Clip 111 0 50 0 111 0 Sets both the upper and lower PbPr Chroma Clip g 0 5 thresholds of PbPr signal
250. erwrite In Data Blank x PAL M Modo Sot V ANC Pass Blank V ANC Pass Blank Disable OEnable Converter 1 Audio Group Convertor 2 Audio Group Group 1 Disable Enable Group 1 OOlsable CEnable Group 2 ODisable DEnable Group 2 ODisable OEnable Refresh Group 3 ODisable enable Group 3 Odisable Ofnable Group 4 Disable Enable Group 4 ODisable E nable 1 NTSC Setup On Off radio buttons will appear under Composite Setting if the FA 95AlO option is not installed and will appear under Video Sub if the option is installed Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown SD Phase Parameter Default eee Description HPhase 00K C64 864 ck a Adjusts the horizontal and vertical phases of 0 Line the system referring to genlock signal This V Phase ar ay ee oo setting is applied to SD output signals Line AVDL Adjusts the subcarrier phase of composite and o o o Y C output signals referring to the B B SC Phase 0 179 8 180 genlock signal Not adjustable with the tri level genlock signal 1 These settings cannot be made if there is no reference signal input 2 The default value varies depending on the Synchro Mode setting as shown in the below
251. eset itself to the default value If the set value exceeds the horizontal range the H Left and H Right settings will reset to their default values If the value exceeds the vertical range the V Top and V Bottom settings will also reset accordingly Converter2 Side Cut Color Parameter Default Setting range Description Sets background color that will be visible if the converted image is set smaller than Red Green Blue 0 0 255 the original under Converter2 Size 5 4 3 R G and B components can be adjusted separately The Converter2 Side Cut Color setting cannot be changed if Converter2 Process Mode is set to BY PASS Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats that are indicated as BY PASS in the CONV2 Conversion Table 5 4 2 180 9 2 8 Color Corrector Clicking block 8 on the video block diagram opens the Color Corrector dialog box See section 5 2 4 COLOR CORRECTOR C C for details Auto Video Optimizer AVO and Color Corrector use the same circuit The color corrector settings are not fully changeable when AVO mode 9 2 2 Auto Video Optimizer AVO is set to Auto See section 5 2 5 Color Corrector and AVO Modes for the available menu settings 3 http 192 168 0 10 Color Corrector Microsoft Internet Explorer Correction Mode GH Balance Differential O Sepia Group Adjust Off Oon White Level Gamma Level 100 0 G 100 0
252. etting range Parameter Steps Description Field Generates a progressive scan image from one field of an interlaced scan image The created image has no motion artifacts but vertical resolution will be reduced Adaptive Detects whether there is motion or no motion in Adaptive the scene and generate an optimal progressive Frame Odd scan image 1st ble cds 1st enerates a progressive scan image from two eye fields odd even of and interlaced scan image Suitable for the progressive segment frame input of progressive scan signals Frame Even 1st Generates a progressive scan image from two fields even odd of interlaced scan image Field Motion Sense Adaptive IMPORTANT 1 The Motion Sense setting is common for Converters 1 and 2 Setting Motion Sense to Frame Odd 1st or Frame Even 1st for input signals other than progressive segment frame inputs causes motion artifacts to appear In such case change the Motion Sense setting to Field or Adaptive 178 Antialias Parameter Default Setting range Description Performs horizontal anti aliasing for the output video image Weak 8 1 Weak 8 to Strong 8 low to high Horizontal Normal Normal This setting cannot be changed if the Strong 1 8 conversion is set to the formats indicated as DOWN in the CONV2 Conversion Table in section 5 4 2 Performs vertrical anti aliasing for the output video image Weak 8 1 Weak 8 to Strong 8 l
253. ettings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps AES Audio Input Gain Parameter Default anen Description Sets the offset to the input gain for Master 0 0dB w 148 dB all channels CH1 to 8 of AES inputs AES Audio Input Gain Set Settings Parameter Default eee Description 20 0 20 0dB Sets the input gain for the EAS OBS 0 0 dB 0 1 dB individual AES channel 1 The total value of Master and individual channel cannot exceed the setting range The setting value will stop at the end of the range AES Audio Input Hysteresis Parameter Default o Description Synchronizes the AES input signals in Off group A or B per group CH1 2 CH7 8 Off Group A This setting is effective when using AES Group B audio signals to output multi channel audio signals such as surround sound The channel pair with the smallest channel numbers within a group is used as the reference pair and other channel pairs are synchronized to it If there is no audio signal in the channel pair the next channel pair will be the reference Audio signals with a phase difference relative to the reference within 0 25 of a sample period can be synchronized 190 Setting Examples When setting all channel pai
254. evel Analog p SUM Hp Gain Analog OUT REMAP 17 18 16 FA 95DACBL Option AES OUT gt 11 ANALOG DIGITAL Audio Input Output Level 11 1 Analog Output Level Relative to the Digital Input Level 9 Digital Reference Level 18dBFS ANALOG OUT LEVEL setting Digital audio input level 10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm 24 dBFS 16 dBm 6 dBm 2 dBm 2 dBm 20 dBFS 12 dBm 2 dBm 2 dBm 6 dBm 18 dBFS 10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm 0 dBFS 8dBm 18 dBm 22 dBm CLIP Digital Reference Level 20dBFS ANALOG OUT LEVEL setting Digital audio input level 10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm 24 dBFS 14 dBm 4 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 20 dBFS 10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm 18 dBFS 8 dBm 2 dBm 6 dBm 10 dBm 0 dBFS 10 dBm 20 dBm 24 dBm CLIP Digital Reference Level 24dBFS ANALOG OUT LEVEL setting Digital audio input level 10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm 24 dBFS 10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm 20 dBFS 6 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm 12 dBm 18 dBFS 4 dBm 6 dBm 10 dBm 14 dBm 0 dBFS 14 dBm 24 dBm CLIP CLIP See REF LEVEL in section 6 10 2 DIGITAL AUDIO for details on the Digital Reference Level setting See section 6 3 3 ANALOG OUT LEVEL for details on the ANALOG OUT LEVEL setting 259 11 2 Digita
255. f Converter1 Process Mode is set to BY PASS Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV1 Conversion Table 5 3 2 Converter1 Size Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description H Size 100 0 50 0 150 0 Adjusts the width of the video Horizontal Size aa 0 1 displayed on the monitor V Size 100 0 50 0 150 0 Adjusts the height of the video Vertical Size ee 0 1 displayed on the monitor The Converter1 Size setting cannot be changed if Converter1 Process Mode is set to BY PASS Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV1 Conversion Table 5 3 2 Converter1 Position Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description H Position 0 Pixel Variable Adjusts the horizontal position of Horizontal Position 2 Pixel the video displayed on the monitor V Position 0 Line Variable Adjusts the vertical position of the Vertical Position 1 Line video displayed on the monitor The Converter1 Position setting cannot be changed if Converter1 Process Mode is set to BY PASS Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV1 Conversion Table 5 3 2 1 The Converter1 Position setting range varies depending on Converter1 Process Mode and Sync Format settings in FS Mode 9 4 1 Video System 175 C
256. f O rectangle on all output videos display It is set to Off at startup Also if Mode is set to Off Area Display is automatically set to Off 1 Selecting Auto disables the Color Corrector menu 9 2 8 2 Selecting Hold disables the Correction Mode and Gamma Curve settings in the Color Corrector 9 2 8 165 IMPORTANT Auto Level Adjustment will provide optimal results in many cases but not always Sample Area determines the area where the data is sampled and the level adjustments are applied to whole images Sample Area Fixed area Eight available sample areas are as shown below Data is continuously sampled within each area See section 9 2 2 3 User Area 1 2 for USERA REA 1 and 2 AAA Sample Sample area Sample area D Sample area Full Screen Letter Box Pillar Box Center area area area area Top Left Top Right Bottom Left Bottom Right 9 AVO Setup Setting ee Parameter Default range Description Sets the filtering strength for calculating the mean distances that are applied to histograms created Response Lia using the sample data Filtering Level 3 Level5 The larger the value the more gradually filtering is strength performed with a more stable image but slower response The smaller the value the less stable the image but with a faster response Scene Cut Det Off When set to On the cut transitions are detected Scene cut Off On and images are properl
257. f at startup These settings are not stored in the event memory 2 Freeeze Mode is automatically set to Frame for progressive and progressive segmented frame input signals and cannot be changed See the below Freeze Mode Setting Chart for details Freeze Mode Setting Chart Input signal Sync Format 525 60 625 50 1080 59i 1080 50i 720 59p 720 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF 1080 59p 1080 50p settings AUTO OE OE OE OE F F F F F F 525 60 OE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE 625 50 NOE OE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE 1080 59i NOE NOE OE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE 1080 50i NOE NOE NOE OE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE NOE 720 59p NF NF NF NF F NF NF NF NF NF 720 50p NF NF NF NF NF F NF NF NF NF 1080 23PsF NF NF NF NF NF NF F NF NF NF 1080 24PsF NF NF NF NF NF NF NF F NF NF 1080 59p NF NF NF NF NF NF NF NF F NF 1080 50p NF NF NF NF NF NF NF NF NF F OE Can be set to Frame Odd or Even F Fixed to Frame NOE Can be set to Frame Odd or Even but the image does not appear properly NF Fixed to Frame and the image does not appear properly 219 FS Mode Parameter Default Setting range Description Frame Sync Enables horizontal and vertical alignment of video signals to a genlock signal Effective on both synchronous and asynchronous signals Line Sync Locks the video signal of within Synchro Mode 1 2H to a
258. f the Converter 1 CONA output signal 1 NAME and LOGO FORMAT can be registered for each logo ID via FA 95LG GUI See the separate FA 95LG GUI Operation Manual for details 2 The video format displayed under CONV1 and the logo format displayed under LOGO FORMAT must match Otherwise no logo will be displayed even if KEYER in section 5 9 1 2 CONV1 KEYER SET is turned On 76 5 9 1 2 CONV1 KEYER SET Allows you to set a keyer for CONVERTER 1 Menu button 402 LEVEL 100 VIDEO OP H POS OPIXEL AUDIO OP V POS OLINE Setting range ae Parameter Default Steps Description Allows you to enable or disable the keyer for the OFF Converter 1 output signal joes QuE ON ON Enables display of logos selected in the CONV1 LOGO SEL menu 5 9 1 1 4 0 100 Allows you to set a key level for a logo to be LEVEL 100 0 1 output to the Converter 1 output signal y 9 Allows you to set the horizontal positon for a H POS 0 logo to be output to the Converter 1 output 2 Pixel signal Vv POs 0 2 Allows you to set the vertical positon for a logo 1 Line to be output to the Converter 1 output signal 1 Key level and position settings are saved for each logo ID Changing logo settings for Converter 1 will also change the logo settings of Converter 2 using the same logo 2 Actual logo position differs depending on the logo format selected when registering the logo See section 5 9 1 5
259. g to the REMOTE GPD Connector 28 Connecting via a WEB Browser 157 Connections 23 Consecutive Viewing of Settings 33 CONTROL SETTING 146 Control via WEB Browser 157 CONV1 UP DOWN CROSS CONVERTER 40 CONV1 ANC OUT 109 CONV1 ANC OUT1 111 CONV1 ANC SET 87 CONV1 AUDIO GROUP 89 301 CONV1 Conversion Table 43 CONV1 CROPPING 44 CONV1 IMPROVE 45 CONV1 KEYER SET 77 CONV1 LOGO SEL 76 CONV1 82016 OUT 109 CONV1 SIDE RGB 46 CONV1 SIZE POS 43 CONV1 U D MODE 41 CONV1 VI OUT 110 CONV1 WSS OUT 110 CONV2 UP DOWN CROSS CONVERTER 47 CONV2 ANC OUT 111 CONV2 ANC OUT1 113 CONV2 ANC SET 88 CONV2 AUDIO GROUP 89 CONV2 Conversion Table 49 CONV2 CROPPING 50 CONV2 IMPROVE 51 CONV2 KEYER SET 79 CONV2 LOGO SEL 78 CONV2 S2016 OUT 111 CONV2 SIDE RGB 52 CONV2 SIZE POS 49 CONV2 U D MODE 48 CONV2 VI OUT 112 CONV2 WSS OUT 112 Conversion Setting Version Differences 291 Converter1 Web 173 Converter2 Up Down Cross Web 177 CORRECTION 144 226 Correction Mode 181 CRC ERROR TRG 68 D DIGITAL AUDIO 143 Digital Output Level Relative to the Analog Input Level 260 DIGITAL SILENCE 145 Dipswitch Settings 22 Dolby AUX OUTPUT 132 Dolby AUX OUTPUT Select Web 211 Dolby AUX STATUS 107 Dolby DECODER GAIN 134 Dolby DECODER INPUT 133 Dolby Decoder Option FA 95D D 132 Dolby DECODER REFERENCE 134 Dolby DOWNMIX 134 Dolby E Decoder Encoder Channel Assignment Table 262 Dolby E Encoder Web 212 Dolby E Digital Decoder Web 208 Dolby
260. ge with a 16 9 aspect ratio and alternative 14 9 center in a 16 9 coded frame Image with a 16 9 aspect ratio and alternative 4 3 center in a 16 9 coded frame 20 2 Aspect Ratio Conversion with AFD 4 3 to 16 9 conversion Input AFD Input AFD Illustration in a 4 3 SD AFD 16 9 conv SD AFD ALT 16 9 conv WSS VI S2016 coded frame HD AFD conversion HD AFD ALT conversion BOX 16 9 TOP 4 3L 16 9 T BOX 14 9 TOP 4 3L 14 9 T BOX 16 9 CTR 4 3 L gt 16 9 MEE F 4 3 4 3 F 4 3 aa z a a se BOX 16 9CTR 4 3L16 9PRTD BOX 14 9CTR 4 3 L 14 9 F 14 9 CTR 4 3 F ALT14 9 Sissi PRTD None 4 3 LALT 14 9 None 4 3 LALT 4 3 284 4 3 to 4 3 conversion Input AFD Input AFD Illustration in a 4 3 AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 WSS VI S2016 coded frame conversion conversion BOX 16 9 TOP 4 3L 16 9 T BOX 14 9 TOP 4 3L 14 9 T BOX 16 9 CTR 4 3 L gt 16 9 IE E MEE MEE F 4 3 4 3 F 4 3 a Ne AR s a Ne BOX 16 9 CTR 4 3L16 9PRTD BOX 14 9 CTR 4 3L 14 9 F 14 9 CTR 4 3 F ALT14 9 AE LIE LIA PRTD None 4 3L ALT 14 9 None 4 3 L ALT 4 3 PR 285 16 9 to 4 3 conversion Input AFD WSS None F 16 9 AMRPH None None None None None None Input AFD VI S2016 16 9 L gt 16 9 16 9 F 16 9 16 9 P 4 3 16 9 F PRTD 16 9 P 14 9 16 9PALT 14 9 16 9FALT 14 9 16 9 F ALT4 3 Illustration in a 16 9 coded frame 286 AFD 4 3 conversion
261. genlock signal Output delay is 1H A Effective only when video signal is synchronous 2 x Frame Sync to the genlock signal E Frame Line Sync AVDL Locks the video signal to a genlock E Sync AVDL signal with a 1H delay Effective only when 5 Input Lock video signal is synchronous to the genlock 6 signal Input Lock Locks the system to an input video signal The delay can be adjusted by System Phase and or Frame Delay However the minimum delay is 520clk common in all formats HD 74MHz SD 27MHz Does not use a genlock signal Auto Detect 525 60 625 50 1080 59 94 Sets a system format for the FA 9500 Auto 1080 50i Auto Detect Detects and sets the detected Sync Format Detect 720 59 94p input video format to the system format 720 50p Other values make the system work in the 1080 23PsF format 1080 24PsF 1080 59 94p 1080 50p Off Selects which field to be used twice to compose Forced Field 4 Off Odd a frame Even Effective on composite signal inputs 1 Setting Synchro Mode to Input Lock cannot synchronize the system with an invalid composite signal input In such case set Synchro Mode to Frame Sync Also when Synchro Mod is set to Input Lock the horizontal and vertical phases of the system need to be offset by more than 1 line to keep the delay between Converter and BY PASS outputs to within 1 frame See 9 2 6 Converter1 9 2 7 Converter 2 and SD Phase and HD Phase in 9 4 1
262. gnal as described in section 5 10 7 SD PHASE SET The SDI OUT3 4 output siganls will be adjusted To embed AFD data into the FA 9500 output video signal set ANC MODE to DETAIL in the 5 10 9 CONV1 ANC SET and 5 10 10 CONV2 ANC SET menus then select the AFD data you wish to embed for each converter in the 5 10 16 ANC DATA EMBED menu 24 3 3 To Embed AES Input Signals on SDI Signals The following describes how to embed 4 channel AES signals on SDI signals in SDI OUT1 4 Input an HD SD SDI signal to SDI IN1 The AES signals are embedded to Input 2 channel AES signals to DIGITAL AUDIO CH 1 through 4 of output signals AUDIO 101 2 and 103 4 from SDI OUT1 4 Settings that need to be checked O Select SOURCE SEL 1 2 and set SOURCE SET to AES1 2 as described in section 6 5 1 SOURCE SRC SEL Also select SOURCE SEL 3 4 set SOURCE SET to AES3 4 and set SRC OP BY to AUTO NOTE Provide audio settings if necessary as described in section 6 2 AES AUDIO Settings AES AUDIO 25 3 4 To Embed Analog Audio Signals on SDI Signals The following describes how to embed a 4 channel analog audio signal on SDI OUT1 through 4 output signals Input an audio signal to SDI ANALOG AUDIO IN1 4 channels Input an HD SD signal to SDI IN1
263. gnal input to the optional Dolby input connector Dolby IN Loss PER PCM Loss No audio signal l Input NON PCM PCM Standard audio signal nknown NON PCM Compressed audio data such as Dolby E encoded data UNKNOWN Unknown signal Displays status or type of signal output to the optional PCM Dolby output connectors Dolby OUT Output NON PCM PCM Standard audio signal l None NON PCM Compressed audio data such as Dolby E encoded data NONE No signal Loss 525 60 625 50 1080 59i Displays signal format of reference signal input to the 1080 50i optional Dolby REF IN connector Relenenies 720 59p LOSS No signal 720 50p UNKNOWN Unknown signal format 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF Unknown Analog Input Audio Item Display Description Displays status of the input audio signal in the Loss ANALOG AUDIO connector CH1 CH4 In Loss No audio signals In Input signal is present 9 Analog Output Audio Item Display Description Displays status of the output audio signal from the CH1 CH4 Silence ANALOG AUDIO connector i Out Silence Mute signal Out Output signal is present 246 9 7 3 Unit Information FA 9500 Logout EE EE M e A Video Audio System GPI Utility Status Network gt Unit Video Status gt Audio Status gt Unit Information ANC Status Changeover Status Unit Version Option A Information Option B Information Option Information Serial No 13710401
264. gs VIDEO Button Destination Reference Button mode VIDEO CONV1 CONV1 ANC SET 99 5 10 9 VIDEO CONV2 AFD IN STATUS 641 5 13 16 VIDEO IN SEL VIDEO IN STATUS 502 5 13 2 VIDEO OUT SEL VIDEO OUT STATUS 511 5 13 4 AUDIO SDI AUDIO SDI 1 2 OUT AUDIO 561 5 13 11 AUDIO AES AUDIO AES OUT AUDIO 569 5 13 13 AUDIO ANALOG ANALOG OUT AUDIO 571 5 13 14 AUDIO MAPPING SOURCE AUDIO 531 5 13 6 AUDIO AUDIO OP Dolby AUX STATUS 573 5 13 15 1 The Dolby AUX STATUS 573 menu is available only if the FA 95D D option is installed The page jump feature is inoperative while the FA 9520 is in the setting change confirming state lt becomes operable when the change is either confirmed or canceled Refer to section 4 2 6 Changing Setting Values for details 4 2 6 Changing Setting Values Once the desired menu is displayed use the control knobs F1 F4 to change the setting values 9000168 ee 5 b JUN POWER on o ir Control F1 F4 Menu title DEO PRO A P 1 E VIDEO LVL 100 0 p CHROMA LVL 100 0 pa SETUP BLACK 0 0 Fa HUE 0 0 SORA FA 950 Parameter Setting value Menu page number 34 lt NORMAL mode gt In the above example the PROCESS SDI AUDIO button h
265. hanged by loading an event While the USER 1 2 AREA SET setting menu is open and the AREA is changed via web browser or the connected FA 95RU to other than USER AREAs 1 and 2 in the AVO SETTING menu 5 5 1 the menu will change to display the AVO SETTING menu 5 5 1 59 5 5 4 1 Manual Level Adjustment The FA 9500 automatically adjusts the signal level if the MODE of the AVO SETTING menu is set to AUTO see section 5 5 1 The signal level can also be manually adjusted if the MODE is set to HOLD or OFF To provide fine adjustment on the automatically adjusted level Changing the AVO MODE selection from AUTO to HOLD will enable fine adjustment of the adjusted signal levels that are provided by the automatic level adjustment However the change will not be retained after restarting the unit The signal levels return to the values before the manual adjustment the values provided by the automatic level adjustment While AVO is turned on the COLOR CORRECT menu settings will automatically adjust MODE will change to BALANCE and CURVE to BLACK The fine adjustment enabled in HOLD mode is enabled only for color correction BALANCE mode To manually adjust the signal levels Set AVO MODE to OFF to manually adjust the signal levels If the AVO MODE selection is changed from AUTO to OFF the signal levels return to their values before the automatic level adjustment The adjustable items in the Color Correction menus are as shown in the t
266. he 6 1 5 SDI IN AUDIO ALIGNMENT setting from DISABLE to ENABLE b Disconnect and reinput the SDI input signal These operations reset the audio circuit and minimize the delay differences and group audio phase differences Output audio signals will be muted while performing the operations 144 6 10 4 DIGITAL SILENCE Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description Sets the duration to determine the SDI embedded audio and SILENCE TIME 2sec 1 10sec AES input signals are silent The audio status display appears as Silence after the set duration 72dBFS 66dBFS Sets the audio level to determine SILENCE LVL 72dBFS 60dBFS the SDI embedded audio and 54dBFS AES input signals are silent 48dBFS 1 According to this setting the audio status is displayed in the SDI 1 IN AUDIO 5 13 7 SDI 2 IN AUDIO 5 13 8 and AES IN AUDIO menus 5 13 9 145 7 Other Settings amp Information OTHER Allows you to set other settings other than video and audio settings Also information on the various versions and installation states of FA 9500 option items can be viewed 7 1 CONTROL SETTING CONTROL SETTING Menu button CONTROL LOCAL STATUS OTHER Parameter Default Setting range Description LOCAL Disables control from FA 95RU FA 10DCCRU LOCAL Front panel REMOTE LED is lit PONTROL LOCAL REMOTE REMOTE Enables control fro
267. hen BY PASS is enabled or the unit is turned off Used for reference signal input black burst or tri level sync to synchronize the system The bottom connector is y GENLOCKIN for a loop through It must be terminated at 75 ohm when not in use DIGITAL AUDIO Used for digital audio inputs and outputs Select whether 8 IO to use for input or output as in section 6 2 5 AES I O 6 2 5 1 2 7 8 SETUP A 1000 100BASE TX 10BASE T Ethernet LAN port 9 LAN1 Used to connect an external remote control unit or to transfer data to an external device RJ 45 A 1000 100BASE TX 10BASE T Ethernet LAN port 10 LAN2 Used to connect an external remote control unit or to transfer data to an external device RJ 45 For future use Used to ground the unit to protect operators against static electricity and electrical shock 11 Ground Terminal 19 No Name Description Ref 12 ACIN2 Used to connect the unit to an AC power source AC100V 240V 50 60Hz Enabled only when the optional redundant power unit FA 95PS is installed The operation status can be viewed from the DC POWER 2 menu as described in section 5 13 1 UNIT ALARM The menu is displayed if the optional FA 95PS is installed 13 FAN1 Used to air cool the unit to prevent overheating Do not block the ventilation with other equipment or objects The operation status can be viewed from the FAN1 menu as described in sectio
268. htness of all LED LED BRIGHT LEVEL4 LEVEL1 8 indicators on the front panel LEVEL1 8 dark to bright DISABLE DISABLE Disable buzzer BUZZER ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE Enable buzzer This menu cannot be accessed from the FA 95RU 147 7 4 GPI SETTING Menu button STATUS OTHER Parameter Default Setting range Description GPI1 7 SEL GPI1 GPI1 7 Selects a GPI pin of the REMOTE port IN OUT SEL INPUT INPUT OUTPUT Selects whether to use the GPI pin that is selected under GPI1 7 SEL for input or tally output ASSIGN NONE In case IN OUT SEL is set to INPUT 2 NONE BY PASS FREEZE FULL CB 75 CB SMPTE CB RAMP SDI1 SDI2 COMPOSITE YPbPr SMPTE YPbPr BETACAM 4 RGB Y C DEFAULT EVENT1 100 CHGOV ENABLE CHGOV DISABLE 5 CONV1 KEYER CONV2 KEYER CONV1 LOAD 1 7 8 CONV2 LOAD 1 7 8 LOUD1 2 START 7 LOUD1 2 CLEAR 7 In case IN OUT SEL is set to OUTPUT NONE FREEZE VIDEO IN AUDIO IN REF IN FAN ALARM DC POWER1 DC POWER2 SDI1 SDI2 COMPOSITE YPbPr SMPTE YPbPr BETACAM 4 RGB 4 Y C CHANGEOVER 5 CHGOV ENABLE CONV1KEYER CONV2KEYER LOUD1 2 CTRL Assigns a function to the GPI pin that is selected under GPI1 7 SEL according to the selection under IN OUT SEL LOGO ID 1 7 1 256 Selects a logo ID for the selected CONV1 LOAD 1 7 or CONV2 LOAD 1 7 1 Whenev
269. igger is disabled for audio channels 1 to 16 respectively CH1 1 to 16 Non Trigger Audio Error trigger is enabled but has not triggered a changeover for audio channels 1 to 16 respectively Trigger Audio Error trigger is enabled and has triggered a changeover for audio channels 1 to 16 respectively 4 Silence Status Displays Silence trigger status details at the time a changeover is performed Item Description Disable Silence trigger is disabled for audio channels 1 to 16 respectively CH1 1 to 16 Non Trigger Silence trigger is enabled but has not triggered a changeover for audio channels 1 to 16 respectively Trigger Silence trigger is enabled and has triggered a changeover for channels 1 to 16 respectively 252 9 8 Network Settings FA 9500_ System Utility Click If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown Click the Network tab at the top of the page The Network page will be displayed Click NETWORK SETTING in at the top left to go to the NETWORK SETTING screen In the same way click SNMP SETTING USER SETTING or NETWORK RESTART to go to the respective page 9 8 1 Network Information Network Information LAN 1 IP Address 192 168 0 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Unused MAC Address 00 10 B1 06 A0 3C Remote Port Number 50010 Logo Port Number 50020
270. ignals to output from video output connectors SDI3 and 4 Setting range eT Parameter Default Steps Description Selects whether to output a Converter or 2 signal from SDI3 and 4 connectors The input and output signal formats are displayed e g 625 50 gt gt 1080 50i Converter1 Assign Converter1 Converter2 185 Composite Output Setting Allows you to assign video signals to output from the Composite output connectors Setting range aoe Parameter Default Steps Description Selects whether to output a Assign Converter1 Palate Converter1 or 2 signal from COMPOSITE OUT connectors The input and output signal formats are displayed e g 625 50 gt gt 1080 50i Component Output Setting This menu appears only if the FA 95AIO option is installed Allows you to assign video signals to video output pins to output to the FA 95AlO Component I O connector Setting range is Parameter Default Steps Description Converter1 Selects whether to output a Converter1 or 2 Assign Converter1 signal from the ANALOG COMPONENT I O Converter2 connector Displays formats of input signals to the converter and converted output signal from the converter as 625 50 gt gt 1080 50i Output Mode Setting range ae Parameter Default Steps Description YPbPr SMPTE Selects an output mode for ANALOG Output Mode YPbPr YPbPr BETACAM COMPONENT FA 95AIO signals p SM
271. in ANC DATA EMBED Sec 5 10 16 Whether closed caption data has been inserted can be verified in CONV1 ANC OUT Sec 5 16 and or CONV2 ANC OUT Sec 5 18 for CEA608 CC CONV1 ANC OUT1 Sec 5 17 and or CONV2 ANC OUT1 Sec 5 19 for S334 1 CC SD and CEA708 CC HD e Closed caption data auto conversion If CEA608 and 8334 1 CC closed caption data is detected in SD SDI input video signals and the CONV1 and or Conv2 output format is 1080 59i and or 720 59p the detected closed caption data will not be converted to CEA708 CC HD The CEA708 closed caption data insertion will be automatically terminated Meanwhile if CEA708 closed caption data is detected in the 1080 59i or 720 59p input signal it will be converted to CEA608 and S334 1 CC The converted closed caption data will be inserted into output video signals selected under EMBED from among CONV1 CONV2 and CONV1 2 in ANC DATA EMBED Sec 5 10 16 292 22 Loading Older Version Data from FA 9500 Event data created by an earlier version of software than 6 00 and files saved by the backup parameter function of the former version FA 9500 may not recall images as saved before since software version 6 0 has been enhanced to include up down cross conversion in the second converter Make sure to reset the settings shown below when loading events or files created by earlier version software However Event data files created on software earlier than version 6 00 and that created on versio
272. indicated as BY PASS in the CONV2 Conversion Table see section 5 4 2 In both cases the menu as shown below will be displayed IMPORTANT Setting MOTION to FRM ODD 1st or FRM EVEN 1st for input signals other than progressive segment frame inputs causes motion artifacts to appear In such case change the MOTION setting to FIELD or ADAPTIVE 51 5 4 6 CONV2 SIDE RGB CON 25 Menu button RED 0 GREEN 0 CONV2 BLUE 0 MASTER GROUP ADJ UST Parameter Default Setting range Description Sets background color that will be visible if the converted image is set smaller than original in CONV2 SIZE POS 5 4 3 0 0 255 R G and B components can be adjusted separately F4 control knob allows you to adjust R G and B at the same time Adjusts the R G and B components separately then turns this Group Adjust Group Adjust 0 0 255 on Changing any R G or B value will Group Adjustment change the values of the three components accordingly while retaining the proportion RED GREEN BLUE Background color If the CONV2 mode is set to BY PASS the CONV2 SIDE RGB setting cannot be changed Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV2 Conversion Table see section 5 4 2 In both cases the menu as shown below will be displayed 52 5 5 Auto Video Optimizer AVO 5 5 1 AVO SETTING
273. ing AFD code data SD SDI 4 3 oy SD SDI 4 3 HD SDI 16 9 A PA E gt E ME Postage stamp Down Full frame Pillar box DN gt Full frame HD SDI 16 9 K AFD Active Format Description having the SD SDI 4 3 o original aspect ratio information of the input a video enables aspect ratio conversion with Full frame an optimal image display area 16 9 Letter box N OI Postage stamp Gray regions are picture areas that may be cropped by the receiving device with no signaficant picture loss for the viewer The bounding box indicates the o screen size The white region contains important image data Black regions indicate picture areas containing no useful image data that is to be cropped by the receiver as necessary 281 20 1 AFD Codes AFD 4 3 code WSS name FA 9500 specified name illustration in a 4 3 Description VI S2016 coded frame Image with a 16 9 aspect ratio as a letterbox on top of a 4 3 BOX 16 9 TOP 4 3 L 16 9 T coded frame Image with a 14 9 aspect ratio as a letterbox on top of a 4 3 BOX 14 9 TOP 4 3 L 14 9 T coded frame Image with an aspect ratio greater than 16 9 as a vertically centered letterbox in BOX 16 9 CTR 4 3 L gt 16 9 a 4 3 coded frame MEE Image is full frame with an aspect ratio the same as that F 4 3 4 3 F 4 3 of the 4 3 coded frame a Ne Image with a 16 9 aspect ratio as a vertically centered letterbox in a 4 3 coded BOX
274. ing a Router Web An SDI 1 input signal switchover conducted via router will be detected as an error by the CRC Error Trigger and Audio Error Trigger in section 9 2 1 Input Select If either trigger has been enabled for a short duration a changeover will occur To avoid such input switchover triggered changeovers set DURATION under CRC Error Trigger to longer than 2 frames and DURATION under Audio Error Trigger to longer than 0 2 sec 9 2 1 4 How to Reset to SDI 1 Main Input Web This section describes how to reset input to SDI 1 after a Changeover 1 Check the 9 7 5 Changeover Status menu to verify what caused the changeover 2 Resolve the issue s 3 Check that the issue s is are resolved using a waveform monitor 4 Disable Changeover The status menu will be reset 5 Select SDI 1 under Input Select 6 Enable Changeover again 164 9 2 2 Auto Video Optimizer AVO Clicking block 2 on the video block diagram opens the Auto Video Optimizer dialog box 4 http 192 168 0 10 Auto Video Optimiz EBX AVO Control Sample Area Off User 4 Auto O Hold Area 1 y Off O On AVO Setup Level 3 v Area Display Response Scene Cut Det Off Oon Off oOn Close Gamma Mode Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings AVOControl Parameter Default Setting rang
275. ings must be adjusted for your network after purchase The FA 9500 s LAN1 IP address is set to 192 168 0 10 at the factory Set the IPaddress and subnet mask of the computer IP address 192 168 0 1 to 192 168 0 254 except 192 168 0 10 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 In Windows open the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box and open the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window The settings must be made in the window See the user s manual of your computer for details Start a web browser on your computer and enter the address as http 192 168 0 10 Enter the default user name fa9500 and the default password foranetwork The FA 9500 control window appears on the web browser window See section 9 8 Network Settings for details on changing the FA 9500 s IP address See section 9 Control via WEB Browser for details on the FA 9500 web browser control window NOTE The FA 9500 s IP address can be checked on the front panel display See section 7 5 NETWORK INFO for details 27 3 6 Connecting to the REMOTE GPI Connector Easy control over the FA 9500 from an external device is also possible by connecting the device to the REMOTE connector Seven ports are provided on the connector Assign functions to the respective ports to control the FA 9500 Connect a device to the REMOTE con
276. interlaced scan image The created image has no motion artifacts but vertical resolution will be reduced ADAPTIVE Detects whether there is motion or no motion in the scene and generate an optimal progressive scan image FRM ODD 1st Generates a progressive scan image from two fields odd even of and interlaced scan image Suitable for the progressive segment frame input of progressive scan signals FRM EVEN 1st Generates a progressive scan image from two fields even odd of interlaced scan image Performs horizontal anti aliasing for the output video image WEAK 8 to STRONG 8 low to high This setting cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as DOWN in the CONV2 Conversion Table in section 5 4 2 ANTIALIAS V NORMAL WEAK 8 1 NORMAL STRONG1 8 Performs vertrical anti aliasing for the output video image WEAK 8 to STRONG 8 low to high This setting cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as DOWN in the CONV2 Conversion Table in section 5 4 2 ENHANCE LEVEL 0 LEVEL 0 8 Sharpens the output video image LEVEL 0 to 8 low to high 1 Common MOTION settings for CONV1 and CONV2 This setting can be changed from either the CONV1 IMPROVE or CONV2 IMPROVE menu and applied to both menus 2 ANTIALIAS and ENHANCE settings cannot be changed if CONV1 U D MODE is set to BY PASS or the conversion is set to the formats
277. io signals as a group Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description DISABLE DISABLE Does not insert the GROUP1 GROUP1 ENABLE ENABLE 2 embedded audio ENABLE Inserts the GROUP1 embedded audio DISABLE DISABLE Does not insert the GROUP2 GROUP2 ENABLE ENABLE 2 embedded audio ENABLE Inserts the GROUP2 embedded audio DISABLE DISABLE Does not insert the GROUP3 GROUP3 ENABLE ENABLE 2 embedded audio ENABLE Inserts the GROUP3 embedded audio DISABLE DISABLE Does not insert the GROUP4 GROUP4 ENABLE ENABLE 2 embedded audio ENABLE Inserts the GROUP4 embedded audio 1 GROUP4 embedded audio cannot be inserted into SD SDI output signals regardless of the GROUP4 setting 2 The setting is ineffective if the input and output formats are the same and H ANC is set to IN DATA in the 5 10 9 CONV1 ANC SET menu 5 10 12 CONV2 AUDIO GROUP Allows you to set whether or not to embed audio signals as a group Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description DISABLE DISABLE Does not insert the GROUP1 GROUP1 ENABLE ENABLE 2 embedded audio ENABLE Inserts the GROUP1 embedded audio DISABLE DISABLE Does not insert the GROUP2 GROUP2 ENABLE ENABLE 2 embedded audio ENABLE Inserts the GROUP2 embedded audio DISABLE DISABLE Does not insert the GROUP3 GROUP3 ENABLE ENAB
278. isplayed a changeover will not be performed 70 5 7 13 CHGOV VID STATUS This menu is accessible only if the FA 95CO software option is installed Settings in this menu will reset themselves whenever CHANGEOVER in the VIDEO INPUT SET 5 7 1 menu has been set to DISABLE CHGOV VID ATU 6 4 Menu button SDI ERROR NON TRG FORMAT ERR NON TRG IN SEL CRC ERROR NON TRG DOWNMIX BLACK VIDEO NON TRG Parameter Description Displays SDI error trigger status at the time a changeover is performed SDI ERROR DISABLE This trigger is disabled NON TRG This trigger is not activated TRIGGER Changeover is performed due to this trigger FORMAT ERR Displays Format error trigger status at the time a changeover is performed DISABLE This trigger is disabled NON TRG This trigger is not activated TRIGGER Changeover is performed due to this trigger Displays CRC error trigger status at the time a changeover is performed DISABLE This trigger is disabled CRC ERROR NON TRG This trigger is not activated TRIGGER Changeover is performed due to this trigger Displays Black Video trigger status at the time a changeover is performed BLACK VIDEO DISABLE This trigger is disabled NON TRG This trigger is not activated TRIGGER Changeover is performed due to this trigger 5 7 14 CHGOV AUD STATUS This menu is accessible only if the FA 95CO software option is in
279. it is on Note that the video and audio signals will be distorted while rebooting the FA 9500 INFORMATION NETWORK SETTING SNMP SETTING TRAP SETTING USER SETTING NETWORK RESTART System Restart Restart 257 10 Systen Block Diagram Audio AUX IN 16ch SDI IN1 16ch SDI IN2 Analog IN IN SEL gt Gain gt 0 2 Source Boch SRC Terminal gt taal gt Select a a 5 AES IN OUT Cas mou ey IN OUT Select 6 Hystereesi Gain gt s FO SY pr Block No Block No Menu No 2 47 125 184 121 41 142 5 135 184 155 181 182 183 2 11 175 on 22 124 14 123 4 17 146 3 0 20 134 302 303 23 304 301 26 307 308 Dolby E Digital 10ch FA 95DE E Option Decoder 23 Dolby E 20h San H Encoder k ea eo i 2ch y H H i i Polarity 11 i go Dolby Dolby j Decoder Encoder Input Select Input Select i 2 en J Delay Gain gt 10 Polarity 11 Block No Menu No 147 132 161 165 166 101 102 143 144 wo a 258 Output Select 25 2ch i NP AUX OUT SDI OUT1 160h MONO Audio p sum p croup SDI 14 18 REMAP 13 SDI OUT2 gt 4ch MONO L
280. itoring and can be downloaded see section 9 6 3 Downloading a MIB File See section 9 8 3 SNMP SETTING for details about the SNMP network settings SET GET List Object group Front TITLE Item name Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type fey Seb OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 1 Unit infor Product Name Model name a95ProduciName 1 OCTET STRING O Product Code Product code a95ProductCode 2 INTEGER O UnitName Unit name a95UnitName 3 OCTET STRING O Unit Info Serial No Serial number a95SerialNumber 4 INTEGER O Soft Software version a95SoftVersion 11 OCTET STRING 5 13 O Unit Ver FPGA1 Ver FPGA 1version a95FPGA1Version 12 OCTET STRING 5 13 O FPGA2 Ver FPGA2 version a95FPGA2Version 13 OCTET STRING 5 13 O FPGA3 Ver FPGA3 version a95FPGA3Version 14 OCTET STRING 5 13 O O1D 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 1 100 Software option 0 notinstalled A FA 95SCNV 1 installed a95ScnvOption 1 NTEGER O FA 95AVO Punotinsialed a95AvoOption gt INTEGER O Soft Option SOFT OPTION1 2 0 notinstalled g FA 95 3G 1 installed a95 3GOption 3 NTEGER O 0 notinstalled FA 95CO 1 installed a95CoOption 4 NTEGER O O1D 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 1 200 1 Option SlotA 0 notinstalled 1 FA 95AIO 4 FA 95DE E Name 5 FA 95D D a95SlotTypeA 1 NTEGER O OPTION Slot A
281. k area in pictures will appear brighter which may however lower the contrast and the noise will become apparent The smaller the value the higher the contrast which may however cause the image to be underexposed 169 9 2 2 3 User Area 1 2 Clicking Set Area of Sample Area on the AVO setting dialog box opens the User Area 1 2 Setting dialog box 2 AVO User Area Setting Windows Internet Explorer DERI a 192 168 0 10 a User Area 1 o Pixel Y E 0 Line YH 360 Pixel YH E 360 Line HH User Area 2 0 Pixel li 0 Line a 360 Pixel YH E 360 Line i un Refresh Internet fa gt Qio After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps To set the sample area set the start point and the size Parameter Default R Description Start H O Pixel Perales Specifies the horizontal start point Start V 0 Line ino Specifies the vertical start point ce eee V Size 360 onc e ala size distance from START V START H HSIZE Ly N N gt Default setting of sample area in 1080 59 94i IMPORTANT The sample area should be set within the effective lines and pixels Otherwise the sample area will automatically revert
282. l Output Level Relative to the Analog Input Level Digital Reference Level 18dBFS ANALOG IN LEVEL setting Analog audio input level 10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm 20 dBm 28 dBFS 38 dBFS 42 dBFS 46 dBFS 10 dBm 18 dBFS 28 dBFS 32 dBFS 36 dBFS 4 dBm 12 dBFS 22 dBFS 26 dBFS 30 dBFS 0 dBm 8dBFS 18 dBFS 22 dBFS 26 dBFS 4 dBm 4dBFS 14 dBFS 18dBFS 22 dBFS 8 dBm OdBFS 10 dBFS 14dBFS 18 dBFS 10 dBm CLIP 8 dBFS 12 dBFS 16 dBFS Digital Reference Level 20dBFS ANALOG IN LEVEL setting Analog audio input level 10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm 20 dBm 30 dBFS 40 dBFS 44 dBFS 48 dBFS 10 dBm 20 dBFS 30 dBFS 34 dBFS 38 dBFS 4 dBm 14 dBFS 24 dBFS 28 dBFS 32 dBFS 0 dBm 10 dBFS 20 dBFS 24 dBFS 28 dBFS 4 dBm 6 dBFS_ 16 dBFS 20 dBFS 24 dBFS 8 dBm 2 dBFS 12 dBFS 16 dBFS 20 dBFS 10 dBm OdBFS 10 dBFS 14dBFS 18 dBFS Digital Reference Level 24dBFS ANALOG IN LEVEL setting Analog audio input level 10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 8dBm 20 dBm 34 dBFS 44 dBFS 48 dBFS 52 dBFS 10 dBm 24 dBFS 34 dBFS 38 dBFS 42 dBFS 4 dBm 18 dBFS 28 dBFS 32 dBFS 36 dBFS 0 dBm 14 dBFS 24 dBFS 28 dBFS 32 dBFS 4 dBm 10 dBFS 20 dBFS 24 dBFS 28 dBFS 8 dBm 6 dBF
283. l exists the FA 9500 performs LOSS according to the selection made under LOSS in the VIDEO INPUT SET 5 7 1 menu If both SDI 1 and 2 inputs encounter the same problem and the problem is not signal loss the FA 9500 will output the SDI 1 input signal 5 7 3 2 Changeover and Input Switchover Using a Router An SDI 1 input signal switchover conducted via router will be detected as an error by the CRC ERROR TRG 5 7 7 and AUDIO ERR TRG 5 7 10 functions If either trigger has been enabled for a short duration a changeover will occur To avoid such input switchover triggered changeovers set DURATION under CRC ERROR TRG to longer than 2 frames and DURATION under AUDIO ERR TRG to longer than 0 2 sec 5 7 3 3 How to Reset to SDI 1 Main Input This section describes how to reset input to SDI 1 after a Changeover 1 Check menus 5 7 12 CHGOV STATUS through 5 7 17 SILENCE STATUS to verify what caused the changeover 65 2 Resolve the issue s 3 Check that the issue s is are resolved using a waveform monitor 4 Disable Changeover The status menus will be reset 5 Set IN SEL to SDI 1 input signal selection 6 Enable Changeover again IMPORTANT If SYNCHRO in section 5 10 1 FS MODE SET is set to LINE AVDL or INPUT or SYNCHRO is set to FRAME with FRAME DELAY turned OFF a changeover may produce video noise To avoid video noise set SYNCHRO to FRAME and FRAME DELAY to 1 or more frames 5 7 4 CHGOV CHANGEOVER
284. l to the set value The maximum delay in such cases will be 1 000msec 1 frame 2frames for progressive signals of the input video signal 194 9 3 6 SRC Mode Clicking block 6 on the audio block diagram opens the SRC Mode dialog box A http 11192 168 0 10 SRC Mode Mi fode Mi EE CH1 2 CH3 4 CH5 6 CH7 8 CH9 10 CH11 12 CH13 14 CH15 16 Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto SRC Mode BY PASS BY PASS BY PASS BY PASS BY PASS BY PASS BY PASS BY PASS Close OSRC In O SRC In O SRC In O SRC In O SRC In O SRC In O SRC In O SRC In D Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings SRC Mode Parameter Default Setting range Description SRC Mode SRC In Auto BY PASS SRC In Sets the SRC circuit to pass or by pass audio signals per channel pair Auto Sets the SRC circuit to pass signals However non PCM audio signals will be by passed BY PASS Sets the SRC circuit to by pass signals Set to By pass to output asynchronous audio signals An audio clock must be selected under 9 3 11 SDI Audio Output Setting for the respective audio groups to embed audio signals to SDI output video signals SRC In Sets the SRC circuit to pass both PCM or NON PCM signals Useful for the irregular PCM signal with the NON PCM audio
285. lack and white video signals ON Passes through VITS V ANC lines 10 VITS OFF OFF to 21 NTSC or 6 to 23 PAL of composite ON input signals For SD SDI output signals inserts VITS lines into Y signals Allows you to align unprocessed output video signal phases to those of processed OFF video signals delayed by processing ON ON Aligns CONV 1 and 2 output video signal phases and adjusts audio delay See the table below for the delay amounts CONV DLY ADJ OFF Automatic Delay Adjustment by the CONV DLY ADJ function If CONV1 is If CONV2is CONV1 CONV2 SB Reena set to set to Output delay Output delay audio channels BY PASS BY PASS 0 0 0 34 Other than BY PASS Delay produced Auto adjustment Auto adjustment BY PASS by conversion Other than BY PASS Qtherthan Auto adjustment Delay Produced by conversion 1 The amount of delay varies depending on the input format Progressive format signals require 2 frames and other format signals require 1 frame Auto adjustment 5 10 5 TEST SIGNAL Internal test signal settings Video and audio signal processing will stop and a test signal will be output from all output connectors 95 Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description OFF FULL CB VIDEO OFF 75 CB Selects an internal video test signal SMPTE CB RAMP AUDIO OFF OFF Selects an inter
286. lay 520 clk Maximum 8 frames Frame Sync or Input Sync Up Down Cross converter Aspect ratio converter Proc Amp Color Corrector Automatic video optimizer AVO Second converter Down Cross Aspect ratio Video level 0 0 to 200 0 Chroma level 0 0 to 200 0 Black level 20 0 to 100 0 HUE 179 8 to 180 YPsPr mode RGB mode Composite mode Balance mode Differential mode Sepia mode 3G HD 16 channels Group 1 to 4 48 kHz 16 bit to 24 bit synchronous asynchronous SD 16 channels Group 1 to 4 48 kHz 16 bit to 24 bit synchronous only Unbalanced 1 0 Vp p 750 BNC x 4 for AES EBU input output Maximum 4 pairs of stereo channels 32 44 1 48 kHz 16 bit to 24 bit Balanced or unbalanced 4 inputs 2 stereo channels 25 pin D sub female x 1 for analog audio input output 6000 or High impedance 48 kHz 24 bit 3G HD 16 channels Group 1 to 4 48 kHz 16 20 24 bit synchronous asynchronous SD 12 channels Group 1 to 3 48 kHz 16 20 24 bit synchronous only Unbalanced 1 0 Vp p 750 BNC x 4 for AES EBU input output Maximum 4 pairs of stereo channels 48 kHz 16 bit to 24 bit Balanced or unbalanced 4 outputs 2 stereo channels 25 pin D sub female x 1 for analog audio input output less than 1000 48 kHz 24 bit 2 ms 1 000 ms adjustable in 1 ms steps 297 Audio Processing Sampling rate converter SRC Functions Gain control Set per channel Down mix Channel re mapping Channel mu
287. lby Decoder Output signals Dolby Decoder Output Output signal from the Dolby decoder When Direct Input When Input Selection is set to Direct Selection is selected Input Selection Source1 16 Source1 16 SOURCE signal selected in PCM Down Mix L the 6 5 AUDIO MAPPING MAPPING PCM Down Mix R menu 500Hz TONE PCM Down Mix L R Down mixed signal 1kHz TONE generated from SOURCE channel signals Silence 500Hz 1kHz TONE Test signal TONE Left Silence Mute signal eid 40 Right pora 9 al When Input Selection is set to Dolby QuanESS Ls Decoder Output 7 Dolby Decoder1 8 PCM signal output CH1 8 2 Rs from thie Dolby decoder i DolbyDown Mix L R Down mixed signal generated from Dolby decoded PCM signal Outputis ea a 500Hz 1kHz TONE Test signal TONE Dolby Decoder 1 8 Silence Mute signal Dolby Down Mix L Loudness 1 2 Left DolbyDown Mix R Loudness 1 2 Right 500Hz TONE Loudness 1 2 Center 1kHz TONE Loudness 1 2 LFE Siilence Loudness 1 2 Ls Loudness 1 2 Rs Audio signal processed in FA 95ALA Loudness1 2 channels 1 Direct Input Selection and Dolby Decoder Output settings are retained until changed When these Input Selection settings are switched CH 1 8 assignments will be changed to 212 those of the Input Selection setting Direct Input Selection and Dolby Decoder Output signals cannot be input to the Dolby encoder together Dolby Digital signal input to the Dolby Decoder Output cannot be re encoded to a Dolby E signal 2 S
288. ling rate Changing the audio assignment of the reference channel pair may cause noise on other channel pairs in the same audio group Also changing the assignment may affect the phase alignment of the reference and other channel pairs If the alignment is turned off set MASTER MUTE see section 6 4 MASTER OUT GAIN Settings MASTER on and off or turn the unit power off and on to regain the alignment 119 6 2 3 AES REMAPPING Menu button cc AES AUDIO Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an AES output audio channel das oni CHT CHG from channels CH1 to 8 SOURCE1 16 Selects an audio signal to assign to 500Hz the AES audio output channel 4KHz selected under CH SEL SOURCE 1 16 Signals assigned to NI e SOURCE channels DOWNMIX R2 500Hz 1KHz Test signal B e SILENCE Mute signal Dolby DEC 1 8 DOWNMIX L R Downmixed signal Dolby DM L generated from SOURCE channels Dolby DM R Dolby DEC 1 8 Dolby decoded PCM ASSIGN Each SOURCE ae dd Dolby ENC 1 2 57 signals Dolby DM L R Downmixed signal L generated from Dolby decoded PCM R signals LOUD1 2 Dolby ENC 1 2 Encoded Dolby E OUD 1 de C signal of selected signals of SOURCE LOUD2 LFE channels Ls LOUD1 2 L R C LFE Ls Rs Rs Loudness processed signal of the selected SOURCE channel SDI1 16 Displays the input signal in the SOURCE AES1 8 SOURCE channel that is selected under ASSIGN Shown onl
289. lled 3 Shown if the optional FA 95D D is installed 4 Shown if the optional FA 95DE E is installed 5 Shown if the optional FA 95AIO is installed 6 Shown if the optional FA 95ALA is installed lt gt Can be navigated to using double up and down arrow buttons display is not shown in the menu e When settings in menus shown with a black circle e are changed in LIVE SAFE mode single up and down arrow buttons and the LED around the control knob of which setting is changed blink confirming the setting change To set the FA 9520 to LIVE SAFE mode change the mode setting referring to section 7 3 FRONT OPERATION 32 4 2 3 Arrow Buttons Double arrow buttons up and down lt NORMAL mode gt The double arrow buttons allow you to go to the first menu of the video or audio menus that are assigned to the respective menu buttons These buttons can also navigate STATUS OTHER video related menus designated by lt gt in the above menu list lt LIVE SAFE mode gt Button functions are the same as NORMAL mode however double arrow buttons are inoperative while single arrow buttons are blinking indicating the FA 9500 is in the setting change confirming state because a parameter in one of the menus requiring a setting change confirmation has been changed Single arrow buttons up and down lt NORMAL mode gt The single arrow buttons allow you to move between menus within the menus that are as
290. ls RP186 VI Aspect ratio data inserted into bit 3 of Chroma data in the SD SDI V ANC data space BT1119WSS Aspect ratio data inserted as Y signals into line 23 of 625 50 analog signals 5 10 17 ANC EMBED LINE Allows you to select a line of SDI signal ancillary data space to insert closed caption data Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description ANC CEA608 CC CEA608 CC 334 1 CC SD CEA708 CC HD 2016 3 AFD RP186 VI BT1119 WSS Selects a type of ancillary data to insert FORMAT Selects a video format compatible with the a ancillary data selected under ANC Only compatible Video formats will be displayed LINE FIELD1 Selects a line in ancillary data space into which ancillary data is inserted A line can be selected for different ANC and FORMAT selections separately If ANC is set to RP186 VI this parameter allows you to select a line for FIELD 1 Lines can be selected for fields 1 and 2 respectively FIELD2 If ANC is set to RP186 VI this parameter allows you to select a line for FIELD 2 Lines can be selected for fields 1 and 2 respectively 92 The setting range varies according to the ancillary data type and video format Ancillary data type FORMAT LINE Default ANC CEA 608 CC 525 60 FIELD1 21 284 fixed ANC S334 1 CC SD 525 60 FIELD1 12 27
291. ls CH1 DOWNMIX L CH2 DOWNMIX R CH1 DOWNMIX L CH1 DOWNMIX L Changed to make a proper pair including the CH2 SOURCE2 CH2 x DOWNMIX R assigned L channel signal DOWNMIX L and NON PCM signals are selected for L R channels CH1 Dolby ENC 1 DEN pe ENSI Choi fake proper pair including the CH2 1KHz CH2 DolbyENC2 assigned L channel signal NON PCM and 1KHz signals are selected for L R channels 116 6 1 3 SDI MONO SUM CH SEL 1 2 Menu button MONO SUM DISABLE PROCESS SDI AUDIO Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a stereo pair of embedded audio CHISEL eile CEPA TANG channels of an SDI output signal ENABLE Outputs the stereo pair channels DISABLE selected under CH SEL as a mono sum MONO SUM DISABLE ENABLE The signals of the selected pair channels are added and devided by two to output from each channel 6 1 4 SDI AUDIO CLOCK GROUP1 REFERENCE GROUP2 REFERENCE PROCESS GROUP3 REFERENCE GROUP4 REFERENCE PEO Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects an audio clock signal per group for AUTO SDI embedded audio output REFERENCE GROUP REFERENCE CH 1 2 AUTO Automatically selects audio clock CH 3 4 input in the NON PCM signal channel if an input NON PCM signal is in the selected SDI embedded audio group Automatically selects audio clock signal in the smallest AUTO numbered channel if all signals in the audio GROU
292. ls on CONV1 and CONV2 settings 6 9 2 3 METADATA INPUT Menu is available only if the FA 95DE E option is installed METADATA Menu button VIDEO OP SEEE CT INTERNAL AUDIO OP Default Description Selects a metadata to be used for Dolby E encoding INTERNAL Uses the program configuration and bit depth selected in the 6 9 7 Dolby ENCODER SETTING menu Other metadata will be reset to default Dolby DEC OUT Uses the metadata of the Dolby E signal input to the Dolby decoder The program configuration and bit depth selected in the 6 9 2 2 Dolby ENCODER SETTING will be ineffective Parameter Setting range INTERNAL ds Dolby DEC OUT INTERNAL 136 6 9 3 Automatic Loudness Adjustment FA 95ALA Automatic Loudness Adjustment is the function that measures and automatically adjusts the input audio signal loudness level to the target level The FA 95ALA in one option slot can measure and adjust the loudnes level of 2 signals monaural stereo or 5 1 ch selectable simultaneously The following menus allow you to set the loudness measurement and adjustment parameters See section 6 1 2 SDI REMAPPING 6 2 3 AES REMAPPING 6 3 5 ANALOG REMAPPING for details on the output assignments of the adjusted signals to SDI AES or analog audio output Available only if the FA 95ALA option is installed 6 9 3 1 LOUDNESS MEASUREMENT e Channel 1 display LOUD MEASURE Menu bu
293. m FA 95RU FA 10DCCRU Front panel REMOTE LED is unlit This menu cannot be accessed from the FA 95RU 7 2 FRONT OPERATION FRONT OPERATION Menu button MODE NORMAL STATUS OTHER Parameter Default Setting range Description Allows you to select a front panel operation mode NORMAL NORMAL Changes made by control knobs F1 LIVE SAFE to F4 will be applied immediately to the unit LIVE SAFE Requires confirmation before control knob changes are applied Whenever a change is made by control knobs F1 to F4 the single arrow buttons up and down and the LED around the control knob of the changed parameter blink confirming the change Pressing the single down arrow button confirms the change and the control knob LED lights Pressing the single up arrow button cancels the change and everything reverts to the previous state Refer to section 4 Front Panel Operations for details The FRONT OPERATION menu in the FA 95RU allows you to select a front panel operation mode for the FA 95RU MODE NORMAL 146 7 3 FRONT PANEL SET Menu button STATUS OTHER Parameter Default Setting range Description Sets brightness of the menu VFD BRIGHT 50 10 50 display 10 50 dark to bright DISABLE Sets the idle time before turning 5min off the menu display a ci PIPAREE 10min DISABLE Does not turn off the 30 min menu display Sets the brig
294. mbOutT 2Ch9 9 NTEGER O CH10 6 Non PCM Async a95StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch10 10 INTEGER O CH11 ean a95StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch11 1 INTEGER O CH12 RN a95StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch12 12 INTEGER O CH13 P Blank a05StatusSdiEmbOut 2Ch13 13 INTEGER O CH14 a95StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch14 14 INTEGER O CH15 a95StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch15 15 NTEGER O CH16 a95StatusSdiEmbOut1 2Ch16 16 INTEGER O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 5 3 22 SDI3 4 output audio signal status CH1 a95StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch1 1 NTEGER O CH2 a95StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch2 2 INTEGER O CH3 a95StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch3 3 NTEGER O CH4 0 Loss a95StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch4 4 NTEGER O CH5 1 PCM a95StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch5 5 NTEGER O CH6 2 Silence a95StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch6 6 INTEGER O CH7 3 Non PCM a95StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch7 7 INTEGER O AUDIO Isp13 4 OUT AUDIO GHB 4 PCM Async a95StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch8 8 NTEGER O OUTPUT CH9 5 Silence Async a95StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch9 9 INTEGER O CH10 6 Non PCM Async a95StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch10 10 INTEGER O CH11 7 Unknown a05StatusSdiembOut3 4Ch11 T1 NTEGER O CH12 9 BY PASS ag5StatusSdiembOut3 4Ch12 12 INTEGER O CH13 9 Blank a95StatusSdiembOut3 4Ch13 13 NTEGER O CH14 a95StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch14 14 INTEGER O CH15 a95StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch15 15 NTEGER O CH16 a95StatusSdiEmbOut3 4Ch16 16 NTEGER O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 5 3 23 AES output audio signal status CH1 0 Loss a95StatusAesQutCh1 1 NTEGER O CH2 1 PCM a95StatusAesOutCh2 2 INTEGER O CH3 2 silence a95StatusAesQuiCh3 3 INTEGER O AUDIO CH4 3 Non P
295. mbedded audio is silent depends on the duration set in the 9 4 2 Audio System menu The Disable All button allows you to disable triggers for all channels 1 through 16 The Enable All button allows you to enable triggers for all channels 1 through 16 9 2 1 1 About Changeover Web The changeover function is supported for the main input SDI 1 If the SDII 1 input encounters a problem Changeover switches the input to input SDI 2 However if SDI 2 also encounters the same problem a changeover will not occur Conditions to determine problem occurrence can be selected in the previously described menus Video Trigger through Silence Trigger Input selection under Input Select cannot be changed while Changeover is enabled Input Select must be set to SDI 1 to enable Changeover Whether a changeover has been performed can be checked in the 9 7 5 Changeover Status menu which allows you to know what caused the changeover To reset the Changeover Status menu set Changeover to Disable 163 9 2 1 2 Changeover and Loss Operation Web Changeover has priority over Loss operation conducted by Video Loss Mode However if neither a SDI 1 or SDI 2 input signal exists the FA 9500 performs LOSS according to the selection made under LOSS in the 9 2 1 Input Select menu If both SDI 1 and 2 inputs encounter the same problem and the problem is not signal loss the FA 9500 will output the SDI 1 input signal 9 2 1 3 Changeover and Input Switchover Us
296. ments according to the signal selected for the L channel Source channels that are assigned after such adjustments are shown as Assigned Sources L R channel pairs are Source 1 2 Source 3 4 Source 15 16 The channel assignments that are changed by the adjustment will be shown with x as CH1 Source2 Auto channel pairing example on non PCM inputs Conditions non PCM inputs in Source 1 and 2 PCM inputs in Source 3 through 16 PLE Reape Assigned Source display Auto channel pairing CH1 Source1 CH1 Source1 CH1 Source1 CH2 Source2 CH2 Source2 CH2 Source2 Unchanged The selected L R channels are a correct non PCM channel pair CH1 Source3 CH1 Source3 CH1 Source3 CH2 Source5 CH2 Source5 CH2 Source5 Unchanged The selected L R channels are PCM audio signals CH1 Source1 CH2 Source2 CH1 Source CH1 Source1 Changed to make a proper pair including the CH2 Source CH2 Source2 assigned L channel signal The selected L R channels are the same channel of a non PCM channel pair CH1 Source1 CH2 Source2 CH1 Source2 CH1 Source1 Changed to make a proper pair including the CH2 Source2 CH2 Source2 assigned L channel signal The selected L R channels are the same channel of a non PCM channel pair CH1 Source3 CH2 Source4 CH1 Source4 CH1 Source3 Changed to make a proper pair including the CH2 Source2 CH2 Source4 assigned L channel signal PCM and non PCM signals ar
297. n Displays the status of FAN1 NORMAL Operating normally NORMAL FAN1 STOPPED STOPPED FAN1 has stopped Turn the unit power OFF and contact your dealer if the replacement is needed Displays the status of FAN2 NORMAL Operating normally NORMAL FAN2 STOPPED FAN2 has stopped TOPPED S19 Turn the unit power OFF and contact your dealer if the replacement is needed Displays the status of DC POWER1 NORMAL The power supply is normal NORMAL ABNORMAL DC POWERT has failed DC POWER ABNORMAL A power failure has occurred Although the unit is working properly It is recommended that the power supply unit be replaced Contact your dealer if a replacement is necessary Displays the status of DC POWER2 NORMAL The power supply is normal NORMAL ABNORMAL DC POWERZ2 has failed ABNORMAL A power failure has occurred Although the unit is working properly It is recommended that the power supply unit be replaced Contact your dealer if a replacement is necessary DC POWER2 1 Displayed only if FA 95PS is installed 97 5 13 2 VIDEO IN STATUS Menu button 11 1080 59i 12 525 60 STATUS MPOSI TE 525 60 FERENCE 525 60 VEER Parameter Display Description LOSS 525 60 625 50 1080 59 1080 50i 720 59p SDI1 720 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF 1080 59p 1080 50p BY PASS UNKNOWN LOSS 525 60 625 50 1080 59i 1080 50i Displays the video format of the SDI2 input
298. n 5 13 1 UNIT ALARM 14 SLOTA OPTION SLOT A for an optional expansion card 15 15 SLOT B OPTION SLOT B for an optional expansion card 15 16 ANALOG AUDIO Used for four channel analog audio input and output See section 12 Analog Audio Connection for details 17 REMOTE Used for remote control Assign functions to each pin See section 7 4 GPI SETTING for details on assigning functions See section 14 REMOTE for connections 7 4 14 18 FAN2 Used to air cool the unit to prevent overheating Do not block the ventilation with other equipment or objects The operation status can be viewed from the FAN2 menu as described in section 5 13 1 UNIT ALARM 19 ACIN1 Used to connect the unit to an AC power source AC100V 240V 50 60Hz The operation status can be viewed from the DC POWER 1 menu as described in section 5 13 1 UNIT ALARM The menu is displayed if the optional FA 95PS is installed FA 9500 with the FA 95DACBL option installed 21 REMOTE CU k hn LANZ LAL _ C SERNO GENLOCK No Name Description Ref DIGITAL AUDIO IO 20 4 2 7 8 Digital audio input and output connectors Used only for inputs when the FA 95DACBL option is installed DIGITAL
299. n be checked using a wave form monitor 2 Processes the audio signal as described if 9 3 6 SRC Mode is set to Auto 3 Processes the audio signal as described if 9 3 11 SDI Audio Output Settings is set to Auto Validity FA 9500 determins whether the input audio signal is PCM or NON PCM by Validity Bit V Bit in audio signal If Validity Bit V Bit is incorrect the audio signal may cause inproper processing For such case this setting may effective processing the audio signal normally IMPORTANT Please use this setting only if there is audio noise or the audio is muted Otherwise do not change the setting from In Data 227 9 4 3 ANC Settings FA 9500 Logout A SEE EE Video Audio System GPI Utility Status Network Video System gt Audio System ANC Settings ANC Detect Line ANC Data Embed ANC Loss Mode Settings Anc RP186 VI v ANC CEA608 CC ANC 52016 3 AFD v Format 525 60 w Format 525 60 Format SD y Field 1 19 Line Y Embed Converter 1 2 v Mode Remove v Field 2 282 Line v Field 1 21 284 Line y ANC Detect Select mp z v Caption CEA608 CC Y nee AFD 2016 3 AFD v If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown Click Refresh to update the settings ANC Detect Line For RP186 VI Parameter Default Setting range Description RP186 VI Selects an
300. nal audio test signal 1KHZTONE 9 If VIDEO and AUDIO of the TEST SIGNAL menu are set to other than OFF VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS button flashes 83 5 10 6 HD PHASE SET 96 Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Sening range Description Steps H 1080 0 1375 1375 Horizontal Phase CLK Adjusts the horizontal and 07 vertical phases of the system En referring to genlock signal This V 1080 ui FRAME INPUT 563 563 setting 2 applied to Vertical Phase ite LINE 1080 format output signals LINE AVDL H 720 0 2063 2063 f Horizontal Phase CLK Adjusts the horizontal and 07 vertical phases of the system PE referring to genlock signal This V720 2 FRAME INPUT 375 375 setting is applied to 720 format LINE AVDL 1 The settings are not available if there is no reference signal input In such case the menu as shown below will be displayed H V H V 2 Set V PHASE to more than 1 line when setting SYNCHRO mode to INPUT 3 The default value varies depending on the SYNCHRO setting in section 5 10 1 FS MODE SET and the IN SEL setting in section 5 7 1 VIDEO INPUT SET as shown in the below table The set value will be reset to its relevant default value whenever the SYNCHRO setting is changed SYNCHRO FRAME IN SEL Default 0 SDI1 2 COMPOSITE 525 60 COMPOSITE 625 50 COMPONENT Y C COMPON
301. ne None None None 3 0 1L 1R 1C None None None None None 2 0 1L 1R None None None None None None 1 0 None None 1C None None None None None 1 1 1C 2C None None None None None None PCM 1L 1R None None None None None None 262 14 REMOTE 14 1 REMOTE Connector The pin assignments of the REMOTE GPI connector are as shown in the table below The connector has seven ports Although the pin assignments below cannot be changed the input and output are selectable and the functions for GPI1 to GPI7 can also be selected REMOTE GPI Pin Assignments 9pin D sub male inch screws Pin No Setting 1 DC OUT Up to 200mA output current is available at 5 4V GPI 1 input output GPI 2 input output GPI 3 input output GPI 4 input output GPI 5 input output GPI 6 input output GPI 7 input output GND ground J OJ we Jes J es es J eS em OO CO NIIA BY OJN ee See section 7 4 GPI SETTING for the function assignments for GPI1 GPI7 For GPI inputs the function is ON when a pin is shorted to ground and OFF when open 14 2 GPI Input Circuit FA 9500 inside AE EEE EAEN E gt 263 14 3 GPI Input Control Level Control The pin assigned function is enabled or disabled by the pulse level Trigger state of pin OPEN Function is OFF CLOSE Function is ON 500msec or more pulse width 500msec or more pulse width
302. nector El 7 i e poo no Se ol j i Ale a I e See section 14 REMOTE for details on pin assignments and triggers e See section 7 4 GPI SETTING for details on function assignments for the ports 28 4 Front Panel Operations 4 1 Powering ON Turn the power ON after all system connections are complete The indicators on the front panel light up during startup When startup is complete the indicators will go off and the VIDEO STATUS menu showing the current input video and reference signal formats will be displayed If Logo data is stored A loading progress message is displayed in the menu display as shown below Logo data may take up to 2 5 minutes to load LOADING LOGO DATA 00 COMPLETE 4 2 Basic Operations This section explains how to select menus and parameters Most of the menus can be controlled by these basic operations However some menus work differently See the descriptions given for each menu for details The FA 9500 has two modes for the menu operation NORMAL mode in which setting changes immediately take effect and LIVE SAFE mode in which some settings request confirmation before changes take effect NORMAL and LIVE SAFE modes can be selected in the FRONT OPERATION menu sec 7 3 Factory default is NORMAL mode Menus that request a setting confirmation are shown in the menu list in section 4 2 2 Menu Buttons with a black circle e
303. nel pair CH1 CH2 Source3 Source5 CH1 CH2 Source3 Source5 CH1 Source3 CH2 Source5 Unchanged The selected L R channels are PCM audio signals CH1 CH2 Source1 Source1 CH1 CH2 Source1 Source2 CH1 Source1 CH2 Source2 Changed to make a proper pair including the assigned L channel signal The selected L R channels are the same channel of a non PCM channel pair CH1 CH2 Source2 Source2 CH1 CH2 Source 1 Source2 CH1 Source1 CH2 Source2 Changed to make a proper pair including the assigned L channel signal The selected L R channels are the same channel of a non PCM channel pair CH1 CH2 Source4 Source2 CH1 CH2 Source3 Source4 CH1 Source3 CH2 Source4 Changed to make a proper pair including the assigned L channel signal PCM and non PCM signals are selected for L R channels CH1 CH2 Silence Source2 CH1 CH2 Silence Silence CH1 Silence CH2 Silence Changed to make a proper pair including the assigned L channel signal SILENCE and non PCM signals are selected for L R channels CH1 CH2 500Hz Source2 CH1 CH2 500Hz 500Hz CH1 500Hz CH2 500Hz Changed to make a proper pair including the assigned L channel signal 500Hz and non PCM signals are selected for L R channels 1KHz signal will be processed the same CH1 CH2 Down Mix L Source3 CH1 CH2 Down Mix L S
304. nerator xi A A A Ads 76 5 9 1 1 CONVIT LOGO SEL a A Aen ARE 76 5 9 1 2 CONVIT KEYER SE Tattoo ee aee a Mine ie a AI eetet 77 5 9 1 3 CONV2 LOGO SEL otrora aara aaraa aa aa taara eaaa annaa 78 5 9 1 4 CONV2 KEYER SET iooocccccccccocononnnoncnnnnoncnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnannnnnnnnnnenianinnnnes 79 5 9 1 5 Logo Position Setting Range oooococcccccccccooooconcnccconononannnncnnnononnnnannnnnnnnnnonnanannnnss 79 5 10 VIDEO SYSTEM VIDEO SYS c ccccccecceeeceeeeee cece eeeeeceeceeaeeeseeeescencaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeenseneees 80 921 021 EFS MODE SET td er 80 9 1 0 2 FREEZE SET iiss casearetendvtubrelacseshee cased a upd sl aalansecars iaae aaraa aA Ara eeann 81 510 3 COMPOSITE SE Tucci ade eats ee ee be ate aa 82 921024 VIDEO SU BA ila teen dias A ela A ante eee 83 9 1 0 5 TEST SIGNAL aut toi ids tevbade 83 9 10 6 ID PHASE SET nroa ena aee o aAa dade iMleeue sent E a i rE enia 84 921027 SD PHASE SET watesi ietie A N A ea e Head 85 5 10 8 VIDEO POSITION cun ii 86 5 1 029 CONVIT ANG SET piee A A ei eae A 87 5 10 10 CONV2 ANC SET c ccccccee cece ceeceneeeeeeeeeeeecccceeaeeeeeeeesesencaeeseeeeeeesecnenieaeeeeeeeees 88 5 10 11 CONV1 AUDIO GROUP 000 cece ec ee eee ee cece eens eeeeeeeeseceaaeeeeeeeeeeeesenneaeeeeeetes 89 5 10 12 CONV2 AUDIO GROUP iieii ii oi i iE E AA ae A T EKETE 89 5 10 13 SD LINEMAS K ivinen a Ad na eneee 90 9 10 14 ANC DETECT EINE eutanasia 90 5 10 15 ANC DETECT SEL s csniiec bh tend ce
305. ng the single down arrow button confirms the change and LEDs stop blinking then light Pressing the single up arrow button cancels the change the setting returns to before the change and LEDs stop blinking then light While the FA 9520 is in a setting change confirming state all buttons except single arrow buttons control knobs F1 to F4 and their Unity buttons are disabled To go to other menus press either single arrow button to complete the confirmation 4 2 7 Resetting to Default lt NORMAL mode gt The UNITY indicator light goes off when the setting value is changed from the default value Pressing the UNITY button while the light is off returns the corresponding setting value to the default value Then the light goes off Pressing the button again returns the value to the previous value before resetting to the default value Press the UNITY button to uv uNa unn unn reset the value The indicator O Ge Gey lights up orange lt LIVE SAFE mode gt The UNITY indicator light goes off when the setting value has changed from default Pressing the UNITY button while the light is off returns the corresponding setting value to default and single arrow buttons and the LED around the control knob above the UNITY button blink in the setting change confirming state Pressing the single down arrow button will resets the value to default and the UNITY indicator light turns on Pressing the single up arrow button cancels the reset the set
306. nge ARIBB 35ProgEx 5F FD Trigger signal packets for data broadcasting standarized in ARIB STD B35 SD Data Program Exchange Specification for Digital Broadcasting ARIB B 39 5F FE Control signal packets for inter studio transmission standarized in ARIB STD B39 Structure of Inter Stationary Control Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets ARIB B 15 5F FF Resource ID packets standarized in ARIB STD B15 Resource Identification Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets for 52 60 and 1125 60 Television Systems SMPTE 12 2 60 60 ARIB STD B41 for time code 334 1CDP 708 61 01 ITU R BT 1619 SMPTE 334 1 closed captioning ElA 708 B S334 1 CEA608 61 02 ITU R BT 1619 SMPTE 334 1 EIA 608 data 334 1 Teletxt 61 03 World System Teletext Description Packet 334 SDE 61 04 Subtitling Data Essence SDE 334 207 62 01 ITU R BT 1619 SMPTE RP207 DTV program description 334 1 Future 62 02 ITU R BT 1619 SMPTE 334 1 DTV data broadcasting S334 RP208 62 03 ITU R BT 1619 SMPTE RP208 VBI data RP196 LTC 64 64 Time code RP196 VITC 64 7F Time code RP165EDH 1F4 SMPTE error detection indication 280 20 About AFD Active Format Description The FA 9500 can provide aspect ratio conversion according to S2016 3 RP186 VI Video Index or BT1119 2 WSS Wide Screen Signalling AFD code data in the ancillary data of input video signals The below figure depicts example aspect ratio conversions us
307. ngs Click Unity to reset to the default settings Click to increase the value by the smallest steps Click to decrease the value by the smallest steps The Level drop down menu in the AVO dialog box has five options of user settings User 1 through 5 Each User1 5 is composed of four level settings such as In White Level In Black Level Target White Level and Target Black Level The default settings of user settings User 1 through 5 are the same as those for Darker Dark Standard Bright and Brighter respectively The desirable level settings are easily obtained by adjusting values from the default values USER1 5 Default Settings Parameter SELECT LEVEL Adjustment level Custom levels User 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 User 5 Default Default Default Default Default Fixed levels Darker Dark Standard Bright Brighter In White Level 99 0 98 0 97 0 95 0 93 0 In Black Level 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 7 0 Target White Level 80 0 88 0 93 0 95 0 97 0 Target Black Level 3 0 5 0 7 0 12 0 17 0 168 In White Level and In Black Level These two parameters determine the highest and lowest levels of luminance in the input signal Parameter Setting range step Description In White Level 80 0 99 0 0 5 The maximum value of luminance in the sample data is defined as 100 Based on this reference value this determines the highest level of luminance fo
308. nmixed audio signals as a whole E 3dB If set to AUTO Down MIX Master MSE ENE ede AUTO Level changes according to the Downmix Mode and Surround Mix level selections 1 See the Downmix Block Diagram in the next page for details on downmix modes 2 If MASTER LVL is set to AUTO Master Level changes as shown in the below table Down Mix Mode Surround Mix Level 3dB 6dB 9dB 0 dB Stereo approx 7 7dB approx 6 9dB approx 6 3dB approx 4 6dB Surround approx 9 9dB approx 8 7dB approx 7 7dB approx 4 6dB Monaural approx 12 9dB approx 12 0dB approx 11 4dB approx 9 5dB 129 Downmix Block Diagram lt lt Surround Mix Lt Rt gt Ls Rs surround channels are summed to produce a mono surround channel and mixed to right and left channels by the 180 degree phase difference LFE channel is discarded Ls Rs 3 aa IC Rs 2 SURROUND MIX level setting 3 MASTER LVL setting lt Stereo Mix Lo Ro gt E For Stereo Monitors LFE channel is not subjected to the mix D Gain Adjust 1 CENTER MIX level setting 3 2 SURROUND MIX level setting 3 MASTER LVL setting LFE channel is not subjected to the mix lt Monaural Mix Lo Ro Lo Ro gt For Monaural Monitors e _ ci A E 1 CENTER MIX level setting 2 SURROUND MIX level setting 2 LFE channel is not subjected to the mix 3
309. nnels i Source CH 1 16 Signals assigned to ee SOURCE channels Down Mix R 2 500Hz 1kHz Test signal nen Silence Mute signal Dolby Decoder 1 8 Down Mix L R Downmixed signal Dolby Down Mix L 8 generated from SOURCE channels Dolby Down Mix R 8 Dolby Decoder 1 8 Dolby decoded Source PCM signals Dolby Down Mix L R Downmixed signal generated from Dolby decoded PCM signals Dolby Encoder 1 2 Encoded Dolby E signal of selected signals of SOURCE channels Loudness 1 2 Left Loudness 1 2 Right Loudness 1 2 Center Loudness 1 2 LFE Loudness 1 2 Ls Loudness 1 2 Rs Audio signals processed in FA 95ALA Loudness1 2 channels 1 See section 9 3 4 Source Select for details on Source settings 2 See section 9 3 9 5 1Ch Down Mix for details on Down Mix settings 3 See section 9 3 14 Dolby E Digital Decoder for details on Dolby Decoder settings 4 See section 9 3 14 Dolby E Digital Decoder for details onDolby Down Mix settings 5 See section 9 3 16 Dolby E Encoder for details on Dolby Encoder settings 6 Shown only if the FA 95D D option is installed 7 Shown only if the FA 95DE E option is installed 8 Shown only if the FA 95ALA option is installed See section 9 3 17 Automatic Loudness Adjustment FA 95ALA for details 201 Auto Channel Pairing for non PCM Audio Inputs The FA 9500 recognizes non PCM audio input signals in L R channel pair units and adjusts assign
310. nnnnnnncennanannnnnnncininnns 35 9 VIDEO Menus ti Ases 36 5 1 VIDEO PROC AMP PROCESS cccccococcncccccccconnnononcnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnoncnnnnnnncnncnnincnnnnnccnnnno 36 5 2yCOLOR CORRECTOR Citi ra eine needed aetna da 36 5 2 1 WHITE LEVE coocasmatala naar 36 9 2 2 BLACK LEVEL o td 37 5 2 3 GAMMA LEVEL o vhs ees 37 5 24 COLOR CORRECT G Dans da 38 5 2 5 Color Corrector and AVO MOd6S ocooocooooocccccocccocononnnoncnnoconnoncnnnnnnononennoncnnnnnnnnnnnaninens 39 5 3 CONV1 UP DOWN CROSS CONVERTER c0ooccccoccccccccocncononnnnnnnononncnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnncncnnnos 40 9 31 CONVA1 YD MODE Ai 41 5 3 2 CONV1 Conversion Table oooooococcccccccoococoncccccccconnnnnnnnnonononnoncnnnnnnnnnncncancnnnnnnnnnnnaninnns 43 5 3 3 CONV1 SIZE POS 20 02 cece ceeceeeccee cece eeecceneaeeeeeeeeeecceneaaeeeeeeeeeesecceeseeeeeeesseennneaeeeeeerers 43 5 3 4 CONVIT CROPPING iee iie cee iera evden nude ir iii 44 5 3 5 CONVIT IMPROVE tacit tart tei A ee 45 9 3 6 CONV 1 SIDE RGB 00d A di era wd EEEE 46 5 4 CONV2 UP DOWN CROSS CONVERTER cccccococcccconononccncononcncnnnnncncnnannnncncanancncninnns 47 9 4 1 CONV2 U D MODE uta a SH nae eves AA ae 48 5 4 2 CONV2 Conversion Table cccccccccceceeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeeeeeeecneaeeeeeeeeeseseeceneeeeeeeeeeseeeeas 49 5 4 3 GONV2 SIZEIPOS unta sede ceeshaelendbatea ce coestsbtesadte Eaa AREAS 49 5 4 4 CONV2 CROPPING ccccccccceceeeeeeceneee cece eee ceeeeaeeeeeeeeeesegaeeaee
311. nput audio signal status CH1 0 Loss a95StatusAesInCh1 1 INTEGER O CH2 1 PCM 48kHz a05StatusAesInCh2 2 INTEGER O CH3 2 PCM 44 1kHz a95StatusAesinCh3 3 INTEGER O CH4 3 PCM 32kHz a95StatusAesInCh4 4 INTEGER O CH5 E EOM OMET i a95StatusAesInCh5 5 INTEGER CH6 yal a05StatusAesInCh6 6 INTEGER AUDIQINEUT AES IN AUDIO ICH 6 Silence 44 1kHz a05StatusAesInCh7 7 INTEGER O 7 Silence 32kHz 8 Silence Other CH8 9 Non PCM a95StatusAesInCh8 8 INTEGER O 10 Unknown 11 Output Setting 274 Object group Front TITLE ltem name Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type aay Set OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 5 3 4 ANALOG input audio signal status CH1 it a95StatusAnaloglnCh1 1 INTEGER e CH2 Loss a95StatusAnaloginCh2 2 NTEGER AUDIO INPUT ANALOG IN AUDIO 93 1 IN 305StatusAnaloginch3 3 INTEGER O CH4 aQ95StatusAnaloginCh4 4 NTEGER O OID 1 3 6 1 4 1
312. nput is lost a changeover will be performed even though SDI Error Trigger is disabled based on the CRC Error Trigger Duration setting CRC Error Trigger also detects TRS errors in blanking intervals as well as in the active picture area while SDI Error Trigger detects them only in the active picture area A changeover according to a TRS error in a blanking interval can only be triggered by CRC Error Trigger Black Video Trigger Parameter Default Setting range Description f Disable Enables or disables auto changeover Trigger Set Disable Enable for SDI black signal Sets the threshold of average luminance of one field of interlaced or Threhold 0 0 7 5 to 30 0 segment frame video or one frame of progressive video to determine a black signal Immediate Sets the detected black signal input Duration Immediate duration required to trigger a 1 to 100 Frames changeover A changeover will not be performed if Changeover is disabled or Video Trigger is disabled even though Black Video Trigger is enable Audio Trigger Audio Trigger Disable e cick here The Changeover Audio Trigger dialog box for detailed settings opens Changeover Audio Trigger Windows Internet Explorer DER a 192 168 0 10 BR Audio Loss Trigger Audio Error Trigger Silence Trigger Group 1 Disable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable Group 2 ODisable OEnable ODi
313. nput video signal as a reference signal Dolby Down Mix Mode Parameter Default Setting range Description Surround Selects a downmix mode for the Mode Surround Stereo Dolby decoder Monaural Dolby Decoder Gain Setting range we Parameter Default Steps Description 20 0 20 0dB Sets offset for all Dolby decoded Master 0 0 dB 0 1 dB signals Dolby Decoder Gain Set Setting range er Parameter Default Steps Description eae 20 0 20 0 dB 1 Set in f h Dolby decod Down Mix L CH 0 0 dB Foye 0 4 dB ana Orear ZPY rere Down Mix R CH l l 1 The total Master and individual channel gain setting value cannot exceed the above setting range 210 9 3 15 Dolby AUX OUTPUT Select Clicking block 15 on the audio block diagram when FA 95D D or FA 95DE E option is installed opens the Dolby AUX Output Select dialog box F http 4 192 168 0 10 Dolbya MBR Dolby AUX Output Select Output Dolby Decoder CH 1 2 v Close Refresh Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a signal to be output from the optional Dolby output connector Dolby OUT Decoder Output CH 1 2 Dolby Decoder CH 1 2 se as Dolby deeaded PEM Dolby Decoder CH 3 4 Dolby Down Mix L R Dolby Decoder CH 5 6 Downmixed signal generated Dolby Decoder CH 7 8 from Dolby decoded PCM Output Dolb
314. ns 6 00 and later cannot be shared due to a file format difference If the software of your FA 9500 is newer than version 6 00 the below resets are not required Do not load event data and or files created by software of versions later than 6 00 to FA 9500 units having software versions earlier than 6 00 See section 9 6 2 Backup Parameter for details on the backup parameter function See section 8 Event Memory or 9 6 1 Event Control for details on event data creation Settings need to be reset All settings in CONV1 U D MODE Sec 5 3 1 All settings in CONV2 U D MODE Sec 5 4 1 ANTIALIAS H V settings in CONV1 IMPROVE Sec 5 3 5 ANTIALIAS H V settings in CONV2 IMPROVE Sec 5 4 5 All settings in CONV1 ANC SET Sec 5 10 9 All settings in CONV2 ANC SET Sec 5 10 10 All settings in ANC DETECT LINE Sec 5 10 14 All settings in ANC DETECT SEL Sec 5 10 15 All settings in ANC DATA EMBED Sec 5 10 16 All settings in ANC EMBED LINE Sec 5 10 17 All settings in ANC LOSS SET Sec 5 10 18 All settings in WSS AFD ERROR Sec 5 10 19 The above resets are required for each piece of event data Older version event data saved in the FA 95RU also need their settings to be reset 293 23 Regarding Option Card Removal An alarm message described in section 23 1 Alert may appear when turning the FA 9500 on after removing or changing the location of the FA 95D D FA 95DE E FA 95AIO or FA 95ALA option Press the F1 UNITY
315. ns the USER AREA2 AREA SET page See section 5 5 4 USER1 2 AREA SET for details Sets sample area display ON OFF If set to ON AREA the sample area appears as a semi transparent DISPLAY OFF OFF white rectangle on all output videos Marker ON It is set to OFF at startup Also if MODE is set to display OFF AREA DISPLAY is automatically set to OFF IMPORTANT The Auto Level Adjustment will provide optimal results in many cases but it does not always yield optimal results Sample Area determines the area where the data are sampled and the level adjustments are applied to whole images 53 Sample Area Fixed area Eight available sample areas are as shown below Data are continuously sampled within each area See section 5 5 4 USER1 2 AREA SET for USERAREA 1 and 2 C Sample Sample area Sample area i D Sample area FULL SCREEN LETTER BOX PILLAR BOX CENTER area area area area TOP LEFT TOP RIGHT BOTTOM LEFT BOTTOM RIGHT 5 5 2 AVO SETUP 39 Menu button RESPONSE vULE VE E3 SCENE CUT OFF AVO Parameter Default Setting range Description Sets the filtering strength for calculating the mean distances that are applied to histograms created using the sample RESPONSE LEVEL data Filtering LEVEL 3 1 5 The larger the value the more gradually strength filtering is performed with a more stable image but slower response The smaller the value the less stable the image b
316. nts Be sure to use the supplied FA 95AlO connection cable FA 95AIO Connector 15 pin D sub female inch screws Pin Assignment 15 pin D sub female Pin No Connector Signal 1 Y G IN Y G IN 2 Pb B IN Pb B C IN 3 Pr R IN Pr R IN 4 GND 5 GND 6 Y G OUT Y G OUT 7 Pb B OUT Pb B C OUT 8 Pr R OUT Pr R OUT 9 GND 10 GND 11 GND 12 GND 13 GND 14 GND 15 GND When BY PASS is enabled Y G IN Y G OUT Pb B IN Pb B OUT and Pr R IN Pr R OUT are connected FA 95AIO connection cable PC 3307 1 SL SDE UUUUU 5 e o PIE 268 16 2 FA 95AIO Switch Settings IMPORTANT Note that internal switch settings should not be changed from factory defaults If you have accidentally changed the setting refer to the Dipswitch S1 settings below to return to the factory default setting Futher note that adjustments and maintenance should only be performed by qualified technical personnel familiar with FOR A equipment Do not access MU internal cards or make connections with unit power ON Always power OFF the main unit prior to accessing the interior Do not touch other components on the card to avoid damage from static electricity Dipswitch S1 settings Pin No Default Description 1 OFF Do not change 2 OFF Do not change 3 OFF Do not change 4 OFF Do not change 5 OFF Do not change 6 OFF Do not change 7 OFF Do not
317. nu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description RP 186 VI Selects an ancillary data ANC Rete BT1119 WSS standard FORMAT 525 60 ae Selects the input signal format 625 50 put sig FIELD1 14 LINE 525 60 12 19 LINE 525 60 Selects a line to detect ancillary 19 LINE 625 50 8 22 LINE 625 50 data in field 1 FIELD2 277 LINE 525 60 275 282 LINE 525 60 Selects a line to detect ancillary 324 LINE 625 50 321 335 LINE 625 50 data in field 2 For BT1119 WSS Parameter Default Setting range Description RP 186 VI Selects an ancillary data ANG AFARO N BT1119 WSS standard FORMAT 625 60 625 50 Selects the input video format Selects a line to detect ancillary FIELD1 23LINE 8 23 LINE data in field 1 90 5 10 15 ANC DETECT SEL Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Default Setting range Description Select CEA608 CC to process closed caption data in the luminance signal Y of CEA608 CC 525 60 system S334 1 CC Select S334 1 CC to process closed caption data in ancillary data space of SDI signal CAPTION CEA608 CC S2016 3 AFD AFD S2016 3 AFD RP186 VI Selects a type of AFD data to be detected BT1119 WSS for SD input signals 1 Be sure to set to CEA608 CC when processing closed caption data in 525 60 composite signals Otherwise the caption data will not be detecte
318. nverts progressive scan signals to a 1080 interlaced video format SD signals are output oe without converting l 720p SD Converts interlaced signals to a 720 M BY PA p 9 Ode 2 720p SD progressive video format Converts interlaced 1080PsF SD signals to a 720p progressive video format SD 1080p 3G SD_ signals are output without converting 1080PsF SD Converts interlaced signals to a 1080PsF progressive video format SD signals are output without converting 1080p 3G SD Converts interlaced signals to a 1080p 3G progressive video format SD signals are output without converting Displays the format of the input signal to Converter 2 and the format the signal will be converted to in Converter 2 See section 5 4 2 CONV2 Conversion Table for the possible conversions performed by Converter 2 177 Aspect Ratio Parameter Default Setting range Description AFD 4 3 Selects the aspect ratio for the output from AFD ALT 4 3 Converter2 AFD 16 9 Selectable aspect ratio settings when AFD ALT 16 9 Converter 2 is set to SD 4 3 L 16 9 T AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 AFD 16 9 4 3 L 14 9 T AFD ALT 16 9 automatically select an 4 3 L gt 16 9 aspect ratio according to the AFD data in the 4 3 F 4 3 input signal If no AFD data is found in the 4 3L 16 9PRTD input signal the aspect ratio will be 4 3 L 14 9 determined according to the setting made AFD 4 3 4 3 F ALT14 9 under 5 10 18
319. o SDI signals Format Selects a video format compatible with the ancillary data selected under ANC Only compatible Video formats will be displayed Embed Disable Disable Converter Converter 2 Converter 1 2 Disable Does not insert the ancillary data selected under ANC Converter1 Inserts ancillary data selected under ANC into the Converter 1 output signal Converter2 Inserts ancillary data selected under ANC into the Converter 2 output signal Converter1 2 Inserts ancillary data selected under ANC into Converter 1 and Converter 2 output signals This value can be set for each ANC selection S334 1 CC SD toBT1119 WSS under ANC respectively Line Field 1 Selects a line in an ancillary data space into which to insert the ancillary data A line can be selected for different ANC and FORMAT selections separately If ANC is set to RP186 VI this parameter allows you to select a line for Field 1 while a line for respective fields can be selected Field 2 If ANC is set to RP186 VI this parameter allows you to select a line for Field 2 while a line for respective fields can be selected The setting range varies by ancillary data type and video format Ancillary data type FORMAT LINE Default ANC CEA 608 CC 525 60 21 284 Line fixed ANC S334 1 CC SD 525 60 12 275 to 19 282 Line 12 275 Line 1080i 9 to 20 Line 9
320. o convert to 4 3 set ASPECT in CONV2 U D MODE to 4 3 F 4 3 and ASPECT in CONV1 U C MODE to 16 9 P 4 3 Also set ASPECT in the 5 7 2 SD INPUT ASPECT menu to 4 3 To enable automatic aspect ratio conversion according to the AFD data select an automatic conversion mode from among AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 AFD 16 9 or AFD ALT 16 9 Make sure the AFD data is embedded into the input signal Whether the AFD data is embedded or not can be verified in the 5 15 AFD IN STATUS menu If the input signal is 525 50 or 625 50 20163 3 VI Video Index and WSS Wide Screen Signalling AFD formats are supported Select the type of AFD data to refer to in the 5 10 15 ANC DETECT SEL menu from S2016 3 AFD RP186VI and BT1119 WSS Also set ANC MODE to DETAIL in the 5 10 15 ANC DETECT SEL menu from S2016 3 AFD RP186VI and BT1119 WSS Also set ANC MODE to DETAIL in the 5 10 9 CONV1 ANC SET and 5 10 10 CONV2 ANC SET menus SDI1 2 OUT SET is set to CONV1 as described in section5 8 1 SDI1 2 OUT SET SDI3 4 OUT SET is set to CONV2 as described in section 5 8 2 SDI3 4 OUT SET Select a sync mode in the SYNCHRO menu as described in section 5 10 1 FS MODE SET SYNC FRMT is set to AUTO DET as described in section 5 10 1 FS MODE SET Adjust the HD output phase to match that of the reference signal as described in section 5 10 6 HD PHASE The SDI OUT 1 2 output siganls will be adjusted Adjust the SD output phase to match that of the reference si
321. o enter the unit Doing so could result in fire other hazards or unit malfunction If foreign material does enter the unit turn power off and disconnect power cord immediately Remove material and contact authorized service representative if damage has occurred Transportation Caution Handle with care to avoid shocks in transit Shocks may cause malfunction When you need to transport the unit use the original packing materials or alternate adequate packing Circuitry Access Do not remove covers panels casing or access circuitry with power applied to the unit Turn power off and disconnect power cord prior to removal Internal servicing adjustment of unit should only be performed by qualified personnel Stop Do not touch any parts circuitry with a high heat factor Capacitors can retain enough electric charge to cause mild to serious shock even after power is disconnected Capacitors associated with the power supply are especially hazardous Avoid contact with any capacitors gt Hazard Unit should not be operated or stored with cover panels and or casing removed Operating unit with circuitry exposed could result in electric shock fire hazards or unit malfunction Potential Hazards A Caution If abnormal smells or noises are noticed coming from the unit turn power off immediately and disconnect power cord to avoid poten
322. o generator allows you to superimpose logos to FA 9500 outputs for each converter Run the FA 95 LG GUI which can be downloaded from FOR A s website on a PC to register logos to the FA 9500 via Ethernet See the FA 95LG GUI Operation Manual downloaded with the software for details on logo management The VIDEO OP AUDIO OP button LED flashes red while storing logo data to the FA 9500 from the FA 95LG GUI Once the data is stored it will be transmitted to the video memory The VIDEO OP AUDIO OP button LED flashes green during this transmission Do not turn the power of the unit off while the button is flashing in order not to obstruct the data storage process IMPORTANT The FA 9500 front panel button control operation and web browser will be slowed down while storing logo data using FA 95LG GUI Complete necessary settings before storing logo data 5 9 1 1 CONV1 LOGO SEL Allows you to select a logo function mode for CONVERTER1 Menu button VIDEO OP AUDIO OP Parameter Default Setting range Description LOGO ID 1 1 256 Selects a logo to be output to CONV 1 output Displays the registered name of the ID selected NAME logo Displays if the logo is not registered LOGO Displays the format of the ID selected logo 4 Logo formats SD 525 SD 625 HD 1080 HD 720 FORMAT a Displays if the logo is not registered 2 2 _ Displays the video format o
323. of GREEN can be changed SEPIA 100 0 The menu appears as shown below if AVO is enabled 37 5 2 4 COLOR CORRECT C C Menu button CC AES AUDIO Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description MODE Correction Mode CURVE Gamma Curve BALANCE CENTER BALANCE DIFFERENTIAL SEPIA CENTER BLACK WHITE Selects a correction mode from BALANCE RGB DIFFERENTIAL YPbPr or SEPIA BALANCE RGB signal correction mode Allows you to adjust the white balance Gray scale can be changed by adjusting R G and B levels DIFFERENTIAL Color difference signal mode Allows you to adjust contrast without changing white balance R Gand B levels can be changed without affecting gray scale This adjustment is effective for images with different color saturation levels SEPIA Sepia mode Useful for creating black and white images Selects a gamma curve type If MODE is set to SEPIA the menu as shown below will be displayed Setting range T Parameter Default Steps Description SEPIA LEVEL 25 0 aS Adjusts the color level in the SEPIA mode SEPIA COLOR 160 0 o a Adjusts the color in the SEPIA mode 38 5 2 5 Color Corrector and AVO Modes Auto Video Optimizer and Color Corrector use the same circuit The color corrector settings are not fully changeable when AVO mode is set to Auto See
324. on PCM Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 through CH16 of the SDI 3 4 output Silence PCM Normal audio signal CH1 CH16 Non PCM Silence Mute signal Unknown Non PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 Blank Unknown Unidentifiable Blank No audio signal embedding Bene BY PASS By passed through AES Input Audio Item Display Description oes Displays the status of the audio signal input to the DIGITAL AUDIO IO connectors PCM 48kHz Loss No audio signals PCM 44 1kHz PCM 48kHz Normal audio signal approx 48kHz PCM 32kHz PCM 44 1kHz Normal audio signal approx PCM Other 44 1kHz ion CH1 CH8 Silence 48kHz PCM 32kHz Normal audio signal approx 32kHz PCM Other Normal audio signal Other AES Silence 48kHz Mute signal approx 48kHz Silence 44 1kHz Mute signal approx 44 1kHz Silence 32kHz Mute signal approx 32kHz Silence Other Mute signal Other AES Non PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 Output Setting Connector is set to Output 245 AES Output Audio Item Display Description Displays the status of the audio signal output from the PCM DIGITAL AUDIO IO connectors Silence PCM Normal audio signal CH1 CH8 Non PCM Silence Mute signal Unknown Non PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 Input Setting Unknown Unidentifiable Input Setting Connector is set to input Dolby AUX Status Item Display Description Displays status or type of si
325. onal Dolby reference input connector REF IN If no signal is in the REF IN connector the PCM signal output will be in free run mode INPUT VIDEO Uses the input video signal as a reference signal 6 9 1 4 Dolby DOWNMIX This menu is available only if FA 95D D option is installed Menu button MODE SURROUND VIDEO OP AUDIO OP Parameter Default Setting range Description SURROUND MODE SURROUND STEREO eee downmix mode for the Dolby MONAURAL 6 9 1 5 Dolby DECODER GAIN Menu is available only if the FA 95D D option is installed Menu button VIDEO OP AUDIO OP Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a signal for gain adjustment DEC CH1 CH8 DEC CH1 CH8 Dolby decoded PCM CH SEL DEC CH1 DolbyDM L signal gt oo SOL ONE DolbyDM L R Down mixed signal y generated from Dolby decoded PCM signal 20 0 20 0 dB Sets gain for the signal selected under GAIN SET 0 0 dB 0 1 dB CH SEL 20 0 20 0 dB Sets offset for all Dolby decoded MASTER 0 0 dB 0 1 dB signals If the MASTER setting exceeds the total setting range of individual channels the alert will be displayed as 20 0dB or 20 0dB 134 6 9 2 Dolby ENCODER INPUT FA 95DE E 6 9 2 1 Dolby ENCODER INPUT Menu is available only if the FA 95DE E option is installed Dolby ENC INPUT 306 Menu button NEP UT i DIRECT LOND
326. onal device that is NAME 5 installed in OPTION SLOT B Displays NONE if no device is installed Displays the FPGA1 version information in FPGA1 OPTION SLOT B Displays if the version is not supported Displays the FPGA2 version information in FPGA2 OPTION SLOT B Displays if the version is not supported Displays the version information of SOFT in SOFT OPTION SLOT B Displays if the version is not supported 202 152 7 9 OTHER OPTION OTHER OPTION 204 Menu button FA 95PS INSTALLED STATUS OTHER Parameter Default Setting range Description FA 95PS y 7 INSTALLED FA 95PS option is installed NONE FA 95PS option is not installed 7 10 SOFT OPTION1 SOFT OPTIONI 205 Menu button FA 95AVO NONE FA 95S5CNV INSTALLED STATUS FA 95 36G NONE OTHER Parameter Default Setting range Description y INSTALLED FA 95AVO is installed FARRO NONE FA 95AVO is not installed INSTALLED FA 95SCNV option is installed FARNE NONE FA 95SCNV option is not installed FA 95 3G 7 INSTALLED FA 95 3G option is installed NONE FA 95 3G option is not installed INSTALLED FA 95FRC option is installed PARAPEN NONE FA 95FRC option is not installed FA 95AVO comes standard optional in Japan 7 11 SOFT OPTION2 0 0 Menu button FA 95LG NONE
327. onverter1 Crop Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description Variable i H Left 0 Pixel 2 Pixel Crops the left side of the video T H Right 0 Pixel V2 Piel Crops the right side of the video 7 V Top 0 Line hs Crops the top of the video F V Bottom 0 Line Vat cine Crops the bottom of the video The Converter1 Crop setting cannot be changed if Converter1 Process Mode is set to BY PASS Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV1 Conversion Table 5 3 2 1 The Converter1 Crop setting range varies depending on the Sync Format settings in FS Mode 9 4 1 Video System IMPORTANT The cropping setting range resets itself if the video input changes If the set value exceeds the setting range due to an input change the set value will automatically reset itself to the default value If the set value exceeds the horizontal range the H Left and H Right settings will reset to their default values If the value exceeds the vertical range the V Top and V Bottom settings will also reset accordingly Converter1 Side Cut Color Parameter Default Setting range Description Sets background color that will be visible if the converted image is set smaller than the original under Converter1 Size 5 3 3 Red Green Blue 0 0 255 R G and B components can be adjusted separately Control knob F4 allows you to adjust R
328. or under CONV1 SIDE RGB see section 5 3 6 2 The following parameters interact with each other When you change one of their setting values setting ranges of other parameters will also change SYNC FRMT Parameter in FS MODE SET see section 5 10 1 CONV 1 parameter in CONV1 U D MODE see section 5 3 1 If the CONV1 mode is set to BY PASS the CONV1 SIZE POS setting cannot be changed Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV1 Conversion Table see section 5 3 2 In both cases the menu as shown below will be displayed 43 5 3 4 CONV1 CROPPING CONV CROPPING 8 Menu button LEVEE T f OPIXEL RIGHT OPIXEL CONV1 TOP OLINE ANALOG BOTTOM OLINE Setting range TAN Parameter Default Steps Description LEFT 0 Pixel ME Pixel Crops the left side of the video RIGHT 0 Pixel ME Pixel Crops the right side of the video TOP 0 Line va tine Crops the top of the video BOTTOM O Line MS Crops the bottom of the video These setting ranges vary depending on the input signal format The LEFT and RIGHT settings and the TOP and BOTTOM settings interact with each other If the size cannot be adjusted as desired try changing the setting of another parameter 1 The following parameters interact with each other When you change one of their setting values setting ranges of other parameters will also change Video format SYNC FRMT Paramete
329. ource3 CH1 Down Mix L CH2 Source3 Unchanged Down Mix L and PCM signals are selected for L R channels CH1 CH2 Down Mix L Source2 CH1 CH2 Down Mix L x Down Mix R CH1 Down Mix L CH2 Down Mix R Changed to make a proper pair including the assigned L channel signal Down Mix L and non PCM signals are selected for L R channels 205 Entered value in AES Audio Remapping Assigned Source display Auto channel pairing CH1 Dolby Encoder1 i CH2 Dolby Encoder2 CH1 Dolby Encoder 1 CH1 Dolby Encoder 1 Changed to make a proper pair including the CH2 1KHz CH2 Dolby Encoder 2 assigned L channel signal NON PCM and 1KHz signals are selected for L R channels AES Audio Mono Sum Setting range Parameter Default Steps Description Disable Enable Outputs the stereo pair CH1 2 CH 7 8 Disable Enable channels as a mono sum To change the Source signal assignments see section 9 3 4 Source Select For details on how to set downmix see section 9 3 9 5 1Ch Down Mix IMPORTANT To use AES audio signals 1 2 through 7 8 for Source the AES connector must be set to be used for input See AES 1 2 3 4 IO Setting and AES5 6 7 8 lO Setting in section 9 4 2 Audio System for details 206 9 3 13 Analog Audio Output Settings Clicking block 13 on the audio block diagram opens the Analog Audio Output dialog box A http 19
330. output will be temporally muted when Alignment is changed from Disable to Enable while audio signal phases are aligning 225 Audio Error Sense Parameter Default Setting range Description FA 9500 can fade and mute audio when it detects a change in the audio status due to e g signal switchover This parameter allows you to select whether to detect changes and how sensitive detection should be to such changes Disable Disables mute function when change in audio status is detected Normally not selected Normal Mutes when a change on an SDI signal ADP Audio Data Packet or DBN Data Block Number is detected Normally selected Sensitive Mutes when a change on channel status or EDP Extended Data Packet presence only for SD SDI as well as the above items is detected 1 Fade function depends on the Fade Mode setting in the Fade In Out menu Disable Normal Sensitive Correction Normal Correction Normally set to Normal Set to Disable for a specific program or duration when audio output has noise or is muted The FA 9500 fades out audio or resets the delay circuit when a status change SDI signal input interruption signal switchover by a router etc is detected Faulty ancillary data in normal audio signals may also be detected as status changes Audio signals with such faulty ancillary data may lead the FA 9500 s automatic correction to improperly process the audio
331. over 65 About Changeover Web 163 About Colosed Captioning 292 About Scene Cut Detection and Frame Delay Settings 55 About Scene Cut Detection and Frame Delay Settings Web 167 AC Cord Retaining Clip 7 Accessing Menus 30 AES Audio Input Hysteresis 190 AES Audio Input Settings Web 190 AES Audio Output Settings Web 204 AES AUDIO Settings AES AUDIO 119 AES HYSTERESIS 119 AES I O SETUP 122 AES IN AUDIO 104 AES IN GAIN 119 AES MONO SUM 122 AES OUT AUDIO 106 AES REMAPPING 120 AFD 281 AFD Based Auto Aspect Conversion Settings 288 AFD Code Abbreviations 290 AFD Codes 282 AFD IN STATUS 108 AFD Supported Video Formats 288 Alert 294 Analog Audio Connection 261 Analog Audio Output Settings Web 207 ANALOG AUDIO Settings ANALOG 123 ANALOG IN AUDIO 104 ANALOG IN GAIN 123 ANALOG IN LEVEL 123 Analog Input Gain Level Web 192 ANALOG MONO SUM 125 ANALOG OUT AUDIO 107 134 ANALOG OUT GAIN 124 ANALOG OUT LEVEL 123 Analog Output Level Relative to the Digital Input Level 259 ANALOG REMAPPING 124 ANALOG SYSTEM 125 ANC DATA EMBED 91 ANC DETECT LINE 90 ANC DETECT SEL 91 ANC EMBED LINE 92 ANC IN STATUS 108 ANC IN STATUS 1 2 109 ANC LOSS SET 94 ANC Settings Web 228 ANC Status Web 248 Ancillary Data Packet Name List 279 Ancillary Data Types 92 Anti Aliasing 175 Arrow Buttons 33 Aspect Raito 174 Aspect Ratio Conversion with AFD 284 AUD ERROR STATUS 72 AUD LOSS STATUS 72 AUDIO DELAY 128 AUDIO DELAY Settings 128
332. ow to high Vertical Normal Normal This setting cannot be changed if the Strong 1 8 conversion is set to the formats indicated as DOWN in the CONV2 Conversion Table in section 5 4 2 The Antialias setting cannot be changed if Converter2 Process Mode is set to BY PASS or if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV2 Conversion Table 5 4 2 Enhance Setting range we Parameter Default Steps Description 3 Sharpen the output video image Enhance Level 0 Level 0 8 Level 0 to 8 low to high The Enhance setting cannot be changed if Converter2 Process Mode is set to BY PASS Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV2 Conversion Table 5 4 2 Converter2 Size Parameter Default nod Description H Size 100 0 50 0 150 0 Adjusts the width of the video Horizontal Size one 0 1 displayed on the monitor V Size 100 0 50 0 150 0 Adjusts the height of the video Vertical Size frre 0 1 displayed on the monitor The Converter2 Size setting cannot be changed if Converter2 Process Mode is set to BY PASS Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV2 Conversion Table 5 4 2 Converter2 Position Setting range ae Parameter Default Steps Description H Position 0 Pixel Variable 1 Adjusts the
333. own if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E is installed 140 6 9 3 5 LOUDNESS STANDARD Settings in this menu are common for channels 1 and 2 STANDARD LOUD Parameter Default Setting range Description STANDARD ARIB ARIB ATSC A85 EBUR128 ITU R1770 Allows you to select the standard under which the loudness measurement and adjustment will be conducted ARIB ARIB TR B32 ATSC A85 ATSC A 85 EBU R128 EBU R128 ITU R1770 ITU R BS 1770 TARGET LVL Displays the specified target level of the selected standard MOMENTARY Displays the specified measurement duration Momentary of the selected standard SHORT TERM Displays the specified measurement duration Short Term of the selected standard Parameter Specification of Standards used in the FA 95ALA Parameter ARIB TR B32 ATSC A 85 EBU R128 ITU R BS 1770 Target Level 24 0 LKFS 24 0 LKFS 23 0 LUFS 24 0 LKFS Momentary Average Time 400 msec 125 msec 400 msec 400 msec Short Term Average Time 3000 msec 10000 msec 3000 msec 3000 msec Absolute Gating 70 0 LKFS NONE 70 0 LUFS 70 0 LKFS Relative Gating 10 LU NONE 10 LU 10 LU Overlap Size 75 0 75 75 141 6 10 AUDIO SYSTEM Settings AUDIO SYS Allows you to set basic settings on the audio system 6 10 1 FADE IN OUT Menu button VIDEO SYS AUDIO SYS Parameter Def
334. pect ratio will be determined according to the 4 3L16 9PRTD setting made under ANC LOSS SET Sec 4 3 L 14 9 5 10 18 AFD 4 3 4 3 F ALT14 9 To output video signals in 4 3 select either ratio 4 3 L ALT14 9 with 4 3 To output in 16 9 select either ratio 4 3 L ALT 4 3 with 16 9 Other options will output video signals 16 9L gt 16 9 in the specified aspect ratio See section 20 16 9 F 16 9 7 About AFD for details 16 9 P 4 3 Options 4 3 L 16 9 T to 16 9 F ALT 4 3 other ASPECT 16 9 F PRTD than the above four require the input signal 16 9 P 14 9 aspect ratio to be specified in SD INPUT 16 9P ALT 14 9 ASPECT Sec 5 7 2 if the input signal is an SD 16 9F ALT14 9 signal 16 9F ALT4 3 AFD Selectable aspect ratios when CONV1 is set to 16 9 L gt 16 9 AFD and AFD ALT automatically select an aspect j ratio according to the AFD data in the input signal 16 9 F 16 9 If no AFD data is found in the input signal the AFD 16 9 P 4 3 aspect ratio will be determined according to the 16 9 F PRTD setting made under ANC LOSS SET Sec 16 9P 14 9 9 10 18 Options other than the above two are output in the specific aspect ratio See section 20 About AFD for details on conversions according to AFD data The format of the input signal to CONV1 and the format the signal will be converted to in CONV1 are displayed on the 4 row 1 BT1119 WSS will be embedded according to the WSS AFD ERROR settings
335. put Setting Microsoft Internet Explorer SDI Audio Mono Sum CH 1 2 Disable Enable SDI Audio Remapping Source CH1 SDI CH1 Source CH2 SDI CH2 Source CH3 SDI CH3 Assigned Source Source CH1 Source CH2 CH 3 4 Disable Enable Source CH3 CH 5 6 Disable Enable Source CH4 SDI CH4 Source CH5 5 Source CH4 CH 7 8 Disable Enable Source CH5 CH 9 10 Disable Enable Source CHG 5 Source CH7 5 Source CH6 CH 11 12 Disable Enable Source CH7 CH 13 4 Disable Enable Source CH8 5 Source CH9 S Source CH8 CH 15 16 Disable Enable Source CH9 SDI Output Clock Select Group 1 Auto v Source CH Source CH10 Source CH Source CH11 Group 2 Auto Y Source CH12 Source CH12 Source C H Source CH14 Source CH D 5 1 8 2 S 3 8 4 5 5 5 B 5 Source Cl Source CH13 Source CH14 Source CH15 Source CH16 Group 3 Group 4 Auto v Auto v Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings SDI Audio Remapping channel of the same channel number with the parameter CH1 16 Dolby Encoder 1 2 7 Left Right Center LFE Ls Rs Loudness 1 8 Loudness 2 Parameter Default Setting range Description Source CH 1 16 Selects source audio signals to 500Hz assign to SDI embedded audio 1kHz cha
336. put signal LEFT and RIGHT settings and the TOP and BOTTOM settings interact with each other If the size cannot be adjusted as desired try changing the setting of another parameter 1 The following parameters interact with each other When you change one of their setting values setting ranges of other parameters will also change Input video format SYNC FRMT Parameter in FS MODE SET see section 5 10 1 If the CONV2 mode is set to BY PASS the CONV2 CROPPING setting cannot be changed Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV2 Conversion Table see section 5 4 2 In both cases the menu as shown below will be displayed IMPORTANT The cropping setting range resets itself if the video input changes If the set value exceeds the setting range due to an input change the set value will automatically reset itself to the default value If the set value exceeds the horizontal range the LEFT and RIGHT settings will reset to their default values If the value exceeds the vertical range the TOP and BOTTOM settings will also reset accordingly 50 5 4 5 CONV2 IMPROVE 24 Menu button CONV2 MASTER Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description MOTION ANTIALIAS H ADAPTIVE NORMAL FIELD ADAPTIVE FRM ODD st FRM EVEN 1st WEAK 8 1 NORMAL STRONG1 8 FIELD Generates a progressive scan image from one field of an
337. puter File name fa9500 Files of type All Files Specify the destination directory and click Open Click Load A confirmation message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 e re you sure you want to load from file a Click OK to start transferring the file to the FA 9500 To stop transferring the file click Cancel IMPORTANT BY PASS On Off and Freeze On Off settings cannot be saved IMPORTANT The FA 9500 uses the CSV file format to backup the configuration data which enables commercially available spreadsheet software to edit the data However Unit ID or event names that consist only of numbers may be recognized as numeric values by such software and appear differently after being recalled to the FA 95RU It is recommended that alphabetical values be included in names to enable editing using such software 237 9 6 3 Downloading a MIB File The MIB file used when the FA 9500 is monitored and operated through the external SNMP manager can be downloaded from the FA 9500 The downloaded file is in zip format and so you will need to unzip the file before its use Download MIB File Click Download under Download MIB File on the Utility page The File Download dialog appears File Download Do you want to open or save this file Name fora fa9500 mib zip Type Compressed zipped Folder 6 08 KB From 192 168 0 10 Open Save Cancel Always ask before opening this type of file
338. r all 3 following conditions are met processed output signals will be delayed by 2 frames SYNCHRO MODE is set to INPUT FRAME DELAY is set to OFF V phase settings for the Converter CONV 1 or 2 are set between Minimum to 1 line Change the settings if necessary referring to section 5 10 1 FS MODE SET 5 10 6 HD PHASE SET or 5 10 7 SD PHASE SET 40 5 3 1 CONV1 U D MODE Converts video signals according to the AFD Active Format Description data CONV1 U D MODE 6 CONV1 SD ASPECT AFD 4 3 1080 59i gt gt 525 60 Menu button CONV1 ANALOG 16 9P ALT14 9 16 9F ALT14 9 16 9F ALT4 3 Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a mode for UP DOWN CONVERTER1 to convert the input signal in CONV1 connector BY PASS BY PASS Outputs the signal without converting SD SD Converts signals to a standard definition 1080i format CONE EES S 720p 1080i Converts signals to a 1080i format 1080PsF 720p Converts signals to a 720p format 1080p 3G 1080PsF Converts signals to a 1080PsF format 1080P 3G Converts signals to a 3G SDI 1080p format AFD 4 AFD ALT 43 Selectable aspect ratio settings when CONV is AFD 16 9 set to SD AFD ALT 16 9 AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 AFD 16 9 4 3 L 16 9 T AFD ALT 16 9 automatically select an aspect 4 3 L 14 9 T ratio according to the AFD data in the input signal 4 3 L gt 16 9 If no AFD data is found in the input signal the 4 3 F 4 3 as
339. r in FS MODE SET see section 5 10 1 If the CONV1 mode is set to BY PASS the CONV1 CROPPING setting cannot be changed Also it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as BY PASS in the CONV1 Conversion Table see section 5 3 2 In both cases the menu as shown below will be displayed IMPORTANT The cropping setting range resets itself if the video input changes If the set value exceeds the setting range due to an input change the set value will automatically reset itself to the default value If the set value exceeds the horizontal range the LEFT and RIGHT settings will reset to their default values If the value exceeds the vertical range the TOP and BOTTOM settings will also reset accordingly 44 5 3 5 CONV1 IMPROVE Menu button CONV1 ANALOG Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description MOTION ANTIALIAS H ADAPTIVE NORMAL FIELD ADAPTIVE FRM ODD st FRM EVEN 1st WEAK 8 1 NORMAL STRONG1 8 FIELD Generates a progressive scan image from one field of an interlaced scan image The created image has no motion artifacts but vertical resolution will be reduced ADAPTIVE Detects whether there is motion or no motion in the scene and generate an optimal progressive scan image FRM ODD 1st Generates a progressive scan image from two fields odd even of and interlaced scan image Suitable for the progressive segment fr
340. r level control If the value is too large some noise may be picked up causing the results to become unstable If the value is too small it increases contrast but it may cause the images to be overexposed In Black Level 1 0 20 0 0 5 The minimum value of luminance in the sample data is defined as 0 Based on this reference value this determines the lowest level of luminance for level control If the value is too small some noise may be picked up causing the results to become unstable If the value is too large it increases contrast but it may cause the images to be underexposed Target White Level and Target Black Level These two parameters determine the highest and lowest levels of luminance for target images outputs Parameter Setting range step Description Target White Level 60 0 100 0 0 5 Determines the maximum value of luminance for outputs The maximum luminance value of the image after correction should approximate this value The larger the value the brighter the image which may however cause the image to be overexposed The smaller the value the brighter tones are kept However the overall obtained image may be dark Target Black Level 0 40 0 0 5 Determines the minimum value of luminance for outputs The minimum luminance value of the image after correction should approximate this value The larger the value the dar
341. re delayed by 1 frame from the bypassed video signals In case the input signal is a progressive video signal or all 3 following conditions are met processed output signals will be delayed by 2 frames SYNCHRO MODE is set to INPUT FRAME DELAY is set to OFF V phase settings for the Converter CONV 1 or 2 are set between Minimum to 1 line Change the settings if necessary referring to section 5 10 1 FS MODE SET 5 10 6 HD PHASE SET or 5 10 7 SD PHASE SET 47 5 4 1 CONV2 U D MODE Menu button ED CONV2 MASTER 1080 59i gt gt 525 60 Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a mode of the UP DOWN CONVERTER2 to convert the input signal in CONV2 BY PASS BY PASS Outputs the signal without converting SD SD Converts signals to a standard definition 1080i format CONME BUEASS 720p 1080i Converts signals to a 1080i format 1080PsF 720p Converts signals to a 720p format 1080p 3G 1080PsF Converts signals to a 1080PsF format 1080P 3G Converts signals to a 3G SDI 1080p format AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 AFD 16 9 Selectable aspect ratio settings when CONV2 is AFD ALT 16 9 set to SD 4 3 L 16 9 T AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 AFD 16 9 4 3 L 14 9 T AFD ALT 16 9 automatically select an aspect 4 3 L gt 16 9 ratio according to the AFD data in the input signal 4 3 F 4 3 If no AFD data is found in the input signal the j aspect ratio will be determined according to the 4
342. reats audio signals as mute signals 226 1 Channel status and Validity Bit of input audio channel status can be checked using a wave form monitor 2 Processes the audio signal as described if 9 3 6 SRC Mode is set to Auto 3 Processes the audio signal as described if 9 3 11 SDI Audio Output Settings is set to Auto CH STATUS FA 9500 determins whether the input audio signal is PCM or NON PCM by the NON PCM flag in the Audio Channel Status ACS If ACS is incorrect the audio signal may cause inproper processing For such case this setting may effective processing the audio signal normally IMPORTANT Use this setting only if there is audio noise or the audio is muted Otherwise do not change the setting from the default setting 4 Validity Bit Mask Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects audio error sensor mode for each stereo channel pair of SDI and AES input audio signals whose channel status Validity Bit flag is 1 SRC BY PASS Treats audio signals as SRC BY PASS NON PCM By passes audio signals through 7 SRC SRC and selects audio clock input in the CH1 2 CH15 16 Bypass REM NON PCM signal channel for SDI AUDIO Mute CLOCK PCM Treats audio signals as PCM standard audio signal By passes audio signals through SRC and select REFERENCE for SDI AUDIO CLOCK Mute Treats audio signals as mute signals 1 Channel status and Validity Bit of input audio channel status ca
343. rs CH 1 2 to 7 8 to Group A CH 1 2 will be the reference Other channel pairs will be synchronized to the word clock of CH1 2 When setting channels CH1 2 to 3 4 to Group A and channels CH5 6 to 7 8 to Group B CH 1 2 will be the reference pair for Group A and CH 5 6 the reference pair for Group B IMPORTANT Channel pairs in an audio group must be synchronous and must have the same sampling rate Changing the audio assignment of the reference channel pair may cause noise on other channel pairs in the same audio group Also changing the assignment may affect the phase alignment of the reference channel pair and other channel pairs If the alignment is turned off set Master Mute see section 9 3 7 Audio Master Setting to on and off or turn the unit power off and on to regain the alignment 191 9 3 3 Analog Input Gain Level Clicking block 3 on the audio block diagram opens the Analog Audio Input Gain Level dialog box 3 http 192 168 0 10 Analog Audio Input Microsoft Internet Explorer Analog Audio Input Level Analog Audio System El UNITY CH1 4 dBm Termination Setting 6000 OHiZ Analog Audio Input Gain Set CH2 CH1 0 0 dB BONT cnz Analog Audio Input Gain Master 0 0 dB 4 dBm Silence Time 2 sec v 4 dBm v Silence Level 72dBFS v CH 2 0 0 dB ij HN CH4 4 dBm v CH3 0 0 dB _ 0 0 dB o on ou Internet After completing the settings
344. s Selectable when Clip Mode is set to YPbPr RGB Clip Parameter Default O Description White Clip 300 0 50 300 Sets the upper RGB color space RGB White Clip di 0 5 threshold Black Clip 200 0 200 50 Sets the lower RGB color space RGB Black Clip id 0 5 threshold Selectable when Clip Mode is set to RGB 184 9 2 11 Output Select Clicking block 12 on the video block diagram opens the Video Output Setting dialog box Display of the Video Output Setting dialog varies depending on the Video Output Mode setting a http 192 168 0 10 Video Output Setting Er SDI 1 2 Output Setting Assign Converter 1 Converter 2 525 60 gt gt 525 60 SDI 3 4 Output Setting Assign Converter 1 Converter 2 525 60 gt gt 525 60 Composite Output Setting Assign Converter 1 Converter 2 525 60 gt gt 525 60 Component Output Setting Assign Converter 1 O Converter 2 525 60 gt gt 525 60 Output Mode YPbPr SMPTE 0D Internet 9 SDI1 2 Output Setting Allows you to assign video signals to output from video output connectors SDI1 and 2 Setting range Parameter Default Steps Description Selects whether to output a Assign Converter1 ed ial Converter or 2 signal from OVEST SDI1 and 2 connectors The input and output signal formats are displayed e g 625 50 gt gt 1080 50i 9 SDI3 4 Output Setting Allows you to assign video s
345. s 1 2 R selected under respective Audio Output Setting menus will be the same as that for Loudness 1 2 L 215 5 Only signals processed in the SRC will be subject to Loudness adjustments See section 9 3 6 SRC Mode for details on SRC settings 6 Shown if the FA 95D D or FA 95DE E is installed LFE channels are subjected to adjustments but not to measurement Loudness Standars Setting Parameter Default Setting range Description ARIB TR B32 ATSC A85 Allows you to select according to what Standard ARIB TR B32 EBU R128 standard the loudness measurement and E adjustment will be conducted ITU R BS 1770 Parameter Specification of Standards used in the FA 95ALA Parameter ARIB TR B32 ATSC A 85 EBU R128 ITU R BS 1770 Target Level 24 0 LKFS 24 0 LKFS 23 0 LUFS 24 0 LKFS Momentary Average Time 400 msec 125 msec 400 msec 400 msec Short Term Average Time 3000 msec 10000 msec 3000 msec 3000 msec Absolute Gating 70 0 LKFS NONE 70 0 LUFS 70 0 LKFS Relative Gating 10 LU NONE 10 LU 10 LU Overlap Size 75 0 75 75 216 9 4 SYSTEM Settings Utility Click Click the System tab at the top of the page The System setting window will be displayed The system setting window consists of Video System and Audio System pages at the top of the page 9 4 1 Video System FA 9500 Logout video audio System crt umy Status network Video
346. s Mode Back Color Back Color Off WD internet Select setting values for parameters in the respective pull down menus After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Video Input Setting Parameter Default Setting range Description SDI1 SDI2 Composite Input Select SDI1 YPbPr SMPTE 2 Selects an input signal YPbPr BETACAM 2 RGB Y C Back Color Select tion for the ti q elects an operation for the time Video Loss Mode Back Color Auto eso the signal input selected under Color Bar Input Select is lost Output Disable Off Black Blue Back Color Black ped S Magenta elect a background color Green Cyan Yellow 1 If Synchro Mode under FS Mode in section 9 4 1 Video System is set to Line AVDL or Input Lock the selected Auto Freeze functions the same as Back Color In such case the Auto Freeze display will be grayed out 2 Selectable only if FA 95AIO option is installed lt Video Loss Mode gt Video Loss Mode allows you to select what to output when the input signal selected under Input Select is lost e Back Color Displays a screen in a color selected under Back Color e Auto Freeze Freezes the last image before loss of signal Freezes progressive signals such as 720p in frame freeze mode and other signals in field freeze mode e Color Bar Outputs SMPTE color bars e Output Disable 159 No outp
347. sable OEnable ODisable OEnable Group 3 ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable Group 4 ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable Duration 0 0 second ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable ODisable OEnable Disable OEnable Disable All Enable Al Disable All Enable All Duration 0 0 second O Internet far Rio 162 After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Audio Loss Trigger Setting range er Parameter Default Steps Description Disable Enables or disables auto changeover for signal Group to 4 Disable Enable loss of SDI embedded audio 0 0 to 1 0sec Sets the detected SDI embedded audio signal Duration 0 0sec j 0 1 f loss duration required to trigger a changeover 0 15ec This setting will be shared by all 4 audio groups A changeover will not be performed if Changeover is disabled or Audio Trigger is disabled even though Audio Loss Trigger is enable Audio Error Trigger Setting range a Parameter Default S
348. section 5 5 1 AVO SETTING Changeable Color Corrector menus according to AVO modes AVO Modes AUTO HOLD OFF Color Corrector Menus x O O WHITE LEVEL x O O BLACK LEVEL X O O GAMMA LEVEL x x O CORRECTION MODE CURVE O Enabled setting x Disabled setting IMPORTANT DIFFERENTIAL and SEPIA mode settings under COLOR CORRECT will automatically change to BALANCE mode whenever AVO is enabled While AVO is being used the color corrector performs correction as if MODE is set to BALANCE and CURVE is set to BLACK in the COLOR CORRECT menu Color correction enabled by setting AVO Control to HOLD is also performed in the above state 39 5 3 CONV1 UP DOWN CROSS CONVERTER Both converters CONV1 and CONV2 can equally output video signals in formats specified for respective output connectors and convert the aspect ratio according to the S2016 VI or WSS AFD Active Format Description data The video signal selected under IN SEL in the VIDEO INPUT SELECT IN SEL menu as shown in section 5 7 will be input to UP DOWN CONVERTER1 CONV1 The signal will be processed in CONV and output from the output connector for which CONV is selected as described in section 5 8 VIDEO OUT SELECT OUT SEL The converter requires 1 frame to process video signals so that processed output signals are delayed by 1 frame from the bypassed video signals In case the input signal is a progressive video signal o
349. signed to respective menu buttons When it reaches the last menu the light goes off lt LIVE SAFE mode gt Single arrow buttons blink when a parameter in one of the menus requiring a setting change confirmation is changed To confirm the change press the single down arrow button Pressing the single up arrow button cancels the change and the parameter before change will be displayed While single arrow buttons are blinking all buttons except single arrow buttons are disabled until either single arrow button is pressed Menus that request a setting confirmation are shown with a black circle e in the menu list in section 4 2 2 Menu Buttons 4 2 4 Consecutive Viewing of Settings lt NORMAL mode gt While a menu button is turned on the menu display will be in consecutive display mode when both single up and down arrow buttons are pressed simultaneously Both single arrow buttons blink when they are in consecutive display mode To exit the mode simultaneously press both arrow buttons again Then arrow buttons will stop blinking The single down and up arrow buttons while in consecutive display mode can consecutively display all menus in which menu list settings can be changed from the first to last or last to first menu item Meanwhile holding down the single down or up arrow button also allows you to consecutively view menus lt LIVE SAFE mode gt Button functions are the same as NORMAL mode however consecutive displa
350. stalled Settings in this menu will reset themselves whenever CHANGEOVER in the VIDEO INPUT SET 5 7 1 menu has been set to DISABLE 65 Menu button IN SEL DOWNMIX Parameter Description Displays Audio Loss trigger status at the time a changeover is performed DISABLE This trigger is disabled AGBN EnS NON TRG This trigger is not activated TRIGGER Changeover is performed due to this trigger Displays Audio Error trigger status at the time a changeover is performed DISABLE This trigger is disabled AER NON TRG This trigger is not activated TRIGGER Changeover is performed due to this trigger Displays Audio Silence trigger status at the time a changeover is performed SILENCE DISABLE This trigger is disabled NON TRG This trigger is not activated TRIGGER Changeover is performed due to this trigger 71 5 7 15 AUD LOSS STATUS This menu is accessible only if the FA 95CO software option is installed Settings in this menu will reset themselves whenever CHANGEOVER i in the VIDEO INPUT SET 5 7 1 menu has been set to DISABLE AUD LOSS STATU 6 6 Menu button GROUP1 NON TRG GROUP2 NON TRG IN SEL GROUP3 NON TRG DOWNMIX GROUP4 NON TRG Parameter Description Displays Audio Loss trigger status in each audio group at the time a changeover is performed GROUP1 4 DISABLE This trigger is disabled NON TRG This trigger is not activated TRIGGER Changeover is performed du
351. t 220 240 VAC at 100 120 VAC at 220 240 VAC FA 95ALA Dimensions 430 W x 350 D x a H Weight 3 0 kg without options FA 95D D DE E 0 3 kg FA 95AI0 0 3 kg with a connection cable PC 3307 1 FA 95ALA 0 2 kg Consumables Recommended replacement timespans Power unit within 5 years Cooling fan P 1437 FAN 1 and FAN 2 within 6 years Accessories Operation manual AC cord rack mount brackets Options FA 95PS Redundant power supply unit lt gt FA 95DACBL Digital audio expansion connector cable lt FA 95CO Changeover function lt gt FA 95RU Remote control unit FA 95D D Dolby E Dolby Digital decoder FA 95DE E Dolby E encoder lt gt FA 95AIO Analog component I O card lt gt FA 95ALA Automatic Loudness Adjustment lt gt FA 10DCCRU Remote Control Unit for color correction 298 25 2 External Dimensions All dimensions in mm lo om mi im mf im framm A raana t qT m gt x o a DISPLAY AREA 8 3 462 299 Index 5 5 1Ch Down Mix Web 198 A About AFD 281 About Change
352. t Video Status page FA 9500 Logout video Audio system cpi utility status Network Unit Video Status Audio Status Unit Information ANC Status Changeover Status Video Input Status Video Output Status Unit Status SDI In 1 1080 59 94i SDI Out 1 2 1080 59 94i Unit Name FA 9500 SDI In 2 1080 59 94i SDI Out 3 4 1080 59 94i Fan 1 Normal Composite In Loss Composite Out 525 60 Fan 2 Normal Reference Loss Component Out 1080 59 94i Power1 0 22 Component In Loss Power2 0 2 wee If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown Click Refresh to refresh the page 241 Video Input Status Item Display Description SDI1 In Loss 525 60 625 50 1080 59i 1080 50i 720 59p 720 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF 1080 59p 1080 50p BY PASS Unknown Displays the video format of the SDI1 input signal Displays Loss if there is no input signal Displays Unknown if there is an unsupported input signal Displays BY PASS if the function is enabled SDI2 In Loss 525 60 625 50 1080 59i 1080 50i 720 59p 720 50p 1080 23PsF 1080 24PsF 1080 59p 1 1080 50p 1 BY PASS Unknown Displays the video format of the SDI2 input signal Displays Loss if there is no input signal Displays Unknown if there is an unsupported input signal Displays BY PASS if the function is enabled Displays
353. t menu The CONV1 mode cannot be manually changed To change the mode set Video Output Mode to Fix Displays the format of the input signal to CONV1 and the format the signal will be converted to in CONV1 See section 5 3 2 CONV1 Conversion Table for details on conversions 173 Aspect Ratio Setting range ra Parameter Default Steps Description AFD 4 3 Selects the aspect ratio for the output from WiN a Converter1 Selectable aspect ratio settings when CONV1 is Aaa a set to SD pie L a T AFD 4 3 AFD ALT 4 3 AFD 16 9 4 3 L gt 16 9 AFD ALT 16 9 automatically select an aspect 4 3 F 4 3 ratio according to the AFD data in the input 4 3 L 16 9PRTD signal If no AFD data is found in the input i 4 3 L 14 9 signal the aspect ratio will be determined AFD 4 3 4 3 F ALT14 9 CP a aa made under 5 10 18 a a To output video signals in 4 3 select either ratio 16 9 L gt 16 9 with 4 3 To output in 16 9 select either ratio 16 9 F 16 9 1 with 16 9 Other options will output video 16 9 P 4 3 signals in the specified aspect ratio See section Aspect 16 9 FPRTD 1 20 About AFD for details Ratio 16 9 P 14 9 1 Options 4 3 L 16 9 T to 16 9 F ALT 4 3 other 16 9 P ALT 14 9 1 than the above four require the input signal 16 9 F ALT14 9 1 aspect ratio to be specified in 5 7 2 SD INPUT 16 9 F ALT4 3 1 ASPECT if the input signal is an SD signal Selectable aspect ratios when CONV1 is set to
354. ta for details on how to save setting data into a backup file 156 9 Control via WEB Browser This section describes how to control the FA 9500 from a computer via a web browser See section 3 5 Connecting a Computer for details on connecting with a computer Do not open pop up setting dialogs at the same time Doing so may disable operation 9 1 Connecting via a WEB Browser Open a web browser on your computer and enter the address as http 192 168 0 10 factory default setting in the address bar Press the Enter key to connect to the FA 9500 The login page is displayed FORA HD SD FRAME SYNCHRONIZER FA 9500 Login Copyright 2011 FOR A COMPANY LIMITED All rights reserved Click Login The authentication dialog appears Connect to 192 168 0 10 FA 9500 User name faosoo Password eeccccccccs Remember my password Enter your user name and password The default user name and password are set at the factory User name fa9500 Password foranetwork Click OK The Status page is displayed If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Status page will be displayed without displaying the Login page or authentication dialog FA 9500 Logout Video Audio System GPI Utility Status Network gt Unit Video Status Audio Status Unit Information Changeover Status Video Input Status Video Ou
355. te Interfaces Ethernet 10 Base T 100 Base TX 1000 Base T RJ 45 x 2 Remote GPI 9 pin D sub male 7 terminals x 1 IN TTL negative logic level signal or Make contact OUT Rated current 10mA each terminal Absolute maximum current 40mA FA 95D D FA 95DE E Option Audio Input AES EBU Unbalanced 1 0 Vp p 750 BNC x 1 48 kHz 16 bit to 24 bit Audio Output AES EBU Unbalanced 1 0 Vp p 750 BNC x 1 48 kHz 16 20 24 bit Reference Input BB NTSC 0 429 Vp p PAL 0 45 Vp p or Tri level Sync 0 6 Vp p 750 BNC x 1 Internally 750 terminated FA 95AI0 Analog Component I O Option Input Video 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 1080 24PsF 1080 23 98PsF 720 59 94p 720 50p Formats 525 60 NTSC 625 50 PAL Output Video 1080 59 94i 1080 50i 1080 24PsF 1080 23 98PsF 720 59 94p 720 50p Formats 525 60 NTSC 625 50 PAL PAL M FA 95ALA Automatic Loudness Adjustment Option Supported standard ARIB TR B32 ATSC A 85 EBU R128 ITU R BS 1770 Temperature 0 C to 40 C Humidity 30 to 90 no condensation Power 100 VAC 240 VAC 10 50 60 Hz Power Consumption FA 9500 50 VA 47 W at 100 120 VAC 64 VA 52 W at 220 240 VAC with FA 95PS 60 VA 55 W at 100 120 VAC 73 VA 56 W at 220 240 VAC Add the amount of power consumption of options installed FA 95D D DE E 4 VA 4 ve at 100 120 VAC 5 Wat 220 240 VAC FA 95D D DE E W at 100 120 VAC at 220 240 VAC FA 95AI0 at 100 120 VAC a
356. tem name Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type Rees Set OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 5 2 Input Output video signal format 00 Loss 01 525 60i 02 625 50 04 1080 59 05 1080 50 09 1080 24PsF SDI1 IN D Jasa S fa95InSD11 1 INTEGER O 13 1080 50p 20 720 59p 21 720 50p 29 Unkown 30 BY PASS 31 Disable SD2 IN Ditto aQ5InSDi2 2 INTEGER O 0 LOSS MIDES IN STATUS Composite IN 1 osoen ffa95InComposite 3 INTEGER O 30 BY PASS 00 Loss 01 525 60i 02 625 50i 04 1080 59 05 1080 50 09 1080 24PsF Ref Status 10 1080 23 98PsF fad5InReference 1 1 11 INTEGER O 12 1080 59p 13 1080 50p 20 720 59 94p 21 720 50p 29 Unknown 34 not Used Component IN Ditto O 00 Loss 01 525 60i 02 625 50i 04 1080 59 05 1080 50 ISDIOUT 1 2 09 1080 24PsF fa950utSDI1 2 21 INTEGER O 10 1080 23 98PsF 12 1080 59p 13 1080 50p 20 720 59 94p 21 720 50p SDI OUT 3 4 Ditto fa950utSDI3 4 22 INTEGER 0 Loss VIDEO VIDEO OUT 1 525 60 OUTPUT STATUS Composite OUT 2 625 50 fa950utComposite 23 INTEGER O 30 BY PASS 131 Disable 00 Loss 01 525 60i 02 625 50 04 1080 59 05 1080 50 Component OUT 09 1080 24PsF fa950utComponent 24 INTEGER O 10 1080 23 98PsF 12 1080 59p 13 1080 50p 20 720 59 94p 21 720 50p OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 5 3 1 SDI1 input audio status CH1 a05StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch1 1 INTEGER O CH2 a05StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch2 2 INTEGER O CH3 a05StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch3 3 INTEGER O CH4 a95StatusSdiEmbin1Ch4 4 INTE
357. teps Description Enables or disables auto changeover for errors Disable listed below CH1 to CH16 Disable Enable DBN Data Block Number discontinuity Channel status discontinuity HD audio clock data error or change Sets the detected audio error duration required to trigger a changeover Duration 0 0sec 0 0 to 1 0sec This setting will be shared by all 16 channels 0 1sec To avoid an unexpected changeover triggered by a switchover of input signals via router set Duration to longer than 0 2 sec A changeover will not be performed if Changeover is disabled or Audio Trigger is disabled even though Audio Error Trigger is enable The Disable All button allows you to disable triggers for all channels 1 through 16 The Enable All button allows you to enable triggers for all channels 1 through 16 Audio Error Trigger also triggers a changeover for SDI input signal loss If Audio Error Trigger is enabled and the SDI signal input is lost a changeover will be performed even though Audio Loss Trigger is disabled based on the Audio Error Trigger Duration setting Silence Trigger Setting range T Parameter Default Steps Description Disable Enables or disables auto changeover for audio CHTO EHI pisanie Enable silence in the embedded audio channel A changeover will not be performed if Changeover is disabled or Audio Trigger is disabled even though Silence Trigger is enable The duration to determine SDI e
358. the FA 9500 within 15 characters The name will be displayed on the front panel under NAME in the NETWORK INFO menu 7 5 The factory default is FA 9500 e Event Name Enter a name in the setting box next to respective events within 15 characters Select which events to be displayed by clicking on the event groups in section 1 at the top of the page Events are displayed by groups of 20 After completing the settings click Submit The factory default values are EVENT 1 to 100 The entered event names will be displayed when performing Event Load or Event Save They will also be displayed on the front panel menu display while opening menus described in section 8 Event Memory 235 9 6 2 Backup Parameter The FA 9500 settings can be saved to a file and the saved settings in a file can be loaded Saving the FA 9500 Settings to a File Click Save The File Download dialog appears File Download Do you want to open or save this file Name fa9500 csv Type HTML Document From 192 168 0 10 harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or Y While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially save this file What s the risk The Save As dialog appears Specify the destination directory Save in ie Desktop Om Documents 3 My Computer My Recent Bm Network Places Documents My Documents My Computer ferme My Network Save as type Text Document
359. tially hazardous conditions If problems similar to above occur contact authorized service representative before attempting to again operate unit Rack Mount Brackets Ground Terminal and Rubber Feet Q Caution To rack mount or ground the unit or to install rubber feet do not use screws or materials other than those supplied Otherwise it may cause damage to the internal circuits or components of the unit If you remove the rubber feet attached on the unit do not reinsert the screws securing the rubber feet A Caution Consumables The consumables used in unit must be replaced periodically For further details on which parts are consumables and when they should be replaced refer to the specifications at the end of the Operation Manual Since the service life of the consumables varies greatly depending on the environment in which they are used they should be replaced at an early date For details on replacing the consumables contact your dealer Upon Receipt Unpacking FA 9500 units and their accessories are fully inspected and adjusted prior to shipment Operation can be performed immediately upon completing all required connections and operational settings Check your received items against the packing lists below FA 9500 ITEM QTY REMARKS FA 9500 1 AC Cord 1 set Incl ladder strap retaining clip assembly Ra
360. ting Default at startup Event1 to Event100 Enable Loads the settings of the Disable respective video formats If the Auto Event Load Disable Enable video input is changed to a different format the settings of the changed format will be loaded Video Format Selects the number of an event Event Load Default Default you want to load Click Submit to Event1 to EVENT100 load Selects the number of an event a Video Format E Event Save Video Format Evanti to Event100 even to save Click Submit to 1 Video Format selects an event that is stored for each video format 2 Default recalls the default settings Set Event Name Click Set next to Set Event Name A window that allows you to name the FA 9500 and events 1 though 100 as shown below opens FA 9500 Video Audio system Logout GPI Utility Event 1 20 Event21 40 Event41 60 Event61 80 Event 81 100 Unit Name Unit Name FA 9500 Event 1 10 Event 1 EVENT Event 11 Event 2 EVEN Event 12 Event 3 EVENT Event 13 Event 4 EVENT Event 14 Event 5 EVENT Event 15 Event 6 EVEN Event 16 Event 7 EVENT Event 17 Event 8 EVENT Event 18 Event 9 EVENT Event 19 o iu o fon feo n EVEN a Event 10 Event 20 e Unit Name Event 11 20 EVENT 11 EVENT 12 EVENT 13 EVENT 14 EVENT 15 EVENT 16 EVENT 17 EVENT 18 EVENT 19 EVENT 20 Status A Network Enter a name for
361. ting returns to the value before it was reset and the UNITY indicator light goes off 35 5 VIDEO Menus Make the menu buttons light up green using the VIDEO AUDIO button Pressing the button while the buttons are lit orange turns the lights green Then the menus displayed on the upper row on each menu button can be selected 5 1 VIDEO PROC AMP PROCESS Menu button VIDEO AUDIO Menu button VIDEO PROC AMP 1 VIDEO LEVEL 100 0 PROCESS CHROMA LEVEL 100 0 SETUP BLACK 0 0 SOL AUEIO HUE Dug OF Setting range T Parameter Default Steps Description VIDEO LEVEL 100 0 ere a Adjusts the video level CHROMA LEVEL 100 0 o e Adjusts the chrominance level SETUP BLACK 0 0 sala ec a Adjusts the black level HUE 0 0 o ye Adjusts the color phase 5 2 COLOR CORRECTOR C C Allows you to adjust the Color corrector settings 5 2 1 WHITE LEVEL Menu button RED gt 100 0 GREEN 100 0 CC BLUE 100 0 AES AUDIO GROUP ADJUST Parameter Default Seiling renge Description Steps RED GREEN BLUE 100 0 0 0 200 0 Adjusts the white level of R G RGB White Level e 0 5 and B components separately Adjusts the white level of R G GROUP ADJUST 100 0 0 0 200 0 and B components all together Group Adjustment RER 0 5 while retaining the proportion of the separately adjusted levels If MODE is set to SEPIA in the COLOR CORRECT C
362. tions for details on AFD types 110 5 17 CONV1 ANC OUT1 Menu button STATUS OTHER L indicates the line number into which ancillary data is inserted Displays the ancillary data packet name and line number for the inserted ancillary data in the CONV 1 output signal The status of up to 4 ancillary data can be displayed See section 19 FA 9500 Ancillary Data Packet Name List for details on ancillary data names 334 1 CEA608 kde 5 18 CONV2 ANC OUT Menu button STATUS OTHER Displays the status of CEA608 WSS and VI ancillary data inserted into luminance signal of the CONV 2 output The line number in which the ancillary data is in is displayed Displays PRESENT if ancillary data is inserted Displays ABSENT if no anceillary data is inserted If ANC MODE is set to H V ANC the state of the V ANC setting PASS or BLANK will be displayed In such case no line number will be displayed See section 5 10 10 CONV2 ANC SET for details on ANC MODE and V ANC setting 5 18 1 CONV2 S2016 OUT Displays whether the S2016 3 ancillary data is inserted into CONV 2 output video signal When no S2016 3 is in the CONV2 output video signal 6872 Menu button 2016 3 ABSENT STATUS OTHER If ANC MODE in 5 10 10 CONV2 ANC SET is set to H V ANC the state of the V ANC setting PASS or BLANK is displayed When S2016 3 is in the CONV2 output video signal 00000000 AFD Active Format Des
363. to the LOSS DIGITAL AUDIO IO connectors PCM 48kHz LOSS No audio signals PCM 44 1kHz PCM 48kHz Normal audio signal approx 48kHz PCM 32kHz PCM 44 1kHz Normal audio signal approx 44 1kHz PCM Other PCM 32kHz Normal audio signal approx 32kHz CH1 CH8 SILENCE 48kHz SILENCE 44 1kHz SILENCE 32kHz SILENCE Other NON PCM OUTPUT SETTING PCM Other Normal audio signal Non AES input SILENCE 48kHz Mute signal approx 48kHz SILENCE 44 1kHz Mute signal approx 44 1kHz SILENCE 32kHz Mute signal approx 32kHz SILENCE Other Mute signal Non AES input NON PCM Compressed audio data such as AC3 OUTPUT SETTING Connector is set to output 0 0G Menu button CH Is LOSS CH 2 L0OSS STATUS CH 3 L USS CH 4 LOSS OTHER Parameter Display Description Displays the status of the input audio signal in CH1 CH4 LOSS the ANALOG AUDIO connector 7 IN LOSS No audio signal is present IN An audio signal is present 104 5 13 11 SDI 1 2 OUT AUDIO SD 02 0 UST ACU Dr 0 561 Menu button CH ules Pe eo STATUS CH 4 PC aoe CH lt 5 PE CHo s PE CH APA CH 2 Bis Pe G CH 9 PCM CH10 PCM CH11 PCM CH12 PCM CH13 PCM CH14 PCM CH15 PCM CH16 PCM Parameter Display Description PCM Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 through CH16 of the SDI 1 2 output SILENCE PCM Normal audio signal CH1 CH16 NON PCM SILENCE Mute signal
364. tput FA 95AI0 SMPTE RGB SMPTE and BETACAM are SD SDI output Y C formats The FA 95AIO connector outputs a black video if the output signal from the selected CONV1 or CONV2 is 1080p and MODE is set to YPbPr or RGB See the below YPbPr RGB Output Format table for details The FA 95AIO connector outputs a black video if the output signal from the selected CONV1 or CONV2 is an HD signal and MODE is set to Y C See the below Y C Output Format table for details YPbPr RGB Output Format CONV1 or 2 output signal FA 95AIO YPbPr RGB output signal 525 60 525 60 signal in CONV1 or 2 625 50 625 50 signal in CONV1 or 2 1080 59i 1080 59i signal in CONV1 or 2 1080 50i 1080 50i signal in CONV1 or 2 1080 24PsF 1080 24PsF signal in CONV1 or 2 1080 23 98PsF 1080 23 98PsF signal in CONV1 or 2 720 59p 720 59p signal in CONV1 or 2 720 50p 720 50p signal in CONV1 or 2 1080 59p 1080 59i black video 1080 50p 1080 50i black video Y C Output format CONV1 or 2 output signal Y C output signal 525 60 525 60 signal in CONV1 or 2 625 50 625 50 signal in CONV1 or 2 1080 59i 525 60 BB signal 1080 50 625 50 BB signal 1080 24PsF 625 50 BB signal 1080 23 98PsF 525 60 BB signal 720 59p 525 60 BB signal 720 50p 625 50 BB signal 1080 59p 525 60 BB signal 1080 50p 625 50 BB signal 75 5 9 VIDEO OPTION VIDEO OP 5 9 1 Logo Generator The log
365. tput Status Unit Status SDI In 1 1080 59 94i SDI Out 1 2 1080 59 94i Unit Name FA 9500 SDI In 2 1080 59 94i SDI Out 3 4 1080 59 94i Fan 1 Normal Composite In 525 60 Composite Out 525 60 Fan 2 Normal Reference 525 60 Power 1 0 2 sess Power 2 Click Logout to return to the Login page If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown 157 9 2 VIDEO Settings Click Click the Video tab at the top of the page The video block diagram will be displayed Each block in the diagram lets you to go to the corresponding windows or dialog boxes that allow you to change various settings Video Block Diagram a Logout Video Composite In Composite 1 Out Up Down Cross Converter 1 Input Process Select Amp Up Down Cross Converter 2 CONV 1 YPbPr Output RGB Select f Clip Composite CONV 2 Clip 10 11 Logo Generator Color Corrector Signal 8 No setting options for 10 14 through 17 14 through 17 are displayed as FA 95AI0 if the FA 95AIO is installed If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page see section 9 8 5 the Logout is not shown 158 9 2 1 Input Select Clicking block 1 on the Video block diagram opens the Video Input setting dialog box A http 192 168 0 10 Video Input M MBR Video Input Setting Input Select SDI 1 Video Los
366. tre Bit13 0 00 01 HEX Detected Displays as BT 1119 2 WSS AFD Displays Active Format Description code in binary format The detected AFD type is shown on the third row Bit13 0 Displays detected Bits 13 O in hexadecimal format Ancillary Data Packet Input Status Displays the status of ancillary data packets in an input SDI signal Displays the detected DID and SDID of the ancillary data in hexadecimal format such as DID SDID 05 30 if they are different from that of supported formats Displays the ancillary data name such as S334 1CDP 708 if the DID and SDID of the ancillary data match that of supported formats See section 19 FA 9500 Ancillary Data Packet Name List for details on ancillary data names and DID and SDID of formats The status of up to 8 ancillary data can be displayed CONV1 2 Ancillary Output Status Displays the status of CEA608 CC BT 1119 2 WSS and RP186 VI ancillary data in the output luminance signals of Converters 1 and 2 and the line number where the data is inserted Status Displays Present if ancillary data is inserted Displays Absent if no ancillary data is inserted If ANC Mode under Converter1 Ancillary Setting in the Video System menu Sec 9 4 1 is set to H V ANC the state of the V ANC setting Pass or Blank will be displayed In such case the line number display appears as Line See section 9 4 1 Video System for details on ANC Mode and V ANC setting 249
367. tton VIDEO OP a o Gees AUDIO OP F3 gt STR F4 gt CL 0 00 03 les i A E A E F3 gt STR F4 gt CL 0 00 03 Parameter Default Setting range Description Displays the measured loudness level of the FA 95ALA input audio signal in LKFS See section 6 9 3 4 LOUDNESS CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT for details on input settings MOMENT Momentary loudness level SHORT Short term loudness level LONG Long term loudness level Displays the loudness level of the audio signal adjusted by the FA 95ALA in LKFS O Displays if the adjustment is disabled OUTPUT MOMENT Momentary loudness level SHORT Short term loudness level LONG Long term loudness level Pressing the F3 control knob starts loudness measurement and adjustment Press again to stop Pressing the F3 control knob alternates the STR START menu display between STR and STP STP STOP STR Starts measuring and adjusting STP Stops measuring and adjusting Once the measurement and adjustment starts the elapsed time will be displayed F4 gt CL 7 Pressing the F4 control knob clears all measured loudness levels and the elapsed time display 1 Displays NA for no input signal All values measured as over 0 0 LKFS will be displayed as 0 0 INPUT F3 gt STR IMPORTANT Measurement and adjustment can be performed for up to 6 59 59 6 hr 59 min 59 sec If measurement continues for
368. urrent input video format can be verified in the Unit Video Status menu Sec 9 7 1 for each input selected in the Video Input Setting menu Sec 9 2 1 IMPORTANT Adjust the audio delay as required in the Audio Output Delay menu Sec 9 3 5 to account for any additional video signal delay produced by changing Frame Delay settings in the Frame Delay menu Sec 9 2 3 167 9 2 2 2 User 1 5 LEVEL SET Clicking Set User on the Auto Video Optimizer dialog box opens the User1 5 setting dialog box A http 1192 168 0 10 AVO User Setting Microsoft Internet Explorer E B User 1 910 1 0 In White Level anjin In Black Level 1 ie Target White Level 80 0 Target Black Level 3 0 In White Level 98 0 1 1 In Black Level 2 0 El fe fe Z Target White Level 88 0 Target Black Level 5 01 1 1 EE 3 In White Level 97 0 3 0 E In Black Level Target White Level 93 0 Target Black Level 7 0 In White Level 95 0 In Black Level 5 0 Target White Level 95 0 Target Black Level 12 0 In White Level 93 0 LE In Black Level 7 01 mepe LRG CBE ELELE LE Target White Level 97 01 p uie z z Target Black Level 17 0 l Done Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the setti
369. ut In Out Input v Assign None Logo ID Output In Out Input v Assign None Logo ID Output In Out Input Assign None v Logo ID Output Setting range Steps GPI5 Output v GPI 6 O Output v GPI 7 O Output e Description In Out Input Input Output Selects whether to use GPI pins 1 through 7 each for input or tally output Assign None In case Input Output is set to Input None BY PASS Freeze 2 Full Color Bar 2 75 Color Bar 2 SMPTE Color Bar 2 Ramp Input SDI1 2 4 7 Input SDI2 2 4 7 Input Composite 7 Input YPbPr SMPTE Input YPbPr BETACAM Input RGB Input Y C Default Event1 100 2 Changeover Enable Changeover Disable CONV1 Keyer CONV2 Keyer CONV1 Load 1 7 CONV2 Load 1 7 Loudness1 2 Start 10 Loudness1 2 Clear 10 Assigns a function to GPI pins 1 through 7 according to the selection under In Out 232 Parameter Default Setting range Steps Description In case Input Output is set to Output None Freeze Y Video In 3 Audio In 8 REF In 3 FAN Alarm 3 DC Power1 8 l DC Power2 3 8 Assigns a function to GPI pins 1 Assign None Selected SDI1 Y through 7 according to the selection Selected SDI2 3 under In Out Selected Composite Selected YPbPr SMPTE Selected YPbPr BETACAM Selected RGB 9 Selected Y C Changeover Changeover Enable CONV1 Keyer C
370. ut with a faster response SCENE CUT When set to ON the cut transitions are Scene cut OFF OFF detected and images are properly f ON adjusted even if there are sharp detection luminance changes When set to ON signal levels are ae MODE ON OFF adjusted using the GAMMA LEVEL Gamma ON settings See section 5 2 3 GAMMA correction LEVEL 1 The follwoing delay will be produced when performing scene cut detection depending on the input signal format Interlaced formats 2 fields 1 frame some lines Progressive and PsF formats 2 frames some lines Scene cut detection images will be properly adjusted and output when enough frame delay is set If the amount of frame delay is insufficient Scene cut detection will not be properly processed To perform AVO scene cut detection properly set enough delay using the FRAME DELAY function The output delay varies depending on the SYNCRO MODE input signal format FRAME DELAY setting and video signal H V phase difference FRAME DELAY settings are described on the next page 54 5 5 2 1 About Scene Cut Detection and Frame Delay Settings To properly perform AVO scene cut detection and adjustment the FRAME DELAY must be set in the setting range according to the menu settings 5 10 1 FS MODE SET menu as shown in the table below FRAME DELAY Setting Range Chart 2 Setting Rrange per Input Video Format 525 60i NO En 720 59p 50p Baa 1080
371. uts from SDI OUT1 2 3 4 or COMPOSITE OUT1 2 Clicking block 1 on the Video block diagram when the FA 95CO option is installed opens the Video Input Setting dialog box as shown below Video Input Windows Internet Explorer SEE E 192 168 0 10 R Video Input Setting Input Select SDI 1 Video Loss Mode Back Color Back Color Black Changeover Changeover Disable OEnable Video Trigger Disable bo Audio Trigger Disable v Q Internet fg Q100 After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Video Input Setting If Changeover is disabled settings are the same as described in the previous page If Changeover is enabled the Input Select setting cannot be changed To change the input selection disable Changeover Changeover Parameter Default Setting range Description Disable Disables or enables changeover Changeover Disable Enable Changeover cannot be enabled unless Input Select is set to SDI 1 Selects changeover trigger mode for below 4 video triggers SDI Error Trigger Format Error Trigger Disable CRC Error Trigger Enable Black Video Trigger Disable Disables auto changeover by the video trigger Enable Performs a changeover if any video trigger is activated Video Trigger Disable Selects changeover trigger mode for below 3 audio triggers Audio Loss Trigger Disable Audio Error Trigger Audio Trigger Disable E
372. ween menus same as the buttons menu buttons Indicators light up to indicate 4 2 the accessible direction 9 Menu buttons Used to select menus 4 2 1 The DC POWER indicator functions when the optional FA 95PS is installed 18 2 2 Rear Panel FA 9500 LLE 16 17 18 19 sl RE 5 a y dl HEJ 1 3 9 10 A FA 9500 with the FA 95PS de installed 12 13 14 16 17 AIR 7 O se es FANt E ay E a JE TE KIN DIGITAL AUDIO INT OUT i 8 _ SER NO 9 1 No Name Description Ref 1 SDI IN 1 Used for HD SD SDI video input 1 5 7 Used for HD SD SDI video output 1 2 SDI OUT 1 2 The input signal in SDI IN 1 is output from SDI OUT1 when BY PASS is enabled or the unit is turned off 3 SDI IN 2 Used for HD SD SDI video input 2 5 7 Used for HD SD SDI video output 2 4 SDI OUT 3 4 The input signal in SDI IN 2 is output from SDI OUT3 when BY PASS is enabled or the unit is turned off 5 COMPOSITE IN Used for analog composite video input 5 7 Used for analog composite video output e COMPOSITE The input signal in COMPOSITE IN is output from OUT 1 2 COMPOSITE OUT1 w
373. when the BY PASS button is pressed lit fy BY PASS button See the description of No 2 4 and 6 of the rear panel for details 4 EVENT button Used to save and load events 8 An input signal is present in the 5 7 VIDEO IN Lit green connector selected in the menu 5 13 2 Unlit An input signal is not present in the 5 7 connector selected in the menu 5 13 2 AUDIO IN Lit green An audio signal is present 6 5 Unit No audio signal is present 6 5 A genlock signal input is present Lit green Unlit if SYNCHRO is set to 5 10 1 GENLOCK INPUT See section 5 10 1 FS 5 13 2 MODE SET for details Unit No genlock signal input is present 5 13 2 5 Status indicator Lit green EME SETTING is set to REMOTE 7 1 CONTROL SETTING is set to voe EGeAL A power failure has occurred Turn DC POWER Lit red the power of the unit OFF and 5 13 1 4 contact your supplier Unlit Power supply is normal 5 13 1 One or more fans have failed Turn Lit red the power of the unit OFF and 5 13 1 FAN ALARM replace the failed fans if needed Unit All fans are operating normally 5 13 1 6 Menu display Used to display menus and make operational settings 4 2 z Controls F1 F4 Used to change operational settings Turn and select values y UNITY buttons The Unity buttons return the settings to the default values Used to move between parameters A Sn Indicators light up to indicate the accessible 4 2 8 Arrow buttons recon Double arrow Used to move bet
374. xedSel 21 INTEGER o lo OUT SEL e Assign Auto 0 HD inaccessible 1 SD a950utSDI3 4AutoSel 22 INTEGER SA iai 0 Converter 1 7 COMPOSITE SET Assign Fix 1 Converter 2 a950utVBSFixedSel 31 INTEGER Assign Fix 9 aan 4950utComponentFixedSel 41 INTEGER Assign Auto 0 HD a950utCom A h ponentAutoSel 42 INTEGER COMPONENT SET Inaccessible 1 SD 0 YPbPr SMPTE Mode dE OR BETACAN a950utComponentOutMode 43 INTEGER O O 3 Y C OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 2 4 1 FS MODE 0 FRAME SYNCHRO MODE 2 REOT a95VideoSyncMode 1 NTEGER O O 3 AVDL 0 Auto 1 525 60 VIDEO 2 625 50 SYSTEM FS Mode 3 1080 59 94i 4 1080 50i System Format 5 720 59 94p fa95VideoSystemFormat 2 INTEGER O O 6 720 50p 7 1080 23PsF 8 1080 24PsF 19 1080 59p 20 1080 50p 271 Object group Front TITLE Item name Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type Read Get Write Set OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 2 4 2 FREEZE FREEZE FREEZE SETTING FREEZE On Off F REEEZE On Off Off On a95FreezeEnable INTEGER FREEZE Mode N 0 0 Frame Odd Even a95FreezeMode INTEGER OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 20175 1 301 2 4 3 Composite settings COMPOSITE Composite Setting 3D COMB Adaptive 3D Adaptive 2D Trap Only a95VbsCombrFilter INTEGER NR Level 4 Off Level1 4 a95VbsNRFilter INTEGER Cross Color 3 Off Level1 3 a95VbsCrossColorFilter
375. y Decoder CH Dolby Down Mix L R signals eo 1 2 Dolby Encoder CH 1 2 Dolby Encoder CH 112 ncoded Dolby E signal o a ae selected signals of SOURCE i2 LONG channels Silence 500Hz Tone 500Hz 1KHz None Test signal TONE 1kHz Tone 500Hz 1KHz Test signal TONE Silence Mute signal None No signal output 1 Shown only if the FA 95DE E option is installed 211 9 3 16 Dolby E Encoder Clicking block 16 on the audio block diagram when the FA 95DE E option is installed opens the Dolby E Encoder dialog box A http 192 168 0 10 Dolby E Encoder Microsoft Internet Explorer DEAR Input Selection CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 CH 5 Source CH 1 Source CH 2 Source CH3 Source CH 4 Source CH5 Source CHE Source CH 7 Source CH8 x Program Configuration Bit Depth Frame REF Metadata Input ES Done 5 1 2 20bit CONV Internal Dolby Encoder Input Assign O Direct Input Selection O Dolby Decoder Output Dolby Encoder Mode Setting v v O CONV2 O Dolby Decoder Output Close MD Internet After completing the settings click Close to close the dialog box Click Refresh to update the settings Dolby Encoder Input Assign Parameter Default Setting range Description Selects a signal to be input to the Dolby encoder Input Direct Input Direct Input Selection Direct Input Selection Source channel Selection Selection Do
376. y adjusted even if there are detection sharp luminance changes ean On Off When set to On signal levels are adjusted using correction On the Gamma Level settings 1 The follwoing delay will be produced when performing scene cut detection depending on the input signal format Interlaced formats 2 fields 1 frame some lines Progressive and PsF formats 2 frames some lines Scene cut detection images will be properly adjusted and output when enough frame delay is set If the amount of frame delay is insufficient Scene cut detection will not be properly processed To perform AVO scene cut detection properly set enough delay using the FRAME DELAY function The output delay varies depending on the SYNCRO MODE input signal format FRAME DELAY setting and video signal H V phase difference FRAME DELAY settings are described on the next page 166 9 2 2 1 About Scene Cut Detection and Frame Delay Settings To properly perform AVO scene cut detection and adjustment Frame Delay must be set in the setting range according to the menu settings 9 2 3 Frame Delay menu as shown in the table below FRAME DELAY Setting Range Chart 2 Setting Rrange per Input Video Format 525 60i 1080 59 1080 59p 50p 1080 501 1080 23PsF 24PsF FRAME 1 to 8 FRAME 2 to 8 FRAME LINE AVDL Cannot be set Cannot be set INPUT 2 to 8 FRAME 3 to 8 FRAME 1 Synchro Mode settings in section 9 4 1 Video System 2 The c
377. y if ASSIGN ANA 4 is setto SOURCE 1 16 If the AES connector is set to be used for input the menu display for the selected AES output audio channel appears as CH1 See section 6 2 5 AES I O SETUP and change the setting if necessary 1 See section 6 5 AUDIO MAPPING MAPPING for details on SOURCE settings 2 See section 6 7 DOWN MIX SET for details on DOWN MIX settings 3 See section 6 9 1 2 Dolby DECODER INPUT for details on Dolby DEC settings 4 See section 6 9 1 4 Dolby DOWNMIX for details on Dolby DM settings 5 See sections 6 9 2 Dolby ENCODER INPUT and 6 9 2 2 Dolby ENCODER SETTING for details on Dolby ENC settings 6 Shown only if FA 95D D option is installed 7 Shown only if FA 95DE E option is installed 8 Shown only if FA 95ALA option is installed See section 6 9 3 4 LOUDNESS CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT for details on LOUD 1 2 settings Auto Channel Pairing for NON PCM Audio Inputs The FA 9500 recognizes NON PCM audio input signals in L R channel pair units and adjusts assignments according to the signal selected for the L channel L R channel pairs are SOURCE 1 2 SOURCE 3 4 SOURCE 15 16 The channel assignments that are changed by the adjustment will be shown with x as CH1 SOURCE2 120 channel pairing example on NON PCM inputs Conditions NON PCM inputs in SOURCE 1 and 2 PCM inputs in SOURCE 3 through 16
378. y mode is inoperative while single arrow buttons are blinking indicating the FA 9520 is in the setting change confirming state because a parameter in one of the menus requiring a setting change confirmation has been changed Consecutive display becomes operable when the change is either confirmed or canceled Order of Consecutive Menu Display VIDEO Menus Lit green The single down arrow button consecutively displays menu pages from VIDEO PROC AMP of PROCESS to CONV2 ANC OUT1 of STATUS in the menu list in section 4 2 2 On the other hand the single up arrow button consecutively displays menu pages from CONV2 ANC OUT1 of STATUS to VIDEO PROC AMP of PROCESS in the menu list AUDIO Menus Lit orange The single down arrow button consecutively displays menu pages from SDI AUDIO GAIN of SDI AUDIO to SOFT OPTION2 of OTHER in the menu list in section 4 2 2 On the other hand 33 the single up arrow button consecutively displays menu pages from SOFT OPTION2 of OTHER to SDI AUDIO GAIN of SDI AUDIO in the menu list The EVENT button assigned menus cannot be consecutively viewed The consecutive display mode is not suppported for EVENT menus While the menu display is in consecutive display mode pressing the EVENT button cancels the mode 4 2 5 Page Jump Feature Some menu buttons allow you to directly go to specific menus when they are held down for at least 1 second This feature helps you quickly check the state of specific settin
379. ystem format nadia mismatches Immediate Sets the duration of the detected Duration Immediate 0 5 to 5 0 format mismatch required to trigger a 910 9 9 Sec changeover Trigger Set cannot be enabled if System Format is set to Auto Detect To enable the trigger set System Format to a video format other than Auto Detect in section 9 4 1 FS Mode A changeover will not be performed if Changeover is disabled or Video Trigger is disabled even though Format Error Trigger is enabled Format Error Trigger also triggers a changeover for SDI input signal loss If Format Error Trigger is enabled and the SDI signal input is lost a changeover will be performed even though SDI Error Trigger is disabled based on the Format Error Trigger Duration setting 161 CRC Error Trigger Parameter Default Setting range Description Disable Enables or disables auto changeover Trigger Set Disable Enable for SDI video CRC error Sets the detected video CRC error duration required to trigger a f changeover Duration Immediate 4 bs To avoid an unexpected changeover triggered by a switchover of input signals via router set Duration to longer than 2 frames A changeover will not be performed if Changeover is disabled or Video Trigger is disabled even though CRC Error Trigger is enable CRC Error Trigger also triggers a changeover for SDI input signal loss If CRC Error Trigger is enabled and the SDI signal i

For-A FA-9500 - Operation Manual_PDF

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents